2016 Triumph Thruxton R Service Manual - Rev 2

2016 Triumph Thruxton R
Service Manual
Table of Contents
 Service Tool and Garage Equipment
 Specifications
 Torque Wrench Settings
 Routings
 Routine Maintenance
 Engine Covers
 Cylinder Head
 Barrels and Pistons
 Clutch
 Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons
 Balancer
 Transmission
 Starter Drive and Sprag Clutch
 Lubrication
 Engine Removal and Install
 Fuel System and Engine Management
 Cooling
 Front Suspension
 Rear Suspension
 Brakes
 Wheels and Tyres
 Final Drive
 Frame and Bodywork
 Electrical
5/7/2017 Service Tools and Garage Equipment
1
Service Tools and Garage Equipment
Special service tools have been developed to facilitate removal, dismantling and assembly of
certain mechanical components in a practical manner without causing damage. Some
operations in this Service Manual cannot be carried out without the aid of the relevant service
tools. Where this is the case, the tools required will be described during the procedure.
Special Service Tools:
cdgh
T3880001 Fuel Pressure Gauge T3880016 Balancer Gear CSpanner
T3880023 50 mm Socket T3880057 Triumph Diagnostic Interface
https://www.tritun.net/tritun/content/document/view?id=2005&groupId=2 1/7
2
T3880039 T3880041
T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin T3880041 Idler Gear Timing Wrench
T3880109
cdoa
T3880104 Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench T3880109 Bearing Separator
cgwp
T3880105 Torque Angle Gauge T3880147 Radiator and Cap Tester Kit
3
ccha
T3880160 Fork Oil Filler/Evacuator T3880176 Radiator Pressure Test (use with
3880147)
ccmi
T3880307 Clutch Antirotation Jig T3880308 Cylinder Barrel Clamps
cczh
T3880313 Oil Filter Wrench T3880365 Alternator Housing Puller
4
cjgu
T3880375 Alternator Rotor Holder T3880391 Fuel Pump Extension Cable
T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin T3880603 Oil Pump Restraint
T3880606 Flywheel Restraint Handle T3880609 Timing Torque Limiter
5
cja r
T3880649 Timing Chain Tensioner Socket T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate
cja s cjax
T3880651 Timing Chain Tensioner T3880809 Rear Balancer Timing Tool
cja t cjaw
T3880652 Dead Shaft Key Tool T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set
6
cczb
cjay
T3880811 Front Balancer Timing Tool T3880053 Wheel Bearing Extraction Kit
cczb
T3880075 Bearing Installer BatteryMate Battery Charger See Latest
Parts Catalogue for Part Number Information
cdoa2
T3880377 Engine Mounting Adjuster T3880207 Hose Clip Pliers
7
cjix
T3880171 Fork Holding Tool T3880635 Final Drive Chain Cut and Rivet
T3880186 45 mm Octagonal Socket T3880634 Wrench Damper Cylinder
T3880003 Front fork Seal Installer
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head and Valves
8
Cylinder Head and Valves
Cylinder head Flatness 0.030 mm

tolerance
Valve Head Diameter Inlet 35.60 mm
Exhaust 29.70 mm
Valve Lift Inlet 10.3 mm
Exhaust 9.2 mm
Valve Stem Diameter Inlet 4.975 4.990 mm (standard)
4.965 mm (service limit)
Exhaust 4.970 4.980 mm (standard)
Valve Guide Bore Diameter Inlet 5.000 5.015 mm (standard)
Valve Stem to Guide Clearance Inlet 0.010 0.040 mm (standard)
Valve Seat Width (in head) Inlet 1.000 1.100 mm (standard)
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head and Valves
9
Valve Seat Width (valve) 1.50 1.85 mm
Valve Seat Angle 90° inclusive
Valve Spring Length 49.9 mm
Inlet/Exhaust Valve Spring 'Load at Length' 214 N +/ 10 at 39.5 mm
Valve Clearance Inlet 0.05 0.13 mm
Exhaust 0.08 0.18 mm
5/7/2017 Camshafts
10
Camshafts
Camshaft Timing (at 1 mm lift) Inlet Open 5.0° ATDC
Close 41.0° ABDC
Duration 216°
Exhaust Open 39.0° BBDC
Close 4.0° BTDC
Duration 215°
Camshaft Journal Diameter 22.930 22.960 mm
Camshaft Journal Clearance 0.040 0.091 mm (standard)
Camshaft Journal Bore Diameter 23.000 23.021 mm
Camshaft End Float 0.05 0.20 mm (standard)
Camshaft Runout 0.015 mm (standard)
5/7/2017 Clutch and Primary Drive
11
Clutch and Primary Drive
Primary Drive Type Gear
Reduction Ratio 1.26:1 (93/74)
Clutch Type Wet multiplate
No. of Friction Plates 8
Steel Plate Flatness Limit 0.15 mm
Friction Plate Flatness Limit 0.20 mm
Friction Plate Thickness (new) 2.90 3.10 mm
Friction Plate Thickness (service limit) 2.80 mm
Clutch Pack Height 38.00 mm + 0.34/0.66 mm
Clutch Actuation Method Cable
Cable Free Play (at lever) 2.0 3.0 mm
5/7/2017 Engine
12
Engine
Engine Configuration Liquid cooled parallel twin, 270°
firing angle
Arrangement Transverse inline
Displacement 1200 cc
Bore x Stroke 97.6 x 80 mm
Compression Ratio 10.00:1
Cylinder numbering Left to right
Firing Order 12
5/7/2017 Piston
13
Piston
Cylinder Barrel Diameter 10 mm from the top 97.585 97.601 mm (standard)
of the barrel
Cylinder Barrel Diameter 97 mm from the top 97.600 97.615 mm (standard)
of the barrel
Piston Diameter 97.570 97.580 mm (standard)
Piston Ring to Groove Top 0.02 0.07 mm (standard)

Clearance
Second 0.02 0.06 mm (standard)
Piston Ring Groove Width Top 1.21 1.24 mm (standard)
Oil 2.51 2.53 mm (standard and service
limit)
Piston Ring End Gap Top 0.183 0.383 mm (standard)
Oil 0.153 0.703 mm (standard)
Gudgeon Pin Bore Diameter In Piston 21.004 21.012 mm (standard)
5/7/2017 Piston
14
Gudgeon Pin Diameter 20.995 21.000 mm (standard)
Connecting Rod Small End Diameter 21.016 21.029 mm (standard)
Connecting Rod Big End Diameter 41.000 41.009 mm (standard)
Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance 0.15 0.30 mm (standard)
5/7/2017 Crankshaft
15
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Big End Journal Diameter 38.000 37.984 mm (standard)
Crankshaft Big End Bearing Clearance 0.036 0.061 mm (standard)
Crankshaft Main Journal Diameter 43.108 43.092 mm (standard)
Crankshaft Main Bearing Clearance 0.018 0.042 mm (standard)
Crankshaft End Float 0.05 0.20 mm (standard)
Crankshaft Runout 0.02 mm (standard)
5/7/2017 Transmission
16
Transmission
Type 6 Speed, Constant Mesh
Gear Ratios Primary 1.26:1 (93/74)
1st 3.50:1 (49/14)
2nd 2.50:1 (45/18)
3rd 1.85:1 (37/20)
4th 1.48:1 (37/25)
5th 1.30:1 (35/27)
6th 1.17:1 (34/29)
Gear Selector Fork Thickness 5.90 6.00 mm (standard)
Gear Selector Groove Width 6.10 6.20 mm (standard)
Gear Selector Fork to Groove 0.1 0.3mm (standard)
Clearance
5/7/2017 Final Drive
17
Final Drive
Final Drive Type Chain EK525MVXZ2, 100 links
Final Drive Ratio 2.63:1 (42/16)
Drive Chain Slack See Final Drive Chain Adjustment
5/7/2017 Lubrication
18
Lubrication
Oil Capacity (including filter, 3.80 litres
dry fill)
Oil and Filter Change 3.40 litres
Oil Change only 3.20 litres
Recommended Oil Approval API SH (or higher) and JASO MA
Rating
Viscosity 10W/40 or 10W/50
Type Semi or fully synthetic
Oil Pressure (in main gallery) 3.00 3.60 bar at 3,500 rpm
Oil Pump Rotor Tip 0.15 mm (standard)
Clearance
0.20 (service limit)
Oil Pump Body Clearance 0.15 0.239 mm (standard)
0.369 mm (service limits)
Oil Pump Rotor End Float 0.04 0.09 mm (standard)
5/7/2017 Ignition System
19
Ignition System
Type Digital electronic
Electronic RevLimiter 7,000 rpm
Pick up Coil Air Gap Fixed, not adjustable
Primary Coil Resistance 0.185 Kohms
Ignition Coil Type Inductive, plug top
Spark Plug Type NGK LMAR8A9
Spark Plug Gap 0.9 mm +0.0/0.1 mm
5/7/2017 Fuel System
20
Fuel System
Fuel Type Unleaded, 91 RON (CLC or AKI octane rating (R+M)/2 of
87 or higher)
Fuel Tank Capacity 14.0 litres
Low Level Warning Lamp 3.5 litres remaining
Fuel Pump Type Submerged, electric
Fuel Pressure (nominal) 3.5 bar
Purge Control System Modulated, vacuum
5/7/2017 Emissions Control System
21
Emissions Control System
Type Multi point sequential
Idle Speed 1,000 rpm
Injector Type Multi hole, solenoid operated plate valve
Throttle Electronically controlled throttle bodies
Idle Speed Control Electronic
Control Sensors Atmospheric air pressure, throttle position, twist grip
position, coolant temperature, crankshaft position,
oxygen sensor, intake air temperature, gear position,
MAP, vehicle speed (from ABS)
Catalysts One, in the catalytic converter box
Oxygen Sensor One per cylinder, heated, in header pipe
Evaporative Control Activated carbon canister (certain markets only)
5/7/2017 Cooling System
22
Cooling System
Coolant Mixture Premixed
Antifreeze Type Triumph HD4X Hybrid OAT coolant
Cooling System Capacity 1.56 litres
Radiator Cap Opening Pressure 1.2 bar
Thermostat Opening 88°C
Temperature
Cooling Fan Switch On 103°C
Temperature
Temperature Gauge Sensor 173 Ohms (+/ 10%) at 100°C
Resistance
5/7/2017 Suspension
23
Suspension
Front Fork Travel 120 mm
Recommended Fork Oil Grade Showa SS47
Oil Level (spring, spring seat and 68 mm
spacer removed and fork fully
compressed)
Oil Volume (dry fill) 582 cc
Front Fork Pull Through upper surface of the fork top cap flange 23.5 mm from
lower edge of top yoke to the top of the outer tube (not
the top cap)
Fork Spring Rate K = 8.1 N/mm
Rear Wheel Travel 120.3 mm
5/7/2017 Brakes
24
Brakes
Front Type Four piston monobloc calipers acting on twin discs
Front Caliper Piston Diameter 34 mm
Front Disc Diameter 310 mm
Front Disc Thickness 4.5 mm (standard)
Front Disc Runout Max. 0.25 mm
Front Master Cylinder 18 mm
Diameter
Recommended Fluid DOT 4
Rear Type Twin piston sliding caliper acting on single disc
Rear Caliper Piston Diameter 27 mm
Rear Disc Diameter 220 mm
Rear Disc Thickness 5.0 mm (standard)
Rear Disc Runout Max. 0.5 mm
Rear Master Cylinder 12.7 mm
Diameter
Recommended Fluid DOT 4
5/7/2017 Frame
25
Frame
Frame Type Tubular steel
Rake 22.8°
Trail 92.1 mm
Maximum. Payload (rider, 210 kg
passenger, luggage and
accessories)
5/7/2017 Wheels and Tyres
26
Wheels and Tyres
Front Wheel Size MT 17 x 3.5
Front Tyre Size 120/70ZR17 58W
Front Tyre Pressure 2.48 bar (36 lb/ in²)
Front Wheel Rim Axial runout 0.6 mm
Front Wheel Rim Radial Run 0.6 mm
out
Rear Wheel Size MT 17 x 5.0
Rear Tyre Size 160/60ZR17 69W
Rear Tyre Pressure 2.48 bar (36 lb/ in²)
Rear Wheel Rim Axial runout 0.6 mm
Rear Wheel Rim Radial Runout 0.6 mm
Approved Tyres A list of approved tyres specific to these models is
available from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the
Internet at www.triumph.co.uk.
5/7/2017 Electrical Equipment
27
Electrical Equipment
Battery Type YTX12BS
Battery Rating 12 V 10 Amp. Hour
Alternator Rating 25 Amps at 1000 rpm
46.5 Amps at 3000 rpm
Headlight 12 volt, 60/55 watt H4 halogen
Rear/Brake Light LED
Directional Indicator Lights 12 volt, 10 watt
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head
28
Cylinder Head
Application Torque Notes
(Nm)
Camshaft cover to cylinder head 14 Nm See Camshaft Cover

Installation
Camshaft drive chain tensioner to cylinder barrel 16 Nm
Camshaft drive chain tensioner blade to cylinder 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

head loosened or removed
Camshaft frame to cylinder head 10 Nm See Camshaft

Installation
Camshaft sprocket to camshaft 22 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Cylinder head to crankcase * See Cylinder Head
Installation
Camshaft idler shaft bolt 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Flanged plug to cylinder head 22 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Spark plugs 12 Nm
Exhaust stud to cylinder head 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Timing torque limiter 0.6 Nm
5/7/2017 Clutch
29
Clutch
(Nm)
Clutch centre nut 98 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Fit new Belleville washer
Clutch pressure plate to centre 10 Nm
Clutch lever nut 3.5 Nm
Clutch lever clamp bolts 12 Nm
Switch housing screws 2.5 Nm
Clutch switch to switch housing 2 Nm
Clutch cable lower lock nut 3 Nm
Clutch cable bracket 1.5 Nm
5/7/2017 Balancer, Crankshaft and Crankcase
30
Balancer, Crankshaft and Crankcase
(Nm)
Crankcase to crankcase bolts * See Crankcase
Assembly
Oil level sight glass 30 Nm
Oil filler cap 3 Nm
Dry seal plug 23 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Flanged plug 10 Nm
Breather plate to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Crankcase breather pipes to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Connecting rod big end bolts * See Connecting Rod
Installation
Sprag thrust washer fixings 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Sprag clutch housing fixings 16 Nm See Starter Drive/Sprag

Clutch Installation
Plug, front balancer shaft adjuster clamp 23 Nm
Rear dead shaft retaining washer 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Dead shaft clamp pinch bolt 10 Nm
Dead shaft clamp retaining bolt 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Dead shaft preload * See Balancer Shafts
Dynamic Adjustment
5/7/2017 Balancer, Crankshaft and Crankcase
31
5/7/2017 Engine Covers
32
Engine Covers
(Nm)
Clutch cover to crankcase 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
See Clutch Cover
Installation
Clutch cover embelisher to clutch cover 4 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Clutch cover plug 2 Nm
Sound suppression to clutch cover fixings (up to 6 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

VIN 803543) loosened or removed
Cable cover to alternator cover 6 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Alternator cover embelisher to cover 4 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Front sprocket cover to crankcase 9 Nm
Heel guard to front sprocket cover 7 Nm
Alternator cover to crankcase 10 Nm
Sump to crankcase 10 Nm
Sump baffle plate 6 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Sump plug 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
5/7/2017 Transmission
33
Transmission
(Nm)
Front sprocket to output shaft nut 180 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Input shaft bearing retainer 7 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Input selector fork plug 22 Nm
Detent wheel to selector drum 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Detent arm fixing 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Detent arm spring fixing 12 Nm
Selector drum bearing retaining screw 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Output selector shaft retainer 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Gear change pedal pinch bolt 8 Nm
Starter drive flywheel * See Starter Drive/Sprag
Clutch Installation
5/7/2017 Lubrication System
34
Lubrication System
(Nm)
Oil pressure relief valve plug 10 Nm
Oil pressure switch 15 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Oil filter adapter 10 Nm
Oil filter 10 Nm Apply clean engine oil to

the seal(s)
Oil pump to crankcase 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Oil cooling jet (pistons) 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Oil pump drive chain guide fixings 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Sump baffle plate to sump 6 Nm
Oil pump drive sprocket to oil pump 12 Nm
Oil pump rotor cover to oil pump body 10 Nm
Oil pump auxiliary chain guard 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
5/7/2017 Final Drive
35
Final Drive
(Nm)
Rear sprocket to cush drive 55 Nm See Rear Sprocket

Installation
5/7/2017 Cooling System
36
Cooling System
(Nm)
Radiator to frame upper 6 Nm
Thermostat housing to cylinder head 9 Nm
Coolant expansion tank mounting 7 Nm
Coolant expansion tank 3 Nm
Coolant temperature sensor 18 Nm Apply ThreeBond 1374 to

the threads
Coolant return elbow to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Coolant manifold to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Coolant filler neck 3 Nm
Radiator Grill 5 Nm
5/7/2017 Fuel System, Exhaust System and Airbox
37
Fuel System, Exhaust System and Airbox
(Nm)
Fuel tank to frame (pivot nut) 8 Nm
Fuel pump mounting plate to fuel tank 5 Nm
Fuel pump mounting bracket to fuel pump plate 7 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Fuel hose bracket to fuel pump mounting bracket 4 Nm
Fuel pump baffle clamp 3 Nm
Fuel hose to fuel pump 15 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Exhaust intermediate pipe to catalytic converter 8 Nm
clamp
Right hand exhaust intermediate pipe to frame 19 Nm
Left hand exhaust intermediate pipe to frame 19 Nm
Exhaust headers to catalytic converter clamp 10 Nm
Exhaust balance pipe clamp 9 Nm
Exhaust silencer to frame 24 Nm
Exhaust headers to cylinder head 19 Nm
Exhaust catalytic converter heat shield to 19 Nm
crankcase
Catalytic converter to heat shield 15 Nm
Catalytic converter front shield 5 Nm
Exhaust silencer to intermediate pipe 15 Nm
38
(Nm)
Exhaust cover 9 Nm
Oxygen sensor 25 Nm Apply antiseize

compound to threads.
Airbox to frame 6 Nm
Air intake hose clips 1.5 Nm
Evaporative canister 1.4 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Crankshaft position sensor 6 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Ambient air pressure sensor 2 Nm
Air temperature sensor 1.5 Nm
Gear position sensor 5 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Immobiliser module 2 Nm
Immobiliser module bracket 4 Nm
Throttle position sensor cover 3 Nm
Fuel rail to cylinder head 6 Nm
Ignition coil assembly fixings 3 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Air intake duct 1.5 Nm
Air intake finisher 3 Nm
Air intake finisher mounting 3 Nm
39
(Nm)
Purge valve bracket 1.5 Nm
Air filter cover to airbox 1.5 Nm
MAP sensor 1.5 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Harness guide to crankcase (GPS) 4 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Relay bracket 1.5 Nm
Engine breather pipe clip 3 Nm
Engine breather pipe mounting bracket 1.5 Nm
Throttle body transition piece to cylinder head 9 Nm
Multiplug mounting bracket 3 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
5/7/2017 Front Suspension
40
Front Suspension
(Nm)
Upper yoke centre nut 90 Nm
Upper yoke pinch bolt 20 Nm
Lower yoke pinch bolt 25 Nm
Instrument bracket to upper yoke 8 Nm
Damping cylinder 90 Nm
Handlebar to riser clamp bolt 8.5 Nm
Handlebar end weights 5 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Headstock bearing adjuster and lock nut * See Steering Head
Bearing Adjustment
Right hand switch housing fixings 2.5 Nm
Left hand switch housing fixings 2.5 Nm
Handlebar riser to front fork clamp bolt 20 Nm
Twist grip housing 3.5 Nm
Fork top cap 22 Nm
5/7/2017 Rear Suspension
41
Rear Suspension
(Nm)
Swinging arm pivot nut 110 Nm See
Swinging arm pivot bolt adjuster 6 Nm See Swinging Arm

Installation
Drive chain slack adjuster lock nut 20 Nm
Drive chain guard fixings 9 Nm
Drive chain rubbing strip 9 Nm
Rear suspension unit upper mounting bolt 28 Nm
Rear suspension unit lower mounting bolt 48 Nm
5/7/2017 Wheels
42
Wheels
(Nm)
Front wheel spindle/axle bolt 65 Nm
Fork to wheel spindle pinch bolts 22 Nm
Rear wheel spindle lock nut 110 Nm
Rear sprocket to sprocket carrier 55 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Sprocket carrier stud 30 Nm See Rear Sprocket

Installation
5/7/2017 Front Brakes
43
Front Brakes
(Nm)
Brake caliper to front fork 55 Nm Apply and hold front brake

lever when tightening the
fixings
Front brake master cylinder to handlebar 8.5 Nm
Brake hose to master cylinder 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Brake hose to front caliper 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Brake disc to wheel 22 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Brake lever pivot bolt 1 Nm
Brake lever pivot bolt lock nut 6 Nm
Front brake fluid reservoir cap 1 Nm
Caliper bleed screw 8 Nm
5/7/2017 Rear Brakes
44
Rear Brakes
(Nm)
Brake hose to rear caliper 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Brake master cylinder right hand control plate 18 Nm
Master cylinder reservoir cap screws 1 Nm
Brake master cylinder reservoir to relay bracket 3 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Brake hose to master cylinder 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Brake light switch bracket to control plate 5 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Brake hose Pclip to right hand control plate 5 Nm
Brake disc to wheel 22 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Brake pad retaining pin 18 Nm
5/7/2017 ABS System
45
ABS System
(Nm)
ABS modulator bracket to frame 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
ABS modulator to bracket 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Brake line union block to headstock 8 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Antirotation moulding to ABS modulator 5 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Rear brake line to modulator Pclip 5 Nm
Rear ABS pulser ring to wheel 5 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Hose routing moulding to crankcase 3 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Brake line union to modulator 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Front brake hose to hard line union 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)
Hose guide to swinging arm 3 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
5/7/2017 Frame, Footrests, Control Plates and Engine Mountings
46
Frame, Footrests, Control Plates and Engine Mountings
(Nm)
Footrest rubber inserts 6 Nm
Bank angle indicator 9 Nm
Front control plate 25 Nm
Pillion hanger finisher 24 Nm
Side stand switch 3 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Side stand spring peg 7 Nm
Front right hand cylinder head bolt to frame 24 Nm See Engine Installation

(stage one)
Front right hand cylinder head bolt to frame 105 Nm See Engine Installation

(stage two)
Frame adjuster 5 Nm See Engine Installation
Front left hand cylinder head bolt to frame 105 Nm See Engine Installation
Lower rear crankcase mounting 80 Nm See Engine Installation
Upper rear crankcase mounting 80 Nm See Engine Installation
Cradle to crankcase mounting bolts 105 Nm See Engine Installation
Cradle to frame mounting bolts 40 Nm
Front mudguard bracket to forks 6 Nm
Front mudguard to bracket 3 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Rear mudguard to frame 6 Nm
5/7/2017 Frame, Footrests, Control Plates and Engine Mountings
47
(Nm)
Rear mudguard support 6 Nm
Mirror 3 Nm
Seat lock to frame 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Rear light harness cover 4 Nm
Sump guard bracket 19 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Heel Guard 7 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
right hand side only
Seat cowl 1.5 Nm
5/7/2017 Electrical
48
Electrical
(Nm)
Alternator rotor to crankshaft * see Alternator Rotor
Installation
Alternator stator to cover 12 Nm
Alternator regulator to bracket 4 Nm
Starter motor to crankcase 7 Nm
Starter motor power lead connection 5 Nm
Starter motor solenoid bracket 1.5 Nm
Starter motor solenoid lead connection 4 Nm
Spark plug 12 Nm
Alternator regulator/rectifier 4 Nm
Immobiliser ECU 2 Nm
Ignition switch 12 Nm
Headstock tidy 1.5 Nm
Headlight vertical adjuster 10 Nm
Rear light 2 Nm
Rear light assembly 5 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Front and rear direction indicator 5 Nm
Fuse box bracket 3 Nm
Wire guide to headstock 3 Nm
5/7/2017 Electrical
49
(Nm)
Main harness to frame 3 Nm
Instrument bracket to upper yoke 8 Nm
Instruments 3 Nm
Instruments cover 3 Nm
Horn 24 Nm
Rear light harness cover 4 Nm
Alternator stator to alternator cover 12 Nm
Ignition switch 12 Nm
Tool 3880606 lock nut 10 Nm
Fall detection switch 3 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

loosened or removed
Relay bracket 1.5 Nm
Headlight connector bracket to headlight bowl 1.5 Nm
5/7/2017 Main Wiring Harness Routing
50
Main Wiring Harness Routing
5/7/2017 Clutch Cable Routing
51
Clutch Cable Routing
cjpk
5/7/2017 ABS Brake Hose routing
52
ABS Brake Hose routing
cjph
5/7/2017 Evaporative Hose Routing
53
Evaporative Hose Routing
cjpl
5/7/2017 Scheduled Maintenance
54
Scheduled Maintenance
WARNING
Triumph Motorcycles cannot accept any responsibility for damage or injury resulting from
incorrect maintenance or improper adjustment carried out by the owner.
Since incorrect or neglected maintenance can lead to a dangerous riding condition, always
have an authorised Triumph dealer carry out the scheduled maintenance of this motorcycle.
WARNING
All maintenance is vitally important and must not be neglected. Incorrect maintenance or
adjustment may cause one or more parts of the motorcycle to malfunction. A malfunctioning
motorcycle may lead to loss of control and an accident.
Weather, terrain and geographical location affect maintenance. The maintenance schedule
should be adjusted to match the particular environment in which the vehicle is used and the
demands of the individual owner.
Special tools, knowledge and training are required in order to correctly carry out the
maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance chart. Only an authorised Triumph
dealer will have this knowledge and equipment.
Since incorrect or neglected maintenance can lead to a dangerous riding condition, always
have an authorised Triumph dealer carry out the scheduled maintenance of this motorcycle.
To maintain the motorcycle in a safe and reliable condition, the maintenance and adjustments
outlined in this section must be carried out as specified in the schedule of daily checks, and also
in line with the scheduled maintenance chart. The information that follows describes the
procedures to follow when carrying out the daily checks and some simple maintenance and
adjustment items.
Scheduled maintenance may be carried out by your authorised Triumph dealer in three ways;
annual maintenance, mileage based maintenance or a combination of both, depending on the
mileage the motorcycle travels each year.
1. Motorcycles travelling less than 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must be maintained
annually. In addition to this, mileage based items require maintenance at their specified
intervals, as the motorcycle reaches this mileage.
2. Motorcycles travelling approximately 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must have the
annual maintenance and the specified mileage based items carried out together.
3. Motorcycles travelling more than 10,000 miles (16,000 km) per year must have the
mileage based items maintained as the motorcycle reaches the specified mileage. In
addition to this, annual based items will require maintenance at their specified annual
intervals.
In all cases maintenance must be carried out at or before the specified maintenance intervals
shown. Consult an authorised Triumph dealer for advice on which maintenance schedule is
most suitable for your motorcycle.
Triumph Motorcycles cannot accept any responsibility for damage or injury resulting from
incorrect maintenance or improper adjustment.
5/7/2017 Scheduled Maintenance Table
55
Scheduled Maintenance Table
Operation Description Odometer Reading in Miles (Km) or Time Period,
whichever comes first
First Annual Mileage Based Service
Service Service
Every 500 Year 10,000 20,000 40,000
(800) and (32,000) (64,000)
1 month 30,000
(16,000
and
48,000)
Lubrication
Engine check for leaks Day • • • • •
Engine oil renew • • • • •
Engine oil filter renew • • • • •
Fuel System and Engine Management
Fuel system check for leaks, • • •
chafing etc.
Throttle body plate (butterfly) • • •
check/clean
Autoscan Carry out a full • • • • •
Autoscan using the Triumph
Diagnostic Tool (print a
customer copy)
Air cleaner renew • • •
Fuel filter renew • •
Throttle bodies balance • • •
1200 cc engines only
Fuel hoses renew Every 4 years regardless of mileage
Evaporative loss hoses* Every 4 years regardless of mileage
renew
56
Service Service
Every 500 Year 10,000 20,000 40,000
(800) and (32,000) (64,000)
1 month 30,000
(16,000
and
48,000)
Ignition System
Spark plugs check •
Spark plugs renew • •
Cooling System
Cooling system check for Day • • • • •
leaks
Cooling system check hoses • • •
for chafing/cracks/damage.
Replace if necessary
Coolant level check/adjust Day • • • • •
Coolant renew Every 3 years regardless of mileage
Engine
Clutch cable check function Day • • • • •
and adjust as necessary
Valve clearances check • •
Camshaft timing • •
Wheels and Tyres
Tyre wear/tyre damage check Day • • • • •
Tyre pressures check/adjust Day • • • • •
Wheels inspect for damage Day • • • • •
57
Service Service
Every 500 Year 10,000 20,000 40,000
(800) and (32,000) (64,000)
1 month 30,000
(16,000
and
48,000)
Wheels check wheels for Day • • • • •
broken or damaged spokes
and check spoke tightness
(models with spoked wheels
only)
Wheel bearings check for • • • • •
wear/smooth operation
Electrical
All lights, instruments and Day • • • • •
electrical systems check
Steering and Suspension
Steering check for free Day • • • • •
operation
Front and rear suspension Day • • • • •
check for
damage/leaks/smooth
operation
Fork oil renew •
Headstock bearings • • • • •
check/adjust
Headstock bearings lubricate • •
Brakes
Brake pads check wear levels Day • • • • •
58
Service Service
Every 500 Year 10,000 20,000 40,000
(800) and (32,000) (64,000)
1 month 30,000
(16,000
and
48,000)
Brake master cylinders check • • • • •
for fluid leaks
Brake calipers check for fluid • • • • •
leaks and seized pistons
Brake fluid levels check Day • • • • •
Brake fluid renew Every 2 years regardless of mileage
Drive Chain
Drive chain slack check/adjust Day • • • • •
Drive chain wear check Every 500 miles (800 km)
Drive chain lubricate Every 200 miles (300 km)
Drive chain rubbing strip • • • • •
check
General
Instruments and engine ECM • • • • •
check for latest calibration
download using the Triumph
diagnostic tool
Fasteners inspect visually for Day • • • • •
security
Bank angle indicators inspect Day • • • • •
visually for wear
59
Service Service
Every 500 Year 10,000 20,000 40,000
(800) and (32,000) (64,000)
1 month 30,000
(16,000
and
48,000)
Side stand/Centre stand Day • • • • •
lubricate/check operation
Side stand pivot pin • • •
clean/grease
* Evaporative system fitted to models for certain markets only.
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Sump
60
Exploded View – Sump
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Clutch Cover
61
Exploded View – Clutch Cover
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Alternator Cover
62
Exploded View – Alternator Cover
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Camshaft Cover
63
Exploded View – Camshaft Cover
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Sprocket Cover
64
Exploded View – Sprocket Cover
5/7/2017 Sump Removal
65
Sump Removal
WARNING
Before starting work, ensure the motorcycle is stabilised and adequately supported. This will
help prevent it from falling and causing injury to the operator or damage to the motorcycle.
Remove the seat (see Seat Removal).
Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first (see Battery Removal).
Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Removal).
Remove the exhaust system (see Exhaust Silencer Removal with Single Seat and
Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes Removal).
Remove the engine cradles (see Cradle Assemblies Removal).
Remove the catalytic converter (see Exhaust Catalytic Converter Removal).
WARNING
The oil may be hot to the touch. Contact with hot oil may cause the skin to be scalded or
burned.
WARNING
Prolonged or repeated contact with engine oil can lead to skin dryness, irritation and
dermatitis. In addition used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which can
cause cancer. Wear suitable clothing and avoid skin contact.
1. Drain the engine oil and remove the oil filter (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
WARNING
The exhaust system will be hot if the engine has recently been running. Always allow
sufficient time for the exhaust to cool before working on or near the exhaust system.
Contact with a hot exhaust could result in burn injuries.
2. Remove the sump to lower crankcase fixings.
5/7/2017 Sump Removal
2
66
2 1
2
2
L0152 2
1. Sump
2. Fixings
3. Release the sump from the lower crankcase.
Note
The water pump drain tube may remain attached to the water pump or become
detached with the sump.
4. Collect the water pump drain tube.
5. Remove and discard the four Orings from the drain tube.
5/7/2017 Sump Inspection
67
Sump Inspection
WARNING
Ensure the oil pickup is clean and free of blockages or restrictions. If the oil flow is
restricted, oil pressure will be reduced and may cause severe engine damage.
1. Check the oil pickup for blockages or restrictions. Remove and clean if found to be blocked
or restricted.
5/7/2017 Sump Installation
68
Sump Installation
1. Lubricate the four new Orings with a commercially available soft petroleum jelly and fit two
each end of the drain tube.
2. Position the water pump drain tube to the oil pump.
cjaq_1
1. Water pump drain tube
2. Orings
3. Incorporating a new sump gasket/baffle, position the sump to the lower crankcase.
4. Tighten the sump fixings to 10 Nm in the sequence shown below.
5. Retighten the fixings one and two to 10 Nm.
13 9 5
3 1
15
7
16
12
11
8
4
2
L0152 6 10 14
Tightening Sequence
69
6. Using a new washer, refit the oil drain plug and tighten to 25 Nm.
7. Apply a thin smear of clean engine oil to the sealing ring of the new oil filter. Fit the oil filter
using T3880313 Oil Filter Wrench and tighten to 10 Nm.
L0151
1. Oil filter
2. Oil drain plug
Refit the catalytic converter (see Exhaust Catalytic Converter Installation).
Refit the exhaust system (see Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes Installation).
Refit the engine cradles (see Cradle Assemblies Installation).
Refit the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Installation).
Fill the engine with the correct grade of engine oil (see Engine Oil Specification).
Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first and tighten the battery terminals to 4.5 Nm.
CAUTION
Raising the engine speed above idle, before the oil reaches all parts of the engine can
cause engine damage or seizure. Only raise engine speed after running the engine for 30
seconds to allow the oil to circulate fully.
CAUTION
If the engine oil pressure is too low, the low oil pressure warning light will illuminate. If this
light stays on when the engine is running, stop the engine immediately and investigate the
cause. Running the engine with low oil pressure will cause engine damage.
Start the engine and ensure that the low oil pressure warning light goes out shortly after
starting.
Stop the engine and check the engine oil level. Adjust if necessary (see Engine Oil Level
70
Inspection).
Refit the seat (see Seat Installation).
5/7/2017 Clutch Cover Removal
71
Clutch Cover Removal
WARNING
1. Disconnect the clutch cable at the clutch cover (see Clutch Cable Removal).
2. Release the fixing and disconnect the gear change actuator arm at the clutch cover.
4
3
ciuz
1. Gear change actuator arm
2. Fixing
3. Actuator arm alignment mark
4. Gear change actuator arm split line
Note
Note the position of the clutch cable brackets prior to removal.
3. Release the fixings securing the clutch cover to the crankcases. Note the position of the
encapsulated fixings and discard.
72
2 2
2
2
1 2
2
1
1 3
1 2 2 3
ciup
1. Fixings M6 x 50 mm
2. Fixings M6 x 40 mm
3. Encapsulated fixings M6 x 35 mm
4. Place an oil catch tray beneath the clutch cover to collect any oil that may spill out on
removal.
5. Carefully withdraw the cover.
6. Remove the gasket and clean the surfaces of the crankcase and the clutch cover using a
lint free cloth.
7. Note the position of the washer on the gear change shaft.
ciur
2
1. Gear change shaft
2. Washer
73
5/7/2017 Clutch Cover Installation
74
Clutch Cover Installation
WARNING
1. Ensure the washer is correctly positioned on the gear change shaft.
ciur
2
1. Gear change shaft
2. Washer
2. Thoroughly clean the cover and crankcase mating faces.
3. Position a new gasket to the crankcase.
4. Refit the cover ensuring that the gasket does not become dislodged.
Note
Ensure that the lifter piece claw engages correctly with the pull rod during assembly.
It may be necessary to rotate the lifter piece rack to allow assembly to take place.
Fixings 4 and 10 are encapsulated and must be replaced during fitment.
5. Refit the two brackets for the clutch cable and fixings as noted during removal, tighten the
fixings as described below:
Tighten fixings 1 to 13 in the sequence shown below to 10 Nm.
6. Fit the clutch cable bracket and tighten fixings 14 and 15 to 10 Nm.
Retighten fixings one, two and six to 10 Nm.
75
13 9
5
3
7 1
12
11
2 4
14 15 6 10
ciup
Tightening Sequence
7. Align the split line on the gear change actuator arm with the alignment mark on the gear
change shaft and fit the actuator arm to the spline. Fit the fixing and tighten to 8 Nm.
4
3
ciuz
1. Gear change actuator arm
2. Fixing
3. Actuator arm alignment mark
4. Gear change actuator arm split line
8. Refit and adjust the clutch cable (see Clutch Cable Installation).
Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first (see Battery Installation) and tighten the
terminals to 4.5 Nm.
76
5/7/2017 Alternator Cover Removal
77
Alternator Cover Removal
WARNING
The rotor magnets are very strong. When handling the alternator cover the magnets may
'grab' the stator, causing injury to the hands or fingers. When handling the alternator cover
wear suitable gloves and only grip the alternator cover by the outside surfaces; always keep
hands and fingers clear when handling the alternator cover.
Remove the right hand side panel (see Side Panels).
Remove the front sprocket cover (see Front Sprocket Cover Removal).
Remove the alternator regulator/rectifier (see Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Removal).
1. Remove the lock nuts and detach the coolant expansion tank from its mounting. Discard the
lock nuts.
1
2
cjpt
1. Lock nuts
2. Coolant expansion tank
2. Remove the fixings, detach the alternator harness and remove the coolant expansion tank
mounting.
78
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
3. Alternator harness
CAUTION
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled
brake fluid will damage paintwork.
3. Remove and discard the fixing and detach the rear brake fluid reservoir from the relay
bracket.
citi_1
1. Fixing
2. Brake fluid reservoir
79
4. Secure the rear brake fluid reservoir in an upright position.
5. Disconnect the crankshaft position sensor from the main harness.
ciwh_1
1. Crankshaft position sensor electrical connector
Note
Note the routing of the crankshaft position sensor harness and for installation.
6. Route the crankshaft position sensor harness through the frame to the harness guide on the
crankcase.
7. Remove and discard the fixing and detach the harness guide from the crankcase.
cjqb_1
1. Fixing
80
2. Harness guide
8. Carefully remove the alternator harness from the harness guide.
Note
Note the routing of the alternator harness and its clips for installation.
9. Route the alternator harness with the grey electrical connector to the alternator cover.
10. Place an oil catch tray beneath the alternator cover to collect any oil that may spill out on
removal.
11. Release the fixings securing the alternator cover to the crankcases.
10 3 7
5 2
1 6
8 9
ciuo 4
Removal Sequence
12. Carefully withdraw the alternator cover from the crankcase.
13. Remove the gasket and clean the surfaces of the crankcase and the alternator cover using
a lint free cloth.
14. Remove and discard the Oring from the balancer dead shaft.
81
1
2
civa
1. Oring
2. Balancer dead shaft
5/7/2017 Alternator Cover Installation
82
Alternator Cover Installation
WARNING
hands and fingers clear when handling the alternator cover.
1. Fit a new Oring to the balancer dead shaft.
1
2
civa
1. Oring
2. Balancer dead shaft
2. Position a new gasket to the crankcase dowels and refit the alternator cover.
3. Tighten the fixings to 10 Nm, in the sequence shown below.
83
10 3 7
5 2
1 6
8 9
ciuo 4
Tightening Sequence
4. Retighten fixings one and two to 10 Nm.
5. Route the alternator harness to the alternator regulator rectifier securing it to its clips as
noted for removal.
6. Carefully fit the alternator harness into the harness guide as noted for removal.
7. Secure the harness guide to the crankcase and tighten the new fixing to 4 Nm.
cjqb_1
1. Fixing
2. Harness guide
8. Route the crankshaft position sensor harness through the frame to the right hand side of the
airbox, as noted for removal.
9. Connect the crankshaft position sensor electrical connector to the main harness.
84
ciwh_1
1. Crankshaft position sensor electrical connector
10. Refit the brake fluid reservoir to the relay bracket, and tighten the new fixing to 3 Nm.
11. Attach the alternator harness to the coolant expansion tank mounting, fit the coolant
expansion tank mounting and tighten its fixings to 7 Nm.
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
12. Refit the coolant expansion tank to its mounting bracket and tighten the new lock nuts to 3
Nm.
85
1
1
2
cjpt
1. Lock nuts
Refit the alternator regulator/rectifier (see Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Installation
Refit the front sprocket cover (see Front Sprocket Cover Installation).
Refit the right hand side panel (see Side Panels).
5/7/2017 Camshaft Cover Removal
86
Camshaft Cover Removal
WARNING
Remove the ignition coils (see Ignition Coils Removal).
Remove the immobiliser/TPMS module (see Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Removal).
1. Remove the spark plugs.
2. Progressively release the camshaft cover fixings.
3. Raise the camshaft cover and manoeuvre it towards the right hand side of the engine,
where it can be removed.
CAUTION
Never use a lever to remove the camshaft cover from the cylinder head.
Using a lever will cause damage to the cylinder head and camshaft cover, which could lead
to an oil leak.
4. Remove the camshaft cover gasket.
5. Discard the camshaft cover gasket and rubber seals.
6. Remove any residual oil from the mating face of the cylinder head using a lint free cloth.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Cover Installation
87
Camshaft Cover Installation
1. Fit a new camshaft cover seal to the camshaft cover. Ensure the groove in the gasket is
correctly seated to the camshaft cover.
2. Position the camshaft cover to the cylinder head. Ensure that the gasket remains in
position.
3. Lubricate the new camshaft cover fixing seals with clean engine oil. Fit the camshaft cover
fixings and seals and tighten until finger tight.
4. Tighten the fixings in the sequence shown to 14 Nm.
Tightening Sequence
5. Refit the spark plugs and tighten to 12 Nm.
Refit the immobiliser/TPMS module (see Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Installation).
Refit the ignition coils (see Ignition Coils Installation).
5/7/2017 Front Sprocket Cover Removal
88
Front Sprocket Cover Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Rotating the rear wheel will cause the drive chain to rotate on the sprockets. To prevent
injury, never place loose clothing, fingers or hands near the drive chain or sprockets. Loose
clothing, fingers or the hands could become trapped as the drive chain rotates on the
sprockets causing a crushing injury to the fingers, hands or other parts of the anatomy.
1. Remove the fixings securing the sprocket cover to the crankcase.
1. Sprocket cover
2. Fixings
5/7/2017 Front Sprocket Cover Inspection
89
Front Sprocket Cover Inspection
WARNING
1. Inspect the rubber grommets, flanged sleeves and rubber buffer for damage or wear.
5/7/2017 Front Sprocket Cover Installation
90
Front Sprocket Cover Installation
WARNING
WARNING
1. If removed, refit the grommets to the sprocket cover.
2. If removed, refit the flanged sleeves to the sprocket cover.
3. If removed, refit the rubber buffer to the swinging arm nut.
3
2
cive
1. Flanged sleeve
2. Grommet
3. Rubber buffer
4. Fit the sprocket cover, ensuring that the rubber buffer and the flanged sleeves remain in the
correct position.
5. Fit the sprocket cover fixings and evenly and progressively tighten to 9 Nm.
5/7/2017 Front Sprocket Cover Installation
91
1. Sprocket cover
2. Fixings
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Camshaft and Camshaft Drive
92
Exploded View – Camshaft and Camshaft Drive
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Cylinder Head
93
Exploded View – Cylinder Head
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head Description
94
Cylinder Head Description
The engine is fitted with an aluminium alloy cylinder head, which carries the camshaft, valves
and spark plugs. The cylinder head is cast as a single entity, to which various components are
permanently added after machining.
A silent running camshaft drive chain drives the single overhead camshaft, which runs directly
in the cylinder head without additional bearings.
The crankshaft drives an idler gear, which in turn drives the camshaft drive chain. The idler
gear, and therefore the camshaft rotates in the opposite direction to the crankshaft.
The engine is fitted with a camshaft drive chain hydraulic tensioner. The tensioner is fed oil via a
gallery in the crankcase. The combination of oil pressure and spring pressure pushes the
plunger against the tensioner blade which tensions the camshaft drive chain. The hydraulic
tensioner has an oil pressure relief valve located in the plunger that is set to open between 12
16 bar. The chain is guided by two nylon tensioner blades. The rubbing blade is located in the
cylinder barrel by lugs on the blade. The cylinder head must be removed to remove this blade.
The tensioner blade is secured to the cylinder head by two bolts at its upper end, and its lower
end rests on the tensioner plunger.
Camshaft, valve, valve shim and valve seat wear affect the valve clearances. The effect of this
wear is to change the clearance between the rocker and the adjustment shim, causing engine
noise and/or improper running. If the valve clearances are incorrect, permanent damage to
components in the valve train will take place and engine performance will be affected.
Oil is supplied to the cylinder head by an internal passageway inside the engine. Once it arrives
at the cylinder head, it is passed through a restrictor, and is then delivered to the camshaft
bearing journals along grooves and bolt holes in the camshaft frames. The camshaft lobes are
splash fed by oil coming from the rocker arms.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Removal
95
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Removal
WARNING
Remove the immobiliser/TPMS module (see Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Removal).
Remove the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover Removal).
Remove the alternator cover (see Alternator Cover Removal).
1. Rotate the engine until the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin can be inserted through the
hole in the alternator rotor, crankcase and into the idler gear.
civb
1. T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin
2. Timing hole in alternator rotor
2. In addition to the alignment mark, at TDC, the offset slot on the camshaft will align with the
upper surface of the cylinder head.
96
cizs
2 3
1. Camshaft slot
2. Cylinder head
3. Camshaft ladder (cylinder two)
3. With the aid of an assistant, hold the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade to keep the
camshaft drive chain in position during removal of the tensioner.
cjag
1. Camshaft drive chain tensioner blade
2. Tension (hand held)
WARNING
97
The hydraulic tensioner is under spring tension. Always wear hand, eye, and face protection
when withdrawing the tensioner. Take great care to minimise the risk of injury and loss of
components.
4. Using T3880649 Timing Chain Tensioner Socket, unscrew the hydraulic tensioner body
until the plunger spring tension has been released.
1. Tensioner
5. Remove the hydraulic tensioner and discard the Orings.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Inspection
98
Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner Inspection
1. Inspect the camshaft drive chain tensioner spring for damage and deformation. Renew as
necessary.
2. Inspect the tip of the camshaft drive chain tensioner plunger for wear and damage. Renew
as necessary.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Tensioner Installation
99
Camshaft Drive Tensioner Installation
WARNING
1. Ensure that the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade is in contact with the camshaft drive
chain.
2. Check that the camshaft alignment slot aligns with the cylinder head.
3. To set the hydraulic tensioner onto the first tooth of the ratchet (i.e. minimum extension)
carry out the following:
Note
If installing a new hydraulic tensioner, do not release the plunger before fitting.
If installing the original hydraulic tensioner, the engine oil must be drained out of the
tensioner to enable the plunger to be set onto the first tooth of the ratchet.
WARNING
The plunger of the camshaft drive chain tensioner is under spring tension. Always wear
hand, eye and facial protection when removing the tensioner as unprotected areas of the
body can be injured if the spring tension is released in an unexpected or uncontrolled way.
4. Hold the resister ring ends together and pull out the plunger.
2
1
cfei_2
1. Resister ring ends
2. Plunger
5. Remove the spring.
100
1. Spring
6. While holding the resister ring in place, drain the engine oil into a suitable container.
7. Ensure the resister ring is correctly located as shown below.
cfho
1. Resister ring
8. Refit the spring.
9. Support the tensioner in a soft jawed vice.
10. Hold the resister ends together, close the vice allowing the plunger to be pushed through
the resister ring until the snap ring aligns with the snap ring groove.
101
2 3
1
4
cfei
1. Resister ring
2. Plunger
3. Snap ring groove
4. Snap ring
11. When the snap ring aligns with the snap ring groove, release the vice and move one end of
the snap ring into the groove. Slowly release the plunger to ensure it is held in place.
cfe j
1. Snap ring groove
2. Snap ring
12. Fit two new Orings to the camshaft drive chain tensioner body.
13. Fit the tensioner to the cylinder head as noted for removal. Using T3880649 Timing Chain
Tensioner Socket, tighten the tensioner to 16 Nm.
14. Release pressure to the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade, taking care not to move the
102
tensioner blade.
15. Remove T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin.
16. To release the plunger from the snap ring holding the hydraulic tensioner, rotate the
crankshaft anticlockwise until the plunger is released.
17. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise until the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin aligns with the
hole in the crankcase and the crankshaft.
18. Check that there is tension in the camshaft drive chain and the slot at the camshaft end is
correctly aligned.
Note
After fitting to the engine, the hydraulic tensioner will be empty of engine oil. After
starting the engine, the camshaft drive chain and tensioner blade will be noisy until
full pressure is felt at the tensioner plunger. This could take up to 5 seconds.
19. Check that the tensioner plunger is correctly located in the middle of the camshaft drive
chain tensioner blade when viewed from above.
20. Rotate the engine through 4 full revolutions, and reset number 1 cylinder to TDC. Ensure
that the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin aligns with the hole in the crankcase and the
crankshaft.
civb
21. Check that the camshaft timing marks align as shown below.
103
cizs
2 3
1. Camshaft slot
2. Cylinder head
22. Recheck the tensioner plunger location against the camshaft drive chain tensioner blade.
Refit the alternator cover (see Alternator Cover Installation).
Refit the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover Installation).
Refit the immobiliser/TPMS module (see Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Installation).
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain and Idler Gear Removal
104
Camshaft Drive Chain and Idler Gear Removal
WARNING
Remove the engine (see Engine Removal).
WARNING
hands and fingers clear when handling the alternator cover
Remove the alternator rotor (see Alternator Rotor Removal).
1. Rotate the engine until T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin can be inserted through the hole
in the crankcase and into the idler gear.
2. Remove the cylinder head (see Cylinder Head Removal).
3. Remove the cylinder barrels (see Barrels Removal).
WARNING
Never use a 'dot punch' to mark the camshaft drive chain, camshaft or camshaft driven
gears. Severe engine damage will result if impact is applied to machined parts.
Note
To ensure the camshaft drive chain can be refitted in the same orientation, use a
suitable marker pen to permanently mark one of the outer plates of the camshaft
drive chain prior to removing the camshafts.
Note the side of which the marked outer plate is facing for installation.
4. Secure the idler gear in position using the locking plate supplied with T3880016 Balancer
Gear CSpanner2 by locking the gear teeth as shown below.
105
2
1
3
cizk
1. Idler gear
2. Locking plate (Part of T3880016 Balancer Gear C
Spanner)
3. T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin
5. Remove and discard the fixing from the idler gear shaft.
cjac
1. Fixing
6. Withdraw the idler gear shaft and collect the idler gear and camshaft drive chain from the
upper crankcase.
106
2
1 3
cizl
1. Idler gear shaft
2. Idler gear
3. Camshaft drive chain
7. Remove the camshaft drive chain from the idler gear.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Chain Inspection
107
Camshaft Chain Inspection
Visual in situ checks can also be made as follows:
1. Check for significant blue discolouration of the drive chain plates indicating excessive heat
buildup.
2. Examine all of the pins for signs of rotation.
3. Check for cracking or deep scratching of the drive chain plates.
4. Check for severe wear of the inner plates as indicated in the diagram below.
ccrv
For a more thorough check, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the drive chain from the engine.
2. Suspend the drive chain from a pin or hook with a 13 kg weight attached at the lower end.
cajs
3. Measure across 23 links as shown in the diagram below. If the drive chain is within limits,
the measurement should be no longer than . Measurements beyond indicate that the drive
chain must be replaced.
108
1 2 3 4 22 23
cajt
4. Check for severe wear of the inner surface of the outer plates at the sidecontact points with
the sprocket teeth.
ccru
5. Check for signs of stiffness or kinking.
6. Check for severe wear of the plates in the area shown below.
109
caju
7. If any of these symptoms are evident, the camshaft drive chain must be replaced.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain and Idler Gear Installation
110
Camshaft Drive Chain and Idler Gear Installation
1. Preload the backlash gear using T3880041 Idler Gear Timing Wrench and locking plate
T3880016 Balancer Gear CSpanner2 as shown below.
1
2
cizm
1. Idler gear
2. Locking plate (part of T3880016 Balancer Gear C
Spanner)
3. T3880041 Idler Gear Timing Wrench
2. Install the camshaft drive chain to the idler gear.
3. Refit the idler gear to the upper crankcase and install the idler gear shaft. Ensure that the
marked outer plate on the camshaft drive chain is facing the same direction as noted for
removal.
1 3
cizl
1. Idler gear shaft
111
2. Idler gear
4. Install T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin through the hole in the crankcase (alternator side)
and through the smaller hole in the idler gear, as shown below.
2
cjac
1. Idler gear
2. Backlash gear
5. Install the idler gear shaft and a new fixing, Counter hold the idler shaft and tighten the
fixing to 10 Nm.
cjac
1. Fixing
112
6. Refit the barrel assembly (see Barrels Installation).
7. Refit the cylinder head (see Cylinder Head Installation).
8. Refit the camshafts (see Camshaft Installation).
10. Remove T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin from the crankcase.
11. Remove T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin from the idler gear.
Refit the engine (see Engine Installation).
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade Removal
113
Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade Removal
WARNING
Note
The camshaft drive chain rubbing blade can only be removed after the cylinder head
has been removed.
The camshaft drive chain tensioner blade can be removed without removing the
cylinder head.
WARNING
'grab' the stator, causing injury to the hands or fingers. When handling the alternator
cover wear suitable gloves and only grip the alternator cover by the outside surfaces;
always keep hands and fingers clear when handling the alternator cover
1. Rotate the engine until T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin can be inserted through the hole
in the alternator rotor, crankcase and into the idler gear.
2. Remove the cylinder head (see Cylinder Head Removal).
Note
Note the position of the camshaft drive chain rubbing blade upper mounting for
installation.
3. Lift the camshaft drive chain tensioner rubbing blade out of the crankcase.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade Removal
114
1
2
cftg
1. Camshaft drive chain tensioner rubbing blade
2. Mounting lugs
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade Inspection
115
Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade Inspection
1. Inspect the camshaft drive chain blades for wear or damage. Renew as necessary.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade Installation
116
Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade Installation
1. Refit the camshaft drive chain rubbing blade. Ensure the lower mounting tip is correctly
located in the upper crankcase and the lugs are located in the barrel as noted during
removal.
3. Refit the camshafts (see Camshaft Installation).
4. Refit the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover Installation).
5/7/2017 Exhaust Decompressors
117
Exhaust Decompressors
Note
The decompressor is an integral part of the camshaft. Any internal parts are not
serviceable and can only be replaced as part of the camshaft. Always refer to the
EPC for parts availability.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Removal
118
Camshaft Removal
WARNING
Note
The camshaft can be removed from the cylinder head without complete removal of
the camshaft drive chain. However, the camshaft drive chain must first be detached
from the camshaft.
Remove the immobiliser/TPMS control module (see Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module
Removal).
1. Rotate the engine until T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin can be inserted through the hole in
the alternator rotor, crankcase and into the idler gear.
civb
2. In addition to the alignment mark, at TDC, the offset slot on the camshaft will align with the
119
Note
The T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate has two different thickness edges marked A
and B. If side A will not slide smoothly into the camshaft slot side use side B.
3. Insert the T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate into the camshaft slot. Ensure that the tool is
centrally located on the cylinder head and secure as shown below.
2
3
cizt
1. T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate
2. Camshaft slot
3. Fixings (6 x 12 mm)
4. Remove the camshaft drive chain tensioner (see Camshaft Drive Chain Tensioner
Removal).
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the camshaft frames, always ensure as many camshaft lobes as
possible are facing downwards. This will reduce stress on the camshaft frames during
removal. Damage to the camshaft frames will result in replacement of the complete cylinder
head.
Note
The camshaft frames can be removed either sequentially or simultaneously.
5. Evenly and progressively release the camshaft frame fixings in the sequence shown below.
120
1 3
3 1
4
4 2 2
cja h
Camshaft Frame Release Sequence
CAUTION
Failure to release the camshaft frame fixings progressively and evenly may result in damage
to the camshaft frame, the camshaft or the cylinder head itself. A damaged camshaft frame
cannot be replaced as an individual item. It can only be obtained as part of a new cylinder
head.
6. Once all of the upward force on the camshaft frames has been released, collect the bolts.
CAUTION
The camshaft frames are located to the cylinder head with dowels. When removing the
camshaft frames collect the dowels at the same time. Failure to collect the dowels could
cause them to fall into the crankcase and may cause serious damage to the engine.
7. Remove the camshaft frames.
8. Release the front camshaft timing chain tensioner blade and discard the fixings.
9. Raise the camshaft slightly from the bearing journals, and remove the camshaft drive chain
tensioner blade.
121
3
cizr
2
1. Tensioner guide
2. Bearing journal
3. Camshaft
10. Detach the camshaft drive chain from the camshaft.
11. Slide the camshaft to the right and remove it from the cylinder head.
2 3
1
cjak
1. Camshaft
3. camshaft drive gear
12. Secure the camshaft drive chain to prevent it from falling into the crankcase.
5/7/2017 Camshaft Identification
122
Camshaft Identification
The single camshaft has four lobes; two inlet and two exhaust. The exhaust lobes contain
decompressors, operated by the drive gear.
cizp
Camshaft
5/7/2017 Camshaft Inspection
123
Camshaft Inspection
1. Inspect the camshaft sprocket for damage and worn or broken teeth.
2. Inspect the bearing surfaces in the cylinder head and camshaft frame. If wear or damage is
found, the cylinder head and the camshaft frames must be replaced.
3. Inspect the camshaft drive chain (see Camshaft Chain Inspection).
Note
Inspect the decompressor for damaged or missing flyweights, worn or broken
springs. Carefully inspect the pins on the decompressor for damage or wear.
4. Check camshaft journal to camshaft frame clearance using Plastigauge (Triumph part
number 3880150T0301) as follows:
Position the camshaft to the cylinder head in its correct location. Ensure that the camshaft
sprocket is positioned as for removal.
Wipe the exposed areas of one of the camshaft journals and the corresponding position on
the camshaft frame.
Apply a thin smear of grease to the camshaft journal and a small quantity of silicone release
agent to the corresponding position on the camshaft frame.
Size a piece of Plastigauge to fit across the camshaft journal.
Fit the Plastigauge to the camshaft journal using the grease to hold it in place.
Position the camshaft frames.
Fit the rocker shafts to the camshaft frames, at this stage, it is not necessary to fit the rocker
arms.
Tighten the camshaft frame bolts by hand until the under head areas are in contact with the
camshaft frame.
In the sequence shown below, progressively tighten the camshaft frame bolts, until the
camshaft frames are in full contact with the cylinder head. Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm.
1 3
3 1
4
4 2 2
cja h
Camshaft Frame Tightening Sequence
5/7/2017 Camshaft Inspection
Release and remove the camshaft frame as previously described.
124
Utilising the gauge provided with the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the now
compressed Plastigauge.
cbpg
Plastigauge Measurement
5. Calculate the camshaft journal clearance using the chart provided with the Plastigauge kit.
6. If the journal to camshaft frame clearance is within the specified tolerances (for
specifications refer toCamshafts), remove the camshaft frame and clean off all traces of
Plastigauge, silicone release agent and grease.
7. Check the diameter of the camshaft journals, (for specifications refer toCamshafts).
8. If any of the journal to camshaft frame clearances are outside the specified tolerances, but
the camshaft journals are within their specified tolerances, the cylinder head must be
replaced.
5/7/2017 Valve Clearance
125
Valve Clearance
Camshaft, valve, valve shim and valve seat wear affect the valve clearances. The effect of this
wear is to change the clearance between the rocker and the adjustment shim, causing engine
noise and/or improper running. If the valve clearances are incorrect, permanent damage to
components in the valve train will take place and engine performance will be affected.
Note
Valve clearance adjustment must be carried out with the engine cold.
When replacing a valve shim, always refer to the EPC.
For valve clearance specifications (see Cylinder Head and Valves).
5/7/2017 Valve Clearance Adjustment
126
Valve Clearance Adjustment
WARNING
Note
Valve clearance checking and adjustment must be carried out with the engine cold.
1. Remove the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover Removal).
Note
Removing the spark plugs reduces compression therefore allowing the engine to be
rotated freely.
2. Remove the spark plugs.
3. Select a high gear and, using the rear wheel, rotate the engine until a camshaft lobe is
positioned pointing directly away from the roller on the rocker shaft.
4. Using feeler gauges, measure and record the clearances for this pair of valves only.
1. Feeler gauges
5. Measure and record all valve clearances as described previously.
6. Remove the rocker shaft and rocker arm of a valve that requires adjustment.
127
3
1
2
ciaa
1. Rocker shaft
2. Rocker arm
3. Shims (cylinder 1 inlet shown)
4. Camshaft
Note
The underside of the shim displays the shim size.
Always place the shim with the shim size facing towards the valve.
7. Remove the shim from the valve(s) that requires adjustment.
2.40
1
cizw_1
1. Shim
2. Valve
8. Measure the original shim, using a micrometer.
128
9. Calculate the shim thickness required to give the correct clearance, for specifications refer
toCylinder Head and Valves.
Clearance too small Fit a thinner shim.
Clearance too large Fit a thicker shim.
Note
Shims are available ranging from 2.00 mm to 3.20 mm in increments of 0.025 mm.
10. Fit the selected shim to the valve.
11. Refit the rocker arm and shaft, tighten the bolts in the sequence shown below to 10 Nm.
cia a
Rocker Shaft Tightening Sequence
12. Repeat the procedure until all valves requiring adjustment have been correctly set.
13. Rotate the engine several times to fully seat the shims.
14. Repeat the clearance checks on all valves, adjust as necessary.
15. Refit the camshaft cover (see Camshaft Cover Installation).
5/7/2017 Camshaft Installation
129
Camshaft Installation
WARNING
Accurate camshaft timing can only be obtained using the correct timing method and service
tools as described below.
CAUTION
The camshaft sprockets are attached to the camshafts using slotted fixing holes. This allows
for very accurate valve timing and therefore improved performance and fuel economy.
Never fit the camshaft sprockets without correctly setting the camshaft timing using the
service tools and timing procedure described below. Severe engine damage will result from
incorrect valve timing adjustment.
1. If not already installed, install the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin.
2. Thoroughly clean the camshaft and journals. Lubricate the camshaft with clean engine oil
before fitting to the cylinder head.
Note
Ensure the sprocket fixings are centrally located within the slotted holes of the
sprocket.
DO NOT tighten the fixings at this stage; the sprocket must be free to rotate.
3. If removed, refit the camshaft sprocket noting its orientation, and secure using the original
fixings.
4. Locate the camshaft to the cylinder head from the right hand side, hooking the camshaft
drive chain over the sprocket.
5. Align the slot in the camshaft end to the upper surface of the cylinder head.
6. Lift the camshaft slightly from the bearing journals, refit the camshaft drive chain tensioner
blade. Tighten the new fixings to 10 Nm.
130
3
cizr
2
1. Tensioner blade
2. Bearing journal
3. Camshaft
Note
It is not necessary to fit the rocker arms at this stage.
7. Temporarily secure number two cylinder camshaft ladder to the cylinder head with a rocker
shaft and one fixing,
cizs
2 3
1. Camshaft slot
2. Cylinder head
8. Adjust the camshaft sprocket, so that the camshaft chain is taut on the inlet side (rear) of
131
the engine.
9. Ensure there is no slack in the chain between the crankshaft and the sprocket and the
sprocket fixings are centrally located within the slotted holes.
cizv
1. Camshaft slot
2. Fixing (one of two on camshaft sprocket)
Note
10. Insert the T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate into the camshaft slot. Ensure that the tool is
centrally located on the cylinder head and secure as shown below.
2
3
cizt
1. T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate
132
2. Camshaft
3. Fixings (6 x 12 mm)
11. Check that the camshaft drive chain is engaged around the idler gear and the camshaft
sprocket is positioned against the tensioner blade.
12. Fit the T3880651 Timing Chain Tensioner and tighten to 16 Nm.
1. T3880651 Timing Chain Tensioner
CAUTION
The torque value stated is very important to accurate timing. Always use the correct value of
0.6 Nm, as set using T3880609 Timing Torque Limiter. Using an incorrect torque value will
result in incorrect valve timing being set, or damage to the tensioner blade or other valve
train components. Either condition may result in serious damage to the engine, reduced
engine performance, or reduced fuel economy.
Note
The T3880609 Timing Torque Limiter is preset to 0.6 Nm.
13. Using the T3880609 Timing Torque Limiter, tighten the internal screw thread to 0.6 Nm
133
1
cizu
1. T3880651 Timing Chain Tensioner
2. Adaptor
3. T3880609 Timing Torque Limiter
14. Remove and discard the accessible camshaft sprocket fixing. Install a new encapsulated
fixing and tighten to 22 Nm.
15. Remove the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin.
CAUTION
Always check that the T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate has been removed before rotating
the engine. Severe damage will result to the camshafts or T3880650 Camshaft Timing
Plate if engine rotation is attempted with the tool installed.
16. Rotate the engine until the remaining sprocket fixing is accessible.
17. Refit the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin.
18. Remove and discard the remaining camshaft sprocket fixing. Install a new encapsulated
fixing and tighten to 22 Nm.
Note
With the aid of an assistant, hold the camshaft drive chain taut during removal of the
T3880651 Timing Chain Tensioner.
20. Release the tension on the T3880651 Timing Chain Tensioner.
21. Refit the timing chain tensioner, incorporating two new Orings (see Camshaft Drive
Tensioner Installation).
22. To activate the tensioner, rotate the crankshaft anticlockwise two complete turns, using the
fixing fitted to the end of the crankshaft. Stop rotation when number 1 cylinder is at top dead
centre (TDC).
134
Note
Before inserting the timing pin, ensure the slot on the camshaft is aligned with the
23. Insert the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin into the timing holes in the crankcase and
crankshaft.
civb
Note
24. Check that the T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate fits into the camshaft slot (to check that
the camshaft timing has not moved during the removal of the T3880651 Timing Chain
Tensioner.
25. Lubricate the camshaft bearing areas of the camshaft frame with a 50/50 solution of engine
oil and molybdenum disulphide grease.
26. Fit the shims to the valves as noted during removal.
27. Position cylinder one camshaft frame to the cylinder head.
135
5 3
1
2
cizw
1. Camshaft ladder (cylinder 2)
2. Camshaft ladder (cylinder 1
3. Shims (cylinder 2 inlet)
4. Shims (cylinder1 inlet)
5. Shims (cylinder 2 exhaust)
6. Shims (cylinder 1 exhaust)
28. Remove the T3880650 Camshaft Timing Plate.
29. Remove the T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin.
30. Lubricate the threads of the camshaft frame fixings with clean engine oil.
31. Fit the rocker shafts with the dot marks facing upwards and toward the camshaft drive gear.
32. Fit the inlet and exhaust rocker shafts to cylinder number one as shown below. Do not fully
tighten at this stage.
33. Fingertighten the fixings until the under head areas are in contact with the camshaft frame.
2
cja b
136
1. Fixings (inlet rocker shaft)
2. Fixings (exhaust rocker shaft)
3. Dot mark
34. Remove the fixing and rocker shaft from cylinder number two camshaft frame.
35. Lubricate the threads of the camshaft frame fixings with clean engine oil.
Note
The rocker shaft must be fitted with the dot marks facing upwards and toward the
camshaft drive gear.
36. Fit the inlet and exhaust rockers and shafts to cylinder number two. Do not fully tighten at
this stage.
1
2 2
cizz
1. Dot mark
2. Rocker shaft
37. Tighten the fixings hand tight until the rocker shafts are in contact with the camshaft frame.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the camshaft frame, always ensure as many camshaft lobes as possible
are facing away from the rocker shaft. This will reduce stress on the camshaft frame during
assembly. Damage to the camshaft frame will result in replacement of the cylinder head.
38. In the sequence shown below,
Tighten cylinder one camshaft frame fixings, until the camshaft frames are in full contact
with the cylinder head. Tighten the fixings to 10 Nm.
137
3
1
4
2
cja h
Cylinder One Camshaft Frame Tightening Sequence
Tighten cylinder two camshaft frame fixings, until the camshaft frames are in full contact
with the cylinder head. Tighten the fixings to 10 Nm.
1
3
4 2
cja h
Cylinder Two Camshaft Frame Tightening Sequence
CAUTION
If any components have been renewed, the valve clearances must be checked and
adjusted. Running with incorrectly adjusted valve clearances may cause excess engine
noise, rough running and engine damage.
39. Check all of the valve clearances and adjust as necessary until the correct clearances are
138
achieved (see Valve Clearance Adjustment).
Refit the immobiliser/TPMS control module (see Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module
Installation).
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head Removal
139
Cylinder Head Removal
WARNING
Remove the camshaft (see Camshaft Removal).
1. Noting their position and the thickness of the shims, remove all eight shims from the
cylinder head.
2. Progressively release the cylinder head bolts in the order shown below.
3 1
5 8
7 6
2 4
cja m
Cylinder Head Bolt Release Sequence
3. Remove the cylinder head bolts, retain the washers and discard the cylinder head bolts.
Note
If necessary, lightly tap the cylinder head with a softfaced mallet to break the gasket
seal.
4. Remove the cylinder head from the crankcase.
5. Remove and discard the cylinder head gasket.
6. Using T3880308 Cylinder Barrel Clamps and two of the cylinder head bolts, hold the
cylinder barrel in position.
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head Removal
140
cizn
1. Cylinder head bolts
2. T3880308 Cylinder Barrel Clamps
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head Inspection
141
Cylinder Head Inspection
1. Thoroughly clean the surface of the cylinder head and check for damage and/or pitting of
the combustion chambers.
2. Using a straight edge and feeler gauges, check the cylinder head face for warp, which could
lead to gasket failure. Replace the cylinder head if warped beyond the flatness limit.
1
2
3
cizq
1. Cylinder head
2. Straight edge
3. Feeler gauges
3. For specifications refer to (Cylinder Head and Valves).
4. Inspect the valve guides for damage or wear.
5. If a valve guide is found to be worn beyond the service limit, the complete cylinder head
must be renewed.
6. For specifications refer to (Cylinder Head and Valves).
7. Check the camshaft drive chain rubbing blades. Renew if worn or damaged.
CAUTION
Ensure all traces of fluid (coolant, oil etc.) are removed from the threaded holes in the
crankcase. Should any fluid remain in any of the threaded holes, severe crankcase damage
could result from hydraulic locking of head bolts on assembly of the engine.
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head Installation
142
Cylinder Head Installation
1. Thoroughly clean the upper faces of the cylinder barrel.
2. Refit the camshaft drive chain rubbing blade (see Camshaft Drive Chain Rubbing Blade
Installation).
3. Ensure that both cylinder head dowels are correctly located in the cylinder barrel.
4. Position a new cylinder head gasket to the cylinder barrel, ensuring the gasket is fitted with
the lettering uppermost and to the rear of the engine.
cja n
1. Head gasket markings
5. Position the cylinder head over the camshaft drive chain rubbing blade and locate it onto the
dowels.
6. Position the washers onto the new cylinder head bolts and lubricate the bolt threads with
clean engine oil.
CAUTION
Use the correct procedure to tighten the cylinder head bolts carefully following the three
stage procedure below. This will ensure the longterm reliability of the cylinder head gasket.
Failure to follow the correct tightening procedure or reuse of a single replacement cylinder
head bolt may lead to engine damage and premature failure of the cylinder head gasket.
7. In the following sequence, tighten the new cylinder head bolts in three stages as follows:
Tighten the bolts to 20 Nm.
Tighten the bolts to 30 Nm.
Tighten the bolts through a further 150° using T3880105 Torque Angle Gauge or similar to
measure the torqueangle.
5/7/2017 Cylinder Head Installation
143
3 1
5 8
7 6
2 4
cja m
Tightening Sequence
8. Lubricate the valve shims with a 50/50 solution of molybdenum disulphide grease and
engine oil, then refit them to their original locations in the cylinder head.
Refit the camshaft (see Camshaft Installation).
Check and adjust the valve clearances (see Valve Clearance Adjustment).
Start the engine and allow it to idle while checking for air, oil, coolant and exhaust leaks.
Rectify as necessary.
5/7/2017 Valves and Valve Stem Seals Removal
144
Valves and Valve Stem Seals Removal
1. Remove each valve from the head using a valve spring compressor. The compressor must
act on the valve spring retainer to allow removal of the valve collets.
Valve removal
2. Once the collets are released, remove the following items:
Valve spring retainer
Valve spring
Valve spring base
Valve stem oil seal
Valve (deburr before removal).
ca rr
5/7/2017 Valves and Valve Stem Seals Removal
1. Valve stem seal
145
Note
Ensure the inlet and exhaust valve components do not become mixed.
1
2
4
5
ccrx 6
1. Collets
2. Valve spring retainer
3. Valve spring
4. Valve spring base
5. Valve stem oil seal
6. Valve
5/7/2017 Valves and Valve Stem Seals Installation
146
Valves and Valve Stem Seals Installation
1. Lubricate the valve stems with a 50/50 solution of engine oil and molybdenum disulphide
grease.
2. Install the valve into the valve guide and refit the spring base to the valve spring recess in
the head.
3. Fit the valve stem seal over the valve stem and, using a suitable tool, press down fully until
the seal is correctly seated over the valve guide.
Note
During fitment of the valve stem seal, two distinctly different degrees of resistance
will be noted when the seal is correctly fitted.
Firstly, press the seal down the valve stem until the lower side of the seal comes into
contact with the valve guide. Greater resistance is felt at this contact point and
further gentle pressure is then required to locate the seal over the top end of the
valve guide.
On application of this pressure, the seal can be felt to positively locate over the top
face of the valve guide. Once correctly positioned, the seal cannot be pushed down
any further.
CAUTION
Incorrect fitment of the valve stem oil seals could lead to high oil consumption and blue
smoke emissions from the exhaust system. Do not use excessive force in fitting the seal as
this may break the seal ring.
1. Install the valve spring over the valve stem. Ensure the close wound, colour coded ends of
the springs are fitted downwards (towards the piston).
2. Fit the valve spring retainer.
3. Compress the valve spring ensuring that the spring is compressed squarely to prevent
damage to the valve stem and cylinder head.
4. Fit the valve collets ensuring correct collet location in the spring retainer and valve as the
spring compressor is released.
CAUTION
Always check for correct location of the valve collets during and after assembly. If not fitted
correctly, the collets may become dislodged when the engine is running allowing the valves
to contact the pistons. Any such valve to piston contact will cause severe engine damage.
Valve Face Inspection
Remove any carbon buildup from the valve head area. Examine the valve seat face, checking
in particular for signs of cracking or pitting.
Valve Stems
If a valve stem is found to be worn beyond the service limit, the valve must be renewed.
Refer to Cylinder Head and Valves.
5/7/2017 Exploded View Barrels and Pistons
147
Exploded View Barrels and Pistons
5/7/2017 Barrels Removal
148
Barrels Removal
WARNING
Remove the camshaft cover (see page Camshaft Cover Removal).
Remove the cylinder head (see Cylinder Head Removal).
1. Clean the area around the barrel base gasket joint to prevent dirt falling into the crankcase
when the barrels are removed.
2. Ensure the pistons are level with each other then break the seal of the base gasket joint.
CAUTION
Do not strike or lever against the barrel cooling fins to break the seal as the fins are easily
damaged.
Note
Secure the camshaft drive chain to ensure that it does not fall into the crankcase
during removal of the barrels.
CAUTION
Support the pistons as the barrels are removed to prevent piston damage.
3. Lift off the barrels and recover the locating dowels.
5/7/2017 Barrels Removal
149
ciyg 1
1. Locating dowels
4. Remove and discard the base gasket.
5/7/2017 Barrels Inspection
150
Barrels Inspection
1. The cylinder barrels are not measurable in service, (see Piston).
5/7/2017 Barrels Installation
151
Barrels Installation
1. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces of the crankcase and barrels taking care not to
damage the mating surfaces.
2. Fit a new base gasket and refit the locating dowels as noted during removal.
3. Using suitable spacers to support the pistons whilst preventing contact with the crankcase,
rotate the crankshaft to position the pistons level with each other.
1200 cc 10mm 900 cc 12.5mm
2
150mm 150mm
25mm 25mm
ciyu
1. Pistons
2. Spacer
3. Crankcase
CAUTION
Do not allow the pistons to fall against the crankcase when turning the engine. Piston and/or
crankcase damage could occur if the pistons are not supported while turning the engine.
4. Ensure the piston ring end gaps are correctly positioned (see Piston Rings Assembly).
Note
Ensure the barrels and pistons are clean prior to installation.
5. Lubricate the piston rings and the cylinder bores with clean engine oil.
CAUTION
Do not allow the full weight of the barrels to rest unsupported on the pistons. Failure to
support the barrels may result in piston ring breakage.
152
CAUTION
Do not force the pistons into their bores. The base of each bore is chamfered to ease
installation and excess force should not be needed. If either piston jams, lift the barrels
slightly and check the rings are correctly located into their grooves before continuing. The
use of force may result in piston ring breakage.
6. With the aid of an assistant, ease the barrels carefully over the pistons whilst guiding the
piston rings into the base of the cylinder bores.
3
1
ciyv
1. Piston
2. Barrel
3. Spacer
7. Slide the barrels fully down, remove the spacers and locate on the dowels.
9. Refit the camshafts (see page Camshaft Installation).
11. Remove T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin from the crankcase.
Refit the alternator stator (see Alternator Stator Installation).
Refit the alternator cover to the engine (see Alternator Cover Installation).
153
5/7/2017 Piston Rings Removal
154
Piston Rings Removal
CAUTION
Do not expand the piston rings any more than is necessary to allow them to be removed
from the piston. The rings are brittle and will break if expanded too much.
1. Ease the top compression ring out of its groove and remove it from the top of the piston.
2. Remove the second compression ring in the same way.
Note
The top and second compression rings are different and are not interchangeable (see
Piston Rings Assembly).
Piston rings must be removed from the piston using hand pressure only. Do not
overextend the piston rings during removal.
If the piston rings are to be reused, note the orientation of the oil control rings prior
to removal.
3. Remove the oil control rings and expanders.
Note
If the piston rings are to be reused, keep them with their respective piston to ensure
they are refitted in their original locations.
5/7/2017 Piston Ring to Groove Clearance
155
Piston Ring to Groove Clearance
Note
Prior to removing the rings, check the ringto groove clearance of each compression
ring.
1. With the piston rings correctly installed on the piston, check the ringtogroove clearance of
each compression ring, using a feeler gauge.
capg
Piston RingtoGroove Clearance Check
2. When checking the piston ring to groove clearance, always refer to the specifications table
(see Piston).
Note
If the ringtogroove clearance is too large, replace the piston rings with a new set.
If the gap remains too large with new piston rings, the piston must also be replaced.
If the gap is too small, check the piston ring grooves closely for distortion, replacing
the piston as necessary. Do not file the ring grooves.
5/7/2017 Piston Ring End Gap
156
Piston Ring End Gap
1. Check each piston ring end gap as follows.
Note
The piston ring end gap must be measured in the cylinder bore to which the piston
ring will be fitted to on installation.
Ensure all piston rings are fitted in their original locations (if original rings are being
reused) or to the piston/bore which the end gaps were checked (if new rings are
being installed).
2.
Position the piston ring into the top of the cylinder bore.
Using the piston crown, push the piston ring down into the bore (the piston will keep the
piston ring square) until the third groove of the piston is level with the top of the bore.
Remove the piston and measure the gap between the ends of the piston ring, using a feeler
gauge.
T908.04.03
1. Checking piston ring end gap
3. When checking the piston ring end gap, always refer to the specifications table (see Piston).
Note
If the end gap is too large, replace the piston rings with a new set.
If the gap remains too large with new piston rings, both the pistons and barrels must
be replaced.
If the gap is too small, check the cylinder bore for distortion, replacing as necessary.
Do not file the piston rings.
4. Repeat the procedure for the remaining piston rings.
5/7/2017 Piston Rings Assembly
157
Piston Rings Assembly
1. Ensure the piston ring grooves are clean.
Note
Ensure all piston rings are fitted in their original locations (if original rings are being
reused) or to the piston/bore which the end gaps were checked (if new rings are
being fitted).
CAUTION
Do not expand the piston rings any more than is necessary to allow them to be installed on
the piston. The rings are brittle and will break if expanded too much.
2. Fit the oil control ring expander to the piston then install the upper and lower control rings
(the oil control rings are both the same and can be fitted either way up).
3. Fit the second compression ring carefully to the piston, ensuring its 2T mark is facing
upwards.
4. Fit the top compression ring to the piston ensuring its 1T mark is facing upwards.
Note
Ensure the second and top compression rings are correctly installed.
The second and top compression rings are different and are not interchangeable.
The top ring can be identified by the chamfer on its upper inside edge.
The second ring has no chamfer.
Piston Ring Identification
5. Ensure all piston rings move freely in their grooves.
6. Position the piston ring end gaps as follows (piston viewed from above, triangular mark
facing forwards).
5/7/2017 Piston Rings Assembly
158
1
2
1 3
3
4
5
caqj_4
2 5
Piston Ring End Gap Locations
1. Top ring
2. Second ring
3. First steel oil control ring
4. Oil control ring expander
5. Second steel oil control ring
Note
The top compression ring gap should be in the 12 o'clock position.
The second compression ring gap should be in the 6 o'clock position.
The first oil control ring gap should be in the 12 o'clock position.
The second oil control ring gap should be in the 6 o'clock position.
The oil control ring expander gap should be in the 7 o'clock position.
5/7/2017 Piston Removal
159
Piston Removal
WARNING
Remove the cylinder barrel (see Barrels Removal).
Note
If both pistons are being removed, mark each piston to ensure it is refitted in its
original location.
1. Remove and discard the gudgeon pin circlip from one side of the piston.
CAUTION
If a circlip is dropped into the crankcase, it must be recovered before the crankshaft is
rotated. Failure to do so will result in serious engine damage.
T908_6
1. Circlip
2. Remove the gudgeon pin by pushing the pin through the piston and connecting rod toward
the side from which the circlip was removed.
CAUTION
5/7/2017 Piston Removal
160
Never force the gudgeon pin through the piston. This may cause damage to the piston which
may also damage the cylinder barrel when assembled.
Note
If the gudgeon pin is found to be tight in the piston, check the piston for a witness
mark caused by the circlip. Carefully remove the mark to allow the pin to be removed.
3. Remove the remaining circlip from the piston and discard it.
4. Remove the piston rings.
Note
The rings may be removed using a proprietary piston ring expander tool or, if a tool
is not available, carefully spread the ring opening using thumb pressure then push
up on the opposite side of the ring to remove it from the piston.
5/7/2017 Piston Wear Check
161
Piston Wear Check
1. Remove any carbon buildup from the piston crown. Inspect the piston crown for signs of
pitting and check the piston skirt and ring grooves for signs of wear or scuffing. If any sign of
damage is found, renew the piston.
2. Measure the piston outside diameter 10 mm +/ 3 mm from the bottom of the piston and at
90° to the direction of the gudgeon pin.
1. Piston outside diameter
2. Measurement point
3. Always refer to the specifications table (see Piston).
4. Replace the piston and rings if outside the specified limit.
5/7/2017 Piston Installation
162
Piston Installation
1. Fit a new circlip to the inside of the piston. Ensure the circlip is correctly located in the
piston groove.
WARNING
Failure to use new gudgeon pin circlips could allow the pin to detach from the piston. This
could seize the engine resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
caxu
1. Circlip Fitment
2. Lubricate the connecting rod smallend and gudgeon pin with clean engine oil.
3. Align the piston with the connecting rod, ensuring the triangular mark on the piston crown is
facing towards the front of the engine.
Note
If the original pistons are being refitted, ensure they are fitted in their original
locations.
4. Insert the gudgeon pin into the piston and push it fully into position.
163
1
T908_7
Gudgeon Pin
5. Secure the gudgeon pin in position with the remaining new circlip. Ensure the circlip is
correctly located in the piston groove.
CAUTION
If a circlip is dropped into the crankcase, it must be recovered before the crankshaft is
rotated. Failure to do so will result in serious engine damage.
T908_6
1. Circlip
164
CAUTION
Do not allow the pistons to fall against the crankcase when turning the engine. Piston and/or
crankcase damage could occur if the pistons are not supported while turning the engine.
6. Install the remaining piston.
Refit the barrels (see Barrels Installation).
Refit the cylinder head (see Cylinder Head Installation).
Refit the alternator stator (see Alternator Rotor Installation).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Clutch Controls
165
Exploded View – Clutch Controls
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Clutch
166
Exploded View – Clutch
5/7/2017 Clutch Cable Removal
167
Clutch Cable Removal
WARNING
1. From the left hand side of the headstock, remove the cable retaining bracket and discard its
fixings.
1
ciwq
1. Clutch cable
2. Fixings
2. Loosen the cable lock nut, release the adjuster nut adjacent to the clutch cover to allow
maximum play in the cable.
168
3 1
2
ciwp
1. Clutch cable
2. Adjuster nut
3. Lock nut
3. Detach the inner clutch cable from the boss on the clutch actuating arm.
cixi
1. Clutch cable
2. Boss
4. Disconnect the cable retaining guides from the frame down tube.
5. Align the slots in the lever adjuster and lock nut.
169
2
cinn_9
1. Lock nut
2. Lever adjuster
6. Pull in the clutch lever and turn the inner cable adjuster anticlockwise through the lock nut,
until the cable can be detached from the lever.
gaau_1
1. Cable adjuster/lever bracket slots
2. Cable release point
Note
To ensure the same route can be followed on installation, tie a length of string to one
end while pulling the cable through from the other. When installing the new cable, tie
the string to one end of the cable and use it to guide the new cable into position.
7. Noting the cable routing, remove the cable from the motorcycle
170
5/7/2017 Clutch Cable Inspection
171
Clutch Cable Inspection
1. Check the inner cable for free movement through the outer cable.
2. Examine the inner cable for frayed strands.
3. Examine the two inner cable nipples for signs of looseness and damage. Replace the cable
if necessary.
5/7/2017 Clutch Cable Installation
172
Clutch Cable Installation
WARNING
1. Position the cable to the motorcycle following the same routing as noted during removal.
2. Attach the inner cable to the boss on the clutch actuating arm using a reversal of the
removal process.
3. Refit the outer cable to the adjuster bracket at the clutch cover end.
3 1
2
ciwp
1. Clutch cable
2. Adjuster nut
3. Lock nut
4. Refit the cable retaining guides to the frame down tube.
5. Refit the cable retaining bracket to the headstock and using new fixings tighten to 1.5 Nm.
6. Set the lever adjuster to a point where an equal adjustment is possible in both directions.
7. Set the adjuster bracket at the clutch cover end to give a preliminary setting of 2 3 mm of
free play as measured at the lever.
8. Operate the clutch lever several times and recheck the amount of free play present.
9. Tighten the clutch adjuster bracket lock nut at the clutch cover end to 3 Nm.
10. Set the final adjustment of the cable to give 1 2 mm of free play at the lever by turning the
adjuster nut and lock nut at the lever end. Secure the setting with the knurled lock nut.
5/7/2017 Clutch Cable Installation
173
1
cinn
1. Clutch lever
2. Correct setting, 1 2 mm
5/7/2017 Clutch Removal
174
Clutch Removal
WARNING
Remove the clutch cover (see Clutch Cover Removal).
Note
The spring seats will remain seated in the pressure plate during removal.
1. Release the 3 fixings, remove the stopper plate, springs and pressure plate.
OU
T
3
2
1. Fixings
2. Stopper plate
3. Springs
4. Spring seats
5. Pressure Plate
2. Remove the pull rod and bearing from the clutch pressure plate.
175
2
1
1. Pull rod
2. Bearing
3. Clutch pressure plate
3. Remove the clutch plates, antijudder seat washers and springs, noting the orientation of
the each component as they are removed.
Note
The two outermost and the inner friction plate are different to the remainder and must
not be fitted in any other position.
Refer to Friction Plate Inspection for details of clutch friction plate inspection.
4. Engage second gear and lock the inner and outer clutch drums together using T3880307
Clutch Antirotation Jig as shown below.
ciwx
1. T3880307 Clutch Antirotation Jig
176
5. Release the clutch centre nut.
6. Remove the centre nut, Belleville washer, plain washer, clutch inner drum and thrust
washer.
7. Discard both the Belleville washer and plain washer.
CAUTION
Do not remove the bearing sleeve from the shaft.
Removing the bearing sleeve will allow the oil pump drive chain to become dislodged.
If the oil pump drive chain becomes dislodged the oil pump will not operate causing severe
engine damage.
8. Slide the bearing sleeve forward and backwards a maximum of 10 mm to allow the needle
roller bearing to become dislodged.
9. Remove the needle roller bearing from the clutch outer drum.
3
cixd
1. Bearing sleeve
2. Needle roller bearing
3. Shaft
10. Slide the clutch outer drum away from the gearbox input shaft.
5/7/2017 Friction Plate Inspection
177
Friction Plate Inspection
Thickness
Note
If any friction plate thickness is outside the service limit, replace the friction plates as
a set.
1. Measure the thickness of the friction plate.
cbvy
1. Clutch friction plate
2. For the clutch friction plate thickness, refer to Clutch and Primary Drive.
5/7/2017 Steel Plate Inspection
178
Steel Plate Inspection
Bend/warp
Check all plates for bend and warp as follows:
1. Place the plate being checked on a clean surface plate and attempt to pass a feeler gauge
of the maximum service limit thickness between the steel plate and surface plate. If the
feeler gauge can be passed beneath the steel plate at any point, renew the plates as a set.
2 1
cbvz
1. Steel plate
2. Feeler gauge
3. Surface plate
2. For specifications refer toClutch and Primary Drive.
5/7/2017 Clutch Pack Height
179
Clutch Pack Height
Note
The clutch pack height is critical for a smooth operation of the transmission and
must be measured prior to installation of new clutch plates.
When building a new clutch pack, its height must be correct. To achieve this, build the new
clutch pack using the following:
2 x new outer friction plates
5 x new friction plates
1 x new inner friction plate
6 x steel plates, 2.0 mm thick
1 x outer steel plate, 2.0 mm thick.
1. Arrange the new friction and new steel plates in a stack as shown below.
1. Outer friction plates
2. Friction plates
3. Inner friction plate
4. Steel plate, 2.0 mm thickness
5. Outer steel plate, 2.0 mm thickness
2. Place the assembled clutch pack on a flat surface and measure its height as shown below.
180
T0943_1
1. Clutch pack height
3. The clutch pack height for this clutch assembly is shown in the specification table see
Clutch and Primary Drive.
4. If the clutch pack is too high, continue from step 5, omit step 6 then continue from step 7. If
the clutch pack is too low, continue from step 6.
Note
1.6 mm and 2.3 mm steel plates are available, refer to the Parts Catalogue for part
numbers.
No more than one 1.6 mm thick steel plate is to be used in the clutch pack.
5. If the clutch pack height is too high, replace the 2.0 mm steel plate indicated below with a
new 1.6 mm steel plate.
1. 2.0 mm steel plate to be replaced
181
Note
No more than one 2.3 mm thick steel plate is to be used in the clutch pack.
6. If the clutch pack height is too low, replace the 2.0 mm steel plate indicated below with a
new 2.3 mm steel plate.
1. 2.0 mm steel plate to be replaced
7. Recheck the clutch pack height as described previously.
5/7/2017 Clutch Installation
182
Clutch Installation
WARNING
CAUTION
Ensure the oil pump drive chain is engaged with the oil pump drive gears. Running the
engine without drive to the oil pump will stop oil supply to the engine. Running the engine
without oil pressure will cause severe engine damage.
1. Visually check the oil pump drive chain is engaged with the drive gears.
1
cixe
1. Oil pump drive sprocket
2. Oil pump drive chain
3. Pump sprocket
2. Position the clutch outer drum assembly to the input shaft and align the oil pump sprocket
drive pegs with the corresponding holes in the rear of the clutch outer drum.
183
3 2
1
cixf
1. Clutch outer drum (rear view)
2. Oil pump sprocket drive pegs
3. Clutch outer drum sprocket drive holes
3. While holding the clutch outer drum in position and ensuring correct engagement with the oil
pump drive, refit the bearing.
3
ciwy
1. Outer drum
2. Bearing sleeve
Note
184
When the bearing and sleeve are correctly fitted, it will be a flush fit with the clutch
drum face.
4. Fit the thrust washer to the shaft.
5. Fit the clutch inner drum.
6. Fit the flat washer, a new Belleville washer (OUT mark facing outwards), and a new centre
nut.
6 5 4 1
3 2
cixc
1. Shaft
2. Thrust washer
3. Clutch inner drum
4. Flat washer
5. Belleville Washer OUT Mark
6. Centre nut
7. Using T3880307 Clutch Antirotation Jig, lock the inner and outer drums together. Depress
the rear brake pedal to prevent the engine rotating, and tighten the centre nut to 98 Nm.
8. Remove T3880307 Clutch Antirotation Jig.
185
1
ciwx
1. T3880307 Clutch Antirotation Jig
9. Disengage second gear and check for free rotation of the clutch inner drum.
10. Using a suitable pin punch, stake the nut to the shaft.
Note
Always refer to the Clutch Pack Height prior to fitting new clutch plates to the
motorcycle.
11. Coat all clutch friction plates in clean engine oil before fitting the friction plates, steel plates,
antijudder spring and antijudder seat washer to the clutch basket in the same order and
orientation as noted during removal.
Note
The inner and the two outermost friction plates are different to the other friction
plates. They must be fitted in their noted positions.
The outer steel plate is different to the other plates. It must be fitted in its noted
position.
186
1
3
4 5
6
5
8
5
9
ciww
1. Clutch outer drum
2. Clutch inner drum
3. Antijudder seat washer
4. Antijudder spring
5. Inner/outer friction plate
6. Friction plates
7. Steel plates
8. Steel plate (outer)
9. Pressure plate
12. Refit the clutch pull rod.
13. Fit the pressure plate. Ensure that the spring seats are fitted into the pressure plate as
noted for removal.
Note
Note that the stopper plate has an OUT mark. This must face outwards when fitted.
There are spring seats located in the pressure plate. Ensure the seats are in the
pressure plate prior to fitting the springs.
14. Fit the springs and stopper plate, ensure that the OUT mark on the stopper plate is facing
outwards. Secure with the fixings and tighten to 10 Nm.
187
5
OU
T
3
2
1. Fixings
2. Stopper plate
3. Springs
4. Spring seats
5. Pressure plate
Refit the clutch cover (see Clutch Cover Installation).
Refit the clutch cable (see Clutch Cable Installation).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Crankshaft and Connecting Rod
188
Exploded View – Crankshaft and Connecting Rod
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Crankcase
189
Exploded View – Crankcase
5/7/2017 Crankcase
190
Crankcase
WARNING
The following procedures often require lifting of heavy components. To avoid injury, always
lift heavy components with a hoist or block and tackle and never attempt to manually lift
items that are too heavy. Injury may result from failure to use the correct lifting equipment.
CAUTION
The upper and lower crankcases are machined as a matched set and must never be
assembled to nonmatching halves. Doing so will cause seizure of the engine.
Note
The crankcase halves may be separated without removing the cylinder head.
If the big end fixings have been loosened or removed, new fixings must be installed.
CAUTION
During crankcase assembly, ensure the two piston cooling jets are reinstalled. If the piston
cooling jets are omitted, oil pressure will be reduced. Running the engine with low oil
pressure will cause severe engine damage.
5/7/2017 Crankcase Removal
191
Crankcase Removal
WARNING
Remove the sump (see Sump Removal).
Remove the clutch (see Clutch Removal).
Remove the alternator rotor (see Alternator Rotor Removal).
Note
To allow correct fitment of T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin the engine may require
rotating up to seven times.
1. Align the timing holes in the crankcase and camshaft idler gear. Lock in position using
T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin.
ciyy
1. Crankcase
2. Remove the oil and water pump (see Oil and Water Pump Removal).
3. Release the fixing and remove the coolant drain tube, discard the fixing and the Oring.
192
2
1
ciyk
1. Coolant drain tube
2. Fixing
4. Release the lower crankcase fixings noting their positions in the sequence shown below.
193
16 15
17
18
20 19
1 3
5 7
6 8
2 4
10
24
12 14
9
11
13 23
22 21
ciyl
Crankcase Fixing Release Sequence
CAUTION
Do not use levers to separate the upper and lower sections of the crankcase as damage to
the crankcases could result.
Note
Always check that all fixings have been released before attempting to separate the
crankcases.
5. Separate the lower crankcase from the upper crankcase noting the position of the three
location dowels.
194
1
1
2
ciyi
1. Dowels
2. Upper crankcase
6. For removal of the:
Front balancer shaft, (see Front Balancer Shaft Removal),
Rear balancer shaft, (see Rear Balancer Shaft Removal),
Crankshaft, (see Crankshaft Removal).
Selector forks and drum (see Selector Forks and Drum Removal).
Coolant manifold, (see Coolant Manifold Removal).
Breather plate, (see Breather Plate Removal).
5/7/2017 Crankcase Assembly
195
Crankcase Assembly
1. Use high flashpoint solvent to clean the crankcase mating faces. Wipe the surfaces clean
with a lintfree cloth.
2. Position the transmission shafts and the selector drum in the neutral position.
3. Ensure that the three dowels are located in position in the upper crankcase.
1
2
ciyi
1. Dowels
2. Upper crankcase
4. Install and lubricate the crankshaft main bearing shells with clean engine oil (see page
Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection before
proceeding).
5. Install and lubricate the front balancer shaft with clean engine oil (see Front Balancer Shaft
Installation).
6. Install and lubricate the rear balancer shaft with clean engine oil (see Rear Balancer Shaft
Installation).
7. Lubricate the crankshaft journals with clean engine oil.
8. Apply a 2 mm (+/0.5 mm) bead of silicone sealant to the lower crankcase mating faces,
(during manufacture, ThreeBond 1216E is used).
196
Sealer Areas
CAUTION
Do not use excessive amounts of sealer. The extra sealer may become dislodged and could
block the oil passages in the crankcases, causing severe engine damage.
9. Position the lower crankcase to the upper crankcase. An assistant may be required to
support the crankcase during alignment.
Note
The rear balancer shaft will rotate one tooth when the upper and lower crankcase are
joined.
10. To check that the balancer shaft is correctly timed to the crankshaft proceed as follows:
11. Check that the dot mark on the rear balancer shaft gear is aligned with the tab on the
crankcase, as shown below.
197
1
cjcm
1. Lower crankcase identification mark
2. Rear balancer shaft dot mark
12. Locate the fixings into their respective positions in the lower crankcase as noted during
removal and hand tighten.
13. Tighten the crankcase fixings as follows:
Note
The crankcase fixings are tightened in stages.
CAUTION
Failure to follow the correct tightening sequence may result in permanent crankcase
damage.
Stage 1 All Fixings
14. In the sequence shown below:
Tighten all of the crankcase fixings to 10 Nm.
198
16 15
17
18
20 19
1 3
5 7
6 8
2 4
10
24
12 14
9
11
13 23
22 21
ciyl
All Fixings Tightening Sequence
Stage 2
Loosen fixings 1 to 8. through 140°, using T3880105 Torque Angle Gauge or similar to
measure the torqueangle.
199
16 15
17
18
20 19
1 3
5 7
6 8
2 4
10
24
12 14
9
11
13 23
22 21
ciyl
Fixings 1 to 8 Loosening Sequence
Stage 3
Tighten fixings 1 to 8 to 10 Nm.
200
16 15
17
18
20 19
1 3
5 7
6 8
2 4
10
24
12 14
9
11
13 23
22 21
ciyl
Fixings 1 to 8 Tightening Sequence
Tighten fixings 1 to 8 through a further 75° using T3880105 Torque Angle Gauge or similar
to measure the torqueangle.
201
16 15
17
18
20 19
1 3
5 7
6 8
2 4
10
24
12 14
9
11
13 23
22 21
ciyl
Stage 4
202
16 15
17
18
20 19
1 3
5 7
6 8
2 4
10
24
12 14
9
11
13 23
22 21
ciyl
Stage 5
203
16 15
17
18
20 19
1 3
5 7
6 8
2 4
10
24
12 14
9
11
13 23
22 21
ciyl
Note
Prior to fitting an Oring coat the surfaces with a commercially available petroleum
jelly.
20. Refit the breather drain tube, fit a new Oring, tighten the new fixing to 9 Nm.
204
2
1
ciyk
1. Breather drain tube
2. Fixing
Refit the oil and water pump (see Oil and Water Pump Installation).
Refit the sump (see Sump Installation).
Refit the alternator (see Alternator Rotor Installation).
Refit the clutch (see Clutch Installation).
Refit the gear position sensor (see Gear Position Sensor Installation).
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Removal
205
Crankshaft Removal
WARNING
Separate the lower crankcase from the upper crankcase (see Crankcase Removal).
Remove the connecting rod big end caps and discard the bolts. (see Connecting Rods
Removal).
Note
Support the connecting rods during crankshaft removal to prevent damage to the
rods, liners and upper crankcase.
1. Remove the crankshaft from the upper crankcase.
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Installation
206
Crankshaft Installation
CAUTION
Always check the main bearing journal clearance (see Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal
Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection), before final assembly of the crankshaft.
Failure to correctly select crankshaft bearings will result in severe engine damage.
1. Select and fit new main and big end bearing shells using the selection processes detailed in
Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection.
2. Lubricate all of the bearings with clean engine oil.
3. Ensure that the crankshaft is clean, and that the oil ways within the crankshaft are clean,
free from blockages and debris.
CAUTION
The crankshaft to idler gear timing will be lost when the crankshaft is removed. Do not refit
the crankshaft without first setting the crankshaft to idler gear timing. Incorrect idler gear
timing will result in incorrect camshaft timing. Rotating or attempting to start an engine with
incorrectly adjusted camshaft timing will result in severe engine damage.
4. Install the crankshaft to the upper crankcase, ensuring the crankshaft drive gear is correctly
timed to the balancer shafts and idler gear (see Front Balancer Shaft Installation).
5. Align the connecting rod big ends to the crankshaft pins.
6. Fit, and in the correct sequence, tighten the big end caps. (see Connecting Rod
Installation).
7. Assemble the crankcases (see page Crankcase Assembly).
Refit the cylinder barrels (see Barrels Installation).
Refit the cylinder head (see Cylinder Head Installation).
starting.
Inspection).
5/7/2017 Connecting Rods Removal
207
Connecting Rods Removal
Note
The connecting rods and caps are etchmarked on one side to identify their correct
orientation. However, the cylinder from which they are individually removed should
also be identified, using a paint marker or similar.
Remove the cylinder barrel (see Barrels Removal).
Remove and discard the connecting rod bolts.
2
1
3
ciyh
1. Connecting rod bolts
2. Connecting rod cap
3. Connecting rod
1. Collect the connecting rod caps.
2. Collect the piston and connecting rod.
3. Label the assembly to identify the cylinder from which it was removed.
5/7/2017 Connecting Rod Installation
208
Connecting Rod Installation
Note
The big end bolts are treated with an antirust solution, which must not be removed.
1. Clean the connecting rod with high flashpoint solvent.
2. Fit the piston and connecting rod assemblies to the crankshaft.
3. Select and fit the selected big end bearing shells to the connecting rods and big end caps
(see Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection).
WARNING
Always renew the big end bolts. The bolts are torqued near to their yield point when first
installed and are severely weakened if reused. Reusing the original bolts may cause bolt
breakage resulting in engine damage, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
WARNING
The torque characteristics of the connecting rod bolts are sensitive to the rate at which they
are tightened. If all the torque is applied in one action, the bolts will be stretched beyond
their yield point. This may cause bolt breakage resulting in engine damage, loss of
motorcycle control and an accident.
Note
Prior to fitting the big end bolts lubricate the under head and thread areas of the
bolts with undiluted molybdenum disulphide grease.
4. Fit new bolts to the connecting rods.
5. Tighten the bolts, in two stages as follows:
Tighten to 14 Nm.
Tighten through 210° using T3880105 Torque Angle Gauge or similar.
5/7/2017 Connecting Rod Installation
209
cbxt
T3880105 Torque Angle Gauge
Assemble the crankcases (see Crankcase Assembly).
Refit the cylinder barrel (see Barrels Installation).
5/7/2017 Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection
210
Connecting Rod Big End Journal Checking, Measuring and
Bearing Selection
Using selective bearings compensates for minor differences in crankshaft main bearing journal
and crankcase dimensions. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross
references, refer to the electronic parts catalogue EPC.
1. Measure the bearing and crankshaft journal clearance as follows.
Note
Do not turn the connecting rod and crankshaft during the clearance measurement as
this will damage the Plastigauge. The crankshaft journal clearances are measured
using Plastigauge (Triumph part number 3880150T0301).
2. Remove the bearing cap from the journal to be checked.
3. Wipe the exposed areas of the crankshaft journal, and the bearing face inside the cap.
4. Apply a thin smear of grease to the journal and a small quantity of silicone release agent to
the bearing.
5. Trim a length of the Plastigauge to fit across the journal. Fit the strip to the journal using the
grease to hold the Plastigauge in place.
6. Release the fixings and remove the cap being measured. Using the gauge provided with the
Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed Plastigauge.
Note
The original fixings may be reused for bearing selection. Do not use new fixings as
they may only be used once, even if the single use is related to bearing selection.
7. Lubricate the threads of the fixing and the face of the fixing with molybdenum disulphide
grease. Refit the lower crankcase and tighten the original fixings (see Crankshaft
Installation).
8. Release the fixings and remove the cap being measured.
9. Using the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed Plastigauge.
cfwa
Checking the Big End Bearing/Crankshaft Journal
Clearance
211
10. For specifications refer toCrankshaft.
11. If the clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the diameter of the crankshaft bearing
journal.
Note
If any journal has worn beyond the service limit, the crankshaft must be replaced.
Due to the advanced techniques used during manufacture, the crankshaft cannot be
reground and no oversize bearings are available.
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Note
Minor differences in dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings.
For further information on bearing part number to colour crossreferences, refer to
the EPC.
1. Select the correct bearing shell as follows:
2. Measure and record the diameter of each crankshaft bearing journal.
3. Measure and record each bearing bore diameter (bearings removed, journal caps fitted and
all fixings fully torqued) (see Connecting Rod Installation).
4. Select the correct bearings by matching the information found in the bearing selection chart.
5. Install the new bearings.
Big End Bearing Selection Chart
Shell Colour Connecting rod bore Big end bearing journal
diameter diameter
WHITE 41.000 to 41.009 mm 37.993 to 38.000 mm
RED 41.000 to 41.009 mm 37.984 to 37.992 mm
For instance:
Connecting rod Big End Diameter 37.966
Crankshaft Journal Diameter 41.004
Required Bearing White
Note
Repeat the measurements for all respective journals.
It is normal for the bearings selected to differ from one journal to another.
It is also normal for there to be two options of bearing shell colour. In such cases,
pick the shell size that gives the greater running clearance.
212
WARNING
Always confirm, using the Plastigauge method, that the running clearance is correct before
final assembly. Severe engine damage could result from incorrect clearance resulting in loss
of motorcycle control and an accident.
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and Bearing Selection
213
Crankshaft Main Bearing/Journal Checking, Measuring and
Bearing Selection
Using selective bearings compensates for minor differences in crankshaft main bearing journal
and crankcase dimensions. For further information on bearing part number to colour cross
references, refer to the EPC.
1. Measure the bearing to crankshaft journal clearance as follows.
Note
Do not turn the connecting rods and crankshaft during the clearance measurement
as this will damage the Plastigauge. The crankshaft journal clearances are measured
using Plastigauge (Triumph part number 3880150T0301).
2. Wipe the exposed areas of the crankshaft journals, and the bearing face inside the cap.
3. Apply a thin smear of grease to the journals and a small quantity of silicone release agent to
the bearings.
4. Trim a length of the Plastigauge to fit across each journal. Fit the strip to the journal using
the grease to hold the Plastigauge in position.
Note
The original fixings may be reused for bearing selection. Do not use new fixings as
they may only be used once, even if the single use is related to bearing selection.
5. Lubricate the threads and the face of the fixings with molybdenum disulphide grease. Refit
the crankcase and tighten the original fixings (see Crankcase Assembly).
6. Release the fixings and remove the crankcase.
7. Using the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed Plastigauge.
cdga
Checking the Crankshaft Journal Clearance
8. For specifications refer toCrankshaft.
9. If the clearance exceeds the service limit, measure the diameter of the crankshaft bearing
214
journal.
Note
If any journal has worn beyond the service limit, the crankshaft must be replaced.
Due to the techniques used during manufacture, the crankshaft cannot be reground
and oversize bearings are not available.
Main Bearing Selection
Note
Minor differences in dimensions are compensated for by using selective bearings.
For further information on bearing part number to colour crossreferences, see the
latest parts information.
1. Select the correct bearings as follows:
2. Measure and record the diameter of each crankshaft bearing journal.
3. Measure and record each bearing bore diameter in the crankcase (bearings removed,
journal caps fitted and all fixings fully torqued).
4. Select and install the correct bearings by matching the information found in the main
bearing selection chart.
5. Install the new bearings.
Main Bearing Selection Chart
Shell Colour Crankcase Bore Crankshaft Journal Diameter Running Clearance
Red 46.105 to 46.097 43.099 to 43.092 0.040 to 0.019
Red 46.114 to 46.106 43.108 to 43.100 0.041 to 0.019
Blue 46.114 to 46.106 43.099 to 43.092 0.041 to 0.020
Blue 46.123 to 46.115 43.108 to 43.100 0.042 to 0.020
Green 46.123 to 46.115 43.099 to 43.092 0.042 to 0.021
For instance:
Crankcase Bore 46.099 mm
Crankshaft Journal Diameter 43.095 mm
Required Bearing RED
WARNING
215
Always confirm, using the Plastigauge method, that the running clearance is correct before
final assembly. Severe engine damage could result from incorrect clearance resulting in loss
Note
Repeat the measurements for all respective journals.
It is normal for the bearings selected to differ from one journal to another.
It is also normal for there to be two options of bearing shell colour. In such cases,
pick the shell size that gives the greater running clearance.
5/7/2017 Coolant Manifold Removal
216
Coolant Manifold Removal
WARNING
WARNING
burned.
WARNING
dermatitis. In addition used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which can
1. Remove the input and output shafts.
2. Release the fixings and remove the coolant manifold, discard the fixings and the sealing
ring.
2 1
ciyo
5/7/2017 Coolant Manifold Removal
1. Coolant manifold
217
2. Fixings
5/7/2017 Coolant Manifold Installation
218
Coolant Manifold Installation
1. Fit a new sealing ring to the coolant manifold.
1 3
cizf
1. Coolant manifold
2. Sealing ring
3. Dowel locating holes
2. Position the coolant manifold to the crankcase, ensuring the locating dowels are correctly
positioned.
3. Install new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm in the sequence shown below.
1
5
3
ciyo_1
Tightening sequence
5/7/2017 Coolant Manifold Installation
4. Refit the input and output shafts.
219
starting.
Inspection).
5/7/2017 Breather Plate Removal
220
Breather Plate Removal
WARNING
WARNING
burned.
1. Remove the breather drain tube from the crankcase, discard the fixing and the Oring.
3. Remove the engine oil breather plate and baffle, discard the fixings.
4
5 1
ciyz
1. Oil breather plate
2. Fixings
4. Fixings
5. Oring
5/7/2017 Breather Plate Installation
221
Breather Plate Installation
1. Using new fixings, fit the engine oil breather baffle and tighten to 9 Nm.
Note
Prior to fitting the Oring coat the surfaces with petroleum jelly.
2. Fit a new Oring and install the breather drain tube to the crankcase. Ensure the tube is
correctly installed in the breather housing.
3. Install a new fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
4
5 1
ciyz
1. Oil breather plate
2. Fixings
4. Fixing
5. Oring
starting.
Inspection).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Balancers
222
Exploded View – Balancers
5/7/2017 Introduction
223
Introduction
Two balancer shafts are fitted to the engine, one in front of the crankshaft in the upper
crankcase and one behind it in the lower crankcase. Each balancer has the effect of a pair of
counterbalance weights, which create an equal amount of energy in the opposite direction, and
at the same time as that produced by the crankshaft, pistons and connecting rods. Because the
opposing pulses occur at the same point of crankshaft rotation, and are of an equal magnitude,
a state of equilibrium or balance is reached.
5/7/2017 Rear Balancer Shaft Removal
224
Rear Balancer Shaft Removal
WARNING
Note
The rear dead shaft clamp is marked with the R facing away from the crankcase.
2. Loosen but do not fully remove the dead shaft clamp locking screw,
3. Remove the dead shaft clamp securing screw and washer. Discard the screw, retain the
washer for reuse.
2
5
ciyx
1. Dead shaft clamp
2. Locking screw
3. Securing screw
4. Washer
5. Dead shaft
4. Release the dead shaft screw and washer. Discard the dead shaft screw and retain the
washer.
5/7/2017 Rear Balancer Shaft Removal
225
1
2
ciyw
1. Screw
2. Washer
3. Dead shaft
5. Support the balancer shaft and noting its orientation slide the dead shaft from the
crankcase.
6. Remove the balancer shaft.
7. Remove and discard the Orings from the deadshaft.
1. Deadshaft
2. Orings
5/7/2017 Front Balancer Shaft Removal
226
Front Balancer Shaft Removal
WARNING
Note
The connecting rods and caps should be identified, using a paint mark or similar.
1. Remove and discard the connecting rod bolts.
2
1
3
ciyh
1. Connecting rod bolts
2. Connecting rod cap
3. Connecting rod
2. Remove the crankshaft.
3. Remove the front balancer shaft blanking screw and, discard the washer.
cizb
227
1 2
1. Blanking screw
2. Washer
3. Upper crankcase
Note
The front dead shaft clamp is marked with the F facing away from the crankcase.
4. Loosen but do not fully remove the dead shaft clamp locking screw.
5. Remove the dead shaft clamp securing screw and washer. Discard the screw, retain the
washer for reuse.
5
ciza
1. Dead shaft clamp
2. Locking screw
3. Securing screw
4. Washer
228
5. Dead shaft
6. Support the balancer shaft and noting its orientation slide the dead shaft from the
crankcase.
1
3 2 2
cizd
1. Balancer
2. Dead shaft
3. Dead shaft clamp
7. Remove the balancer shaft.
8. Remove and discard the Orings from the deadshaft.
1. Deadshaft
2. Orings
229
5/7/2017 Balancer shafts Inspection
230
Balancer shafts Inspection
1. Inspect all gears for chipped or missing teeth.
2. Inspect all bearings for signs of seizure and any other damage. Check that all bearings
rotate smoothly and without tight spots.
5/7/2017 Front Balancer Shaft Installation
231
Front Balancer Shaft Installation
WARNING
Note
To ensure a correct relationship, the balancer shaft must be installed in a specific
orientation relative to the crankshaft.
1. Check T3880039 Idler Gear Timing Pin is fully inserted into the idler gear, and that the
camshaft to idler gear timing is correct.
2. Fit a new Oring to the grooves at each end of the deadshaft.
1. Deadshaft
2. Orings
CAUTION
The balancer shaft gear is designed to mesh with the crankshaft gear.
Correct adjustment of the balancer shafts is critical to the performance of the engine and
comfort of the rider.
Failure to correctly adjust the balancer shafts may cause serous engine damage and a poor
rider experience.
3. Lubricate the balancer shaft, needle roller bearings and Orings with clean engine oil.
4. Fit the balancer shaft into the crankcase as noted during removal.
5. Support the balancer shaft and noting its orientation, slide the dead shaft through the
232
balancer shaft and into the upper crankcase.
1
3 2 2
cizd
1. Balancer
2. Dead shaft
3. Dead shaft clamp
6. Position the alignment mark on the dead shaft with the alignment mark on the crankcase.
Note
The static alignment of the balancer shaft will allow for initial starting of the engine.
Final adjustment must be carried out with the engine running and at operating
temperature, see Balancer Shafts Dynamic Adjustment.
1. Alignment mark (Crankcase)
233
2. Alignment mark (Dead shaft)
7. Rotate the balancer shaft until the F and dot mark are visible.
8. Position the peg on T3880811 Front Balancer Timing Tool to the dot mark on the balancer
shaft gear.
9. Allow the balancer shaft to rotate anticlockwise until the flat surface rests against the
machined surface of the crankcase, as shown.
5 2
cize 1
1. Balancer shaft
2. Balancer shaft 'F' (front) mark
3. Balancer shaft alignment mark
4. T3880811 Front Balancer Timing Tool
5. Crankcase
10. Clean the crankshaft, crankshaft bearings and big end bearings with a high flashpoint
solvent.
11. Lubricate the crankshaft and bearings with clean engine oil.
12. Position the connecting rods as noted during removal.
Note
As the crankshaft is lowered into position the balancer shaft will rotate and the
T3880811 Front Balancer Timing Tool will no longer rest against the crankcase.
13. Position the crankshaft to the crankshaft bearings, aligning the timing mark on the
crankshaft with the machined surface of the crankcase.
234
3
2
1
cizc
1. Crankshaft timing mark
2. Balancer gear timing marks
3. T3880811 Front Balancer Timing Tool
14. To check that the balancer shaft is correctly timed to the crankshaft proceed as follows:
The alignment hole in the crankshaft is visible through the hole in the crankcase.
The alignment mark on the balancer shaft is visible through the screw hole in the dead shaft
clamp.
The T3880601 Camshaft Timing Pin can be inserted fully, locking the crankshaft in
position.
3 2
1
cizh
1. Crankshaft
2. Crankshaft dot mark
235
3. Front balancer shaft dot mark
4. Dead shaft clamp
Note
If the balancer shafts timing is incorrect, the procedure must be restarted from the
beginning.
15. Refit the dead shaft clamp and tighten the new securing screw to 10 Nm and then tighten
the dead shaft clamp locking screw to 10 Nm.
5
ciza
1. Dead shaft clamp
2. Locking screw
3. Securing screw
4. Washer
5. Dead shaft
Refit the big end caps to the connecting rods (see Connecting Rod Installation).
Refit the crankcase halves (see Rear Balancer Shaft Installation and Crankcase
Assembly).
5/7/2017 Rear Balancer Shaft Installation
236
Rear Balancer Shaft Installation
1. Fit a new Oring to the grooves at each end of the deadshaft.
1. Deadshaft
2. Orings
2. Lubricate the balancer shaft, needle roller bearings and Orings with clean engine oil.
3. Position the balancer shaft as noted during removal.
4. Fit the deadshaft into the crankcase as noted during removal and insert the balancer shaft.
CAUTION
The balancer shaft gear is designed to mesh with the crankshaft gear.
Correct adjustment of the balancer shafts is critical to the performance of the engine and
comfort of the rider.
Failure to correctly adjust the balancer shafts may cause serous engine damage and a poor
rider experience.
Note
The static alignment of the balancer shaft will allow for initial starting of the engine.
Final adjustment must be carried out with the engine running and at operating
temperature, see Balancer Shafts Dynamic Adjustment.
5. Align the dot mark on the dead shaft with the dot mark on the crankcase.
237
3
2
ciyw
1. Crankcase dot mark
2. Dead shaft dot mark
3. Dead shaft
6. Fit a new screw to the washer, install the screw and washer to the dead shaft, ensuring the
dot marks are aligned. Tighten to 12 Nm.
7. Position the balancer shaft so that the preload mark aligns with the crankcase identification
mark.
8. Refit the dead shaft clamp and tighten the new securing screw to 10 Nm and then tighten
the dead shaft clamp locking screw to 10 Nm.
2
5
ciyx
1. Dead shaft clamp
2. Dead shaft clamp locking screw
3. Securing screw
4. Washer
238
5. Balancer shaft
9. Lock the balancer shaft into position using T3880809 Rear Balancer Timing Tool.
10. Lubricate the crankshaft and bearings with clean engine oil.
4 1
2
ciyn
1. Crankcase identification mark
2. Rear alignment mark
3. Preload mark
4. Dot mark
5. T3880809 Rear Balancer Timing Tool
Refit the crankcase halves (see Crankcase Assembly).
5/7/2017 Balancer Shafts Dynamic Adjustment
239
Balancer Shafts Dynamic Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
If the engine has recently been running, the engine oil will be hot to the touch. Contact with
the hot oils may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin damage, do not touch hot oil.
WARNING
If the engine has recently been running, the exhaust components may be hot to the touch.
Contact with the hot components may cause damage to exposed skin. To avoid skin
damage, always allow the hot parts to cool before working on the exhaust system.
WARNING
The cooling fan is switched on and off by the Engine Control Module in response to a signal
received from the coolant temperature sensor. To prevent injury, never place loose clothing,
fingers or hands near the cooling fan, until the engine is stopped. Loose clothing, fingers or
the hands could become trapped during cooling fan operation and cause crushing injury to
the fingers, hands or other parts of the anatomy.
WARNING
Never start the engine or run the engine in a confined area. Exhaust fumes are poisonous
and can cause loss of consciousness and death within a short period of time. Always
operate your motorcycle in the openair or in an area with adequate ventilation.
Note
Before dynamically adjusting the front and rear balancer shafts the engine coolant
fan must have cycled once and the coolant temperature must be at least 103°C.
Front Balancer Shaft Dynamic Adjustment
1. Start the motorcycles engine and allow to run to operating temperature.
CAUTION
240
The dead shaft is an eccentric shaft which runs inside the balancer shaft. When rotated the
dead shaft therefore closes or opens the gap between the teeth of the balancer gear and the
teeth of the crankshaft gear.
If the gap between the balancer gear and crankshaft gear is too small a whine is audible due
to the increased load on the gear teeth and bearings.
If the gap between the balancer gear and crankshaft gear is too large a rattle is audible due
to the increased gap between the gear teeth.
The balancer shafts must always be adjusted in the same operation.
Adjusting the front or rear balancer shafts individually may cause the engine to whine or
rattle.
Unsatisfactory adjustment of the balancer shafts may cause severe engine damage.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove the embellisher from the alternator cover and discard the fixings.
4. Remove the dead shaft clamp blanking plug and discard the washer.
241
4
1
cizg
1. Embellisher
2. Fixings
3. Dead shaft clamp blanking plug
4. Oil filler cap
5. Loosen the dead shaft clamp locking screw a maximum of two complete turns to allow
smooth rotation of the balancer dead shaft in the clamp.
2 1
1
2 F
cizg
2. Blanking plug orifice
CAUTION
242
When adjusting the balancer shafts do not allow the gears to whine or rattle for a prolonged
period.
Allowing the gears to mesh incorrectly for extended periods may cause damage to the gears
and or bearings.
6. Start the engine and allow to idle.
7. Gently rotate the dead shaft clockwise until a whining noise can just be heard.
ciyc
1. Dead shaft
8. Rotate the dead shaft anticlockwise until the whining noise can no longer be heard.
ciyc
1. Dead shaft
9. Tighten the dead shaft clamp locking screw to 10 Nm.
243
10. Stop the engine.
2 1
1
2 F
cizg
2. Blanking plug orifice
11. Wipe away any spilled oil from the crankcase.
12. Fit a new washer and tighten the dead shaft clamp blanking plug to 23 Nm.
13. Refit the embellisher cover to the alternator cover, tighten the new fixings to 4 Nm.
4
1
cizg
1. Embellisher
2. Fixings
3. Dead shaft clamp blanking plug
4. Oil filler cap
244
Rear Balancer shaft Dynamic Adjustment
1. Remove the clutch cover plug.
ciwp_1
1. Clutch cover plug
2. Clutch cover
2. Remove the oil filler cap and discard the Oring.
cizg
1. Oil filler cap
3. Using T3880652 Dead Shaft Key Tool, loosen the dead shaft clamp locking screw a
maximum of two complete turns to allow smooth rotation of the balancer dead shaft in the
clamp.
245
cizg
1. T3880652 Dead Shaft Key Tool
3. Oil filler orifice
CAUTION
When adjusting the balancer shafts do not allow the gears to whine or rattle for a prolonged
period.
Allowing the gears to mesh incorrectly for extended periods may cause damage to the gears
and or bearings.
4. Start the engine and allow to idle.
5. Rotate the rear dead shaft clockwise until a whining noise can be heard.
246
1. Dead shaft
6. Rotate the dead shaft anticlockwise until the whining noise can no longer be heard.
1. Dead shaft
7. Using T3880652 Dead Shaft Key Tool tighten the dead shaft clamp locking screw to 10
Nm.
8. Stop the engine.
9. Wipe away any spilled oil from the upper crankcase.
10. Using a new Oring refit the oil filler cap and tighten to 3 Nm.
247
cizg
1. Oil filler cap
11. Refit the clutch cover plug and tighten to 2 Nm.
ciwp_1
1. Clutch cover plug
2. Clutch cover
12. Inspect the engine oil level (see Engine Oil Level Inspection).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Input and Output Shafts
248
Exploded View – Input and Output Shafts
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Gear Selector
249
Exploded View – Gear Selector
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Gear Change Lever
250
Exploded View – Gear Change Lever
5/7/2017 Gear Change Shaft Removal
251
Gear Change Shaft Removal
WARNING
1. Remove and discard the fixings and remove the oil pump drive chain guide from the
crankcase.
cjcb
1. Oil pump drive chain guide
2. Fixings
2. Withdraw the abutment dowel from the crankcase.
5/7/2017 Gear Change Shaft Removal
252
2
cjca
1. Abutment dowel
2. Abutment spring
3. Collect the washer from the gear change shaft.
4. Withdraw the gear change shaft as an assembly.
cjcc
1. Gear change shaft assembly
2. Washer
5/7/2017 Gear Change Shaft Inspection
253
Gear Change Shaft Inspection
1. Inspect the gear change shaft assembly and spring for damage or wear, the springs for
overextension (i.e. abnormal gaps between coils). Renew the components as necessary.
6
3
2
5
7
4
6
1. Gear change shaft assembly
2. Pivot plate
3. Spring (pivot plate)
4. Gear change return spring
5. Washer, 20 mm
6. Circlips
7. Washer, 25mm
5/7/2017 Gear Change Shaft Installation
254
Gear Change Shaft Installation
WARNING
1. Position the selector mechanism into the crankcase and locate the pivot plate to the detent
wheel.
1. Pivot plate
2. Detent wheel
2. Insert the abutment dowel with the spring tangs positioned to either side.
2
cjca
5/7/2017 Gear Change Shaft Installation
255
1. Abutment dowel
2. Abutment spring
3. Refit the pump drive chain guide to the crankcase. Tighten the new fixings to 9 Nm.
cjcb
1. Pump drive chain guide
2. Fixings
5/7/2017 Gear Change Detent Wheel Removal
256
Gear Change Detent Wheel Removal
WARNING
Remove the gear change shaft (see Gear Change Shaft Removal).
1. Release the detent arm spring.
2. Release the detent arm fixing and remove the detent arm. Discard the fixing.
1
2
3
cjcd_1
1. Detent arm spring
2. Detent arm
3. Fixing
Note
Note the position of the spacer, detent arm and washer for installation.
3. Remove the fixing and the detent wheel from the selector drum. Discard the fixing.
5/7/2017 Gear Change Detent Wheel Installation
257
Gear Change Detent Wheel Installation
1. Lubricate the selector drum bearings with clean engine oil.
2. Refit the detent wheel to the selector drum, ensuring the pin on the drum locates in the slot
in the detent wheel. Prevent the drum from turning and tighten the fixing to 12 Nm.
1
2
3 4
cfwy
1. Selector drum
2. Detent wheel
3. Pin
4. Slot
3. Refit the spacer, detent arm, washer and a new fixing as noted during removal.
4. Tighten the new fixing to 12 Nm.
5. Refit the detent arm spring.
1
2
3
cjcd_1
5/7/2017 Gear Change Detent Wheel Installation
1. Detent arm spring
258
2. Detent arm
3. Fixing
Refit the gear change shaft (see Gear Change Shaft Installation).
5/7/2017 Selector Forks and Drum Removal
259
Selector Forks and Drum Removal
WARNING
Remove the transmission shafts.
Remove the gear change selector shaft (see Gear Change Shaft Removal).
Remove the gear position sensor (see Gear Position Sensor Removal).
1. Remove and discard the fixing securing the output selector shaft retainer.
2
1
cjci
1. Fixing
2. Output selector shaft retainer
3. Output selector shaft
2.
3. Remove and discard the fixing securing the input selector shaft.
260
cjck
1. Fixing
Note
Prior to removal, mark, or make a note of the relative positions of each selector fork
in the selector drum.
4. Withdraw the input selector shaft and noting its orientation remove the fork.
5. Withdraw the output selector shafts and noting their orientation, collect the two selector
forks.
cjcj
4
2. Input selector shaft
3. Selector fork (input shaft)
4. Selector fork (output shaft)
261
6. Remove the selector drum bearing keeper plate and discard the fixing.
7. Remove the selector drum.
1
cjch
1. Selector drum
2. Fixing
3. Bearing keeper plate
8. If required, remove the fixing and remove the detent wheel from the selector drum. Discard
the fixing.
5/7/2017 Selector Forks and Drum Inspection
262
Selector Forks and Drum Inspection
Inspect all bearings for damage or wear. Renew as necessary.
Inspect the selector forks and selector grooves for wear beyond the service limits. Renew the
components as necessary.
Refer to the specifications table (see Transmission).
5/7/2017 Selector Forks and Drum Installation
263
Selector Forks and Drum Installation
1. If removed, refit the detent wheel to the selector drum, ensuring the pin on the drum locates
in the slot in the detent wheel. Prevent the drum from turning and tighten the new fixing to
12 Nm.
1
2
3 4
cfwy
1. Selector drum
2. Detent wheel
3. Pin
4. Slot
2. Refit the selector drum, ensuring it is pushed fully into the crankcase.
3. Fit the bearing keeper plate and retain the plate in position using a new fixing. Tighten the
fixing to 12 Nm.
1
cjch
1. Selector drum
264
2. Bearing keeper plate
3. Fixing
4. Lubricate the forks and shafts with clean engine oil.
5. Position the output selector fork shaft and selector forks to the crankcase as noted during
removal,
6. Position the input selector fork shaft and selector fork to the crankcase as noted during
removal.
cjcj
4
2. Input selector shaft
3. Selector fork (input shaft)
7. Using a new fixing secure the output selector shaft retainer, tighten the fixing to 12 Nm.
265
2
1
cjci
1. Fixing
2. Retainer
3. Selector shaft
8. Using a new fixing secure the input selector shaft, tighten the fixing to 22 Nm.
cjck
1. Fixing
Refit the gear position sensor (see Gear Position Sensor Installation).
Refit the gear change shaft (see Gear Change Shaft Installation).
266
5/7/2017 Exploded View Output Shaft
267
Exploded View Output Shaft
1
17
2
3 18
4 19
5 20
6
21
7
22
12
23
8
24
9
13
10 25
14
11 26
15
27
16
28
1. Bearing outer carrier
2. Circlip
4. Thrust washer
5. First gear
7. Fifth gear
8. Circlip
9. Splined thrust washer
10. Fourth gear
11. Plain bush
12. Output shaft
13. Plain bush
14. Third gear
5/7/2017 Exploded View Output Shaft
16. Circlip
268
17. Sixth gear
18. Thrust washer
19. Plain bush
20. Second gear
21. Second gear spacer
22. Outer bearing
23. Snap ring
24. Distance sleeve
25. Output shaft seal
26. Sprocket
27. Tab washer
28. Sprocket nut
5/7/2017 Output Shaft Disassembly
269
Output Shaft Disassembly
WARNING
When using a press, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand protection. Objects such as
bearings frequently breakup under load and the debris caused during breakup may cause
damage and injury to unprotected parts of the body.
Never wear loose clothing, which could become trapped in the press and cause crushing
injury to the hand, arms or other parts of the anatomy.
Note
Make a note or mark the orientation of all transmission parts prior to removal.
1. Mark one side of the needle roller bearing outer carrier to denote its correct orientation and
slide it away from the needle roller bearing.
2
1
cjbz
2. Remove and discard the circlip.
3. Noting its orientation, remove the bearing from the output shaft.
4. Remove the thrust washer.
270
3
T908.07.27
1. Circlip
3. Thrust washer
5. Collect the output shaft seal.
2 1
cjgk
2. Roller bearing
3. Distance sleeve
6. Mark one side of first gear to denote its correct orientation and remove it from the shaft.
7. Remove the needle roller bearing from the shaft.
271
2
1
3
cjgh_2
1. Thrust washer
2. First gear
4. Output shaft
8. Mark one side of fifth gear to denote its correct orientation and remove it from the shaft.
2
1
cjgg_1
1. Fifth gear
2. Output shaft
9. Remove the circlip and splined thrust washer.
10. Discard the circlip.
272
2
3
1
1. Circlip
3. Output shaft
11. Mark one side of fourth gear to denote its correct orientation and remove it from the shaft.
12. Noting its orientation, remove the plain bush which runs inside the gear.
3
2
4
1
cjgf
1. Circlip
3. Fourth gear
4. Plain bush
5. Output shaft
13. Working on the opposite end of the shaft, attach a proprietary bearing separator between
273
the outer bearing and second gear as shown below. Using a press, remove the outer
bearing and the distance sleeve.
4 2
1
cjgm
1. Bearing
2. Distance sleeve
3. Output shaft
4. Bearing separator
14. Discard the bearing.
15. Remove the second gear spacer.
16. Mark one side of second gear to denote its correct orientation and remove it from the shaft.
17. Noting its orientation, remove the plain bush from the shaft.
18. Remove the thrust washer from the shaft.
1 3
4
cjge _1
274
2. Second gear
3. Bush
4. Thrust washer
5. Output shaft
19. Noting its orientation, remove the sixth gear.
2
1
cjgd_1
1. Sixth gear
2. Output shaft
20. Remove the circlip and the splined thrust washer, discard the circlip.
4
2
1 3
cjgi
1. Circlip
275
3. Third gear
4. Output shaft
21. Mark one side of third gear to denote its correct orientation and remove it from the shaft.
22. Noting it’s orientation, remove the plain bush from the shaft.
2 4
5
1
cjgc
1. Circlip
3. Third gear
4. Third gear bush
5. Output shaft
5/7/2017 Output Shaft Assembly
276
Output Shaft Assembly
WARNING
CAUTION
Bushes with oil holes must always be MISALIGNED with the corresponding oil holes in the
output shaft. Reduced oil pressure and gear lubrication may result from alignment of the oil
holes, which would cause premature wear of engine and transmission components.
CAUTION
Removing the output shaft bearing from the shaft will damage the bearing and snap ring.
Never reuse removed bearings or snap rings as use of damaged or weakened components
could lead to engine and transmission damage.
CAUTION
Press only on the bearing inner race to prevent bearing damage.
Note
Lubricate each gear, thrust washer and bush with clean engine oil during assembly.
1. Locate third gear and the plain bush to the shaft as noted during disassembly.
2. Fit the splined thrust washer and retain with a new circlip as shown below.
277
4
2
3
1
cjcl
1. Circlip
2. Splined washer
3. Third gear
4. Output shaft
3. Fit the sixth gear as noted during disassembly.
2
1
cjgd_1
1. Sixth gear
2. Output shaft
4. Fit the thrust washer.
CAUTION
278
5. Locate second gear and the plain bush to the shaft as noted during disassembly.
6. Fit the second gear spacer.
1 3
4
cjge _1
2. Second gear
3. Bush
4. Thrust washer
5. Output shaft
7. Place the output shaft on a press bar, align the inner race of the ball bearing to the output
shaft.
8. Press the output shaft through the bearing until the bearing face contacts the thrust washer.
279
cjgl
1. Output shaft
2. Ball Bearing
Note
Ensure the chamfered edge is facing away from the roller bearing.
9. Locate the distance sleeve to the bearing,
10. Press the output shaft through the distance sleeve until it comes into contact with the
bearing face.
4
1
2
3
cjgb_1
1. Distance sleeve
2. Ball bearing
3. Spacer
4. Output shaft
280
11. Lubricate and fit a new output shaft seal.
2 1
cjgk
2. Roller bearing
3. Distance sleeve
12. Fit the output sprocket, new tab washer and nut. Do not fully tighten the nut at this stage.
CAUTION
13. Working from the opposite end of the shaft, fit the plain bush as noted during disassembly.
14. Fit fourth gear as noted during disassembly.
15. Fit the splined thrust washer and retain using a new circlip, as shown below.
281
3
2
4
1
cjgf
1. Circlip
3. Fourth gear
4. Plain bush
5. Output shaft
16. Fit fourth gear as noted during disassembly. Ensure that the smaller dogs face towards
fourth gear.
2
1
cjgg_1
1. Fifth gear
2. Output shaft
17. Fit the plain bush as noted during disassembly.
18. Fit first gear as noted during disassembly.
282
19. Fit the thrust washer.
1
3
cjgh_2
1. Thrust washer
2. First gear
4. Output shaft
20. Fit the roller bearing to the output shaft as noted during disassembly.
21. Retain the roller bearing using a new circlip.
3
T908.07.27
1. Circlip
3. Thrust washer
283
22. Lubricate the bearing with oil and then slide the bearing outer roller carrier over the needle
roller bearing in the orientation noted during disassembly.
2
1
cjbz
5/7/2017 Output Shaft Inspection
284
Output Shaft Inspection
1. Examine all gears, bearings, bushes and thrust washers for damage, distortion, chipped
teeth and wear beyond the service limits. Replace all defective components and always use
new circlips, a new output shaft seal and a new sprocket tab washer to assemble the shaft.
5/7/2017 Exploded View Input Shaft
285
Exploded View Input Shaft
1. Bearing retainer bolts
2. Bearing retainer plate
3. Ball bearing
4. Input shaft
5. Plain bush
6. Fifth gear
8. Circlip
9. Third/fourth gear
10. Circlip
12. Splined bush
13. Sixth gear
14. Second gear
15. Circlip
5/7/2017 Exploded View Input Shaft
16. Roller bearing
286
17. Restrictor washer
5/7/2017 Input Shaft Disassembly
287
Input Shaft Disassembly
WARNING
Note
The gears on the input shaft can not be fully disassembled or assembled in service. If
for any reason a gear requires replacing, the complete input shaft assembly must be
replaced.
1. Remove the restrictor washer, and roller bearing.
3 1
2
cjbx
2. Roller bearing
3. Input shaft
WARNING
5/7/2017 Input Shaft Disassembly
1. Attach T3880109 Bearing Separator to the bearing, ensuring the flat side of the tool’s jaws
288
are in contact with the bearing.
Service Tool Installation
2. Support the T3880109 Bearing Separator on press bars, then press the shaft through the
bearing. Discard the bearing.
4
1
2
4 3
cfwh
1. Input shaft
2. Bearing
3. T3880109 Bearing Separator
4. Press bars
5/7/2017 Input Shaft Inspection
289
Input Shaft Inspection
Examine all gears, bearings, bushes and thrust washers for damage, distortion, chipped teeth
and wear beyond the service limits. Replace all defective components.
5/7/2017 Input Shaft Assembly
290
Input Shaft Assembly
WARNING
CAUTION
Removing the input shaft bearing from the shaft will damage the bearing. Never reuse
removed bearings as use of damaged or weakened components could lead to engine and
transmission damage.
Note
Lubricate the bearings with clean engine oil during assembly.
1. Position a new bearing to the input shaft.
2. Support the bearing on press bars as shown below, ensuring that the press bars support the
inner race of the bearing.
3. Press the bearing fully on to the shaft.
3 1
cjcg
1. Input shaft
2. Bearing
3. Press plates
4. Fit the roller bearing and restrictor washer to the input shaft.
5/7/2017 Input Shaft Assembly
291
3 1
2
cjbx
2. Roller bearing
3. Input shaft
5/7/2017 Exploded View Starter and Sprag
292
Exploded View Starter and Sprag
5/7/2017 Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch Removal
293
Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch Removal
WARNING
Remove the clutch cover (see Clutch Cover Removal).
1. Whilst holding the first idler gear in position, withdraw the second starter idler shaft and
gear, noting the fitted position of the components.
1
2
ciwu
1. Starter idler gear (first)
2. Starter idler gear (second)
3. Starter sprag gear
2. Using T3880375 Alternator Rotor Holder to retain the flywheel, remove and discard the
fixings securing the starter gear thrust washer to the sprag clutch housing, as shown below.
294
4
1
ciwv
1. Fixings
2. T3880375 Alternator Rotor Holder
3. Sprag clutch housing
4. Thrust washer
3. Remove and discard the fixings securing the sprag clutch housing to the flywheel.
ciwt
1. Fixings
4. Withdraw the starter sprag gear and sprag clutch assembly.
295
ciws
Starter Sprag Gear
5. Remove the starter sprag gear from the sprag clutch housing assembly.
1
2
3
cixh
3. Sprag clutch
6. Remove the sprag clutch from the sprag clutch housing.
296
1 2
2. Sprag clutch
5/7/2017 Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch Inspection
297
Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch Inspection
1. Check the sprag clutch bearings for overheating, wear and/or nonsmooth operation.
Replace the sprag clutch if overheating, wear and/or nonsmooth operation is found.
2. Examine all gears for chipped teeth and for any other damage.
3. With the sprag clutch mounted in the housing, check the sprag clutch for smooth, free
movement in one direction only (as indicated by the arrow marked on the sprag clutch
body).
5/7/2017 Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch Installation
298
Starter Drive/Sprag Clutch Installation
1. Locate the sprag clutch to the sprag clutch housing as shown below. Push firmly until the lip
seats in the recess provided in the housing.
1 2
2. Sprag clutch
2. Fit the starter sprag gear to the sprag clutch.
3. Lubricate the crankshaft bearing with engine oil.
4. Fit the sprag clutch housing to the flywheel.
5. Ensure that the housing is squarely seated and is not jammed on the rotor.
1
2
3
cixh
299
3. Sprag clutch
Note
Ensure the sprag is seated and flush fitting to the housing before tightening the
fixings fully.
6. Align the drilled holes in the sprag clutch housing with the holes in the flywheel.
ciws
Sprag clutch housing assembly
7. Using T3880375 Alternator Rotor Holder to retain the flywheel and working in the
sequence shown below, fit new fixings and tighten to 16 Nm. Repeatedly check the fixings
in sequence until all are correctly torqued and do not move when checked, this will ensure
the sprag clutch housing is correctly seated on the rotor.
1 3
6 5
4 2
300
Tightening Sequence
8. Using tool T3880375 Alternator Rotor Holder Tool to retain the flywheel and using new
fixings secure the starter gear thrust washer to the flywheel. Tighten the fixings to 12 Nm.
1
ciwv
1. Fixings
2. T3880375 Alternator Rotor Holder
4. Thrust washer
9. Refit the starter idler gear and shaft, as noted during removal.
3 1
ciwr
1. Starter idler gear (second)
2. Starter idler gear (first)
301
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Oil Filter and Pump
302
Exploded View – Oil Filter and Pump
5/7/2017 Oil Circuit Diagram
303
Oil Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Oil Circuit
304
Oil Circuit
Oil is collected from the sump and is drawn through a mesh strainer into the oil pump rotor. The
oil pump is fitted with a single pumping rotor assembly which supplies pressurised oil to the
lubrication circuit. The oil circuit is split into two parts the Main circuit and the Transmission
circuit.
Main Circuit
Pressurised oil flows past the oil pressure relief valve, which controls the maximum pressure in
the oil circuit. The relief valve is set to open at 5.1 bar (74 lb/in²) and when open, returns high
pressure oil directly to the oil pump inlet port.
The oil then flows through the oil filter. Filtered oil is then fed into the lower crankcase gallery.
The low oil pressure switch is located in this gallery.
From here oil is distributed around the engine:
A branch supplies oil to the main gallery below the main bearings. Here it is delivered to the
crankshaft main bearings and, via drillings in the crankshaft, to the big end bearings.
Oil is also fed to the alternator to aid cooling of the alternator. The oil is taken from the
crankshaft oil feed and directed to the alternator stator and rotor.
Spray jets located in the upper crankcase, above the front balance shaft, lubricate the
pistons and connecting rod small ends. These jets are fed oil from the cylinder head oil
feed.
Another branch from the cylinder head oil feed supplies oil to the hydraulic camshaft drive
chain tensioner.
Oil is sent to the cylinder head via a drilling in the upper crankcase. From the crankcase the
oil divides into the two front cylinder head bolt drilling’s, up through the cylinder barrels and
into the cylinder head. One of the bolt drilling’s feeds the left hand cam shaft frame and the
other feeds the right hand camshaft frame. Drillings and grooves in the camshaft frames
allow oil to flow to the camshaft journals and rocker shafts. Oil from the cylinder head area
lubricates the camshaft drive chain before draining back to the sump.
Transmission Circuit
Pressurised oil is directed via drillings to the input and output shafts and the clutch. Oil is
circulated along the gearbox shafts to exit holes that feed directly to the bearings and gears
before draining back to the sump.
The selector drum is splash fed by oil returning to the sump from the transmission gears.
5/7/2017 Engine Oil Specification
305
Engine Oil Specification
Use semi or fully synthetic 10W/40 or 10W/50 motorcycle engine oil which meets specification
API SH (or higher) and JASO MA, such as Castrol Power 1 Racing 4T, sold as Castrol Power
RS Racing 4T in some countries.
Triumph recommends the fully synthetic 10W/40 motorcycle engine oil for most conditions. The
oil viscosity may need to be changed to accommodate the ambient temperatures in your riding
area.
Refer to the chart below for the correct oil viscosity (10W/40 or 10W/50) to be used in your
riding area.
Oil Viscosity Temperature Range
CAUTION
Triumph high performance fuel injected engines are designed to use semi or fully synthetic
motorcycle engine oil which meets specification API SH (or higher) and JASO MA.
Do not add any chemical additives to the engine oil. The engine oil also lubricates the clutch
and any additives could cause the clutch to slip.
Do not use mineral, vegetable, nondetergent oil, castor based oils or any oil not conforming
to the required specification. The use of these oils may cause instant, severe engine
damage.
Ensure no foreign matter enters the crankcase during an oil change or top up.
5/7/2017 Disposal of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
306
Disposal of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
To protect the environment, do not pour oil on the ground, down sewers or drains, or into
watercourses. Do not place used oil filters in with general waste. If in doubt contact your local
authority.
5/7/2017 Engine Oil Level Inspection
307
Engine Oil Level Inspection
In order for the engine, transmission, and clutch to function correctly, maintain the engine oil at
the correct level, and change the oil and oil filter in accordance with scheduled maintenance
requirements.
WARNING
Never start the engine or run the engine in a confined area. Exhaust fumes are poisonous
and can cause loss of consciousness and death within a short period of time. Always
operate your motorcycle in the openair or in an area with adequate ventilation.
WARNING
Motorcycle operation with insufficient, deteriorated, or contaminated engine oil will cause
accelerated engine wear and may result in engine or transmission seizure. Seizure of the
engine or transmission may lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
CAUTION
Running the engine with insufficient oil will cause engine damage. If the low oil pressure
indicator remains on, stop the engine immediately and investigate the cause.
1. Start the engine and run at idle for approximately five minutes.
2. Stop the engine, then wait for at least three minutes to allow the oil to settle.
3. Note the oil level visible in the sight glass.
4. When correct, oil should be visible at a point between the upper level and the lower level on
the sight glass.
3
1
4
citl
5/7/2017 Engine Oil Level Inspection
1. Oil filler plug
308
2. Sight glass
3. Upper level (maximum)
4. Lower level (minimum)
Note
An accurate indication of the level of oil in the engine is only shown when the engine
is at normal operating temperature and the motorcycle is upright (not on the side
stand).
5. If it is necessary to top up the oil level, remove the oil filler plug and add oil, a little at a time,
until the level registered in the sight glass is correct.
6. Once the correct level is reached, fit and tighten the oil filler plug to 3 Nm.
5/7/2017 Oil and Oil Filter Change
309
Oil and Oil Filter Change
WARNING
dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contamination which can
The engine oil and filter must be replaced in accordance with scheduled maintenance
requirements.
CAUTION
Do not pour engine oil on the ground, down sewers or drains, or into watercourses. To
prevent pollution of watercourses etc., dispose of used oil sensibly. If in doubt contact your
local authority.
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly, and then stop the engine.
2. Place a waste oil catch tray beneath the engine.
WARNING
burned.
3. Remove the oil drain plug and discard the sealing washer.
cjkf 1 2
1. Oil drain plug
5/7/2017 Oil and Oil Filter Change
2. Oil filter
310
4. Remove the oil filler plug and discard the sealing washer.
5. With the motorcycle on level ground, and on its side stand, allow the oil to completely drain.
6. Unscrew and remove the oil filter using T3880313 Oil Filter Wrench.
7. Dispose of the old filter in an environmentally friendly way.
8. Apply a smear of clean engine oil to the sealing ring of the new oil filter.
9. Using T3880313 Oil Filter Wrench, fit the new oil filter and tighten to 10 Nm.
10. Fit a new sealing washer to the drain plug.
11. Fit and tighten the drain plug to 25 Nm.
12. Fill the engine with new oil of the type and grade (see Engine Oil Specification).
13. Fit a new sealing washer to the oil filler plug.
14. Fit and tighten the oil filler plug to 3 Nm.
15. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a minimum of 30 seconds.
CAUTION
Raising the engine speed above idle before the oil reaches all parts of the engine can cause
engine damage or seizure. Only raise engine speed after running the engine for 30 seconds
to allow the oil to circulate fully.
CAUTION
16. Ensure that the oil pressure warning light extinguishes shortly after starting.
17. Stop the engine and check the oil level. Adjust if necessary.
5/7/2017 Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch Removal
311
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch Removal
WARNING
WARNING
requirements.
CAUTION
local authority.
The low oil pressure warning light switch is located in the lower crankcase, behind the sprocket
cover.
Remove the sprocket cover (see Front Sprocket Cover Removal).
lock nuts.
1
2
cjpt
312
1. Fixings
mounting.
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Note
A small amount of oil will drain from the oil gallery when the switch is removed.
4. Position a suitable receptacle to collect any displaced oil from the oil gallery.
5. Remove the switch and discard the sealing washer.
313
1
ciua
1. Low oil pressure warning light switch
5/7/2017 Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch Installation
314
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch Installation
1. Incorporating a new sealing washer, fit the low oil pressure warning light switch
2. Tighten the switch to 15 Nm.
ciua
1. Low oil pressure warning light switch
3. Reconnect the electrical connector.
4. Attach the alternator harness to the coolant expansion tank mounting, fit the inner cover and
tighten its fixings to 7 Nm.
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
5/7/2017 Low Oil Pressure Warning Light Switch Installation
315
5. Refit the coolant expansion tank to its mountings and tighten the new lock nuts to 3 Nm.
1
2
cjpt
1. Fixings
6. Refit the sprocket cover (see Front Sprocket Cover Installation).
7. Reconnect the battery positive, (red) lead first (see Battery Installation) and tighten the
8. Start the engine and ensure that the oil pressure warning light extinguishes shortly after
starting.
9. Allow the engine to idle for a minimum of 30 seconds.
CAUTION
10. Stop the engine and check the oil level as described (see Engine Oil Level Inspection).
Adjust if necessary.
11. Refit the seat (see Seat Installation).
5/7/2017 Oil and Water Pump Removal
316
Oil and Water Pump Removal
WARNING
WARNING
requirements.
CAUTION
local authority.
Note
The oil pump and water pump are supplied as an assembly and cannot be separated.
This procedure covers the removal of the oil and water pump assembly.
Drain the coolant (see Coolant Replacement Drainage).
Drain the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
1. Release the oil pickup from the oil seal.
2. Remove and discard the oil seal.
317
cja q
1. Oil pickup
2. Oil seal
3. Slide the oil pump drive sprocket gently backwards and forwards to release the needle roller
bearing.
ciuc
4. Support the oil pump drive sprocket and carefully remove the bush, spacer and needle roller
bearing while noting it’s orientation.
318
1
3
2
ciue
3. Spacer
4. Bush
5. Release and discard the fixings securing the oil and water pump.
ciud 2
1. Oil and water pump
2. Fixings
6. Detach the drive chain from the oil pump drive sprocket.
319
1
ciuf
2. Drive chain
7. Carefully withdraw the oil and water pump from the crankcase.
Note
The water pump inlet sleeve/Orings can become dislodged during removal of the oil
pump.
8. Remove the coolant outlet sleeve and the oil pump outlet sleeve from the crankcase.
3
ciuj
1. Coolant outlet sleeve
2. Oil outlet sleeve
3. Coolant inlet seal
9. Remove and discard the four Orings from the coolant outlet sleeve and then remove and
320
discard the two Orings from the oil outlet sleeve.
2 3
ciuh
2. Oring (coolant)
4. Oring (oil)
10. Remove and discard the coolant inlet Oring from the crankcase.
ciug
1. Oring (coolant inlet)
5/7/2017 Oil Pump Disassembly
321
Oil Pump Disassembly
1. Using T3880603 Oil Pump Restraint release the fixing and remove the drive sprocket and
spacer washer.
chhn
1. T3880603 Oil Pump Restraint
2. Release the three fixings and withdraw the oil pump end plate.
ciuk 1
1. Oil pump end plate
2. Fixings
CAUTION
5/7/2017 Oil Pump Disassembly
322
If any part of the oil pump is found to be outside the service limit, the complete pump must
be replaced. Severe engine damage may result from the continued use of a faulty oil pump.
5/7/2017 Oil Pump Inspection
323
Oil Pump Inspection
1. Inspect the sprocket and chain for wear and/or damage. Replace the pump and chain if
wear is found.
2. Check the shaft and shaft bearings for side and end float. Replace the pump if wear is
found.
3. Carry out a visual inspection for corrosion and scale buildup around the coolant pump
impeller and in the coolant pump body. Replace the pump assembly if necessary.
5/7/2017 Oil Pump Rotor Tip Clearance
324
Oil Pump Rotor Tip Clearance
1. Measure the rotor tip clearance using feeler gauges.
2. For specifications refer toLubrication.
chho_1
Rotor Tip Clearance
5/7/2017 Oil Pump Body Clearance
325
Oil Pump Body Clearance
1. Measure the pump body clearance using feeler gauges.
chhp
Pump Body Clearance
5/7/2017 Oil Pump End Clearance
326
Oil Pump End Clearance
1. Remove the end plate from the pump.
2. Wipe the exposed areas of the rotors and the machined face of the end plate.
Note
The oil pump end clearance is measured using Plastigauge (Triumph part number
3880150T0301). Do not turn the oil pump during the clearance measurement as this
will damage the 'Plastigauge'.
3. Apply a thin smear of grease to the rotor and a small quantity of silicone release agent to
the face of the end plate.
4. Cut a length of the Plastigauge to fit across the rotor. Fit the strip to the rotor using the
grease to hold the Plastigauge in place.
2
1
cdqi_1
1. Outer rotor
2. Plastigauge
5. Without any twisting action, refit the oil pump cover and tighten its fixings to 10 Nm.
6. Release the bolts and carefully remove the end plate.
7. Using the gauge provided with the Plastigauge kit, measure the width of the compressed
Plastigauge.
5/7/2017 Oil Pump End Clearance
327
2
3 0.025
0.038
0.050 1
0.063
0.076
0.100
0.125
0.150
0.175
cdqi_2
1. Rotor (outer)
2. Plastigauge
3. Gauge, in millimetres
9. If the clearance measured is within the specified tolerance, clean off all traces of
Plastigauge from the outer rotor and oil pump cover.
10. If any clearance measured is outside the service limits, renew the complete pump.
5/7/2017 Oil Pump Assembly
328
Oil Pump Assembly
1. If all clearances are within service limits, liberally apply clean engine oil to all internal
components and refit the rotor to the oil pump body.
2. Refit the end plate. Apply ThreeBond 1374 to the fixings, refit and tighten to 10 Nm.
ciuk 1
1. Oil pump end plate
2. Fixings
3. Refit the spacer washer and drive sprocket. Apply ThreeBond 1374 to the fixing and tighten
to 12 Nm.
chhm_1
1. Oil pump
2. Spacer washer
5/7/2017 Oil Pump Assembly
3. Drive sprocket
329
4. Fixing
5/7/2017 Oil and Water Pump Installation
330
Oil and Water Pump Installation
CAUTION
Before fitting the pump to the crankcase ensure the pump internal surfaces have been
wetted with clean engine oil. The pump may fail to pick up oil from the sump if the surfaces
have not been wetted. This will cause the engine to run without engine oil pressure and will
lead to severe engine damage.
1. Install four new Orings to the water pump outlet sleeve.
2. Install two new Orings to the oil pump outlet sleeve.
2 3
ciuh
2. Oring (coolant)
4. Oring (oil)
3. Fit the coolant outlet sleeve, the oil outlet sleeve and the coolant inlet Oring to the
crankcase.
331
3
ciuj
3. Oring (coolant inlet)
4. Fill the oil pump with new engine oil, turning the pump rotor as the oil is poured in to ensure
all surfaces are coated with oil.
5. Position the oil and water pump to the crankcase inserting the oil pump outlet sleeve and
the water pump outlet sleeve into the openings.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force to insert the outlet sleeves into the oil pump. Severe oil pump or
outlet sleeve damage may result from the use of excessive force.
6. Feed the drive chain over the transmission input shaft and fit to the sprocket.
7. Fit the drive chain on to the oil pump sprocket.
8. Refit the oil and water pump. Install new fixings and tighten to 10 Nm in the sequence
shown below.
332
1 3
4
ciud_1
Tightening Sequence
9. Support the oil and water pump drive sprocket and carefully refit the bush spacer and
needle roller bearing as noted during removal.
3
2
ciue
1. Drive sprocket
3. Spacer
4. Bush
10. Install a new oil seal and refit the oil pickup.
333
cja q
1. Oil pickup
2. Oil seal
Refit the sump, ensuring the water pump drain tube is correctly installed (see Sump
Installation).
Refill the engine with oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
Refill the cooling system (see Coolant Replacement Filling).
5/7/2017 Oil Pressure Relief Valve Removal
334
Oil Pressure Relief Valve Removal
WARNING
WARNING
requirements.
The oil pressure relief valve is located in the oil pump housing. It is positioned behind a
threaded blanking plug in the oil pump body.
WARNING
burned.
1. Remove the blanking plug.
citz
5/7/2017 Oil Pressure Relief Valve Removal
1. Blanking plug
335
2. Carefully withdraw the oil pressure relief valve from the oil pump housing.
3. Remove and discard the Oring from the oil pressure relief valve.
5/7/2017 Oil Pressure Relief Valve Installation
336
Oil Pressure Relief Valve Installation
1. Lubricate the new Oring with clean engine oil and fit to the oil pressure relief valve.
city
1. Oil pressure relief valve
2. Oring
2. Refit the oil pressure relief valve as noted during removal.
3. Refit the blanking plug and tighten to 10 Nm.
4. Refit the sump, ensuring the water pump drain tube is correctly installed (see Sump
Installation).
5/7/2017 Engine Removal
337
Engine Removal
WARNING
Remove the side panels (see Side Panels).
Remove the left and right hand frame cradles (see Cradle Assemblies Removal).
Remove the exhaust intermediate and header pipes (see Exhaust Intermediate and Header
Pipes Removal).
Remove the throttle body (see Throttle Body Removal).
Remove the radiator (see page Radiator Removal).
Drain the engine oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
1. From the top of the frame, disconnect the following electrical connectors:
Spark plug leads.
Fuel injectors
Coolant temperature sensor.
2. Disconnect the clutch cable from the crankcase (see Clutch Cable Removal).
bracket.
338
1. Fixing
4. Remove the fixings securing the front sprocket cover to the crankcase.
1. Front sprocket cover
2. Fixings
lock nuts.
1
2
cjpt
1. Lock nuts
339
mounting.
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
7. From the right hand side, disconnect the following electrical connectors:
Gear position sensor.
Crankshaft position sensor.
Starter motor cable from the starter motor solenoid.
3
2
ciwh
1. Gear position sensor connector
2. Crankshaft position sensor connector
340
3. Starter motor cable
4. Starter motor solenoid
8. Disconnect the oil pressure switch electrical connector.
ciua _1
1. Electrical connector
9. Noting their orientation route the cables away from the frame.
10. Loosen the drive chain and remove it from the front sprocket (see Final Drive Chain
Adjustment).
11. Remove the two fixings and remove the left heel guard.
cjs b
1. Fixings
2. Heel guard
341
12. Remove the two fixings and detach the left hand control plate from the frame.
13. Carefully remove the swinging arm pivot cover on the left hand side of the frame.
2
3
cjs a
1. Fixings
2. Control plate
3. Cover
14. Remove the swinging arm pivot nut and collect the washer on the right hand side of the
frame.
2
1
cjrw
1. Nut
2. Washer
342
15. Support the swinging arm and remove the swinging arm spindle and washer from the left
hand side.
16. Partially fit the swinging arm spindle on the right hand side to support the swinging arm.
17. Engage T3880104 Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench in the slots of the frame adjuster sleeve
and rotate anticlockwise to loosen the sleeve fully.
cjbc
1. Frame adjuster
2. T3880104 Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench
Note
Note the routing of the brake switch harness for installation.
18. Remove the alternator regulator/rectifier (see Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Removal).
Note
Note the routing of the alternator harness and its clips for installation.
19. Route the alternator harness with the grey electrical connector to the alternator cover.
20. From the left hand side, disconnect the engine earth strap.
21. Disconnect the crankcase breather hose.
343
1
civr
1. Hose clips
2. Crankcase breather pipe
22. Place a support beneath the engine and ensure that the frame is still adequately and
securely supported.
23. Release the engine mounting nuts. Collect the nuts and washers, leaving the bolts in
position.
24. Remove the left hand cylinder head mounting bolt.
25. Using T3880377 Engine Mounting Adjuster release the:
Rear cylinder head mounting adjuster on the left side of the frame,
Upper rear crankcase mounting adjuster,
Lower rear crankcase mounting adjuster,
Left hand cylinder head mounting adjuster.
26. Remove the right hand cylinder head mounting bolt.
27. Remove the remaining mounting bolts, collecting the spacer from the lower crankcase
mounting bolt.
CAUTION
Two brake lines are attached to the brake line tidy on the rear of the crankcase.
Failure to detach the brake lines from the brake line tidy will cause damage to the braking
system.
28. Detach the brake lines from the brake line tidy and position away from the crankcase.
344
2
1. Brake line from ABS modulator to front master
cylinder
2. Brake line from ABS modulator to front brake
caliper
3. Brake line tidy
29. Lower the engine away from the frame, taking care to avoid damage to the brake pipes.
30. When the engine has been removed, check to ensure that the brake line is attached to the
ABS modulator bracket as shown in the following illustration. Rectify if necessary.
ckcf
1. ABS brake line
2. Retaining clips
3. ABS modulator bracket
5/7/2017 Engine Installation
345
Engine Installation
WARNING
1. Prior to fitting the engine, check to ensure that the brake line is attached to the ABS
modulator bracket as shown in the following illustration. Rectify if necessary.
2. Attach the brake lines to the brake line tidy.
1. Brake line from ABS modulator to front master
cylinder.
2. Brake line from ABS modulator to front brake
caliper
3. Brake line tidy
346
ckcf
1. ABS brake line
2. Retaining clips
3. ABS modulator bracket
3. Locate the engine to the frame aligning the engine mounting points with the corresponding
positions on the frame.
4. Install the engine mounting bolts and the spacer to the lower crankcase mounting as noted
during removal, do not fit the nuts or washers at this stage.
Stage 1
5.
Insert the cylinder head left hand front mounting bolt with washer between the bolt and the
frame.
Insert the cylinder head right hand front mounting bolt fit a new lock nut but not fully tighten
at this stage.
Fit the spacer between the crankcase and the frame on the right hand side. Insert the
crankcase rear lower mounting bolt from the right hand side. Do not fit the washer and new
lock nut at this stage.
Insert the crankcase rear upper mounting bolt from the right hand side. Do not fit the washer
and new lock nut at this stage.
Insert the cylinder head rear mounting bolt from the right hand side. Do not fit the washer
and new lock nut at this stage.
Stage 2
Partially withdraw the crankcase rear lower mounting bolt and tighten the frame adjuster to
347
5 Nm using T3880377 Engine Mounting Adjuster. Refit the bolt and washer.
Partially withdraw the crankcase rear upper mounting bolt and tighten the frame adjuster to
5 Nm using T3880377 Engine Mounting Adjuster. Refit the bolt and washer.
Counter hold the cylinder head front right hand cylinder head mounting nut and tighten the
bolt to 24 Nm.
Withdraw the cylinder head left hand mounting bolt and tighten the frame adjuster to 5 Nm
using T3880377 Engine Mounting Adjuster.
Withdraw the cylinder head rear mounting bolt and tighten the frame adjuster to 5 Nm using
T3880377 Engine Mounting Adjuster.
Fit the washer and a new lock nut to the crankcase lower rear mounting bolt. Counter hold
the bolt and tighten the nut to 80 Nm.
Fit the washer and a new lock nut to the crankcase upper rear mounting bolt. Counter hold
the bolt and tighten the nut to 80 Nm.
Fit a new lock nut to the cylinder head front right hand mounting bolt. Counter hold the nut
and tighten the bolt to 105 Nm.
Fit the washer and a new lock nut to the cylinder head front left hand mounting bolt. Counter
hold the nut and tighten the bolt to 105 Nm.
Fit the washer and a new lock nut to the cylinder head rear mounting bolt. Counter hold the
nut and tighten the bolt to 105 Nm.
2
3
1. Lower rear crankcase adjuster
2. Upper rear crankcase adjuster
3. Left hand cylinder head frame adjuster
4. Rear cylinder head frame adjuster
5. Swinging arm adjuster
Stage 3
348
While supporting the swinging arm, remove the swinging arm spindle and partially insert it
from the right hand side. Tighten the frame adjuster to 6 Nm.
While supporting the swinging arm, remove the swinging arm spindle and fully insert it with
the washer from the left hand side.
Fit the washer and a new lock nut to the swinging arm spindle. Counter hold the nut and
tighten the spindle to 110 Nm
6. Refit the coolant hose to the thermostat housing and secure using T3880207 Hose Clip
Pliers.
7. Refit the throttle body (see Throttle Body Installation).
8. Refit the clutch cable (see Clutch Cable Installation).
9. Refit the crankcase breather hose.
10. Reconnect the engine earth strap, tightening the fixing to 6 Nm.
11. Route the starter motor cable, crankshaft position sensor and gear position sensor cables
as noted during removal. Tighten the cable guide fixings to 4 Nm.
12. Connect the electrical connectors as follows:
Gear position sensor,
Crankshaft position sensor,
Oil pressure switch.
13. Refit the starter motor cable to the solenoid, tighten the fixing to 4 Nm.
3
2
ciwh
1. Gear position sensor connector
2. Crankshaft position sensor connector
3. Starter motor cable
4. Starter motor solenoid
14. Refit the brake fluid reservoir, tighten the new fixing to 3 Nm.
15. Refit the drive chain to the front sprocket and adjust (see Final Drive Chain Adjustment).
349
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
1
2
cjpt
1. Fixings
18. Carefully refit the swinging arm pivot cover on the left hand side of the frame.
19. Fit the sprocket cover and evenly and progressively tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
20. Refit the swinging arm pivot cover to the left hand side of the frame.
21. Refit the left hand control plate and tighten its fixings to 25 Nm.
350
2
3
cjs a
1. Fixings
2. Control plate
3. Cover
22. Refit the left and right hand heel guards and tighten their fixings to 7 Nm.
cjs b
1. fixings
2. Heel guard (left hand side)
23. Refit the radiator (see Radiator Installation).
24. Refit the exhaust system (see Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes Installation).
25. Refit the left and right hand frame cradles (see Cradle Assemblies Installation).
26. Connect the following electrical connectors:
Coolant temperature sensor;
351
Fuel injectors;
Spark plug leads.
Refill the engine with oil (see Oil and Oil Filter Change).
Refill the engine with coolant (see Coolant Replacement Filling).
Refit the side panels (see Side Panels).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Fuel Tank
352
Exploded View – Fuel Tank
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Fuel Pump
353
Exploded View – Fuel Pump
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Fuel Rail, Throttles and Injectors
354
Exploded View – Fuel Rail, Throttles and Injectors
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Airbox
355
Exploded View – Airbox
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Exhaust System
356
Exploded View – Exhaust System
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Evaporative System (if fitted)
357
Exploded View – Evaporative System (if fitted)
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Immobiliser Control Module
358
Exploded View – Immobiliser Control Module
5/7/2017 Fuel Requirements
359
Fuel Requirements
Fuel Requirements all countries except USA
This model must be run on 91 RON or higher unleaded fuel.
Fuel Requirements USA
In the United States of America where the octane rating of fuel is measured in a different way,
the following information may be applied:
This model is designed to run on unleaded gasoline with a CLC or AKI octane rating (R+M)/2 of
87 or higher.
Note
If 'Knocking' or 'Pinking' occurs at a steady engine speed under normal load, use a
different brand of gasoline or a higher octane rating.
CAUTION
The use of leaded gasoline is illegal in some countries, states or territories and will invalidate
the vehicle and emissions control warranties. Additionally, leaded gasoline will cause
damage to emissions control components.
Oxygenated Gasoline
To help in meeting clean air standards, some areas of the U.S. use oxygenated gasoline to help
reduce harmful emissions. This model will give best performance when using unleaded
gasoline. However, the following should be used as a guide to the use of oxygenated fuels.
CAUTION
Because of the generally higher volatility of oxygenated fuels, starting, engine response and
fuel consumption may be adversely affected by their use. Should any of these difficulties be
experienced, run the motorcycle on normal unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol
Ethanol fuel is a mixture of 10% ethanol and 90% gasoline and is often described under the
names 'gasohol', 'ethanol enhanced', or 'contains ethanol'. This fuel may be used in Triumph
motorcycles.
Methanol
CAUTION
Fuels containing methanol should not be used in Triumph motorcycles as damage to
components in the fuel system can be caused by contact with methanol.
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)
5/7/2017 Fuel Requirements
The use of gasolines containing up to 15% MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is permitted in
360
Triumph motorcycles.
5/7/2017 Glossary of Terms
361
Glossary of Terms
The following terms and abbreviations will be found in this section. Below is given a brief
explanation of what some of the more common terms and abbreviations mean.
Air temperature
The air temperature in the airbox and intake hose.
Air temperature sensor
Sensor located in the airbox to detect the temperature of the incoming air.
ABDC
After Bottom Dead Centre.
ATDC
After Top Dead Centre.
Ambient air pressure
Pressure of the air in the airbox.
Battery Voltage
The voltage at the input to the Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM).
BBDC
Before Bottom Dead Centre.
BTDC
Before Top Dead Centre.
Catalytic converter
Device placed in the exhaust system which reduces exhaust emissions by stimulating
secondary combustion of the exhaust gases.
Closed throttle position
Throttle position at idle (i.e. against end stop), measured as a voltage and expressed as
percentage.
Coolant temperature
The coolant temperature in the cylinder head.
Coolant temperature sensor
Sensor which detects coolant temperature.
Cooling fan status
The ON or OFF condition of the cooling fan.
DTC
Diagnostic Trouble Code.
362
Engine ECM
Engine Electronic Control Module.
Engine speed
The crankshaft revolutions per minute.
Fall detection
The fall detection switch will detect if the motorcycle is on its side and will cut power to the
engine ECM immediately.
Freezeframe
A data set captured at the time a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set.
Idle fuel trim
The percentage above or below the nominal fuel requirement for the volume of air entering at
idle.
Idle fueling
Adjustment of fueling at idle to suit the actual air inducted.
Idle reference speed
The target idle speed as determined by the engine Electronic Control Module (ECM). (It should
be the same as the actual idle speed if the motorcycle is operating correctly).
Ignition advance
The timing of ignition at the spark plug relative to Top Dead Centre.
Ignition switch position
The ON or OFF position of either or both the ignition switch and the engine stop switch.
Ignition timing
Same as ignition advance.
IImmobiliser and Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Control Module
The control module for the immobiliser and TPMS system.
Injector pulse time
The time during which an injector remains open (i.e. delivering fuel).
Long term fuel trim
Fueling after adapting to the engine's long term fueling requirements (closed loop only). See
also short term fuel trim.
MAP sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (the air pressure in the intake system).
MIL
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.
Illuminates when most Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are set.
363
Neutral switch status
The NEUTRAL or IN GEAR status of the transmission.
Off idle fuel trim
The percentage above or below the nominal fuel requirement for the volume of air entering at
engine speeds other than idle. This function is not currently used in the Triumph system.
Open circuit
A break in an electrical circuit current cannot flow.
Over temp
High temperature within the engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) caused by an internal or
external failure.
Oxygen sensor
The oxygen sensor measures the oxygen levels in the exhaust gases and feeds this information
to the engine ECM. Based on this information, adjustments to air/fuel ratio are made.
Purge valve duty cycle
The time the purge valve is open in an open/close cycle, expressed as a percentage of the
cycle time.
Sensor reference voltage
Supply voltage to the system sensors (nominally 5 volts).
Short circuit
A 'short cut' in an electrical circuit current bypasses the intended circuit (usually to ground).
Short term fuel trim
A correction applied to the fuel mixture during closed loop catalyst operation. This, in turn, has
an effect on the long term fuel trim in that if an engine constantly requires mixture correction,
the long term fuel trim will adapt to this requirement thus reducing the need for constant short
term adjustment.
Side stand status
The 'up' or 'down' position of the side stand.
Target dwell time
The actual time from coil ON to coil OFF.
TDC
Top Dead Centre.
Throttle position
The position of the throttle butterfly given as a percentage of the movement range. When the
data is displayed on the diagnostic software, fully open need not be 100% nor fully closed 0%.
364
Throttle actuator motor
Motor used to open/close the throttle.
Twist grip position sensor
The twist grip position sensor is used to relay twist grip position information to the engine ECM.
The engine ECM uses this information to drive the throttle actuation motor to the correct
position.
Throttle voltage
Voltage at the throttle potentiometer.
Transponder
A transponderresponder chip located in the ignition key. The transponder is activated by a
radio signal sent out by the immobiliser control module, via an antenna located around the
ignition switch. If the immobiliser control module does not receive the correct code signal from
the transponder, the immobiliser will remain active and the engine will not start.
5/7/2017 Engine Management System
365
Engine Management System
System Description
This model is fitted with an electronic engine management system which encompasses control
of both ignition and fuel delivery. The engine electronic control module (ECM) draws information
from sensors positioned around the engine, cooling and air intake systems and precisely
calculates ignition advance and fueling requirements for all engine speeds and loads.
System Sensors
Intake air temperature sensor situated on top of the airbox. As the density of the air
changes with temperature (therefore the amount of oxygen available to ignite the fuel), an
intake air temperature sensor is fitted. Changes in air temperature are compensated for by
adjusting the amount of fuel injected to a level consistent with clean combustion and low
emissions.
Ambient air pressure sensor situated on top of the airbox. The ambient air pressure
sensor measures atmospheric air pressure. With this information, the amount of fuel per
injection is adjusted to suit the prevailing conditions.
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor situated below the fuel tank, connected to
the manifold by a length of tube. The MAP sensor provides information to the engine ECM
which is used at shallow throttle angles (very small throttle openings) to provide accurate
engine load indications to the ECM. This degree of engine load accuracy allows the ECM to
make very small adjustments to fuel and ignition which would otherwise not be possible
from throttle angle data alone.
Clutch switch situated on the clutch lever. The clutch must be pulled in for the starter
motor to operate.
Crankshaft position sensor situated in the alternator cover. The crankshaft position
sensor detects movement of teeth attached to the alternator rotor. The teeth give a
reference point from which the actual crankshaft position is calculated. The crankshaft
position sensor information is used by the engine ECM to determine engine speed and
crankshaft position in relation to the point where fuel is injected and ignition of the fuel
occurs.
Engine coolant temperature sensor situated at the front of the cylinder head near the
thermostat housing. Coolant temperature information, received by the engine ECM, is used
to optimise fueling at all engine temperatures and to calculate hot and cold start fueling
requirements.
Oxygen sensors situated in the exhaust header pipe system close to the cylinder head.
The oxygen sensors constantly feed information to the engine ECM on the content of the
exhaust gases. Based on this information, adjustments to air/fuel ratio are made.
Side stand switch situated at the top of the side stand leg. If the side stand is in the down
position, the engine will not run unless the transmission is in neutral.
Fall detection switch situated on top of the airbox. The fall detection switch will detect if
the motorcycle is on its side and will cut power to the engine ECM immediately. This
prevents the engine from running and the fuel pump from delivering fuel. In the event of a
fall, the switch is reset by returning the bike to an upright position and switching the ignition
off then back on again.
Gear position sensor situated in the lower crankcase, below the drive chain front
sprocket. The gear position sensor provides the engine ECM with selected gear information.
This is used to prevent the engine from starting if the transmission is in gear. The sensor
also provides information to the neutral lamp in the instruments.
5/7/2017 Sensor Locations
366
Sensor Locations
367
368
369
370
371
372
5/7/2017 Actuators
373
Actuators
System Actuators
In response to signals received from the sensors, the engine ECM controls and directs
messages to a series of electronic and electromechanical actuators. The function and location
of the actuators is given below.
Throttle actuator motor situated at the rear of the throttle body. The throttle actuator
motor opens and closes the throttle plate in the throttle body, in response to commands
from the engine ECM. The throttle actuator motor is an integral part of the throttle bodies.
Canister purge valve (certain markets only) situated behind the left hand side cover.
The purge valve controls the return of vapour which has been stored in the carbon canister
during the period when the engine is switched off. The valve is 'pulsed' by the engine ECM
to give control over the rate at which the canister is purged.
Injectors located in the cylinder head. The engine is fitted with two injectors. The spray
pattern of the injectors is fixed but the length of time each injector can remain open is
variable according to operating conditions. The duration of each injection is calculated by
the engine ECM using data received from the various sensors in the system.
Ignition coils situated above the camshaft cover, attached to the frame. There are two
coils fitted, one for each of the spark plugs. The engine ECM controls the point at which the
coils are switched on and off. In calculating the switchon time, the engine ECM allows
sufficient time for the coils to charge to a level where a spark can be produced. The coils
are switched off at the point of ignition, the timing of which is optimised for good engine
performance.
Main power relay situated behind the right hand side panel. When the ignition is switched
on, the main power relay is powered up to provide a stable voltage supply for the engine
ECM.
Fuel pump situated inside the fuel tank. The electric pump delivers fuel into the fuel
system, via a pressure regulator, at a constant 3.5 bar pressure. The pump is run
continuously when the engine is operating and is also run briefly when the ignition is first
switched on to ensure that fuel at 3.5 bar pressure is available to the system as soon as the
engine is cranked. Fuel pressure is controlled by a regulator also situated inside the fuel
tank.
Cooling fan situated behind the radiator. The engine ECM controls switching on and off of
the cooling fan in response to a signal received from the coolant temperature sensor. When
the coolant temperature rises to a level where the cooling effect of natural airflow is
insufficient, the cooling fan is turned on by the engine ECM. When the coolant temperature
falls sufficiently, the engine ECM turns the cooling fan off. The fan only becomes operational
when the engine is running. It will not operate at any other time.
Note
In this system, the starter lockout system (clutch switch, neutral switch, side stand
switch) all operate through the engine management ECM.
5/7/2017 Actuator Locations
374
Actuator Locations
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
Actuator Locations
382
383
384
385
386
387
5/7/2017 Immobiliser System
388
Immobiliser System
System Description
The Thruxton R is fitted with an electronic immobiliser system to help protect it against theft.
This system has to be paired with the engine ECM and the ignition keys which contains a
transponder chip. If all the components are correctly paired, the immobiliser will allow the
engine to start. The Triumph Diagnostic Tool is the only way these components can be paired.
In addition, the system has an onboard diagnostic function. This ensures that, should a
malfunction occur in the immobiliser system, a malfunction code is stored in the immobiliser
control module's memory. This stored data can be recovered using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool
(see Immobiliser Control Module Diagnostic Trouble Codes).
System Components and Operation
Transponder chip situated inside the ignition key. The chip is activated by the antenna
coil when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Antenna coil situated around the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, and the transponder chip is activated, the signal from the chip is sent to the
immobiliser control module.
Immobiliser control module situated behind the headstock next to the coolant filler neck.
This control module communicates with the transponder chip in the key and the ECM and
will only allow the engine to start if a matching signal is received.
Alarm/immobiliser warning indicator light situated in the instrument pack. The light will
flash for 24 hours to show that the engine immobiliser is on. When the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position the immobiliser and indicator light will be off. If the indicator light
remains on it indicates that the immobiliser has a malfunction that requires investigation.
If an accessory alarm is fitted, the immobiliser indicator light will only illuminate when the
conditions described in the accessory alarm instructions are met.
Keys
When the motorcycle is delivered from the factory it is supplied with two keys. Keys can be
deleted or added to the immobiliser system using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool. A maximum of
four keys can be added to the system.
To ensure the immobiliser system functions correctly note the following:
Do not put any magnetic materials on the same key ring as the motorcycle key.
Do not have two of the motorcycle ignition keys on the same key ring, keep the spare key in
a safe place.
Do not put any other ignition key with a transponder chip fitted near the motorcycle key
when in use.
Do not modify the immobiliser system.
Do not submerge the key in water or any other fluid.
Do not drop or strike the key against hard material.
Diagnostics
To fully diagnose the immobiliser system it is necessary to check for fault codes in the
immobiliser control module using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool (see System Diagnostics).
Further Diagnosis
5/7/2017 Immobiliser System
The tables that start on page Immobiliser Control Module Diagnostic Trouble Codes, if used
389
correctly, help to pinpoint a fault in the system once a diagnostic trouble code has been stored.
5/7/2017 Immobiliser System Components Location
390
Immobiliser System Components Location
391
392
393
394
395
5/7/2017 Engine Management Circuit Tables
396
Engine Management Circuit Tables
Key to Circuit Diagram
Key Item Description
1 Engine Electronic Control Module
2 Instrument Assembly Connector
3 Diagnostic Connector
4 ABS Module Connector
5 Bluetooth® Module
6 Immobiliser
7 Ignition Switch
8 Gear Position Sensor
9 Fall Detection Switch
10 Ambient Air Pressure Sensor
11 MAP Sensor
12 Fuel Level Sender
13 Side Stand Switch
14 Intake Air Temperature Sensor
15 Coolant Temperature Sensor
16 Left Hand Switch Housing 8 Way Connector
17 Clutch Switch
18 Main Beam Switch
397
19 Cruise Control Switch (if fitted)
20 Alarm Connector
21 Quickshifter
22 Twist Grip Position Sensor
23 Throttle Position sensor
24 Throttle Drive Motor
25 Fuel Pump Relay
26 Fuel Pump
27 Cooling Fan
28 Cooling Fan Relay
29 Oxygen Sensor Cylinder 1
31 Fuel Injector Cylinder 1
33 Purge Valve
34 Ignition Coil Cylinder 1
36 Crankshaft Position Sensor
37 EMS Relay
38 Fuse Box
398
Key To Wiring Colour Codes
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
5/7/2017 Engine Management Circuit Diagram
399
Engine Management Circuit Diagram
1
38 37
7 4 2
36
1 UB UB A35
2
2 UP
UP UP A36
7B 8B 2B 3 1 2 5
G NK NK NK NK R 9
U 10
NK NK A01
NK NK A13 3
35 A33
A34
R
U
R
U
6
14
NK 1 1 GK GK B15
B 4
34 5 4
NK 1 1 GP GP B14 4 U 11
33 3 R 2
NK 2 1 B B B06 6
32
U 1
NK 2 1 YP YP A11
7 R 6
2 BG 5
31 7 B 10
8
NK 2 1 YK YK A10
30 B44 BW BW 1
NK 3 4 W W B03 B23 BK BK 2
1 2 BU A22 B34 K K 4
BU
B18 KB KB 3
B
29 9
NK 3 4 W W B02
KB 6
1 2 BY BY A21
K 4
B38 KU KU 5
28 10
27 KB
K
1
M B41 KP KP 2
3 1 2 5
11
B
P NK BY NK
KB 1
BY A27 K 3
B36 KS KS 2
26 12
25
M KB 1
3 1 2 5
B K 2
G GR BP PW B27 BY BY 4
24
BP A26 13
GR B01 K 1
1 UO UO A02 3
B43 BR BR
2 UG UG A03
B 2
14
1 UY UY B20 KO KO 1
B42
4 UG UG B26
23
B 2
B
15
2 B B19
3 R R B33
B40 KG KG 1
B 2
7 R
5 B 16
6 W B
22
W B28 4
2 W W B21 B45 BO BO 3
1
B
R
B
R
B35
B17
17
A04 WU WU 7
18
21
A29 WR WR 5
1 RB B22 GR 8
19
2 B
A20 B
B
A23 B
1
A25
B08
B
B
20
B13 B
B48 B
Zoom In  Zoom Out  Reset 
5/7/2017 Engine Management Adaption
400
Engine Management Adaption
General Information
The engine management system fitted to this model is adaptive. This means that the system is
able to learn about new or changing operating conditions and continuously adapt itself without
needing to constantly make major adjustments from a fixed baseline setting.
Adaptive changes can become necessary because of changing rider behaviour, changes in the
region in which the bike is operated (i.e. operation at high altitude where it was previously used
at sea level) or because a new part may have been fitted which has slightly different
characteristics to the old part. All adaptive changes are automatic and require no intervention by
rider or dealer.
Adaption Status
To see if a motorcycle has fully adapted, a facility named 'ADAPTION STATUS' is provided on
the diagnostic tool. The following adaption details can be examined:
Function Examined Report Method
Closed throttle position reference status Adapted/not adapted
Idle speed control adaption status %
Oxygen sensor adaption status (off idle) %
Oxygen sensor adaption range (off idle) %
Oxygen sensor adaption status (idle) %
Oxygen sensor adaption range (idle) %
Terminology
Where the term 'status' is used, this indicates how far the present operating parameter is from
the stored (baseline) value. The nearer these figures are to zero the better as it indicates the
motorcycle has adapted to its current operating conditions.
The term 'range' indicates how much (in percentage terms) of the adjustment range has been
used to reach the current operating status.
401
Typical Values
In a correctly adapted motorcycle, the following will be typical:
Function Examined Read Out
Closed throttle position reference status Adapted
Idle speed control adaption status Between +100 and 100%
Oxygen sensor adaption status (off idle) 0% +/ 10%
Oxygen sensor adaption range (off idle) Between +100 and 100%
Oxygen sensor adaption status (idle) 0% +/ 10%
Oxygen sensor adaption range (idle) Between +100 and 100%
Forcing Adaption to Take Place
If the read out indicates that the motorcycle is not adapted, the following will force the system to
make adaptions:
402
WARNING
Never start the engine or let it run for any length of time in a closed area. The exhaust fumes
are poisonous and may cause loss of consciousness and death within a short time. Always
operate the motorcycle in the openair or in an area with adequate ventilation.
Note
Resetting adaptions with the motorcycle connected to an exhaust extraction system
may cause incorrect values to be set, causing poor engine running. Always reset the
adaptions with the engine disconnected from any exhaust extraction system whilst
ensuring the motorcycle is positioned in a well ventilated area.
1. Ensure the engine is cold.
2. WITHOUT TOUCHING THE THROTTLE, start the engine and allow it to warm up until the
cooling fan comes on.
3. Leave the engine to idle for a further 12 minutes.
Note
As an alternative to the above process, connect the diagnostic tool, select ADJUST
TUNE (see the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide) and select RESET ADAPTIONS.
This will force a fast adaption routine to take place in around five seconds. For this to
happen, the engine MUST be running, it must be at normal operating temperature and
in closed loop control mode. Under any other conditions fast adaption will not take
place and may cause default values to be loaded, which may then require a normal 12
minute adaption routine to be run.
Fault Indications
If 'range' figures at 100% are seen, then the adjustment has reached maximum indicating a
mechanical fault exists on the motorcycle. This can be due to a number of faults but the most
likely causes will be low/high fuel pressure, faulty injectors or air leaks at the throttle bodies or
airbox.
In these circumstances, locate and rectify the fault, and reset the adaptions as described above.
5/7/2017 Electrical Connectors
403
Electrical Connectors
Before beginning any diagnosis, the following connector related information should be noted:
Note
A major cause of hidden electrical faults can be traced to faulty electrical connectors.
For example:
Dirty/corroded terminals
Damp terminals
For example, the engine electronic control module (engine ECM) relies on the supply of
accurate information to enable it to plan the correct fuelling and ignition timing. One dirty
terminal will cause an excessive voltage drop resulting in an incorrect signal to the engine ECM.
If, when carrying out fault diagnosis, a fault appears to clear by simply disconnecting and
reconnecting an electrical plug, examine each disconnected plug for the following.
When Disconnecting a Connector:
Check for a security device that must be released before the connector can be separated,
e.g. barb, hook and eye etc.
When Inspecting a Connector:
Check that the individual pins have not been bent
Check for dampness/dirt/corrosion
Check cables for security
Check cable pin joints for damage.
When Connecting a Connector:
Ensure there is no dirt around the connector/seal
Push together squarely to ensure terminals are not bent or incorrectly located
Push the two halves together positively.
Disconnection of the Engine ECM Connectors
CAUTION
When disconnecting a connector, never pull directly on the wires as this may result in cable
and connector damage.
CAUTION
Never disconnect an ECM when the ignition switch is in the ON position as this may cause
multiple fault codes to be logged in the ECM memory.
Always disconnect an ECM after disconnecting the battery negative (black) lead first.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position and wait at least 1 minute for the engine ECM to
404
complete its power down sequence.
2. Detach the engine ECM from its bracket and the frame (see Engine Electronic Control
Module (ECM) Removal).
Note
Two different sized connectors are used in the engine ECM, which ensures correct
connection is always made. The connectors are coloured black and correspond with
identical connectors on the main harness.
1. Press down on the locking device and gently pull back on the connector to release it from
the engine ECM.
1 2
1. Locking device
2. Locking lever
Reconnection of the engine ECM Connectors
CAUTION
Damage to the connector pins may result if an attempt to fit the connectors incorrectly is
made.
1. Fit the connector into its socket. When the locking lever starts to move, stop pushing the
connector and use the locking lever to fully insert the connector home and lock it.
405
1
2
ciji
1. Connector B (large)
2. Connector A (small)
1. Refit the engine ECM and its bracket to the frame under the seat (see Engine Electronic
Control Module (ECM) Installation).
5/7/2017 System Diagnostics
406
System Diagnostics
The engine management system has an onboard diagnostics feature which allows service
technicians to retrieve stored data from the ECM using Triumph diagnostic software. Full
details of the Triumph diagnostic software operation and how to interpret the results are
given in the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide.
The software is connected, via an interface cable, to the motorcycle using a dedicated
diagnostic plug situated beneath the seat. By using a dedicated plug, no electrical connectors
associated with the system are disturbed, reducing potential connector damage.
The software allows the user to retrieve data associated with the system sensors and actuators,
test various component functions, read build data and make minor adjustments to the setup of
the system. The data and tests available are described on the following pages.
Onboard Fault Detection System
The onboard diagnostic system has two stages to fault detection. When a fault is detected, the
DSM (Diagnostic Status Manager) raises a flag to indicate that a fault is present and increments
a counter. The counter checks the number of instances that the fault is noted. For example, if
there is a fault in the crankshaft position sensor, the counter will increment its count each time
the crankshaft turns through 360°, provided the fault is still present.
When the count begins, the fault is detected but not confirmed. If the fault continues to be
detected and the count reaches a predetermined threshold, the fault becomes confirmed. If the
fault is an emissions related fault or a serious malfunction affecting engine performance, a DTC
(Diagnostic Trouble Code) and freezeframe data will be logged in the ECM's memory and the
MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) on the motorcycle instrument panel is illuminated. Once a
fault is confirmed, the number of warmup cycles made by the engine is counted. If the fault
clears, the warmup cycle counter will extinguish the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) at a
predetermined count, and erase the DTC and freezeframe data from the ECM memory at
another (higher) count.
A single warmup cycle is deemed to have taken place when the following criteria have been
met:
The coolant temperature must be raised to 72°C or more.
The coolant temperature must have risen by 23°C or more from its start temperature, when
72°C is reached.
A controlled power down sequence must take place.
Note
When a fault has been rectified, the MIL will remain illuminated until sufficient non
fault warmup cycles have taken place to turn it off. The MIL will be immediately
extinguished if, after first rectifying the fault, the DTC (diagnostic trouble code) that
caused the MIL illumination is erased from the ECM memory using the Triumph
diagnostic software.
Note
In some cases, when a fault is detected, the engine management system will revert to
a limphome mode. In this mode, the engine will still function though the
performance and fuel economy may be marginally affected. In some cases, the rider
may not notice any appreciable difference from normal operation.
5/7/2017 ECM Connector Pin Numbering
407
ECM Connector Pin Numbering
The above illustration shows the pin numbering system used in the engine management circuit
diagram.
The smaller connector's pins are prefixed A and the larger connector pins B. As viewed on the
mating face with the ECM (as per the illustration), pins are numbered from right to left with
number one in the top right corner.
5/7/2017 Tool Connection
408
Tool Connection
Diagnostic Tool Connection
1. To connect the Triumph diagnostic interface to the motorcycle, remove the seat (see Seat
Removal) and release the diagnostic connector from its locating tang.
cja j_1
1. Diagnostic connector
2. Plug the Triumph diagnostic interface directly into the diagnostic connector.
T3880057 Triumph Diagnostic Interface
5/7/2017 Tool Connection
3. When the diagnostic session is completed, disconnect the Triumph diagnostic interface.
409
4. Refit the diagnostic connector to its locating tang and refit the seat (see Seat Installation).
5/7/2017 Triumph Diagnostic Software
410
Triumph Diagnostic Software
Described on the following pages is the range of information which can be retrieved from the
ECM’s memory and the adjustments which can be performed using the Triumph diagnostic
software.
The tables indicate which tests are performed by the onboard system and what information can
be retrieved by the Triumph diagnostic software.
Note
Full details of how to operate the software and how to interpret the data can be found
in the Triumph Diagnostic Tool User Guide.
Build Data
The Build Data screen will display the following information:
Motorcycle model
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
ECM type
ECM ID
ECM serial number
Tune number
Date of last tune download
Total tune downloads since manufacture
The lock status of the ECM (ECM Locked, Unlocked or Not Applicable).
Current Data
The data available under Current Data is:
Function Examined Result Reported (Scale)
Fuel system status 1 open or closed loop operation
Fuel system status 2 open or closed loop operation/engine not
running
Calculated load value %
Engine coolant temperature °C
Short term fuel trim bank 1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure mmHg
Engine speed rpm
411
Vehicle speed km/h
Ignition timing advance cylinder 1 degrees
Intake air temperature °C
Absolute throttle position %
Bank 1 oxygen sensor 1 Volts
Bank 1 oxygen sensor 1 short term fuel %
trim
Bank 2 oxygen sensor 2 Volts
Bank 2 oxygen sensor 2 short term fuel %
trim
Sensor Data
When using this function it is possible to check the status of various sensors and actuators.
The data sets are divided into eight groups Sensor Voltages, Sensor Readings, Injector Data,
Ignition Data, Idle Speed and Throttle Data, Inputs, Outputs and Adaption Status. Each of these
screens is described on the following pages.
Sensor Voltages
The data available under Sensor Voltages is:
Item Checked Result Unit
Battery voltage Volts
Voltage from ignition switch to ECM Volts
Air temperature sensor voltage Volts
Coolant temperature sensor voltage Volts
Atmospheric pressure sensor voltage Volts
Manifold absolute pressure sensor 1 voltage Volts
412
Manifold absolute pressure sensor 2 voltage Volts
Throttle position sensor voltage Volts
Fuel level sensor voltage Volts
Oxygen sensor output 1 voltage Volts
Oxygen sensor output 2 voltage Volts
Exhaust butterfly valve sensor voltage‡ Volts
‡ Applies to models fitted with an exhaust butterfly valve only. All other models will show Not
Applicable in this field.
Sensor Readings
The data available under Sensor Readings is:
Air temperature °C
Coolant temperature °C
Ambient air pressure mmHg
Manifold absolute pressure (one reading per cylinder) mmHg
Low fuel light on/off
Oxygen sensor 1 heater status on/off
Oxygen sensor 2 heater status on/off
Exhaust butterfly valve sensor voltage‡ %
‡ Applies to models fitted with an exhaust butterfly valve only. All other models will show Not
Injector Data
The data available under Injector Data is:
413
Injector 1 pulse time milliseconds
Injector 2 pulse time milliseconds
Ignition Data
The data available under Ignition Data is:
Ignition timing cyl 1 degrees BTDC
Ignition timing cyl 2 degrees BTDC
Coil 1 dwell time milliseconds
Coil 2 dwell time milliseconds
Idle Speed and Throttle Data
The data available under Idle Speed and Throttle Data is:
Engine speed rpm
Idle reference speed rpm
Idle speed control current steps numeric
Idle speed control target steps numeric
Throttle position % open
Secondary air injection status ‡ SAI on/off
‡ Applies to models fitted with secondary air injection only. All other models will show Not
Inputs
The data available under Inputs is:
Starter switch status switch on/off
414
Side stand status up/down
Fall detection switch status normal/over
Clutch switch status release/grip
Neutral switch status gear/neutral
Gear position status numeric value or neutral
Vehicle speed km/h
Calculated load %
Outputs
The data available under Outputs is:
EMS main relay status relay on/off
Fuel pump relay status on/off
Starter relay status starter on/off
Malfunction indicator light status MIL on/off
Cooling fan status fan on/off
Purge valve duty cycle %
Accessory control relay status relay on/off
Headlight relay status headlight on/off
Adaption Status
Because the fuel system is adaptive, the engine management system is able to automatically
adjust to new working conditions, such as changes in altitude, component wear, air leaks etc.
This screen displays information on the adaption status of the vehicle which will show if it has
adapted or not.
415
Closed Throttle Position Adapted adapted/not adapted
Idle speed control adaption status %
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (off idle) %
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption range (idle) %
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (off idle) %
Oxygen sensor 1 adaption status (idle) %
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (off idle) %
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption range (idle) %
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (off idle) %
Oxygen sensor 2 adaption status (idle) %
Function Tests
The system allows the diagnostic software to perform a series of function tests on various
actuators in the engine management system. In some cases it is necessary to make a visual
observation of a component and in others, if faults are present, DTCs will be logged.
The Function Tests available are:
Instrument Panel Observe instrument panel, refer to Service Manual
Idle Air Control Stepper Observe throttle position/Stored fault code*
Motor †
Purge Valve Listen for valve operation/Stored fault code*
Fuel Pump Priming Listen for fuel pump operation/Stored fault code*
Fuel Pump Continuous Fuel pressure test/Listen for fuel pump operation/Stored fault
Operation code*
416
Cooling Fan Control Observe the cooling fan/Stored fault code*
Secondary Air Injection† Listen for valve operation/Stored fault code*
Exhaust Butterfly Valve Listen or observe for exhaust butterfly valve actuator
Actuator † operation/Stored fault code*
* If a fault is detected.
†Test will only be displayed if the component is fitted.
Adjust Tune
Using the Triumph diagnostic software, it is possible to:
reset the adaptions
balance the throttle bodies.
FreezeFrame Data
Freezeframe data is stored at the time a DTC is recorded (confirmed) by the ECM. If multiple
DTCs are recorded, the freezeframe data which is stored will relate to the first recorded DTC
only.
By calling up freezeframe data associated with the first recorded DTC, the technician can
check the engine condition at the time the fault occurred. The data available is:
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) number
Calculated load %
Coolant temperature °C
Intake manifold absolute pressure mmHg
Engine speed rpm
417
Vehicle speed km/h
Ignition advance degrees
Intake air temperature °C
Throttle position %
Oxygen sensor 1 output voltage Volts
Oxygen sensor 1 short term fuel trim %
Oxygen sensor 2 output voltage Volts
Oxygen sensor 2 short term fuel trim %
5/7/2017 Instrument Panel Function Test
418
Instrument Panel Function Test
On the diagnostic software navigate to and select the ‘FUNCTIONS TESTS’ option.
Click the start button and observe the instruments for the following:
Tachometer needle moves to 5,000 rpm
Speedometer needle moves to 60 mph
The neutral indicator, fuel warning light and malfunction indicator light (MIL) lights alternate
on and off
Fuel gauge goes to full then increments down to zero
The gear position display will sequentially display the following, , 1, N, 4, 5, N, 1 then 2
End of test. Instruments return to normal operation.
5/7/2017 Engine Electronic Control Module Diagnostic Trouble Codes
419
Engine Electronic Control Module Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are logged in the ECM memory when there is a confirmed
fault in the system.
The codes are reported to the Triumph diagnostic software as a four digit code.
As mentioned earlier, when the system detects a fault, it begins to count the number of times
the fault occurs before illuminating the MIL and storing a fault code.
Similarly, if a fault clears, the ECM also records this fact and will turn off the MIL when sufficient
no fault warmup cycles have taken place. Any fault codes will remain in the ECM memory until
the required number of no fault warmup cycles have taken place. The number of warmup
cycles required to extinguish the MIL will always be less than the number required to remove a
DTC from the ECM memory. DTCs can be removed at any time using the Triumph diagnostic
software.
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below/over:
Diagnostic Fault Number of Number MIL Pinpoint test page
Trouble Description nofault of no illuminated number
Code cycles fault when fault
(DTC) before cycles is logged
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P0030 Oxygen sensor 3 40 Yes Oxygen Sensor Heater

1 heater open
circuit or short
to ground

1 heater short
circuit to
battery Voltage

2 heater open
circuit or short
to ground

2 heater short
circuit to
battery Voltage
420
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P0105 Manifold 3 40 Yes Manifold Absolute

absolute Pressure (MAP)
pressure Sensor
sensor 1 open
circuit or short
circuit to 5 Volt
sensor supply

pressure Sensor
sensor 1 short
circuit to
ground
P0110 Intake air 3 40 Yes Inlet Air Temperature

temperature Sensor
sensor open
circuit or short
circuit to 5 Volt
sensor supply
P0112 Intake air 3 40 Yes Inlet Air Temperature

temperature Sensor
sensor short
circuit to
ground
P0115 Engine coolant 3 40 Yes Coolant Temperature

temperature Sensor
sensor open
circuit or short
circuit to 5 Volt
sensor supply
P0117 Engine coolant 3 40 Yes Coolant Temperature

temperature Sensor
sensor short
circuit to
ground
421
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P0120 Throttle 3 40 Yes Throttle Position

position sensor Sensor
1 short circuit
to battery
Voltage or
open circuit

1 short circuit
to ground
P0130 Oxygen sensor 3 40 Yes Oxygen Sensor

1 open circuit
or short circuit
to battery
Voltage

1 short circuit
to ground

2 circuit open
circuit or short
circuit to
battery Voltage

2 short circuit
to ground
P0201 Injector 1 3 40 Yes Fuel Injectors

circuit
malfunction
P0202 Injector 2 3 40 Yes Fuel Injectors

circuit
malfunction
422
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased

2 short circuit
to battery
Voltage or
open circuit

2 short circuit
to ground
P0335 Crankshaft 3 40 Yes Crankshaft Sensor

sensor circuit
malfunction
P0351 Ignition coil 1 3 40 Yes Ignition Coils

malfunction
P0352 Ignition coil 2 3 40 Yes Ignition Coils

malfunction
P0443 Purge valve 3 40 Yes Purge Valve

short circuit to
ground or
open circuit
P0459 Purge valve 3 40 Yes Purge Valve

short circuit to
battery Voltage
P0460 Fuel level 3 40 No Fuel Level Sensor

sensor circuit Circuit
malfunction
P0500 Vehicle speed 3 40 Yes Vehicle Speed Sensor

sensor
malfunction
423
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P0560 System 3 40 Yes System Voltage

voltage
battery circuit
malfunction
P0571 Brake 1 switch 3 40 Yes Brake Switches

malfunction
P0603 EEPROM 0 40 No EEPROM Error

Error
P0606 ECM internal 0 0 Yes Engine ECM Internal

error Error
P0616 Starter relay 3 40 Yes Starter Motor Relay

short circuit to
ground or
open circuit
P0617 Starter relay 3 40 Yes Starter Motor Relay

short circuit to
battery Voltage
P0914 Gear position 3 40 Yes Gear Position Sensor

sensor short
circuit to
ground or
open circuit
P0917 Gear position 3 40 Yes Gear Position Sensor

sensor short
circuit to 5 Volt
sensor supply

pressure Sensor
sensor 1 pipe
malfunction
424
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased

circuits Reverse Connection
reversed
P1135 Traction 3 40 Yes Traction Control

Control Prevented Due to ABS
prevented due Malfunction
to ABS
malfunction
P1231 Fuel pump 3 40 Yes Fuel Pump Relay

relay short
circuit to
ground or
open circuit
P1232 Fuel pump 3 40 Yes Fuel Pump Relay

relay short
circuit to
battery Voltage
P1508 Unmatched 3 40 Flashing Immobiliser and TPMS

immobiliser Control Module ID
ECM Incompatable
P1520 Unmatched 3 40 Flashing ABS Modulator ID

ABS module Incompatible
P1521 CAN fault lost 3 40 Yes ABS Modulator

communication Communication
with ABS
module or ABS
system status
error
P1552 Cooling fan 3 40 Yes Cooling Fan Relay

relay short
circuit to
ground or
open circuit
425
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P1553 Cooling fan 3 40 Yes Cooling Fan Relay

relay short
circuit to
battery Voltage
or over temp

malfunction

correlation
error with
brake switch 2

correlation
error with
brake switch 1
P1604 ECM tamper 0 0 Yes Engine ECM Tamper

detected Detected
return to
Triumph
P1605 ECM locked by Only if Flashing Tune Lock

the tune lock tune lock
function is
unlocked
P1607 ECM ride by 3 40 Yes Engine ECM Internal

wire internal Error
error
P1608 ECM ride by 3 40 Yes Engine ECM Internal

wire internal Error
error
426
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P1614 Instrument ID Only if Flashing Instrument ID

incompatible Instrument Incompatible
ID
Matching
P1619 Headlamp 0 40 No Headlight Relay

relay short
circuit to
ground or
open circuit
P1620 Headlamp 0 40 No Headlight Relay

relay short
circuit to
battery Voltage
P1631 Fall detection 3 40 Yes Fall Detection Switch

circuit short
circuit to
ground
P1632 Fall detection 3 40 Yes Fall Detection Switch

circuit short
circuit to
battery Voltage
P1650 CAN fault lost 3 40 Yes Immobiliser Control

communication Module
with Communication
Immobiliser
ECM
P1659 Ignition power 3 40 Yes EMS Ignition Voltage

supply Input Circuit
malfunction
P1685 Main relay 3 40 Yes EMS Main Relay

circuit Circuit
malfunction
427
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P1690 CAN Fault 3 40 Yes CAN Communication
P1695 CAN fault lost 0 40 No Instrument

communication Communication (CAN)
with
Instrument
panel
P1698 5 Volt sensor 3 40 Yes 5 Volt Sensor Supply

supply Circuit
malfunction
P2100 Throttle 3 40 Yes Throttle Actuator Motor

actuator
control motor
open circuit
P2102 Throttle 3 40 Yes Throttle Valve Drive

actuator Error
control internal
motor relay
does not
operate
P2103 Throttle 3 40 Yes Throttle Valve Drive

actuator Error
control internal
motor relay
operates
continually
P2111 Throttle valve 3 40 Yes Throttle Valve Drive

drive error Error
(stuck open)
P2119 Throttle valve 3 40 Yes Throttle Valve Drive

drive error Error
428
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
2120 Twist grip 3 40 Yes Twist Grip Position 1

position sensor
1 short circuit
to ground or
open circuit
P2123 Twist grip 3 40 Yes Twist Grip Position 1

position sensor
1 short circuit
to battery
Voltage

position sensor
2 short circuit
to ground or
open circuit

position sensor
2 short circuit
to battery
Voltage

1 correlation
error with
throttle
position sensor
2
P2138 Twist grip 3 40 Yes Twist Grip Position

position sensor Sensor 1 Correlation
1 correlation Error with Twist Grip
error with twist Position 2
grip position
sensor 2
429
turning off before
MIL DTC is
erased
P2226 Ambient air 3 40 Yes Ambient Air Pressure

pressure Sensor
sensor circuit
open circuit or
short circuit to
5 Volt sensor
supply
P2228 Ambient air 3 40 Yes Ambient Air Pressure

pressure Sensor
sensor circuit
short circuit to
ground
5/7/2017 Immobiliser Control Module Diagnostic Trouble Codes
430
Immobiliser Control Module Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are logged in the immobiliser/TPMS control module memory
when there is a confirmed fault in the system.
The codes are reported to the Triumph Diagnostic Tool as a four digit code.
The system will log the Diagnostic Trouble Codes listed below:
Diagnostic Fault Description Warning Light/Information
Trouble Code
(DTC)
L0008 Invalid key: Key authentication Alarm/Immobiliser light ON

unsuccessful
5/7/2017 Further Diagnosis
431
Further Diagnosis
The tables that follow will, if used correctly, help to pinpoint a fault in the system once a
diagnostic trouble code has been stored.
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Sensor
432
Crankshaft Sensor
Fault Code Possible cause Action
P0335 Crankshaft sensor circuit View and note diagnostic software

malfunction 'freezeframe' data if available.
Ensure sensor is fitted correctly and
connector is secure.
Disconnect the engine ECM and
proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check terminal and cable integrity: OK Disconnect sensor and proceed
ECM pin A35 to test 2
ECM pin A36
Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 6
2 Check cable for short circuit: OK Proceed to test 3
ECM pin A35 to ground
ECM pin A36 to ground Short Locate and rectify wiring fault,
circuit proceed to test 6
3 Check cable continuity: OK Proceed to test 4
ECM pin A35 to sensor pin 1
ECM pin A36 to sensor pin 2 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin A35 to ECM pin A36
Short Locate and rectify wiring fault,
5 Check crankshaft toothed wheel: OK Renew crankshaft sensor,
Damage to teeth magnetic debris proceed to test 6
contamination
Faulty Clean/renew toothed wheel,
proceed to test 6
6 Reconnect harness, clear fault code OK Action complete quit test
and run engine to verify fault
cleared.
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Sensor
433
Test Result Action
Fault still Contact Triumph service
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Fuel Injectors
434
Fuel Injectors
P0201 Injector 1 circuit malfunction View and note diagnostic software

'freezeframe' data if available.
Ensure relevant injector connector is
secure.
P0202 Injector 2 circuit malfunction
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Proceed to test 2
ECM pin A10
ECM pin A11 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 7
2 Check resistance value: 11.4 to 13 Proceed to test 3

ECM pin A01 to ECM pin A10 Ohms
(injector 1)
ECM pin A01 to ECM pin A11 Open Disconnect relevant injector and
(injector 2) circuit proceed to test 4
Short Disconnect relevant injector and
3 Check cable for short circuit to OK Proceed to test 7
ground:
ECM pin A11 to ground circuit proceed to test 7
EMS relay pin 5 to relevant injector
pin 2
Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin A10 to injector 1 pin 1
ECM pin A11 to injector 2 pin 1
5 Check cable for short circuit to OK Proceed to test 6
supply box:
(injector 1) circuit proceed to test 7
(injector 2)
5/7/2017 Fuel Injectors
435
Test Result Action
6 Check relevant injector resistance: 11.4 to Proceed to test 7
Injector pin 1 to injector pin 2 12.6 Ohms
Faulty Renew relevant injector, proceed
to test 7
cleared.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Throttle Position Sensor
436
Throttle Position Sensor
P0120 Throttle position sensor 1 View and note diagnostic software

short circuit to battery 'freezeframe' data if available.
Voltage or open circuit View and note diagnostic software
'sensor' data.
P0122 Throttle position sensor 1 Ensure throttle position sensor
short circuit to ground connector is secure. Disconnect the
engine ECM and proceed to pinpoint
test 1:
P0220 Throttle position sensor 2
short circuit to battery
Voltage or open circuit
short circuit to ground
correlation error with throttle
position sensor 2
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect sensor and proceed
ECM pin B19 to test 2
ECM pin B33
ECM pin B20
ECM pin B26
ECM pin B20 to ground
ECM pin B26 to ground Short Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin B20 to throttle position
sensor connector pin 1
ECM pin B26 throttle position
437
Test Result Action
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew the throttle body, proceed
ECM pin B33 to ECM pin B20 to test 5
ECM pin B33 to ECM pin B26
cleared.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Purge Valve
438
Purge Valve
P0443 Purge valve short circuit to View and note diagnostic software

ground or open circuit 'sensor' data.
Ensure purge valve connector is
secure.
P0459 Purge valve short circuit to Disconnect the purge valve and

battery Voltage proceed to pinpoint test 5:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin B06
EMS relay pin 5 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 7
2 Check resistance value: 22 to 30 Proceed to test 3

ECM pin A01 to ECM pin B06 Ohms
Open Disconnect purge valve and
Short Disconnect purge valve and
EMS relay pin 5 to valve pin 2
ECM pin B06 to valve pin 1 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin A01 to ECM pin B06
5/7/2017 Purge Valve
439
Test Result Action
6 Check purge valve resistance: 22 to 30 Proceed to test 7

Valve pin 1 to valve pin 2 Ohms
Faulty Renew purge valve, proceed to
test 7
and run diagnostic software function
test to visually verify operation of
purge valve. Fault still Contact Triumph service
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Ignition Coils
440
Ignition Coils
P0351 Ignition coil 1 malfunction View and note diagnostic software

'freezeframe' data if available.
Ensure relevant ignition coil
P0352 Ignition coil 2 malfunction
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin B14
ECM pin B15
EMS relay pin 5
2 Check resistance value: 3.0 to 4.2 Proceed to test 3

ECM pin A01 to Ohms
ECM pin B14 (ignition coil 1)
ECM pin B15 (ignition coil 2) Open Disconnect relevant ignition coil
circuit and proceed to test 4
Short Disconnect relevant ignition coil
EMS relay pin 5 to relevant ignition
coil pin
ECM pin B14 to ignition coil 1 pin 1
ECM pin B15 to ignition coil 2 pin 1
5 Check relevant ignition coil 3.0 to 4.2 Proceed to test 6

resistance: Ohms
Ignition coil pin 1 to ignition coil pin
2
5/7/2017 Ignition Coils
441
Test Result Action
Faulty Renew relevant ignition coil,
proceed to test 6
cleared.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Coolant Temperature Sensor
442
Coolant Temperature Sensor
P0115 Engine coolant temperature View and note diagnostic software

sensor open circuit or short 'freezeframe' data if available.
circuit to 5 Volt sensor View and note diagnostic software
supply 'sensor' data.
Ensure sensor connector is secure.
P0117 Engine coolant temperature Disconnect temperature sensor and

sensor short circuit to proceed to pinpoint test 6:
ground
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin B40
2 Check resistance value: OK Proceed to test 6
(Temperature dependent see Open Disconnect temperature sensor
Resistance data under typical circuit and proceed to test 3
conditions table)
Short Disconnect temperature sensor
ECM pin B40 to sensor pin 1
Ground to sensor pin 2 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin B40 to ECM pin A01
5 Check sensor resistance: OK Proceed to test 7
Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2
(Temperature dependent see
443
TestResistance data under typical Result Action
conditions table)
Faulty Renew temperature sensor,
proceed to test 7
cleared.
present
Resistance data under typical conditions:
Cold engine: Resistance Value
20ºC ambient 2.22 to 2.71 K Ohms
10ºC ambient 8.50 to 10.25 K Ohms
Warm engine: Resistance Value
100 to 400 Ohms
Circuit Diagram
444
5/7/2017 Inlet Air Temperature Sensor
445
Inlet Air Temperature Sensor
P0110 Intake air temperature View and note diagnostic software

sensor open circuit or short 'freezeframe' data if available.
circuit to 5 Volt sensor View and note diagnostic software
supply 'sensor' data.
P0112 Intake air temperature Disconnect the engine ECM and inlet

sensor short circuit to air temperature sensor and proceed
ground to pinpoint test 6:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin B42
2 Check resistance value: OK Proceed to test 6
(Temperature dependent see Open Disconnect temp sensor and
Resistance data) circuit proceed to test 3
Short Disconnect temp sensor and
Ground to sensor pin 2 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
5 Check sensor resistance: OK Proceed to test 7
Sensor pin 1 to sensor pin 2
(Temperature dependent see
446
TestResistance data) Result Action
Faulty Renew air temperature sensor,
proceed to test 7
cleared.
present
Resistance data:
If engine is warm, remove the sensor and allow time to cool to ambient temperature prior to
test.
Ambient Temperature Resistance Value
80ºC 200 to 400 Ohms
20ºC 2.35 to 2.65 K Ohms
10ºC 8.50 to 10.25 K Ohms
Circuit Diagram
447
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Relay
448
Fuel Pump Relay
P1231 Fuel pump relay short circuit Check if pump runs briefly when

to ground or open circuit ignition is switched on.
Ensure fuel pump relay connector is
secure.
P1232 Fuel pump relay short circuit Disconnect the engine ECM and fuel

to battery Voltage pump relay and proceed to pinpoint
test 4:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect fuel pump relay and
ECM pin A26 proceed to test 2
Alarm pin 1
Alarm pin 2 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
ECM pin A26 to fuel pump relay pin
2 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
Alarm pin 1 to fuel pump relay pin 1 circuit proceed to test 5
test to verify fault cleared.
present
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Relay
449
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 System Voltage
450
System Voltage
P0560 System voltage battery View and note diagnostic software

circuit malfunction 'sensor' data.
Ensure voltage across battery is
greater than 12.0 Volts, note voltage.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin A01
ECM pin A13
EMS relay pin 5
2 With Ignition on check voltage at: Same as Proceed to test 3

ECM pin A01 across
battery
voltage
Less than Locate and rectify wiring fault,
across proceed to test 3
battery
voltage
and run engine to verify fault cleared.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 System Voltage
451
5/7/2017 Cooling Fan Relay
452
Cooling Fan Relay
P1552 Cooling fan relay short View and note diagnostic software

circuit to ground or open 'sensor' data.
circuit Ensure fan relay connector is secure.
P1553 Cooling fan relay short Disconnect the engine ECM and fan

circuit to battery Voltage or relay and proceed to pinpoint test 4:
over temp
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect fan relay and proceed
ECM pin A27 to test 2
EMS relay pin 5
ECM pin A27 to fan relay pin 2
EMS relay pin 5 to fan relay pin 1 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
test to visually verify operation of
cooling fan. Fault still Contact Triumph service
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Cooling Fan Relay
453
5/7/2017 Oxygen Sensor
454
Oxygen Sensor
P0130 Oxygen sensor 1 open View and note 'freezeframe' data if

circuit or short circuit to available.
battery Voltage View and note 'sensor' data.
P0131 Oxygen sensor 1 short Disconnect the engine ECM and
circuit to ground proceed to pinpoint test 1:
P0150 Oxygen sensor 2 circuit
open circuit or short circuit
to battery Voltage
P0151 Oxygen sensor 2 short
circuit to ground
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect oxygen sensors and
ECM pin B02 proceed to test 2
ECM pin B03
EMS relay pin 5 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
ECM pin B02 to left hand oxygen
sensor pin 4
ECM pin B03 to right hand oxygen Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
sensor pin 4 circuit proceed to test 4
ECM pin A01 to relevant oxygen
sensor pin 3
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew relevant oxygen sensor,
ECM pin A01 to ECM pin B02 (left proceed to test 5
hand oxygen sensor)
ECM pin A01 to ECM pin B03 (right Short Locate and rectify wiring fault,
hand oxygen sensor) circuit proceed to test 5
5/7/2017 Oxygen Sensor
455
Test Result Action
and run engine.
Check adaption status. Fault still Contact Triumph service
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Oxygen Sensor Heater
456
Oxygen Sensor Heater
P0030 Oxygen sensor 1 heater View and note 'freezeframe' data if

open circuit or short to available.
ground View and note 'sensor' data.
P0050 Oxygen sensor 2 heater Disconnect the engine ECM and
open circuit or short to proceed to pinpoint test 1:
ground
P0032 Oxygen sensor 1 heater Disconnect oxygen sensor and

short circuit to battery proceed to pinpoint test 4:
Voltage
P0052 Oxygen sensor 2 heater
short circuit to battery
Voltage
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect oxygen sensors and
ECM pin A22
ECM pin A21 to left hand oxygen
sensor pin 2
ECM pin A22 to right hand oxygen circuit proceed to test 5
sensor pin 2
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew relevant oxygen sensor
ECM pin A01 to ECM pin A21 (left and proceed to test 5
hand oxygen sensor)
ECM pin A01 to ECM pin A22 (right Short Locate and rectify wiring fault,
hand oxygen sensor) circuit proceed to test 5
5/7/2017 Oxygen Sensor Heater
457
Test Result Action
and run engine.
Check adaption status. Fault still Contact Triumph service
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Starter Motor Relay
458
Starter Motor Relay
P0616 Starter relay short circuit to Ensure starter motor relay connector

ground or open circuit is secure.
P0617 Starter relay short circuit to Disconnect the engine ECM and

battery Voltage starter motor relay proceed to
pinpoint test 4:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect starter relay and
ECM pin A19
Starter Relay pin 1
Starter Relay pin 2
ECM pin B25 to starter relay pin 2
ECM pin A19 to starter relay pin 1 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
and run engine to verify fault cleared
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Starter Motor Relay
459
5/7/2017 Fall Detection Switch
460
Fall Detection Switch
P1631 Fall detection circuit short View and note 'freezeframe' data if

circuit to ground available.
View and note 'sensor' data.
Ensure switch connector is secure.
P1632 Fall detection circuit short
circuit to battery Voltage Disconnect the engine ECM and
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin B34
ECM pin B38
Sensor pin 4, 5, 6
ECM pin B38 to ECM pin B34 Short Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin B18 to sensor pin 6 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
4 Reconnect harness, clear fault code. OK Action complete quit test
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Fall Detection Switch
461
5/7/2017 CAN Communication
462
CAN Communication
P1690 CAN Fault View and note 'freezeframe' data if

available.
Ensure Instrument connector is
secure.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect instruments and
ECM pin A33
Instrument pin 9
Instrument pin 10
ABS module pin 2
ABS module pin 11
Immobiliser module pin 1 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
Immobiliser module pin 6
Bluetooth® module pin 3 ‡
Bluetooth® module pin 4 ‡
ECM pin A34 to Instrument pin
TBA Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin A33 to Instrument pin circuit proceed to test 5
TBA
ECM pin A34 to ABS control
module pin 11
ECM pin A33 to ABS control
module pin 2
ECM pin A34 to Immobiliser
463
module pin 1
ECM pin A33 to Immobiliser
module pin 6
ECM pin A34 to Bluetooth® module
pin 4 ‡
ECM pin A33 to Bluetooth® module
pin 3 ‡
and run engine.
present
‡ Bluetooth® is an optional accessory.
Circuit Diagram
464
5/7/2017 Instrument Communication (CAN)
465
Instrument Communication (CAN)
P1695 CAN fault lost View and note 'freezeframe' data if

communication with available.
Instrument panel Disconnect the engine ECM and
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect instruments and
ECM pin A34
Instrument pin 9
Instrument pin 10
ECM pin A33 to Instrument pin
TBA
ECM pin A34 to Instrument pin circuit proceed to test 5
TBA
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Instrument Communication (CAN)
466
5/7/2017 Ambient Air Pressure Sensor
467
Ambient Air Pressure Sensor
P2228 Ambient air pressure sensor View and note 'freezeframe' data if

circuit short circuit to ground available.
P2226 Ambient air pressure sensor Ensure sensor connector is secure.
circuit open circuit or short Disconnect the engine ECM and
circuit to 5 Volt sensor proceed to pinpoint test 1:
supply
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect ambient pressure
ECM pin B18 sensor and proceed to test 2
ECM pin B34
ECM pin B41
Sensor pin 1, 2, 3
3 Check cable for continuity: OK Renew ambient pressure sensor
ECM pin B34 to sensor pin 3 and proceed to test 4
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Ambient Air Pressure Sensor
468
5/7/2017 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
469
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
P0107 Manifold absolute pressure View and note 'freezeframe' data if

sensor 1 short circuit to available.
ground View and note 'sensor' data.
P0105 Manifold absolute pressure Disconnect the engine ECM and
sensor 1 open circuit or proceed to pinpoint test 1:
short circuit to 5 Volt sensor
supply
P1105 Manifold absolute pressure Check connection/condition of pipes

sensor 1 pipe malfunction from MAP sensors to throttle body.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect MAP sensors and
ECM pin B34
ECM pin B36
Sensor pin 1, 2, 3
3 Check cable for continuity: OK Renew relevant MAP pressure
ECM pin B34 to MAP sensor pin 3 sensor, proceed to test 4
ECM pin B18 to MAP sensor pin 1
ECM pin B36 to MAP sensor pin 2 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
470
5/7/2017 Gear Position Sensor
471
Gear Position Sensor
P0914 Gear position sensor short View and note 'freezeframe' data if

circuit to ground or open available.
circuit View and note 'sensor' data.
P0917 Gear position sensor short Disconnect the engine ECM and
circuit to 5 Volt sensor proceed to pinpoint test 1:
supply
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin B44
ECM pin B44 to ground circuit proceed to test 5
ECM pin B34 to sensor pin 4 circuit proceed to test 5
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew gear position sensor and
ECM pin B23 to ECM pin B44 contact pin and proceed to test 5
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Gear Position Sensor
472
5/7/2017 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit
473
Fuel Level Sensor Circuit
P0460 Fuel level sensor circuit View and note 'freezeframe' data if

malfunction available.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit
474
5/7/2017 EMS Main Relay Circuit
475
EMS Main Relay Circuit
P1685 Main relay circuit Note that the starter motor cannot be

malfunction powered if a main relay fault exists.
Ensure the EMS main relay
Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Ensure ignition has been switched OK Proceed to test 4
off for greater than 90 seconds.
Identify EMS main relay on the
harness.
Check that relay operates when the Faulty Disconnect EMS main relay and
ignition is switched ON and the stop engine ECM. Proceed to test 4
and run switch is in the RUN
position.
circuit replace Fuse 5 and proceed to
test 6
3 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect main relay and
EMS main relay pin 1
EMS main relay pin 3 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
4 Check fuse box fuse 2 integrity OK Proceed to test 5
Short Replace fuse and proceed to test
circuit 5
5 Check cable continuity: OK Replace EMS main relay and
ECM pin A01 to EMS main relay proceed to test 6
pin 5
ECM pin B31 to EMS relay pin 1
EMS main relay pin 2 to ground
5/7/2017 EMS Main Relay Circuit
476
Test EMS main relay pin 3 to fuse box Result Action
fuse 2
Switch ignition off for longer than 90
seconds. Switch ignition on and
check that the EMS main relay Fault still Contact Triumph service
operates. Start engine as final present
check.
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 EMS Ignition Voltage Input Circuit
477
EMS Ignition Voltage Input Circuit
P1659 Ignition power supply Disconnect the engine ECM and

malfunction proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check fuse box Fuse 7 integrity. OK Proceed to test 3
Faulty Proceed to test 2
2 Check cable for short circuit: OK Replace Fuse 7
ECM pin B01 to ground and proceed to test 3
circuit replace Fuse 7
and proceed to test 5
ECM pin B01
Alarm connector pin 1
Alarm connector pin 2
Right hand switch housing pin 1 (8 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
pin connector)
Right hand switch housing pin 2 (8
pin connector)
ECM pin B01 to fuse box Fuse 7
Note that the engine stop switch Open Locate and rectify wiring,
must be in the RUN position and any circuit immobiliser or engine stop switch
alarm fitted must be disarmed. fault, proceed to test 5
cleared.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 EMS Ignition Voltage Input Circuit
478
5/7/2017 5 Volt Sensor Supply Circuit
479
5 Volt Sensor Supply Circuit
P1698 5 Volt sensor supply View and note 'sensor' data. Note

malfunction ECM sensors requiring a power
supply will not be active.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
ECM pin B18
ECM pin B34 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
2 Check cable for short circuit OK Proceed to test 4
3 Disconnect the following sensors in OK Replace sensor last removed
turn: and proceed to test 5
MAP sensor
Ambient pressure sensor
Fall detection sensor
Fuel level sensor
Side stand switch
Gear position sensor
and retest for short circuit
ECM pin B18 to A01
ECM pin B34 to A01 circuit proceed to test 5
ECM pin B18 to battery positive
ECM pin B34 to battery positive
and use diagnostic software to check
5/7/2017 5 Volt Sensor Supply Circuit
480
Testfor correct sensor outputs and 5 volt Result Action
sensor supply voltage level.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Twist Grip Position 1
481
Twist Grip Position 1
P2120 Twist grip position sensor 1 View and note 'sensor' data. Note

short circuit to ground or ECM sensors requiring a power
open circuit supply will not be active.
Ensure twist grip position sensor is
P2123 Twist grip position sensor 1 secure.
short circuit to battery Disconnect the engine ECM and
Voltage proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect twist grip position
ECM pin B21
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew twist grip position sensor,
ECM pin B21 to ECM pin B17 proceed to test 5
present
Circuit Diagram
482
5/7/2017 Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2
483
Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip
Position 2
P2138 Twist grip position sensor 1 View and note diagnostic tool freeze

correlation error with twist frame data if available.
grip position sensor 2 View and note diagnostic tool sensor
data.
Disconnect twist grip position sensor
and proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Turn the ignition on and measure the 5V DC Proceed to test 2

Voltage between:
ECM pin B33 and ECM pin B19
ECM pin B17 and ECM pin B35
2 Check cable continuity: OK Renew the twist grip and proceed
ECM pin B21 to sensor pin 2 to test 3
Open Rectify fault, proceed to test 3
circuit
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Twist Grip Position Sensor 1 Correlation Error with Twist Grip Position 2
484
485
Twist Grip Position 2
P2125 Twist grip position sensor 2 View and note 'sensor' data. Note

short circuit to ground or ECM sensors requiring a power
open circuit supply will not be active.
Ensure twist grip position sensor is
P2128 Twist grip position sensor 2 secure.
short circuit to battery Disconnect the engine ECM and
Voltage proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect twist grip position
ECM pin B28
ECM pin B28 to ECM pin B19 proceed to test 5
present
Circuit Diagram
486
5/7/2017 Throttle Actuator Motor
487
Throttle Actuator Motor
P2100 Throttle actuator short circuit View and note diagnostic tool freeze

to ground or short circuit to frame data if available.
battery Voltage View and note diagnostic tool sensor
Throttle actuator with default data.
spring open circuit Ensure throttle actuator motor
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect throttle actuator
ECM pin A02 connector and proceed to test 2
ECM pin A03
Throttle actuator motor connector
pin 1
Throttle actuator motor connector
pin 2
ECM pin A03 to ECM pin A01 Short Locate and rectify wiring fault,
Throttle actuator motor connector proceed to test 5
pin 1
Throttle actuator motor connector Short Renew throttle body and proceed
pin 2 circuit to test 5
and run engine.
present
488
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Immobiliser Control Module Communication
489
Immobiliser Control Module Communication

communication with available.
Immobiliser ECM Ensure immobiliser control module
Ensure the ignition switch is turned to
the OFF position.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check fuse box Fuse 7 integrity. OK Proceed to test 2
2 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect the engine ECM and
ECM pin A34
Immobiliser pin 1
Immobiliser pin 2
Immobiliser pin 6 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 6
Immobiliser pin 7
Immobiliser pin 8
3 Check cable for short circuit: OK Disconnect immobiliser, ignition
ECM pin A33 to ground switch and proceed to test 4
Faulty Locate and rectify wiring fault,
proceed to test 6
Immobiliser pin 2 to ground
Immobiliser pin 8 to ground Faulty Locate and rectify wiring fault,
replace relevant fuse, proceed to
test 6
ECM pin A33 to immobiliser pin 6
ECM pin A34 to Immobiliser pin 1
5/7/2017 Immobiliser Control Module Communication
490
Test Immobiliser pin 7 to ground Result Action
Fuse box Fuse 7 to immobiliser pin
2 Fault still Locate and rectify wiring fault,
Fuse box Fuse 7 to immobiliser pin present proceed to test 6
8
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 ABS Modulator Communication
491
ABS Modulator Communication

communication with ABS available.
module or ABS system Ensure ABS modulator connector is
status error secure.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
3 Check fuse box Fuse 5 and 7 OK Proceed to test 2
integrity.
2 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect the engine ECM and
ECM pin A34
ABS modulator pin 2
ABS modulator pin 4
ABS modulator pin 10 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 6
ABS modulator pin 11
ABS modulator pin 18
3 Check cable for short circuit: OK Disconnect ABS modulator and
ECM pin A33 to ground proceed to test 4
proceed to test 6
ABS pin 2 to ground
ABS pin 11 to ground Faulty Locate and rectify wiring fault,
test 6
ECM pin A33 to ABS pin 2
ECM pin A34 to ABS pin 11
ABS pin 4 to ground
Fuse box Fuse 5 to ABS pin 18
5/7/2017 ABS Modulator Communication
Fuse box Fuse 7 to ABS pin 4
492
Test Result Action
Fault still Locate and rectify wiring fault,
present proceed to test 6
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Brake Switches
493
Brake Switches
P0571 Brake 1 switch malfunction View and note freeze frame data if

available.
P1576 Brake 1 switch correlation Ensure brake switches connectors
error with brake switch 2 are secure.
Disconnect engine ECM and proceed
to pinpoint test 1:
P1571 Brake 2 switch malfunction
P1577 Brake 2 switch correlation
error with brake switch 1
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Turn ignition on, operate rear brake OK Proceed to test 2
switch and check brake light
operation
proceed to test 7
2 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect front and rear brake
ECM pin A06 switches connector, proceed to
test 4
ECM pin A07
Ignition switch pin 8
3 With all brakes released, check front OK Proceed to test 4
and rear brake switch operation:
The following should be circuit
continuity
Front brake switch pin 2 to pin 3
Rear brake light switch pin 2 to pin Faulty Replace relevant brake switch,
3 proceed to test 7
The following should be open circuit
Rear brake light switch pin 1 to pin
3
4 With both brakes applied, check OK Proceed to test 5
brake switch operation:
The following should be open circuit
Rear brake switch pin 2 to pin 3
494
Test Result Action
The following should be short circuit
Front brake switch pin 1 to pin 3 Faulty Replace relevant brake switch,
Rear brake switch pin 1 to pin 3 proceed to test 7
5 Check cables continuity: OK Proceed to test 6
ECM pin A07 to front brake switch
pin 1 Open Locate and rectify wiring fault,
ECM pin A07 to rear brake switch Circuit proceed to test 7
pin 1
ECM pin A06 to rear brake switch
pin 1
Front brake switch pin 2 to rear
brake switch pin 3
Ignition switch pin 8 to front brake
switch pin 3
6 With the ignition on, measure the Greater Proceed to test 7

following Voltages back to battery than 10V
negative:
Rear brake switch pin 2
Rear brake switch pin 3 Less than Locate and rectify wiring fault,
Front brake switch pin 2 10V proceed to test 7
Front brake switch pin 3
Ignition switch pin 8
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
495
5/7/2017 Headlight Relay
496
Headlight Relay
P1619 Headlight relay short circuit View and note 'freezeframe' data if

to ground or open circuit available.
P1620 Headlight relay short circuit Disconnect the engine ECM and

to battery Voltage headlight relay and proceed to
pinpoint test 4:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal integrity: OK Disconnect headlight relay and
Headlight relay pin 1
Headlight relay pin 2
Check fuse box fuse 7 integrity
test 5
3 Check cable continuity: OK Renew headlight relay, proceed
ECM pin A18 to headlight relay pin to test 5
1
Fuse box Fuse 7 to headlight relay Faulty Locate and rectify wiring fault,
pin 2 proceed to test 5
4 Check cable for short circuit: OK Renew headlight relay, proceed
ECM pin A18 to fuse box fuse 7 to test 5
Short Renew headlight relay, proceed
circuit to test 5
and run engine.
present
5/7/2017 Headlight Relay
497
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Oxygen Sensor Reverse Connection
498
Oxygen Sensor Reverse Connection
P1131 Oxygen sensor circuits Check oxygen sensor connections

reversed and swap cylinder number 1 and
cylinder number 2 connections if
incorrect.
5/7/2017 EEPROM Error
499
EEPROM Error
P0603 EEPROM error View and note 'freeze frame'

data if available.
No tests available contact
Triumph service.
5/7/2017 Engine ECM Internal Error
500
Engine ECM Internal Error
P0606 Engine ECM internal error Contact Triumph service.
P1607 Engine ECM ride by wire
P1608 internal error
5/7/2017 Traction Control Prevented Due to ABS Malfunction
501
Traction Control Prevented Due to ABS Malfunction
P1135 Traction Control prevented Check that there is no other DTC

due to ABS malfunction linked to the ABS system or CAN
communication stored.
Contact Triumph service.
5/7/2017 Throttle Valve Drive Error
502
Throttle Valve Drive Error
P2111 Throttle valve drive error View and note 'freezeframe' data if

(stuck open) available.
P2119 Throttle valve drive error Check throttle body for mechanical
malfunctions. Clear fault code and
contact Triumph service if fault is still
P2102 Throttle actuator control present.
internal motor relay does not
operate
P2103 Throttle actuator control
internal motor relay operates
continually
5/7/2017 Tune Lock
503
Tune Lock
P1605 Engine ECM locked by the This is also identified by a fast

tune lock function flashing MIL indication, and a
disabled engine management
system.
Unlock the engine ECM using the
diagnostic software and supplied
unlock code from Triumph service.
5/7/2017 Instrument ID Incompatible
504
Instrument ID Incompatible
P1614 Instrument ID incompatible This is also identified by a fast

flashing MIL indication, and a
disabled engine management
system.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check engine ECM part number is OK Proceed to test 2
correct for the motorcycle.
Incorrect Replace engine ECM with correct
part and proceed to test 3
2 Check that the calibration is correct OK Proceed to test 3
for the motorcycle, using the
diagnostic software.
Incorrect Update calibration using
diagnostic software, proceed to
test 3
3 Clear fault code, check for normal OK Action complete quit test
operation.
present
5/7/2017 Immobiliser and TPMS Control Module ID Incompatable
505
Immobiliser and TPMS Control Module ID Incompatable
P1508 Unmatched This is also identified by a

Immobiliser/chassis ECM, fast flashing MIL indication
causing the engine ECM to and a disabled engine
be disabled to prevent the management system.
motorcycle from being
operated
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Follow the Pair ECM and OK Action complete quit test
Immobiliser procedure as
described in the Triumph
Diagnostic Tool user guide Fault still Contact Triumph service
present
5/7/2017 ABS Modulator ID Incompatible
506
ABS Modulator ID Incompatible
P1520 Unmatched ABS module This is also identified by

ABS warning light indication.
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check ABS modulator part number OK Proceed to test 2
is correct for the motorcycle.
Incorrect Replace ABS modulator with
correct part and proceed to test 3
2 Check that the calibration is correct OK Proceed to test 3
for the motorcycle, using the
diagnostic tool.
Incorrect Update calibration using service
tool, proceed to test 3
3 Clear fault code, check for normal OK Action complete quit test
operation.
present
5/7/2017 Engine ECM Tamper Detected
507
Engine ECM Tamper Detected
P1604 Engine ECM tamper Contact Triumph service

detected return to Triumph
5/7/2017 Vehicle Speed Sensor
508
Vehicle Speed Sensor
P0500 Wheel speed sensor fault Refer to the following ABS

DTCs.
Front Wheel Sensor
Abnormal Input/Losing
Contact
Rear Wheel Sensor
Abnormal Input/Losing
Contact
Front Wheel Sensor Open
Circuit/Short Circuit
Rear Wheel Sensor Open
Circuit/Short Circuit
5/7/2017 Fault Finding – Non Electrical
509
Fault Finding – Non Electrical
Symptom Possible cause(s)
Poor throttle response at low rpm Low fuel pressure caused by filter
blockage/leaks
Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel
pipes to the fuel pump and filter
Cutting out at idle Throttle bodies out of balance
Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel
Low fuel pressure
Weak mixture caused by air leak at the
throttle body/transition piece to cylinder head
face
Idle speed too low/high Incorrect closed throttle position setting
Diagnostic software malfunctions during Low battery voltage
tune download procedure
Throttle hangup Incorrect closed throttle position setting
Bike will start but cuts out immediately Low fuel pressure caused by loose fuel
Low fuel pressure due to split fuel filter
Abnormally high fuel pressure Fuel pressure regulator inoperative
Temperature gauge reads cooler than Cooling system air–locked resulting in
normal coolant temperature sensor operating in air
instead of coolant
Thermostat fault
5/7/2017 Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful
510
Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful
L0008 Invalid key: Key Check that the key has been

or authentication unsuccessful registered with the immobiliser control
module, if it is a new key or an
Alarm/immobiliser additional key.
warning indicator
light is on when the Check that there are no additional
ignition switch is at keys with a transponder chip fitted
the ON position close to the ignition key and proceed
(only visible on to pinpoint test 1:
motorcycles without
the accessory
alarm fitted)
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 If available, try to start the OK Transponder chip in the key not
motorcycle with the second functioning correctly. Register a
registered key: new key using the Triumph
Diagnostic Tool then proceed to
test 5
2 Check the condition of cable, OK Disconnect the ignition switch,
connector housing and terminals for proceed to test 3
the following:
Ignition switch
Immobiliser control module
3 Check antenna coil resistance: 7 to 13 Proceed to test 4

Ignition switch pin 2 to ignition Ohms
switch pin 7
Faulty Replace the ignition switch,
register new keys and proceed to
test 5
Ignition switch pin 2 to Immobiliser
control module pin 5 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
Ignition switch pin 7 to Immobiliser
control module pin 10
5/7/2017 Invalid Key: Key Authentication Unsuccessful
511
5 Test
Reconnect harness, clear fault code Result
OK Action
Action complete quit test
and run engine.
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Fuel Cap Cover Removal
512
Fuel Cap Cover Removal
WARNING
Observe the warning advice given in the General Information section on the safe handling of
fuel and fuel containers.
A fire, causing personal injury and damage to property could result from spilled fuel or fuel
not handled or stored correctly.
WARNING
1. Open the fuel cap cover and remove the fuel cap.
Note
Note that the chamfered edge of the plastic locking ring is uppermost for installation.
Note the four locating lugs on the plastic locking ring that fit into the cut outs in the
fuel tank filler neck.
2. Using a suitable proprietary lever, remove the plastic locking ring.
2
1
cjwf
1. Plastic locking ring
2. Locating lug (2 shown)
3. Turn the fuel cap cover anticlockwise to release its four locating lugs from the fuel tank filler
neck.
5/7/2017 Fuel Cap Cover Removal
513
3
1
2
cjwg
cjwg
1. Filler cap cover
2. Fuel tank filler neck
3. Locating lug in locked position
4. Locating lug in open position
4. Carefully lift off the fuel cap cover.
5/7/2017 Fuel Cap Cover Installation
514
Fuel Cap Cover Installation
WARNING
WARNING
Note
Note that the chamfered edge of the plastic locking ring is uppermost ad noted
during removal.
Note the four locating lugs on the plastic locking ring that fit into the cut outs in the
1. Position the fuel cap cover and then turn anticlockwise to lock its four locating lugs into the
cjwg
5/7/2017 Fuel Cap Cover Installation
515
3
1
2
cjwg
1. Filler cap cover
2. Fuel tank filler neck
3. Locating lug in locked position
4. Locating lug in open position
2. Refit the plastic locking ring.
2
1
cjwf
1. Plastic locking ring
2. Locating lug (2 shown)
3. Refit the fuel cap and check the operation of the lock
5/7/2017 Fuel Tank Removal
516
Fuel Tank Removal
WARNING
WARNING
1. Remove the fixing securing the rear of the fuel tank to the frame.
cjqk
1. Fixings
2. Pivot the fuel tank upwards at the rear.
3. Detach the breather hose from its retaining clips on the fuel tank then disconnect it from the
fuel tank.
517
2
cjpz
3
1. Breather hose
2. Retaining clips
3. Fuel tank spigot
4. Disconnect the electrical connectors for the fuel pump and the fuel level sensor from the
main harness.
2
1
ciwf
1. Fuel level sensor electrical connector
2. Fuel pump electrical connector
WARNING
518
If the fuel rail is dismantled without first reducing pressure, fuel may escape causing clothing
and components to be coated with fuel.
This would represent a serious fire hazard which could lead to burn injuries and damage to
property.
5. Temporarily reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first and tighten the terminals to 4.5
Nm.
Note
Because fuel stored in the fuel rail will be at 3.5 bar pressure, it is essential that the
fuel pressure is reduced before any dismantling of the fuel rail takes place. To reduce
pressure, briefly crank the engine with the fuel pump disconnected.
When disconnected, the fuel tank is selfsealing but a small amount of fuel may
dribble from the hose.
To protect the components under the fuel tank, place suitable material over the
components to absorb the small amount of fuel that may come from the fuel tank and
its fuel lines.
6. Briefly crank the engine to reduce the fuel pressure in the fuel rail.
7. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
8. To release the double check clip, ease the latch away from the connector until the release
buttons are exposed.
1 2
cekp
1. Locked Position
2. Unlocked Position
9. Disconnect the fuel hose by squeezing the sides of the connector and pulling the hose free
from its spigot on the fuel pump rail. Collect any fuel remaining in the hose in a suitable
container.
519
ciwd
1. Fuel hose
10. Detach the fuel pump and fuel level sensor electrical connectors from the ignition coil
bracket.
11. Slide the tank rearwards to detach it from the frame.
12. Take care not to lose the front mounting and rear mounting rubbers. Renew any mounting
rubber which shows signs of damage.
5/7/2017 Fuel Tank Installation
520
Fuel Tank Installation
WARNING
WARNING
1. Ensure the front and rear mounting rubbers are correctly fitted.
2. Manoeuvre the tank into position, engaging it with the front mounting rubbers.
3. Reconnect the fuel feed hose by gently pushing inwards until the hose engages with a click.
ciwd
1. Fuel hose
4. Slide the double check latch to the locked position until the release buttons are covered. If
the latch will not slide into position, then the fuel hose is not fully home on its spigot and
must therefore be refitted correctly.
5/7/2017 Fuel Tank Installation
521
1 2
cekp
1. Locked Position
2. Unlocked Position
5. Attach and connect the breather pipe to the fuel tank.
6. Connect the electrical connectors for the fuel pump and the fuel level sensor to the main
harness and attach them to the ignition coil bracket.
7. Lower the tank into position ensuring the breather pipe is not trapped, kinked or twisted.
8. Refit the rear fuel tank mounting retaining bolt.
9. Fit a new locknut, counterhold the bolt and tighten the new lock nut to 8 Nm.
10. Using proprietary professional automotive workshop equipment approved for fuel handling,
refill the fuel tank with any fuel removed earlier.
5/7/2017 Fuel Pressure Checking
522
Fuel Pressure Checking
WARNING
Observe the fuel handling precautions given in the General Information section.
Fuel pressure is checked using T3880001 Fuel Pressure Gauge.
T3880001 Fuel Pressure Gauge
Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Removal) and place on a suitable support, close to
the motorcycle.
1. Using the T3880391 Fuel Pump Extension Cable, carefully connect the fuel pump
connection on the main harness to the fuel tank.
2. Select the fuel pressure gauge adaptor marked 'A' from T3880001 Fuel Pressure Gauge.
WARNING
Always use the correct fuel pressure gauge adaptor. Use of an incorrect adaptor will result in
a fuel leak. A fuel leak can result in a fire causing damage to property and injury to persons.
3. Connect the adaptor hose to the fuel pump plate outlet and fuel hose as shown in the
illustration below.
523
2
1
1. Adaptor hose 'A'
2. T3880391 Fuel Pump Extension Cable
4. Connect the fuel pressure gauge to the adaptor hose as shown below by pushing the gauge
spigot into the adaptor until a click can be heard.
2
1
cdvr_2
1. adaptor hose
2. Fuel pressure gauge
Note
To release the fuel pressure gauge from the adaptor, slide the outer ferrule
downwards. This will allow the gauge to spring upwards from the adaptor.
5. Ensure the gauge is visible to the side of the motorcycle.
6. Start the engine and observe the fuel pressure reading on the gauge.
524
Note
The fuel pressure should be 3.5 bar nominally.
7. When fuel pressure checking is complete, disconnect the fuel pressure gauge adaptor and
wiring extension. Collect any fuel in the hose in a suitable container.
8. Refit the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Installation).
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Assembly Removal
525
Fuel Pump Assembly Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Never drain fuel from the tank using nonapproved, nonprofessional standard fuel handling
equipment. A fire causing destruction of property and injury to persons may result from use
of nonapproved fuel handling equipment.
drain all fuel from the fuel tank.
2. Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Removal).
3. Invert the fuel tank and place on a protective surface to prevent paint damage.
4. Remove the ring of fixings securing the fuel pump mounting plate to the tank.
ciwg
1. Fuel pump mounting plate
2. Fixing
5. Detach the pump assembly from the fuel tank.
6. Disconnect the fuel level sensor from the electrical connector on the fuel pump plate.
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Assembly Removal
7. Detach the Pclip for the fuel level sensor harness from the fuel pump bracket.
526
civy
2. Pclip
8. Remove the fuel pump assembly and discard the fuel pump plate seal.
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Assembly Inspection
527
Fuel Pump Assembly Inspection
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Assembly Installation
528
Fuel Pump Assembly Installation
WARNING
1. Position a new fuel pump plate seal to the fuel pump plate as noted for removal.
2. Route the fuel level sensor as noted for removal and connect it to the electrical connector
on the fuel pump plate.
3. Attach the Pclip for the fuel level sensor harness to the fuel pump bracket.
4. Refit the fuel pump assembly to the fuel tank. Fit and tighten the fixings to 5 Nm in the
sequence shown below.
3 1
5
10
8
9
L0137 2 4
Fuel Pump Plate Tightening Sequence
6. Refill the fuel tank with the fuel drained during removal, and check carefully for fuel leaks.
5/7/2017 Fuel Filter Removal
529
Fuel Filter Removal
WARNING
Remove the fuel pump assembly (see Fuel Tank Removal).
1. Release the two fuel hose clips from either side of the fuel filter.
2. Remove the hose bracket from the fuel pump bracket.
2
civv
1. Hose clips
2. Hose bracket
3. Carefully detach the baffle housing from the fuel pump.
530
1
civw
1. Baffle housing
2. Hose clip
4. Remove the fuel pump securing bolt and strap.
civx
1. Strap
2. Bolt
5. Disconnect the fuel pump hose from the fuel filter inlet.
6. Remove and discard the two fuel filter cable ties.
531
1
civv_1
1. Cable ties
Note
Prior to removing the filter, note the direction of the arrow on the side of the filter.
The arrow should point away from the fuel pump, towards the pressure regulator.
7. Remove the fuel filter from the outlet hose.
5/7/2017 Fuel filter Inspection
532
Fuel filter Inspection
5/7/2017 Fuel Filter Installation
533
Fuel Filter Installation
WARNING
1. Install the fuel filter to the outlet hose, ensuring the arrow on the filter points away from the
pump. Secure the hose with the hose clip.
2. Check and ensure that the feet of the rubber isolator engage correctly in the fork.
2
1
cevu
1. Fork
2. Isolator feet
3. Secure the fuel filter to the fuel pump bracket with two new cable ties.
4. Connect the fuel pump hose to the fuel filter and secure with the hose clip.
5. Refit the fuel pump securing bolt and strap and tighten the bolt to 4 Nm.
6. Refit the hose bracket to the fuel pump bracket and tighten its fixing to 7 Nm.
7. Carefully refit the baffle material into the front of the baffle housing.
8. Refit the baffle housing to the fuel pump as noted for removal.
Refit the fuel pump assembly (see Fuel Pump Assembly Installation).
5/7/2017 Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal
534
Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal
1. Remove and discard the circlip securing the fuel pressure regulator in its housing.
cixu
1. Circlip
2. Fuel pressure regulator
2. Remove the fuel pressure regulator from the fuel pump plate. Discard the large Oring from
the fuel pressure regulator and the small Oring in the pressure regulator housing.
1 3
cixv
1. Large Oring
2. Fuel pressure regulator
3. Small Oring
5/7/2017 Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal
535
5/7/2017 Pressure Regulator Inspection
536
Pressure Regulator Inspection
5/7/2017 Fuel Pressure Regulator Installation
537
Fuel Pressure Regulator Installation
1. Install new Orings to the fuel pressure regulator.
cixv_1
1. Orings
2. Apply a small amount of grease, conforming to NLGI 2 specification, to the two Orings.
3. Position the fuel pressure regulator squarley to the fuel pump plate and press it evenly into
its housing.
4. Secure the fuel pressure regulator with a new circlip.
5. Refit the hose and secure with the hose clip. Check for any fuel leaks and rectify if
necessary.
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Removal
538
Fuel Pump Removal
1. Release the fuel hose clip from the fuel pump side of the fuel filter.
2. Remove the hose bracket from the fuel pump bracket.
2
civv
1. Hose clips
2. Hose bracket
3. Release the hose clip securing the baffle housing to the fuel pump.
4. Reposition the hose clip and carefully slide the baffle housing off the fuel pump body.
Note
Note the orientation of the baffle housing for installation.
It is not necessary to disconnect the baffle housing hose from the fuel pressure
regulator unless it is to be removed at the same time as the fuel pump.
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Removal
539
1
civw
1. Baffle housing
2. Hose clip
5. Remove the baffle housing hose clip over the inlet filter.
6. Disconnect the fuel pump electrical connector.
7. Remove the fuel pump securing bolt and strap.
civx
1. Strap
2. Bolt
8. Detach the fuel pump and connector hose from the fuel pump bracket as an assembly.
9. If necessary, release the hose clip and remove the connector hose from the pump.
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Inspection
540
Fuel Pump Inspection
1. Inspect all hoses for cracks, splits, fraying and other damage. Replace as necessary.
2. Check all hose clamps for cracks and signs of distortion. Replace as necessary.
3. Check the mesh filter for damage and replace the fuel pump if necessary.
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Installation
541
Fuel Pump Installation
1. If removed, refit the connector hose to the fuel pump. Secure with the hose clip.
2. Position the fuel pump to the bracket, ensuring the feet of the rubber isolator engage
correctly in the fork.
2
1
cevu
1. Fork
2. Isolator feet
3. Align the fuel pump to the fuel pump bracket and fit the connector hose on to the fuel filter.
4. Fit the fuel pump strap, secure with a new bolt and tighten to 4 Nm.
civx
1. Strap
2. Bolt
5/7/2017 Fuel Pump Installation
542
5. Reconnect the fuel pump electrical connector.
6. Position the baffle housing hose clip loosely over the fuel pump body.
7. Check that the baffle material within the baffle housing is positioned as noted for removal.
8. Refit the baffle housing over the fuel pump, as noted for removal. Refit the hose clip and
tighten to 3 Nm.
5/7/2017 Fuel Level Sensor Removal
543
Fuel Level Sensor Removal
WARNING
Note
The fuel level sensor is located inside the fuel tank on the right hand side.
Access to the fuel level sensor is through the aperture for the fuel pump.
Note
The mounting for the fuel level sensor is located inside the fuel tank. The illustration
shows the bracket outside the fuel tank for clarity.
1. Release the locking device and slide the fuel level sensor up the bracket and release the
two locating lugs from the bracket.
1
2
cixt
1. Locking device
2. Locating lugs
3. Bracket
2. Remove the fuel level sensor.
5/7/2017 Fuel Level Sensor Installation
544
Fuel Level Sensor Installation
WARNING
1. Align the two locating lugs into the holes in the bracket.
2. Slide the fuel level sensor down the bracket for the locking device to engage and secure the
sensor.
1
2
cixt
1. Locking device
2. Locating lugs
3. Bracket
5/7/2017 Air Filter Element Removal
545
Air Filter Element Removal
WARNING
Remove the left and right hand side panels (see Side Panels).
1. Remove the fixing and remove the air intake finishers.
cjpo
1. Fixing
2. Air intake finisher
2. Remove the two fixings and remove the mountings for the air intake finisher.
2 1
cjpp
546
1. Fixings
2. Mounting (right hand side shown)
3. Remove the fixing securing the engine breather hose bracket to the airbox.
2 1
cjom
1. Fixing
2. Engine breather hose bracket
4. Release the two hose clips and remove the engine breather hose.
cjlo
1. Hose clips
2. Engine breather hose
5. Release the four fixings securing the air filter cover to the airbox.
547
1
cjln
1. Fixings
2. Air filter cover
6. Remove the air filter cover and remove the air filter element from the housing.
7. Inspect the cover seal for damage, replace if necessary.
Note
Note the orientation of the air filter moulding for installation.
8. Remove the air filter cassette from the air filter.
1
civq_1
1. Cassette
2. Air filter element
548
5/7/2017 Air Filter Element Installation
549
Air Filter Element Installation
WARNING
1. Clean the air filter cover and interior of the airbox.
2. Locate the new filter element into the air filter cassette, as noted for removal.
3. Fit the air filter and cassette assembly into the airbox.
4. Refit the air filter cover and tighten its fixings to 1.5 Nm.
5. Refit the engine breather hose and secure with the hose clips.
6. Secure the engine breather hose bracket to the airbox and tighten the fixing to 1.5 Nm.
7. Fit the mountings for the air intake finisher and tighten its fixings to 3 Nm.
2 1
cjpp
1. Fixings
8. Fit the air intake finishers and tighten to 3 Nm.
5/7/2017 Air Filter Element Installation
550
cjpo
1. Fixing
2. Air intake finisher
Refit the left and right hand side panels (see Side Panels).
5/7/2017 Airbox Removal
551
Airbox Removal
WARNING
Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Removal).
Remove the rear mudguard (see Rear Mudguard Removal).
If fitted, remove the evaporative canister (see Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Removal).
cjpo
1. Fixing
552
2 1
cjpp
1. Fixings
2 1
cjom
1. Fixing
553
cjlo
1. Hose clips
Note
Before the disconnection of any wiring, note the routing of all wiring and wiring
connectors on both sides of the airbox.
5. Remove the fixing and detach the air intake temperature sensor from the airbox.
6. Remove the fixing and detach the ambient air pressure sensor from the airbox.
7. Remove and discard the fixings securing the fall detection switch to the airbox. Discard the
fixings.
2
1
cjpy
1. Fixing, Air temperature sensor
2. Fixing, Ambient air pressure sensor
3. Fixings, Fall detection switch
554
8. Detach the diagnostic connector from the fusebox bracket.
Note
Note the position of the battery strap to the fusebox bracket for installation.
9. Remove the three fixings and detach the fusebox bracket from the airbox.
2
1
3
2
cjpr
2. Fixings
3. Fusebox bracket
Note
The seal for the air intake may come off with the air intake duct.
10. Remove the fixing and remove the air intake duct on the left hand side of the airbox.
555
2
cjpn
1. Fixing
2. Air intake duct
Note
Note the routing of the rear wheel ABS sensor harness for installation.
11. Disconnect the rear wheel ABS sensor from the main harness and detach from the airbox.
cjqd
1. ABS sensor harness connector
2. ABS sensor connector
Note
556
If fitted, note the position and orientation of the purge control valve and its bracket
for installation.
12. Remove the fixing and detach the roll over valve and, if fitted, the purge control vale bracket
from the airbox.
cjrb
1. Fixing
2. Roll over valve
3. Purge control valve
4. Bracket
13. Detach the starter motor solenoid from the relay bracket on the right hand side of the airbox.
14. Remove the three fixings and detach the relay bracket from the airbox.
cixq
1. Starter motor solenoid (detached)
557
2. Fixings
Note
Note the position of the clamp for the throttle body intake hose for installation.
15. Loosen the clamps for the throttle body intake hoses.
cjkv_1
1. Clamp (right hand side shown)
2. Throttle body
3. Airbox
16. Remove the two fixings and their shouldered washers from under the rear of the airbox.
cjqy
1. Fixings
558
2. Shouldered washers
17. Remove the fixing and shouldered washer from both sides of the airbox.
2
3
cjps
1. Fixing
2. Shouldered washer
3. Airbox
Note
When removing the airbox, ensure that the brake lines on the right hand side of the
frame do not get damaged.
18. Manoeuvre the airbox rearward to remove it from the motorcycle.
5/7/2017 Airbox Installation
559
Airbox Installation
WARNING
Note
When installing the airbox, ensure that the brake lines on the right hand side of the
frame do not get damaged.
1. Position the airbox to the frame ensuring the throttle body air ducts are correctly aligned to
the throttle bodies.
2. Check that the harnesses and hoses are routed as noted on removal.
3. Secure the airbox with the four shouldered washers and fixings, tighten the fixings to 6 Nm.
4. Tighten the intake hose clamps to 1.5 Nm.
5. Refit the relay bracket to the right hand side of the airbox, ensuring the harness is not
trapped, and tighten the three fixings to 1.5 Nm.
cixq_1
1. Fixings
6. Refit the starter motor solenoid to the relay bracket.
7. Refit the roll over valve bracket and, if fitted, the purge control valve and tighten the fixing to
1.5 Nm.
560
cjrb
1. Fixing
2. Roll over valve
4. Bracket
8. Connect the the rear wheel ABS sensor to the main harness and attach to the airbox as
noted for removal.
cjqd
9. If necessary, refit the air intake duct seal to the airbox.
10. Refit the air intake duct to the airbox and tighten its fixing to 1.5 Nm.
561
2
cjpn
1. Fixing
2. Air intake duct
11. Attach the fuse box bracket to the airbox and tighten the three fixings to 3 Nm.
12. Attach the diagnostic connector to the fuse box bracket.
2
1
3
2
cjpr
2. Fixings
3. Fusebox bracket
13. Attach the air intake temperature sensor to the airbox and tighten its fixing to 1.5 Nm.
14. Attach the ambient air pressure sensor to the airbox and tighten its fixing to 2 Nm.
15. Attach the fall detection switch to the airbox and tighten the new fixings to 3 Nm.
562
2
1
cjpy
1. Fixing, Air temperature sensor
2. Fixing, Ambient air pressure sensor
3. Fixings, Fall detection switch
16. Refit the engine breather hose and secure with the hose clips.
2 1
cjpp
1. Fixings
563
cjpo
1. Fixing
If removed, refit the evaporative canister (see Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Installation).
Refit the rear mudguard (see Rear Mudguard Installation).
Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Installation).
5/7/2017 Throttle Body Removal
564
Throttle Body Removal
WARNING
1. Protect the crankcase, crankcase covers and starter motor painted surfaces from damage,
using suitable self adhesive tape such as masking tape.
2 1
cjom
1. Fixing
565
cjlo
1. Hose clips
cjpo
1. Fixing
566
2 1
cjpp
1. Fixings
Note
Note the routing for the throttle actuator and throttle position harnesses for
installation.
6. Disconnect the throttle actuator motor multiplug.
cjkx
1. Multiplug
7. Release the locking device and detach the throttle position sensor from the mounting
bracket.
8. Disconnect the throttle position sensor multiplug from the main harness.
567
1
cjoz
1. Locking device
2. Throttle position sensor multiplug
3. Mounting bracket
Note
Note which spigots on the throttle bodies the MAP sensor hose is fitted to and, if
fitted, which spigot the evaporative emissions hose is fitted to for installation.
9. Disconnect the MAP hoses and the evaporative emissions hoses (if fitted) from the throttle
bodies.
Note
The clamps securing the throttle bodies to the transition pieces have a spacer fitted
between the clamp ends.
The threaded lug is not secure and may fall out when the fixing has been released.
10. Remove the throttle body four hose clamps.
568
2
1
3
cjkv
1. Evaporative hose (if fitted)
2. MAP sensor hose
3. Hose clamps
11. Carefully detach the throttle bodies from the transition piece hoses and the airbox hoses
and remove the throttle bodies.
12. To remove the transition pieces from the cylinder head, remove the fixings and remove the
transition piece(s).
2
1
cjor
1. Fixings
2. Transition pieces
5/7/2017 Throttle Body Installation
569
Throttle Body Installation
WARNING
1. Thoroughly clean the transition piece to cylinder head mating faces.
2. Refit the transition piece to the cylinder head and tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
2
1
cjor
1. Fixings
2. Transition pieces
Note
While installing the throttle bodies, route the throttle position sensor and throttle
actuator motor harnesses as noted for removal.
3. Carefully fit the throttle bodies to transition piece hoses and the airbox hoses.
Note
Ensure that the clamps securing the throttle bodies have the threaded lug fitted and
the spacer on the fixing between the two ends of the clamp.
4. Fit the throttle body four hose clamps and tighten to 1.5 Nm.
5. Connect the MAP hose and the evaporative emissions hose (if fitted) to the throttle bodies,
as noted for removal.
570
2
1
3
cjkv
1. Evaporative hose (if fitted)
2. MAP sensor hose
3. Hose clamps
6. Connect the throttle position sensor to the main harness and secure the multiplug to the
bracket.
1
cjoz
1. Locking device
2. Throttle position sensor multiplug
3. Mounting bracket
7. Connect the throttle actuator motor multiplug.
571
cjkx
1. Multiplug
2 1
cjpp
1. Fixings
572
cjpo
1. Fixing
10. Fit the engine breather hose and secure with the two hose clips.
cjlo
1. Hose clips
573
2 1
cjom
1. Fixing
5/7/2017 Throttle Body Balancing
574
Throttle Body Balancing
Note
The throttles cannot be balanced using equipment to measure vacuum in each
throttle. Instead, the Triumph diagnostic tool must be used.
WARNING
If the engine has recently been running, the components beneath the fuel tank may be hot to
the touch.
1. Remove the blanking fixing from the throttle control motor housing, located between
cylinders one and two.
1
2
cjoq
1. Throttle balance blanking screw
2. Throttle body
3. Bracket
2. Temporarily refit the fuel tank and reconnect the fuel supply and fuel pump connection using
T3880001 Fuel Pressure Gauge (minus the fuel pressure gauge) and T3880391 Fuel
Pump Extension Cable (see Fuel Pressure Checking).
partially refill the fuel tank with the fuel removed earlier.
4. Temporarily reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first.
5. Attach exhaust extraction hoses to the silencers.
6. Attach the Triumph diagnostic tool, start the engine.
7. When the engine temperature is at operating temperature navigate to ADJUST TUNE (see
575
System Diagnostics).
8. Select BALANCE THROTTLES.
Adjust Tune Procedure
Adjust the throttle balance as described in the Service Manual until
balanced
Press cancel to cancel the adjustment process
Press OK to finish
Throttle Status: Throttles Balanced
Cylinder 1 MAP Pressure: 480 mmHg
Cylinder 2 MAP Pressure: 481 mmHg
Adjusting parameter Balance Throttles
Balance Throttles Screen
Note
The balance throttles screen shows the vacuum value of each throttle in mmHg. In
addition, when the throttles are balanced to an acceptable range of each other the
words 'THROTTLES BALANCED' in green text will appear on the right of the screen.
At this point, no further adjustment is necessary or productive.
If the throttles are not balanced to each other the words 'THROTTLES UNBALANCED'
in red text will appear on the right of the screen. At this point adjustment will be
necessary.
WARNING
Total cleanliness must be observed at all times whilst the throttle balance blanking screw is
removed, and adjustment must take place in a dirt/dustfree environment. Dirt or dust
ingress to the throttle motor housing will cause the throttles to stick, leading to loss of
9. Using T3880900 Throttle Body Adjustment Tool, adjust the throttle adjuster until the words
'THROTTLES BALANCED' appear on the diagnostic tool.
576
cjoq_1
1. Adjuster
10. When balanced, stop the engine and disconnect the diagnostic tool.
11. Refit the blanking fixing to the throttle control motor housing and tighten to 5 Nm.
12. Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
drain any remaining fuel from the fuel tank.
5/7/2017 Fuel Injectors and Fuel Rail Removal
577
Fuel Injectors and Fuel Rail Removal
WARNING
Remove the throttle bodies (see Throttle Body Removal).
Note
The fuel rail and injectors are removed from the cylinder head together.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fuel injectors.
2. Remove the two fixings securing the fuel rail and fuel rail covers to the cylinder head.
Collect the spacers between the fuel rail and cylinder head and the two covers.
2
5
1
cjdk
1. Electrical connector (right hand side shown)
2. Fuel rail cover (right hand side shown)
3. Fixing (right hand side shown)
4. Spacer
5. Fuel rail
3. Gently ease the fuel rail and injectors upwards to release them from the cylinder head.
Note
5/7/2017 Fuel Injectors and Fuel Rail Removal
578
The fuel injectors are not to be removed from the fuel rail unless they are to be
replaced.
If the injectors require replacing continue from step 4.
Note the position of the retaining clip for installation.
4. Carefully remove the retaining clips securing the fuel injectors to the fuel rail.
5. Ease each injector from the fuel rail.
1. Retaining clip
2. Injector
3. Fuel rail
5/7/2017 Fuel Injectors and Fuel Rail Installation
579
Fuel Injectors and Fuel Rail Installation
Note
If the fuel injectors have been removed from the fuel rail, continue from step 1 and
omit steps 3 and 4.
If the fuel injectors have not been removed, continue from step 3.
1. Lightly lubricate the Orings with clean engine oil and fit the new fuel injectors to the fuel rail.
2. Fit the retaining clip for each fuel injector as noted for removal.
2
cjdj
1. Retaining clip
2. Fuel injector
3. Fuel rail
3. Remove and discard the Oring on the fuel injector.
4. Fit a new Oring using finger pressure only.
5. Lightly lubricate the Oring on the injectors and fit the injector/fuel rail assembly to the
cylinder head, orientating each injector such that the electrical connection is facing
upwards.
6. Fit the spacers between the fuel rail and cylinder head, fit the fuel rail covers, fit and tighten
the fixings to 6 Nm.
5/7/2017 Fuel Injectors and Fuel Rail Installation
580
2
5
1
cjdk
1. Electrical connector (right hand side shown)
2. Fuel rail cover (right hand side shown)
4. Spacer
5. Fuel rail
7. Connect the electrical connectors to the fuel injectors.
Refit the throttle bodies (see Throttle Body Installation).
5/7/2017 Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Removal
581
Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Removal
WARNING
1. From the underside of the rear mudguard, release the two locking tangs securing the
engine ECM bracket to the mudguard.
cjpv
1. Locking tangs
2. Rear mudguard
Note
Note the routing of the engine ECM harnesses and the rear light harness for
installation.
2. Detach the engine ECM harnesses and the rear light harness form the engine ECM bracket.
582
2 1
cjpw
1. Engine ECM harnesses
2. Rear light harness
3. Engine ECM bracket
Note
Note the orientation of the engine ECM bracket for installation.
3. Raise the rear of the engine ECM and bracket assembly to release the locating lugs on the
front of the bracket from the rear mudguard. Remove the engine ECM bracket.
2 1 2
cjqz
1. Locating lugs
2. Holes for locating lugs
4. Disconnect the two electrical connectors (see Electrical Connectors) and remove the engine
583
ECM and bracket assembly.
5/7/2017 Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Installation
584
Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Installation
WARNING
1. Reconnect the engine ECM connectors (see Electrical Connectors).
2. Position the engine ECM bracket onto the engine ECM as noted for removal.
3. Locate the locating lugs on the bracket into its locating holes in the rear mudguard.
2 1 2
cjqz
1. Locating lugs
2. Holes for locating lugs
4. Route and attach the engine ECM harnesses and the rear light harness to the engine ECM
bracket as noted for removal.
5. Secure the engine ECM bracket two locating tangs into the two holes in the rear mudguard.
5/7/2017 Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Removal
585
Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the fixing and detach the coolant filler neck from the immobiliser/TPMS control
module bracket.
2 3
cixw
1. Fixing
2. Coolant filer neck
3. Immobiliser/TPMS control module bracket
2. Remove the two fixings (one either side) and detach the immobiliser/TPMS control module
and bracket assembly from the frame.
586
2
cixx
3. Remove the three fixings and detach the ignition coil bracket from the motorcycle frame.
2
ciwm
2. Ignition coil bracket
4. Carefully manoeuvre the immobiliser/TPMS control module and bracket assembly through
to the left hand side of the frame.
5. Disconnect the immobiliser/TPMS electrical connector from the main harness.
6. Release the locking device, detach the main harness electrical connector from the bracket
and remove the immobiliser/TPMS control module and bracket assembly.
587
3
2
cixz
1. Immobiliser/TPMS electrical connector
2. Main harness electrical connector
3. Bracket
7. Remove the fixings and remove the immobiliser/TPMS control module from its bracket.
1
2
cjdy
1. Fixings
2. Immobiliser/TPMS control module
5/7/2017 Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Installation
588
Immobiliser/TPMS Control Module Installation
WARNING
1. Fit the immobiliser/TPMS control module to its bracket and tighten the fixings to 2 Nm.
2. Securely attach the main harness electrical connector to the bracket.
cjdx
1. Harness electrical connector
2. Locking device
3. Connect the immobiliser/TPMS electrical connector to the main harness.
4. Carefully manoeuvre the immobiliser/TPMS control module and bracket assembly to the
frame and tighten the fixings to 4 Nm.
589
2
cixx
5. Position the ignition coils and bracket assembly to the motorcycle frame, secure with the
fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
6. Attach the coolant filler neck to the immobiliser/TPMS control module bracket and tighten
the fixing to 3 Nm.
2 3
cixw
1. Fixing
2. Coolant filer neck
590
5/7/2017 Twist Grip Removal
591
Twist Grip Removal
WARNING
Remove the headlight from the headlight bowl (see Headlight Removal).
Remove the right hand mirror (see Mirrors Removal).
1. Release the fixings and detach the harness bracket from the headlight bowl.
3 1
cjdt
1. Fixings
2. Harness bracket
3. Headlight bowl
Note
Note the routing of the twist grip harness for installation.
2. On the back of the harness bracket, locate and disconnect the twist grip electrical connector
from the main harness.
592
1
cjcz
1. Twist grip electrical connector
2. Harness bracket
Note
Note the routing of the twist grip harness for installation.
3. Route the twist grip harness out of the headlight bowl.
Note
The antitamper fixings on the twist grip housing must not be loosened or removed.
If the antitamper screws have been loosened or removed any warranty claims for the
twist grip housing will not be honoured.
4. Release the fixings and remove the clamp for the twist grip housing from the handlebar.
2
1
3
cjhh
1. Twist grip housing fixings
593
2. Twist grip housing
3. Antitamper fixings
Note
Note the position and orientation of the twist grip to its housing for installation.
5. To remove the twist grip, pivot it downwards noting that the cut out in the guide aligns with
the locating lug on the twit grip housing.
cjir
1. Cut out in the guide
2. Locating lug on the twist grip housing
5/7/2017 Twist Grip Installation
594
Twist Grip Installation
WARNING
Note
The twist grip has two guides. One guide has a cut out in it and this guide fits over
the lug on the twist grip housing (7).
2
3
7 5
1 6 4
cjhg
2. Twist grip
3. Twist grip housing clamp
4. Lug
5. Twist grip guides
6. Cut out in one guide
7. Lug
1. If removed, refit the twist grip to the twist grip housing as noted for removal. Ensure the twist
grip guide with the cut out aligns with the lug on the twist grip housing.
595
cjir
1. Cut out in the guide
2. Locating lug on the twist grip housing
2. Check and ensure that the twist grip is correctly fitted as shown in the following illustration.
1
1
1. Cut out in twist grip guide
2. Twist grip lug
3. Position the twist grip onto the handlebar.
4. Fit the clamp for the twist grip, ensure that the locating lug on the clamp locates into the
hole on the handlebar.
596
1
2
cjhk
2. Locating lug (shown removed for clarity)
5. Fit the fixings and tighten, upper one first, to 3.5 Nm.
2
1
3
cjhh
1. Twist grip housing fixings
3. Antitamper fxings
6. Route the twist grip harness to the headlight bowl as noted for removal.
7. On the back of the harness bracket, connect the twist grip electrical connector to the main
harness.
597
1
cjcz
1. Twist grip electrical connector
2. Harness bracket
8. Fit the harness bracket to the headlight bowl and tighten the fixings to 1.5 Nm.
3 1
cjdt
1. Fixings
2. Harness bracket
3. Headlight bowl
Refit the right hand mirror (see Mirrors Installation).
Refit the headlight to the headlight bowl (see Headlight Installation).
598
5/7/2017 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Removal
599
Intake Air Temperature Sensor Removal
WARNING
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the sensor.
2. Remove the fixing and remove the sensor from the airbox.
1
2
cjpy_1
1. Fixing
5/7/2017 Intake Air Temperature Sensor Installation
600
Intake Air Temperature Sensor Installation
1. Fit the sensor to the airbox and secure with the fixing. Tighten to 1.5 Nm.
2. Reconnect the electrical connector to the sensor.
5/7/2017 Coolant Temperature Sensor Removal
601
Coolant Temperature Sensor Removal
Drain the cooling system (see Coolant Replacement Drainage).
1. Detach the coolant temperature connector from the ignition coils bracket.
cjdw
1
1. Coolant temperature sensor connector
2. Ignition coils bracket
2. Press the wire locking device fully in and detach the coolant temperature sensor from the
main harness.
Note
Note the routing of the coolant temperature harness for installation.
3. Remove the rubber cover and using a suitable 19 mm slotted socket, remove the coolant
temperature sensor from the cylinder head.
5/7/2017 Coolant Temperature Sensor Removal
602
cjdh
1. Coolant temperature sensor
5/7/2017 Coolant Temperature Sensor Installation
603
Coolant Temperature Sensor Installation
1. Fit the coolant temperature sensor into the cylinder head and tighten to 18 Nm.
2. Route the wiring as noted prior to removal and reconnect the sensor to the main harness.
3. Refit the coolant temperature sensor electrical connector to the ignition coils bracket.
5/7/2017 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal
604
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Removal
WARNING
Remove the ignition coils and bracket assembly (see Ignition Coils Removal).
1. Remove the fixing and remove the MAP sensor.
1
cjdv
1. MAP sensor
2. Fixing
5/7/2017 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Installation
605
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Installation
1. Fit the sensor to the ignition coils bracket and tighten the fixing to 1.5 Nm.
Refit the ignition coils and bracket assembly (see Ignition Coils Installation).
5/7/2017 Ambient Air Pressure Sensor Removal
606
Ambient Air Pressure Sensor Removal
WARNING
1. Disconnect the electrical connector from the sensor.
2. Remove the fixing and remove the sensor from the airbox.
1
2
cjpy_2
1. Fixing
5/7/2017 Ambient Air Pressure Sensor Installation
607
Ambient Air Pressure Sensor Installation
1. Fit the sensor to the airbox and secure with the fixing. Tighten to 2 Nm.
2. Reconnect the electrical connector to the sensor.
5/7/2017 Fall Detection Switch Removal
608
Fall Detection Switch Removal
WARNING
1. Remove and discard the fixings securing the fall detection switch to the airbox.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the fall detection switch.
cjpy_3
1. Fixings
2. Fall detection switch
5/7/2017 Fall Detection Switch Installation
609
Fall Detection Switch Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector to the fall detection switch.
2. Fit the fall detection switch to the airbox and tighten the new fixings to 3 Nm.
5/7/2017 Gear Position Sensor Removal
610
Gear Position Sensor Removal
WARNING
lock nuts.
1
2
cjpt
1. Fixings
mounting.
611
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
CAUTION
bracket.
612
1. Fixing
4. Detach the gear position sensor electrical connector from the relay bracket.
5. Disconnect the gear position sensor electrical connector from the main harness.
ciwh
1. Gear position sensor electrical connector
Note
613
Note the routing of the gear position sensor harness for installation.
6. Route the gear position sensor harness through the frame to the harness guide on the
crankcase.
Note
Note that the white tape on the harnesses within the harness guide aligns with the
upper gap for installation.
7. Remove and discard the fixings and detach the harness guide from the crankcase.
3
4
cjqb
1. Fixing
2. Harness guide
3. Upper gap
4. White tape
8. Carefully remove the gear position sensor harness from the harness guide.
614
cjqa
1. Harness guide
2. Harness
9. Remove and discard the two fixings and remove the gear position sensor.
cjra
1. Fixings
2. Gear position sensor
5/7/2017 Gear Position Sensor Installation
615
Gear Position Sensor Installation
WARNING
1. Fit a new Oring to the sensor. Lubricate the Oring with a smear of petroleum jelly.
2. Position the sensor to the engine, ensuring that the sensor engages with the slot in the
selector drum shaft. Secure with the two new fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
3. Carefully fit the gear position sensor harness into the harness guide as noted for removal
with the white tape shown in the upper gap.
4. Secure the harness guide to the crankcase and tighten the new fixings to 4 Nm.
3
4
cjqb
1. Fixing
2. Harness guide
3. Upper gap
4. White tape
5. Route the gear position sensor harness through the frame to the right hand side of the
airbox, as noted for removal. Connect the gear position sensor electrical connector to the
main harness and attach it to the relay bracket.
616
ciwh
1. Gear position sensor electrical connector
1. Fixing
617
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
1
2
cjpt
1. Lock nuts
618
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Position Sensor Removal
619
Crankshaft Position Sensor Removal
WARNING
Note
If the crankshaft position sensor needs to be replaced, the alternator stator will also
be replaced as they are one assembly.
1. Remove and discard the fixings securing the crankshaft position sensor to the alternator
cover.
1
civn
1. Crankshaft position sensor
2. Fixings
Note
Note the routing of the alternator harness for installation.
2. Remove and discard the fixing and remove the harness cover from the alternator cover.
3. Remove and discard the fixings securing the stator to the alternator cover and remove the
stator.
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Position Sensor Removal
620
3
cjcs
2
1. Fixing
2. Harness cover
3. Fixings
4. Stator
5/7/2017 Crankshaft Position Sensor Installation
621
Crankshaft Position Sensor Installation
WARNING
1. Position the stator to the alternator cover and route the harness as noted for removal.
Secure the stator with new fixings and tighten to 12 Nm.
2. Fit the harness cover and tighten the new fixing to 6 Nm.
Note
The air gap for the crankshaft position sensor is not adjustable.
3. Fit the crankshaft position sensor with two new fixings and tighten to 6 Nm.
622
Throttle Actuator Motor
CAUTION
The fixings for the throttle actuator motor and the butterfly hard stop adjustment screws are
marked with yellow paint and must not be loosened or removed.
If the fixings or adjustment screws have been loosened or removed the throttle body
assembly must be replaced as there are no means to reset the throttle actuator motor to its
correct position.
The throttle actuator motor is an integral part of the throttle body and cannot be adjusted or
replaced separately.
cjkw
1. Throttle actuator motor fixings (two shown)
2. Butterfly hard stop adjustment screws
The only adjustment permitted on the throttle body is throttle balance adjustment (see Throttle
Body Balancing).
623
Throttle Position Sensor
Note
The fixings for the throttle position sensor are marked with yellow paint and must not
be loosened or removed. If the fixings have been loosened or removed any warranty
claims for the throttle bodies will be rejected.
CAUTION
The fixings for the throttle position sensor are marked with yellow paint and must not be
loosened or removed.
If the fixings have been loosened or removed the throttle body assembly must be replaced
as there are no means to reset the throttle position sensor to its correct position.
The throttle position sensor can not be removed, replaced or adjusted in service. If necessary,
the throttle bodies and throttle position sensor must be replaced as an assembly.
1
cjky
1. Fixings
2. Throttle position sensor
5/7/2017 Exhaust Silencer Removal with Single Seat
624
Exhaust Silencer Removal with Single Seat
WARNING
WARNING
Note
Always note the position and orientation of the exhaust clamps prior to releasing
them, and return them to the noted position and orientation on assembly.
1. Release the clamps securing the silencers to the intermediate pipe.
Note
Note the position of the washers and rubber bushes in the footrest hanger for
installation.
cjqe
1. Silencer clamp fixing (left hand side)
2. Silencer
Note
5/7/2017 Exhaust Silencer Removal with Single Seat
625
Note the position of the washers and rubber bushes in the silencer mounting for
installation.
2. Support the silencer, remove the rear mounting fixing and remove the silencer. Discard the
lock nut.
2
1
cjqf
1. Fixing
2. Lock nut
3. Remove and discard the exhaust gasket.
5/7/2017 Exhaust Silencer Installation with Single Seat
626
Exhaust Silencer Installation with Single Seat
1. Check rubber mountings for cracks and wear, replace if necessary.
2. Fit a new exhaust silencer gasket and position the clamp over the joint.
3. Position the silencer onto the intermediate pipe.
4. Align the silencer rear mounting to the frame and fit the bolt and a new lock nut. Tighten the
fixing to 24 Nm.
2
1
cjqf
1. Fixing
2. Lock nut
5. Position the silencer clamps as noted for removal and tighten to 15 Nm.
cjqe
5/7/2017 Exhaust Silencer Installation with Single Seat
2. Silencer
627
6. Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leaks. Rectify if necessary.
5/7/2017 Exhaust Silencer Removal with Twin Seat
628
Exhaust Silencer Removal with Twin Seat
WARNING
WARNING
Note
Always note the position and orientation of exhaust clamps prior to releasing them,
and return them to the noted position and orientation on assembly.
1. Release the clamps securing the silencers to the intermediate pipe.
cjqe
2. Silencer
Note
Note the position of the rear foot peg detent plate and ball bearing for installation.
2. Remove the Eclip, clevis pin and foot peg from its mounting.
629
2
cjdd
1
1. Eclip
2. Clevis pin
3. Detent plate
4. Rear foot peg
Note
Note the position of the washers and rubber bushes in the silencer mounting for
installation.
3. Support the silencer, remove the rear foot peg mounting and remove the silencer. Discard
the lock nut.
1 3
cjde
1. Fixing
2. Mounting
3. Silencer
630
4. Remove and discard the exhaust gasket.
5/7/2017 Exhaust Silencer Installation with Twin Seat
631
Exhaust Silencer Installation with Twin Seat
1. Check rubber mountings for cracks and wear, replace if necessary.
2. Fit a new exhaust silencer gasket and position the clamp over the joint.
3. Position the silencer onto the intermediate pipe.
4. Align the silencer rear mounting to the frame and fit the rear foot peg mounting. Ensure the
locating peg on the mounting aligns with the locating hole in the frame. Tighten the bolt and
new lock nut to 24 Nm.
1 2
cjdf
1. Mounting
2. Locating peg
3. Locating hole
4. Silencer
5. Position the silencer clamps as noted for removal and tighten to 15 Nm.
cjqe
632
2. Silencer
6. Fit the ball bearing and detent plate to the foot peg, as noted for removal.
1 2
cjdg
1. Ball bearing
2. Detent plate
7. Hold the detent plate and ball bearing in place and fit to the foot peg hanger.
8. Fit the clevis pin and secure with the Eclip.
cjdd_1
2
1. Clevis pin
2. Eclip
633
9. Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leaks. Rectify if necessary.
5/7/2017 Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes Removal
634
Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Note
Remove the exhaust silencers (if a single seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Removal
with Single Seat or, if a twin seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Removal with Twin Seat).
Remove the engine cradle assemblies (see Cradle Assemblies Removal).
1. Remove the fixing for the exhaust cover. Detach the rear of the cover from the exhaust and
move it rearwards for removal.
1
cjqn
1. Fixings
2. Exhaust cover (left hand side shown)
2. Left hand intermediate exhaust pipe only: Remove the fixing securing the intermediate
635
exhaust pipe to the frame.
1
2
cjqv
1. Fixing
2. Intermediate exhaust pipe
3. Loosen the clamp securing the intermediate pipe to the catalytic converter. Remove the
exhaust intermediate pipe.
2
1
3
cjct
1. Exhaust clamp
2. Exhaust intermediate pipe
3. Catalytic converter
4. Remove and discard the exhaust intermediate pipe to catalytic converter gasket.
5. Remove the fuel tank (see Fuel Tank Removal).
636
6. Loosen the clamp securing the exhaust header pipe to the catalytic converter.
3
1
cjcr
1. Clamp
2. Exhaust header pipe
Note
Note the routing of the oxygen sensor harness for installation.
The oxygen sensor electrical connections must not be swapped between cylinders. If
the connections are swapped over, engine malfunctions will occur.
The right hand (Cylinder 2) oxygen sensor connector on the main harness has a red
connector (main harness side).
The oxygen sensors are NOT marked. Always ensure the right hand oxygen sensor
harness is connected to the main harness connector with the red connector.
7. Disconnect the oxygen sensors from the main harness.
637
3
2
cjql
1. Right hand oxygen sensor connector
2. Left hand oxygen sensor connector
3. Red tape
8. Loosen the exhaust balance pipe two clamps.
9. Remove the fixings securing the exhaust header pipe to the cylinder head.
2
3
cjqu
4
1. Fixings
2. Finned clamps
3. Exhaust balance pipe clamp (one shown)
4. Exhaust header pipe
10. Detach one of the exhaust header pipe from the catalytic converter, cylinder head and the
638
exhaust balance pipe. Remove the exhaust header pipe.
11. Detach the other header pipe from the catalytic converter and the cylinder head. Remove
the header pipe and exhaust balance pipe assembly.
12. Remove and discard the exhaust header pipe gasket from the catalytic converter, cylinder
head ports and the exhaust balance pipe.
13. If necessary, remove the finned clamps and the the oxygen sensor.
5/7/2017 Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes Installation
639
Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes Installation
WARNING
1. If removed, apply a thin smear of antiseize compound to the threads of the oxygen sensor,
install the oxygen sensor and tighten to 25 Nm.
2. If removed refit the finned clamps to the exhaust header pipes,
3. Fit new gaskets to the exhaust balance pipe and fit it to one of the exhaust header pipes.
4. Fit a new exhaust gasket and the flanged sleeve to the exhaust intermediate pipe port on
the catalytic converter.
5. If removed, apply a thin smear of antiseize compound to the threads of the clamp and fit to
the exhaust intermediate pipe port on the catalytic converter. Do not tighten the clamp.
1
3
4
2
cjdb
1. Gasket
2. Flanged sleeve
3. Clamp
4. Exhaust intermediate pipe ports
Note
To retain the gaskets during assembly, apply a smear of grease or petroleum jelly to
the gasket faces in the cylinder head.
6. Fit new gaskets to the cylinder head ports.
640
cjcu
1. Cylinder head port
2. Gasket
7. Apply a proprietary high temperature grease to the exhaust header pipe studs on the
cylinder head.
8. Locate the exhaust header pipe, with the exhaust balance pipe, to the cylinder head, ensure
the gasket does not become displaced during assembly. Fit the fixings to the cylinder head
studs but do not fully tighten at this stage.
9. Attach the exhaust header pipe to the catalytic converter, do not tighten the clamp at this
stage.
10. Locate the other exhaust header pipe to the cylinder head while also aligning it to the
exhaust balance pipe. Fit the fixings to the cylinder head studs but do not fully tighten at this
stage.
11. Attach the exhaust header pipe to the catalytic converter, do not tighten the clamp at this
stage.
12. Tighten the exhaust header to cylinder head fixings to 19 Nm.
13. Align the header pipe to catalytic converter pipe clamps so that the compression slots are
equally spaced to both sides of the clamps.
14. Tighten the exhaust header to catalytic converter clamp to 10 Nm.
15. Tighten the exhaust balance pipe clamps to 9 Nm.
16. Route the oxygen sensor harness as noted for removal and connect to the main harness as
noted for removal.
17. Attach the exhaust intermediate pipe to the catalytic converter, ensure the antirotation rod
is placed between the two halves of the clamp. Do not tighten the clamp at this stage.
641
2
cjcy
1. Antirotation rod
2. Clamp
3. Exhaust intermediate pipe
18. Fit the exhaust silencer (if a single seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Installation with
Single Seat or, if a twin seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Installation with Twin Seat).
19. Left hand intermediate exhaust pipe only: Secure the intermediate exhaust pipe to the
frame and tighten the fixing to 19 Nm.
1
2
cjqv
1. Fixing
20. Tighten the exhaust intermediate pipe to catalytic converter clamp to 8 Nm.
21. Fit the exhaust cover and tighten its fixing to 9 Nm.
642
1
cjqn
1. Fixings
2. Exhaust cover (left hand side shown)
Refit the engine cradle assemblies (see Cradle Assemblies Installation).
Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leaks. Rectify if necessary.
5/7/2017 Exhaust Catalytic Converter Removal
643
Exhaust Catalytic Converter Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Note
Remove the exhaust intermediate and header pipes (see Exhaust Intermediate and Header
Pipes Removal).
1. Remove the two fixings and rubber mountings securing the catalytic converter to its heat
shield.
2. Manoeuvre the catalytic converter down and to the left hand side to disengage its locating
lug from the right hand side of the heat shield.
3. Remove the catalytic converter from the motorcycle.
3
1
cjgp
1. Fixings (left hand side)
2. Locating lug (right hand side)
5/7/2017 Exhaust Catalytic Converter Removal
644
4. If required, remove the three fixings and remove the heat shield.
2
1
cjda
1. Fixings
2. Heat shield
5/7/2017 Exhaust Catalytic Converter Installation
645
Exhaust Catalytic Converter Installation
WARNING
1. If removed, refit the catalytic converter heat shield and tighten the fixings to 19 Nm.
2. Fit the gasket and flanged sleeve to the exhaust intermediate pipe ports on the catalytic
converter.
3. Fit the clamp, as noted for removal. Do not tighten the clamp.
1
3
4
2
cjdb
1. Gasket
2. Flanged sleeve
3. Clamp
4. Exhaust intermediate pipe ports
4. Check the mounting rubber for cracks, replace if necessary.
5. Position the catalytic converter into its heat shield, ensure the locating lug and its rubber
mounting fully engages into the heat shield.
5/7/2017 Exhaust Catalytic Converter Installation
646
4
1
2
cjdi
1. Locating lug
2. Rubber mounting
3. Heat shield
6. Fit the fixings and rubber mountings. Tighten the fixings to 15 Nm.
Refit the exhaust intermediate and header pipes (see Exhaust Intermediate and Header
Pipes Installation).
Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leaks. Rectify if necessary.
5/7/2017 Evaporative Loss Control System – Certain Markets Only
647
Evaporative Loss Control System – Certain Markets Only
Some models in certain markets are fitted with a system to control the evaporation of fuel
vapour to the atmosphere.
A carbon filled evaporative canister absorbs vapour while the engine is not running. When the
engine is started, the vapour is returned to the engine and burnt.
There are two distinct phases to the system's operation; engine off and engine running. These
two conditions are explained overleaf.
Component Locations
Evaporative Canister under the airbox.
Purge Control Valve (electronically controlled by the engine ECM) left hand side of the airbox
behind the side panel.
1. Evaporative canister
5/7/2017 Evaporative Control System – Engine Off
648
Evaporative Control System – Engine Off
When the engine is stationary, any pressure increase in the fuel tank due to a rise in ambient
temperature will cause the fuel vapour to pass down the breather pipe A to a carbon filled
evaporative canister which stores the vapour.
Once in the canister, vapour cannot return to the fuel tank because the purge valve is closed.
1. Breather pipe A
3. Purge valve
5/7/2017 Evaporative Control System – Engine Running
649
Evaporative Control System – Engine Running
When the engine is started, a vacuum is applied to the purge hose from the throttle bodies.
At certain times, the engine ECM opens the purge valve. The vacuum applied to the purge
valve now begins to draw stored vapour from the carbon filled evaporative canister and returns
it to the throttle bodies for burning in the engine.
In order to control the speed at which vapour is purged from the canister, the engine
management system regularly shuttles the purge control valve between open and closed
positions.
2
1
1. Throttle bodies
2. Purge valve
5/7/2017 Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Removal
650
Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the fixings and washers securing the evaporative canister to the right hand side of
the airbox.
2 1
cjcv
1. Fixings
3. Airbox
2. Slide the evaporative canister to the right hand side to release its locating lug from the
airbox grommet.
Note
Note the position of the two hoses attached to the left hand side of the evaporative
canister for installation.
3. Detach the two hoses on the left hand side of the evaporative canister and remove.
5/7/2017 Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Removal
651
1 2
cjqm
1. Hoses
3. Airbox
5/7/2017 Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Installation
652
Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Installation
WARNING
1. Position the evaporative canister to the motorcycle and connect the two hoses to the left
hand side of the evaporative canister as noted for removal.
1 2
cjqm
1. Hoses
3. Airbox
2. Fit the evaporative canister to the motorcycle, ensure the locating lug on the left hand side
locates into its hole in the airbox grommet.
3. Align the right hand side to the air box, fit the fixings and tighten to 1.4 Nm.
5/7/2017 Purge Control Valve (if fitted) Removal
653
Purge Control Valve (if fitted) Removal
WARNING
Remove the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
1. Remove the fixing and remove the air intake duct on the left hand side of the airbox.
2
cjpn
1. Fixing
2. Air intake duct
Note
Note the position and orientation of the purge control valve and its bracket for
installation.
2. Remove the fixing and detach the roll over valve and the purge control valve bracket from
the airbox.
3. Detach the purge control valve from the bracket.
4. Detach the upper and lower hoses and remove the purge control valve.
5/7/2017 Purge Control Valve (if fitted) Removal
654
cjrb
1. Fixing
2. Roll over valve
4. Bracket
5. Press the wire locking device fully in and disconnect the electrical connector from the purge
control valve.
5/7/2017 Purge Control Valve (if fitted) Installation
655
Purge Control Valve (if fitted) Installation
WARNING
1. Connect the electrical connector and the upper hose to the purge control valve.
2. Connect the upper and lower hoses to the purge control valve.
3. Position the purge control valve to the airbox as noted for removal. Secure in position with
its bracket and tighten the fixing to 1.5 Nm.
cjrb
1. Fixing
2. Roll over valve
4. Bracket
4. If necessary, refit the air intake duct seal to the airbox. Ensure that the larger rubber flange
of the seal faces outwards.
5. Refit the air intake duct to the airbox and tighten its fixing to 1.5 Nm.
5/7/2017 Purge Control Valve (if fitted) Installation
656
2
cjpn
1. Fixing
2. Air intake duct
Refit the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Radiator and Hoses
657
Exploded View – Radiator and Hoses
5/7/2017 Exploded View Coolant Expansion Tank
658
Exploded View Coolant Expansion Tank
5/7/2017 Radiator Hoses
659
Radiator Hoses
Check the radiator hoses for cracks or deterioration, and hose clamps for tightness in
accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements.
5/7/2017 Radiator and Cooling Fan Inspection
660
Radiator and Cooling Fan Inspection
Radiator
CAUTION
Using high pressure water, such as from a pressurewasher, can damage the radiator fins
and impair the radiator's efficiency.
Do not obstruct or deflect airflow through the radiator by installing unauthorised accessories
in front of the radiator or behind the cooling fan. Interference with the radiator airflow can
lead to overheating and consequent engine damage.
1. Check the radiator for stone damage.
2. Check the radiator core, for damage to fins or obstructions to air flow.
3. Clean off any obstructions with a stream of lowpressure water.
CAUTION
To avoid overheating and consequent engine damage, replace the radiator if the cores are
blocked or if the fins are badly deformed or broken.
4. Rectify any damage.
Cooling Fan
WARNING
The cooling fan is switched on and off by the Engine Control Module in response to a signal
received from the coolant temperature sensor. To prevent injury, never place loose clothing,
fingers or hands near the cooling fan, until the engine is stopped. Loose clothing, fingers or
the hands could become trapped during cooling fan operation and cause crushing injury to
the fingers, hands or other parts of the anatomy.
The motorcycle is fitted with a thermostatically controlled electric fan situated behind the
radiator. When the fan operates with the motorcycle stationary or at slow speed, cool air is
drawn through the radiator from the front of the motorcycle.
1. Check that the cooling fan spins freely and without tight spots.
2. Check the cooling fan blades for signs of heat distortion.
3. Rectify as necessary.
5/7/2017 Coolant
661
Coolant
A yearround, Hybrid Organic Acid Technology (known as Hybrid OAT or HOAT) coolant is
installed in the cooling system when the motorcycle leaves the factory. It is coloured green,
contains a 50% solution of ethylene glycol based antifreeze, and has a freezing point of 35°C
(31°F).
Always change the coolant at the intervals specified in the Scheduled Maintenance chart.
WARNING
The standard coolant mixture contains toxic chemicals that are harmful to the human body.
Never swallow neat antifreeze or any of the coolant mixture.
CAUTION
The antifreeze incorporated in the coolant mixture contains a corrosion inhibitor that helps
prevent damage to the cooling system and engine. Without this inhibitor, the coolant would
'attack' the metals and the resulting corrosion would cause blockages in the cooling system
leading to engine overheating and damage.
Always use the antifreeze listed in the Specification section and never use a methanol
based antifreeze as this does not contain the required corrosion inhibition properties.
Note
HD4X Hybrid OAT coolant, as supplied by Triumph, is premixed and does not need to
be diluted prior to filling or topping up the cooling system.
CAUTION
If hard water is used in the cooling system, it will cause scale accumulation in the engine
and radiator and considerably reduce the efficiency of the cooling system. Reduced cooling
system efficiency may cause the engine to overheat and suffer severe damage.
5/7/2017 Coolant Level Inspection
662
Coolant Level Inspection
WARNING
CAUTION
If the coolant level is found to be low, or if coolant has to be added regularly, inspect the
cooling system for coolant leaks. If necessary, pressure test the system to locate the source
of the leak and rectify as necessary. Loss of coolant may cause the engine to overheat and
suffer severe damage.
1. Position the motorcycle on level ground and in an upright position.
Note
Only inspect the coolant level when the engine is cold.
The coolant level within the expansion tank can be inspected without removing any
covers. The expansion tank can be viewed from the left hand side of the motorcycle,
towards the rear of the engine. Always inspect the coolant level with the engine cold.
2. The coolant level must be between the MAX (upper line) and MIN (lower line) marks in the
expansion tank.
1. Expansion tank cap
2. MAX and MIN marks
3. If the level of coolant is low, remove the cap from the expansion tank and add coolant
mixture as necessary to bring the level up to the MAX mark. Refit the cap (see Coolant
5/7/2017 Coolant Level Inspection
Level Adjustment).
663
5/7/2017 Coolant Level Adjustment
664
Coolant Level Adjustment
WARNING
WARNING
Do not remove the expansion tank or coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When
the engine is hot, the coolant inside the cooling system will be hot and may also be under
pressure. Contact with hot coolant will cause scalds and skin damage.
1. Allow the engine to cool for a minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Remove the front sprocket cover (see Front Sprocket Cover Removal).
3. Remove the cap from the expansion tank, and add coolant mixture through the filler
opening until the level reaches the MAX mark. Refit the cap.
cjpt_1
1. Maximum level
2. Minimum level
3. Filler opening
4. Refit the front sprocket cover (see Front Sprocket Cover Installation).
Note
5/7/2017 Coolant Level Adjustment
665
If the coolant level is being checked because the coolant has overheated, also check
the level in the radiator and top up if necessary.
In an emergency, distilled water can be added to the cooling system. However, the
coolant must then be drained and replenished with HD4X Hybrid OAT coolant as
soon as possible.
5/7/2017 Coolant Replacement Drainage
666
Coolant Replacement Drainage
WARNING
WARNING
Do not remove the coolant pressure cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the
coolant inside the radiator is hot and also under pressure. Contact with hot coolant will
cause scalds and skin damage.
Note
Prior to disassembly of the coolant hoses, note the orientation and position of the
hose clamps to help ensure that they are returned to the same positions and
orientation on assembly.
Use T3880207 Hose Clip Pliers for removal and installation of the hose clamps.
1. Remove the coolant pressure cap.
cixw
1. Coolant pressure cap
2. Position a container below the engine and radiator to collect the displaced coolant.
3. Using T3880207 Hose Clip Pliers, release the hose clamps then release the bottom hose
from the radiator and allow the coolant to drain.
5/7/2017 Coolant Replacement Drainage
667
2
3
cjfz
1. Hose clamps
2. Bottom hose
3. Coolant hose alignment mark
4. Hose alignment mark
4. Disconnect the bottom hose.
5/7/2017 Coolant Replacement Filling
668
Coolant Replacement Filling
WARNING
WARNING
1. Refit the bottom hose. Ensure the hose clamp is positioned to the alignment mark as noted
for removal.
2
3
cjfz
1. Hose clamps
2. Bottom hose
4. Hose alignment mark
2. With the aid of an assistant, raise the rear wheel until the filler opening is above the
radiators upper coolant tank.
5/7/2017 Coolant Replacement Filling
669
cjfu
1. Filler opening
2. Radiators upper coolant tank
3. Slowly add coolant mixture to the system, through the filler opening, until coolant escapes
from the filler opening.
Note
If the system has filled correctly and fully, there should be coolant visible through the
filler opening.
Note
During filling, squeezing the bottom hose with both hands will help to pump coolant
around the system and remove trapped air.
4. Refit the coolant pressure cap.
5. Lower the motorcycle’s rear wheel to the ground.
7. Reconnect the battery, positive (red) lead first and tighten the battery terminals to 4.5 Nm.
8. Start the motorcycle and allow the engine to idle. Briefly raise the engine speed several
times to allow any air to be expelled from the system.
9. Stop the engine and allow it to cool.
10. With the aid of an assistant, raise the fuel tank to allow access to the coolant pressure cap.
12. If necessary, top up the system through the filler.
13. Refit the coolant pressure cap.
Check the expansion tank level and top up if necessary (see Coolant Level Inspection).
5/7/2017 Water Pump
670
Water Pump
WARNING
Note
The oil pump and water pump are supplied as an assembly and cannot be separated.
For additional information, refer to Oil Pump (see Oil and Water Pump Removal for
removal and Oil and Water Pump Installation for installation).
5/7/2017 Water Pump Inspection
671
Water Pump Inspection
1. Remove the pump outer cover to check for corrosion and scale buildup around the impeller
and in the pump body. Renew the pump if leakage is evident.
2. Check the water pump shaft and shaft bearings for side and end float. Renew the pump if
wear is evident.
3. Check the water pump face and shaft seals for signs of leakage. Renew the pump if
leakage is evident.
5/7/2017 Coolant System Pressure Test
672
Coolant System Pressure Test
WARNING
WARNING
1. Remove the fixing and position the coolant filler neck away from the immobiliser bracket.
2 3
cixw
1. Fixing
2. Coolant pressure cap
3. Immobiliser bracket
2. Remove the coolant filler cap.
3. Select the T3880176 Radiator Pressure Test (use with 3880147) bayonet type adapter and
securely fasten to the coolant filler neck.
4. Carefully connect the hand pump (part of T3880147 Radiator and Cap Tester Kit) to the
T3880176 Radiator Pressure Test (use with 3880147) ensuring an air tight seal is
maintained.
673
2
cjhr
1
1. Coolant filler neck
2. T3880176 Radiator Pressure Test (use with
3880147)
3. Hand held pump (part of T3880147 Radiator and
Cap Tester Kit)
Note
Do not exceed 1.2 bar when carrying out a coolant pressure test.
5. Pressurise the cooling system to the operating pressure, using the hand pump taking care
not to exceed 1.2 bar.
6. Hold the pressure for a minimum of 10 minutes, whilst visually inspecting the external
components of the coolant system for leaks.
Note
If the engine oil is contaminated further exploratory investigation will be required.
Engine oil with a hazy or milky appearance may indicate water emulsion.
If the engine oil is contaminated rectify the cause of the problem and then renew the
oil and filter.
7. Remove the engine oil filler cap and check for contamination of the engine oil caused by
coolant escaping into the engine sump.
8. Depressurise the coolant test kit using the pressure release valve.
674
3
4
cjhr_1
1
1. Coolant filler neck
2. Bayonet type connector
3. Hand held pump
4. Pressure release valve
9. Detach the T3880176 Radiator Pressure Test (use with 3880147) bayonet type adapter
from the coolant filler neck.
10. Refit the coolant filler neck and tighten the fixing to 3 Nm.
Fill the coolant expansion tank to the maximum mark (see Coolant Level Adjustment).
Refit the coolant pressure cap.
5/7/2017 Coolant Pressure Cap Test
675
Coolant Pressure Cap Test
WARNING
WARNING
1. Allow the engine temperature to cool for at least 30 minutes.
3. Check the condition of the upper and lower seals of the coolant pressure cap.
3
2
ccer
1. Lower Seal
2. Upper Seal
3. Spring
Note
If there is any sign of damage or deterioration replace the cap.
4. Pressure test the cap and cooling system to the blow off pressure of 1.2 bar as described
676
using T3880147 Radiator and Cap Tester Kit.
Note
It is recommended to carry out coolant pressure cap and cooling system pressure
tests consecutively.
1
3
4
5
1. Hand held pump
2. Bayonet type connector
3. Pressure cap test adapter 44 mm
4. Pressure cap test adapter 46 mm
5. Coolant cap type connector
5. Select the correct test adapter and securely fasten to the pressure cap.
6. Carefully connect the hand pump to the adapter ensuring an air tight seal is maintained.
677
1
2
cgwq
1. Pressure cap
2. Test adapter
3. Hand held pump
7. Pressure test the cap to it’s 1.2 bar blow off pressure. If the coolant cap opens at a lower
pressure, fails to open at the correct pressure or the seal leaks, replace the cap.
5/7/2017 Thermostat Removal
678
Thermostat Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Note
1. Release the hose clamp from the thermostat housing.
1
cjfu
1. Thermostat housing
2. Hose clamp
3. Top hose
5/7/2017 Thermostat Removal
2. Release the fixings securing the thermostat housing to the cylinder head, and withdraw the
679
housing downwards, detaching it from the top hose.
3. Remove the housing, collect the thermostat and discard the seal.
2
cjga
1. Thermostat
2. Thermostat seal
3. Bypass hole
5/7/2017 Thermostat Inspection
680
Thermostat Inspection
1. Inspect the thermostat at room temperature. If the thermostat is open, it must be replaced.
2. To check the thermostat is opening at the correct temperature, suspend the thermostat in a
container of water and raise the temperature of the water until the thermostat opens.
Refer to the General Information section for the correct thermostat opening temperature.
3. If the temperature at which thermostat opening takes place is incorrect, replace the
thermostat.
5/7/2017 Thermostat Installation
681
Thermostat Installation
WARNING
WARNING
1. Clean the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and thermostat housing.
2. Position a new seal to the thermostat, seating the thermostat into the groove in the seal.
3. Locate the thermostat into the cylinder head with the centre bars of the thermostat in a
horizontal position, and the bypass hole positioned uppermost.
2
cjga
1. Thermostat
2. Thermostat seal
3. Bypass hole
4. Reconnect the top hose to the thermostat housing. Ensure the hose clamp is positioned as
noted during removal.
5. Locate the thermostat housing to the cylinder head, ensuring that the top hose is fully
seated on to the thermostat outlet. Tighten the fixings to 9 Nm.
Check the expansion tank level and top up if necessary (see Coolant Level Inspection).
5/7/2017 Thermostat Installation
682
5/7/2017 Radiator Removal
683
Radiator Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Note
Use T3880207 Hose Clip Pliers for their removal and installation.
Remove the right hand frame cradle (see Cradle Assemblies Removal).
1. Disconnect the cooling fan electrical connector.
cjcp_1
1. Cooling fan electrical connector
2. Disconnect the bottom hose from the radiator.
684
2
3
cjfz
1. Hose clamps
2. Bottom hose
4. Outlet pipe alignment mark
3. Disconnect the top hose clamp from the radiator.
4. Release the fixing securing the radiator to the frame.
2 4
3
1
cjfw
1. Top hose
2. Hose clamp
3. Radiator
4. Fixing
5. Release the top hose.
685
2
1
cjfy
1. Radiator
2. Top hose
6. Raise the radiator and rubber mounting from its lower mounting on the left hand cradle
assembly.
1
cjfx
1. Radiator
2. Radiator lower mounting
3. Rubber mounting
7. Remove the radiator from the motorcycle, taking care not to damage the radiator, left hand
frame cradle or front mudguard.
5/7/2017 Radiator Installation
686
Radiator Installation
WARNING
1. Align the radiator’s lower rubber mounting to its mounting on the left hand cradle assembly.
1
cjfx
1. Radiator
3. Rubber mounting
2. Refit the radiator to the top hose, ensure the top hose clamp is positioned as noted during
removal.
3. Align the radiator upper mounting and tighten the fixing to 6 Nm.
687
2 4
3
1
cjfw
1. Top hose
2. Clamp
3. Radiator
4. Fixing
4. Refit the right hand frame cradle assembly (see Cradle Assemblies Installation).
5. Refit the bottom hose, positioning the clamps as noted during removal.
2
3
cjfz
1. Clamps
2. Bottom hose
4. Outlet pipe alignment mark
6. Reconnect the cooling fan electrical connector.
688
cjcp_1
1. Cooling fan electrical connector
7. Refill the cooling system (see Coolant Replacement Filling).
8. Check the expansion tank level and top up if necessary (see Coolant Level Inspection).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Front Fork, Bottom Yoke and Steering Head Bearings
689
Exploded View – Front Fork, Bottom Yoke and Steering Head
Bearings
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Handlebars and Top Yoke
690
Exploded View – Handlebars and Top Yoke
5/7/2017 Fork Inspection
691
Fork Inspection
Examine each fork for any sign of damage or scratching of the slider surface or for oil leaks.
If any damage or oil leakage is found, strip and repair as described in this section or consult an
authorised Triumph dealer.
Check for smooth operation of the forks as follows:
Place the motorcycle on level ground
While holding the handlebars and applying the front brake, pump the forks up and down
several times.
If roughness or excessive stiffness is detected, repair as described in this section or consult an
authorised Triumph dealer.
WARNING
Riding the motorcycle with defective or damaged suspension can cause loss of motorcycle
control and an accident. Never ride with damaged or defective suspension.
5/7/2017 Front Fork Removal
692
Front Fork Removal
WARNING
Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
Remove the front wheel (see Front Wheel Removal).
WARNING
Never allow the brake calipers to hang on the brake hoses as this may damage the hoses. A
damaged brake hose can cause a reduction in braking efficiency leading to loss of
Remove the front mudguard (see Front Mudguard Removal).
Note
Note the routing of the ABS wheel speed sensor harness for installation.
There is a shim between the ABS wheel speed sensor and the front fork leg.
1. Release the fixing and detach the ABS wheel speed sensor from the left hand fork leg, and
collect the shim.
2
cjs l
1. Fixing
2. Front ABS wheel speed sensor
3. ABS wheel speed sensor harness
4. Shim
693
Note
If the forks are to be dismantled, loosen the fork top caps.
2. Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolt.
3. Note the orientation and position of the handlebar riser on the forks, loosen the handlebar
riser pinch bolt.
1
2
cjrj
3
1. Pinch bolts
2. Upper yoke
3. Handlebar riser
4. Loosen the lower yoke pinch bolts and slide the fork down through the yokes.
1
cjrq
1. Pinch bolts
694
2. Lower yoke
CAUTION
Care must be taken when removing the forks, to ensure that the outer surfaces do not
become scratched.
Note
The right hand handlebar has the front brake master cylinder attached to it. Ensue
the master cylinder remains upright when the handlebar riser is removed from the
front fork.
5. As the fork is released, slide the handlebar riser off the fork and tie aside. Do not allow the
handlebar to hang on the wiring harnesses or cables.
6. Remove the forks from the lower yoke.
5/7/2017 Front Fork Installation
695
Front Fork Installation
1. Position the handlebar risers between the upper and lower yokes.
2. Install each fork through the lower yoke and slide handlebar risers on to the forks.
3. Position the fork through the lower yoke so that the upper surface of the fork top cap flange
is 26.5 mm above the lower surface of the upper yoke.
1. Upper yoke
4. Tighten the lower yoke pinch bolts to 25 Nm.
5. If the fork top caps have been loosened, tighten them to 35 Nm.
6. Tighten the upper yoke clamp bolts to 20 Nm.
7. Position the handlebar risers as noted for removal and tighten the fixings to 20 Nm.
WARNING
Move the handlebars to the left and right full lock while checking that cables and harnesses
do not bind or that the steering feels tight or difficult to turn. A cable or harness that binds, or
steering that is tight/difficult to turn will restrict the steering and may cause loss of control
and an accident.
8. Refit the front mudguard (see Front Mudguard Installation).
9. Route secure the ABS wheel speed sensor harness as noted for removal and fit the wheel
speed sensor and shim to the fork leg. Tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
10. Install the front wheel (see Front Wheel Installation).
11. The air gap between the ABS pulser ring and the sensor must be between 0.40 mm and
1.20 mm. Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap (see Air Gap Measurement).
12. Lower the motorcycle to the ground and park it on the side stand.
5/7/2017 Fork Oil Change Oil Draining
696
Fork Oil Change Oil Draining
Remove the fork assembly (see Front Fork Removal).
CAUTION
When securing the fork in T3880171 Fork Holding Tool, take care not to over tighten the
clamp as this will cause the fork tube to distort beyond repair.
1. Using a soft jawed vice, clamp the T3880171 Fork Holding Tool such that the fork can be
mounted vertically.
2. With the top cap facing upwards, very gently clamp the fork inner tube into T3880171 Fork
Holding Tool.
3. Using T3880186 45 mm Octagonal Socket carefully unscrew the top cap from the fork
outer tube.
cjqh
1. T3880186 45 mm Octagonal Socket
2. Fork outer tube
WARNING
The fork damping assembly is under pressure from the fork spring. As the last few threads
of the damping assembly are unscrewed, keep the damping assembly pushed firmly into the
tube to prevent it being forcibly expelled as the threads release. To prevent injury, always
wear eye, face and hand protection when removing the top cap.
4. Hold the fork inner tube fully into the fork outer tube. Using T3880634 Wrench Damper
Cylinder unscrew and remove the top cap and fork damping assembly from the fork inner
tube.
697
2
cjqi
1. T3880634 Wrench Damper Cylinder
2. Top cap
3. Damping rod
4. Fork outer tube
5. Lift out the upper spring collar and the spring.
3 2 1
cjrk
1. Upper spring collar
2. Spring
3. Fork outer tube
6. Invert the fork and pour out the fork oil into a suitable container. Collect the lower spring
collar. Pump the fork assembly to remove all oil.
698
cjrl
1. Lower spring collar
5/7/2017 Fork Oil Change Oil Refilling
699
Fork Oil Change Oil Refilling
The oil level is measured from the upper surface of the fork outer tube, with the fork fully
compressed.
Fork Oil Level (fork fully compressed)
Fork Oil Level Chart
WARNING
Any variation from the figures quoted in the fork oil level chart could result in an unsafe
riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
Oil Level* Oil Volume Oil Grade Fork Pull Through
68 mm 582 cc Showa SS47 The upper surface of the fork top

cap flange 23.5 mm from lower
edge of top yoke to the top of the
outer tube (not the top cap)
1. Fill the fork with the specified fork oil until the oil level passes the side holes in the fork inner
tube.
700
cjrp
1. Hole (one of four shown)
2. Fork inner tube
2. Pump the fork outer tube several times to expel any trapped air then fully compress the fork
and support it in an upright position. Leave the fork for a few minutes to allow the oil level to
stabilise.
Note
When fitting the fork top cap and fork damping assembly, care must be taken not to
damage the top ring of the damping assembly.
3. With the fork fully compressed use T3880634 Wrench Damper Cylinder to fit the fork
damping assembly to the inner tube. Hand tighten only.
4. With the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in T3880171 Fork Holding Tool, tighten
the damping assembly to 90 Nm using the formula described below.
Note
The torque is calculated using a crow’s foot spanner measured at 25 mm across the
centre of the spanner head and the centre of the drive square.
If for any reason a different length crow’s foot spanner is used, recalculate the
torque figure using the table below.
L2
L1
ciyj
M1 = M2 x L1 / L2 Example
701
M2 is the required torque to be applied 90 Nm
L1 is the normal length of the torque wrench 300 mm
L2 is the extended length of the torque wrench (including the 325 mm
crows foot spanner)
M1 is the calculated torque value = 83 Nm
5. Fill the fork with the specified fork oil until the oil level passes over the damping rod guide
case.
cjro
1. Fork damping rod
2. Damping rod
6. Pump the fork several times to expel any trapped air then fully compress the fork and
support it in an upright position. Leave the fork for a few minutes to allow the oil level to
stabilise.
7. Refer to the oil level chart and set the scale on T3880160 Fork Oil Filler/Evacuator to the
specified level.
702
4
3
cbyg_1
1. T3880160 Fork Oil Filler/Evacuator
2. Adjuster plate
3. Scale area
4. Hole (zero position)
Note
Zero level on the tool is set at the small exit hole in the side of the scale tube, NOT AT
THE END TIP. Do not attempt to block this side hole as this will cause the final fluid
level to be incorrect.
8. Insert the scale end of the tool into the fork inner tube.
9. Hold the tool adjuster plate level with the upper surface of the fork outer tube and draw fluid
into the syringe until fluid flow ceases (empty the syringe if the body becomes full before
fluid flow stops).
10. The fluid level in the fork is now set to the height set on the tool scale. Check the tool scale
setting and repeat the process if incorrectly set.
11. Using T3880186 45 mm Octagonal Socket carefully screw the top cap into the fork outer
tube and tighten to 35 Nm.
703
cjqh
1. T3880186 45 mm Octagonal Socket
2. Fork outer tube
5/7/2017 Front Fork Disassembly
704
Front Fork Disassembly
Remove the fork assembly (see Front Fork Removal).
1. Drain the fork oil (see Fork Oil Change Oil Draining).
CAUTION
When securing the fork in T3880171 Fork Holding Tool, take great care not to over tighten
the clamp as this will cause the fork tube to distort beyond repair.
2. Ease the dust seal out of the outer tube.
2
1
ceto_1
1. Dust seal
2. Inner tube
3. Carefully ease the circlip out from the top of the outer tube.
705
cetn
1. Circlip
4. Compress the fork then pull the inner tube sharply out of the outer tube. Repeat this
procedure until the upper bush and seal are forced out of position and the inner and outer
tube can be separated.
5. Carefully slide the upper bush off the fork inner tube. Discard the upper bush.
Note
Note the orientation of the oil seal and dust seal for installation.
6. Slide the lower bush, washer, oil seal, circlip and dust seal off the fork inner tube. Discard
the lower bush, oil seal, circlip and dust seal.
6
5
4 3
2
1
ccup_5
1. Upper bush
2. Lower bush
3. Washer
706
4. Oil seal
5. Circlip
6. Dust seal
7. Fork inner tube
5/7/2017 Front Fork Inspection
707
Front Fork Inspection
1. Thoroughly clean and examine all components for damage, wear, scoring, corrosion etc.,
paying particular attention to the bushes and damper rod piston ring. Renew as necessary.
2. Always renew the oil seal, dust seal and the damper rod bolt sealing washer every time the
fork is dismantled.
5/7/2017 Front Fork Assembly
708
Front Fork Assembly
WARNING
The front forks comprise many precision machined parts. Total cleanliness must be
observed at all times and assembly must take place in a dirt/dustfree environment.
Dirt ingress may cause damage to the fork parts, leading to incorrect operation, instability,
loss of motorcycle control or an accident.
1. Lubricate the oil seal, upper and lower bushes for the inner tube with clean fork oil.
2. Slide a new dust seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
3. Slide the circlip and a new oil seal on to the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
4. Slide the washer and a new lower bush onto the inner tube.
5. Fit a new upper bush to the fork inner tube.
6
5
4 3
2
1
ccup_5
1. Upper bush
2. Lower bush
3. Washer
4. Oil seal
5. Circlip
6. Dust seal
7. Fork inner tube
6. Insert the fork inner tube assembly into the fork outer tube.
7. Using the narrow end of T3880003 Front fork Seal Installer, guide the lower bush, washer
and oil seal into place.
709
1
2 3
4
cjrm
1. T3880003 Front fork Seal Installer
2. Oil seal
3. Fork inner tube
4. Fork outer tube
8. Secure the oil seal in position with the circlip, ensuring it is correctly located in its groove.
9. Position the dust seal to the outer tube.
10. Invert T3880003 Front fork Seal Installer and, using hand pressure only, push the dust
seal squarely into the outer tube.
1
2
cjrm
1. T3880003 Front fork Seal Installer
2. Dust seal
11. Fit the lower spring collar into the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
710
cjrl
1. Lower spring collar
12. Fit the spring and the upper spring collar into the fork inner tube as noted for removal.
3 2 1
cjrk
1. Upper spring collar
2. Spring
3. Fork outer tube
13. Return the fork to an upright position, with the lower end of the fork inner tube secure in
T3880171 Fork Holding Tool.
14. Refill the fork with new oil (see Fork Oil Change Oil Refilling).
5/7/2017 Steering Head Bearing Check
711
Steering Head Bearing Check
WARNING
1. Raise and support the motorcycle so that the front wheel is clear of the ground.
2. Move the handlebars from locktolock whilst checking for signs of tight spots or notchiness
(bearings overtightened).
3. Hold the lower end of the front forks and try to move them forward and backward to check
for signs of free play in the bearings (bearings insufficiently tightened or worn).
jaau_4
Checking for Free Play in Steering Head Bearings
4. Adjust as described in Steering Head Bearing Adjustment then lower the motorcycle to the
ground.
5/7/2017 Steering Head Bearing Adjustment
712
Steering Head Bearing Adjustment
WARNING
Disconnect the battery, negative (black) lead first.
WARNING
If the lower yoke fixings are also loosened, the forks will no longer support the weight of the
motorcycle.
Do not loosen the lower yoke fixings as, in this condition, the motorcycle could topple over
causing damage and/or risk of injury.
Remove the upper yoke (see Upper Yoke Removal).
1. Using T3880023 50 mm Socket loosen the lock nut and adjuster nut.
cjbu
1. T3880023 50 mm Socket
2. Lock nut
3. Tab washer
4. Adjuster nut
5. Dust seal
2. Adjust the bearing free play as follows:
Remove the lock nut, tab washer and adjuster nut.
Thoroughly clean the threads on the steering stem.
713
Refit the adjuster nut and tighten to 40 Nm.
Loosen the adjuster nut, then retighten to 15 Nm.
Fit the tab washer and lock nut.
WARNING
It is essential that the adjuster nut is not overtightened. If the adjuster is overtightened it will
cause a preload on the headstock bearings. This will introduce tight steering, which could
cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
Note
Ensure the adjuster nut does not move as the lock nut is tightened.
With the bearing free play correctly set, hold the adjuster nut stationary then tighten the lock
nut to 40 Nm.
cjbu
1. T3880023 50 mm Socket
2. Lock nut
3. Tab washer
4. Adjuster nut
5. Dust seal
Refit the upper yoke (see Upper Yoke Installation).
Check that the free play has been eliminated and that the steering can be turned freely from
locktolock without any sign of tightness. Readjust if necessary.
WARNING
714
Operation of the motorcycle with incorrectly adjusted steering head bearings, either too
loose or too tight, may cause a dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle
control and an accident.
5/7/2017 Handlebars Removal
715
Handlebars Removal
WARNING
Remove the mirrors (see Mirrors Removal).
Note
The left hand handlebar can be identified by the two dot alignment marks on it for the
alignment to the riser.
The right hand handlebar can be identified by the single dot alignment mark on it for
the alignment to the riser.
Left Hand Handlebar
1. Release the fixings and remove the clamp from the clutch lever assembly. Position the
clutch lever to one side.
1
cjrd_1
1. Fixings
2. Clutch lever clamp
2. Release the fixings and detach the left hand switch housing from the handlebar.
716
2 1
1
cjbn
1. Fixings
2. Left hand switch housing
3. Remove the left hand grip.
4. Release the handlebar to riser pinch bolts and slide the handlebar in towards the centre of
the motorcycle to expose the circlip on the handlebar.
5. Remove and discard the circlip then remove the handlebar.
3
2
cjre _4
1. Fixings
2. Handlebar
3. Circlip
Right Hand Handlebar
Remove the twist grip (see Twist Grip Removal).
717
CAUTION
To prevent paint damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork or frame.
Spilled brake fluid will damage paintwork.
1. Release the fixings and remove the clamp from the master cylinder. Detach the master
cylinder from the handlebars and support it in an upright position.
2
cjrc_1
1. Fixings
2. Clamp
2. Release the fixings securing the right hand switch housing to the handlebar.
3. Release the handlebar to riser pinch bolts and slide the handlebar in towards the centre of
the motorcycle to expose the circlip on the handlebar.
4. Remove and discard the circlip then remove the handlebar.
718
3 2
cjrf_2
1. Fixings
2. Handlebar
3. Circlip
5/7/2017 Handlebars Installation
719
Handlebars Installation
WARNING
Note
The left hand handlebar can be identified by the two dot alignment marks on it for the
alignment to the riser.
The right hand handlebar can be identified by the single dot alignment mark on it for
the alignment to the riser.
Left Hand Handlebar
1. Fit a new circlip to the handlebar.
2. Locate the left hand handlebar in to the left hand riser. Do not fully tighten at this stage.
3. Rotate the handlebar so that the two alignment marks on the handlebar aligns with the split
line of the left hand riser. Tighten the fixings to 8.5 Nm.
cjre _3
1. Alignment mark
2. Split line (left hand riser)
3. Fixings
4. Fit the left hand grip.
5. Align the left hand switch housing to the handlebar, ensure the locating lug aligns with the
hole in the handlebar. Fit the two screws and tighten to 2.5 Nm.
720
2 1
1
cjbn
1. Fixings
2. Left hand switch housing
6. Locate the clutch lever assembly to the handlebar and fit the clamp.
7. Align the clutch lever split line with the alignment mark on the handlebar. Tighten the clamp
fixings, upper one first, to 12 Nm.
1
2
4
cjrd
1. Clutch lever split line
2. Handlebar alignment mark
3. Clamp
4. Fixings
Right Hand Handlebar
1. Fit a new circlip to the handlebar.
721
2. Locate the right hand handlebar in to the right hand riser. Do not fully tighten at this stage.
3. Rotate the handlebar so that the alignment mark on the handlebar aligns with the split line
of the right hand riser. Tighten the fixings to 8.5 Nm.
cjrf_3
1. Alignment mark
2. Split line (left hand riser)
3. Fixings
4. Align the right hand switch housing to the handlebar, ensure the locating lug aligns with the
hole in the handlebar. Fit the two fixings and tighten to 1 Nm.
5. Fit the twist grip (see Twist Grip Installation).
CAUTION
6. Locate the master cylinder to the handlebars and position the clamp with the UP arrow
pointing upwards. Do not tighten the clamp fixings at this stage.
7. Align the split line of the master cylinder clamp to the alignment mark on the upper surface
of the handlebar. Tighten the clamp fixings, upper one first, to 8.5 Nm.
722
1 3
2
cjrc
1. Alignment mark
2. UP arrow
3. Fixings
WARNING
steering that is tight/difficult to turn will restrict the steering and may cause loss of
Refit the mirrors (see Mirrors Installation).
5/7/2017 Upper Yoke Removal
723
Upper Yoke Removal
WARNING
Remove the headlight and its subframe (see Headlight Bracket Removal).
Note
Note the position and the routing of the ignition switch harness for installation.
1. Follow the routing of the ignition switch harness and disconnect it from the main harness.
CAUTION
2. Remove the two fixings and detach the instruments and mounting bracket assembly from
the upper yoke.
cjri
3. Remove the fixing and washer securing the handlebar riser to the upper yoke.
5/7/2017 Upper Yoke Removal
724
1
cjrh_1
1. Fixing
2. Washer
3. Handlebar riser
4. Upper yoke
4. Loosen the upper yoke pinch bolts.
5. Loosen the handlebar riser pinch bolts.
1
2
cjrj
3
1. Pinch bolts
2. Upper yoke
3. Handlebar riser
6. Remove the upper yoke centre nut from the steering stem and remove the upper yoke.
5/7/2017 Upper Yoke Installation
725
Upper Yoke Installation
1. Refit the upper yoke and tighten the upper yoke centre nut to 90 Nm.
2. Tighten the upper yoke pinch bolts to 20 Nm.
3. Position the handlebar riser to the underside of the upper yoke. Fit the washer and fixing for
the handlebar riser to upper yoke, do not fully tighten at this stage.
Note
Up to half of the clamp slot overlap is acceptable.
If over half of the clamp slot is overlaped, the handlebar riser will require adjustment.
4. Push the handlebar fully forward and tighten the handlebar riser to upper yoke fixing to 8
Nm.
5. Visually check the alignment of the upper yoke clamp slot to the handlebar clamp line.
2
3
cjta
1. Upper yoke clamp slot
2. Handlebar riser clamp slot
3. Clamp slot overlap (shown as acceptable)
Note
If the handlebar riser requires adjustment, loosen the handlebar riser to upper yoke
fixing and repeat step 4.
6. Tighten the handlebar riser pinch bolt to 20 Nm.
7. Refit the instruments and bracket assembly to the upper yoke. Tighten the new fixings to 8
Nm.
8. Route the ignition switch harness and connect it to the main harness as noted for removal.
Refit the headlight subframe and headlight (see Headlight Bracket Installation).
WARNING
5/7/2017 Upper Yoke Installation
726
steering that is tight/difficult to turn will restrict the steering and may cause loss of
Check the headlight operation and the beam setting, rectify as necessary.
5/7/2017 Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings Removal
727
Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings Removal
Remove both front forks (see Front Fork Removal).
1. Using T3880023 50 mm Socket remove the lock nut, tab washer, adjuster nut and the dust
seal.
cjbu
1. T3880023 50 mm Socket
2. Lock nut
3. Tab washer
4. Adjuster nut
5. Dust seal
2. Remove the lower yoke from below the frame headstock.
5/7/2017 Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings Installation
728
Lower Yoke and Headstock Bearings Installation
1. Fit a new dust seal to the steering stem on the lower yoke as noted for removal.
CAUTION
Protect the threads of the lower yoke when using a press or a puller as damaged threads
may mean replacing the lower yoke completely.
2. Press a new lower bearing inner race onto the steering stem of the lower yoke.
2
1
cjs t
1. Dust seal
2. Bearing inner race
3. Evenly and progressively drive the new upper and lower bearing outer races into the frame
headstock.
729
cjbm
1. Headstock
4. Lubricate the headstock bearings using Castrol LCX 222 or an equivalent heavy duty lithium
based grease.
5. Fit the bearing to the bearing inner race on the steering stem.
6. Insert the lower yoke to the frame headstock, fit the upper bearing, inner race, dust seal and
retain with the adjuster nut.
7. Adjust the bearing free play as follows:
Remove the adjuster nut.
Thoroughly clean the threads on the steering stem.
Refit the adjuster nut and tighten to 40 Nm.
Loosen the adjuster nut, then retighten to 15 Nm.
Fit the tab washer and lock nut.
WARNING
It is essential that the adjuster nut is not overtightened. If the adjuster is overtightened it
will cause a preload on the headstock bearings. This will introduce tight steering, which
could cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
Note
Ensure the adjuster nut does not move as the lock nut is tightened.
With the bearing free play correctly set, hold the adjuster nut stationary then tighten the lock
nut to 40 Nm.
730
1
cjbu
1. T3880023 50 mm Socket
2. Lock nut
3. Tab washer
4. Adjuster nut
5. Dust seal
Refit both front forks (see Front Fork Installation).
WARNING
Operation of the motorcycle with incorrectly adjusted steering head bearings, either too
loose or too tight, may cause a dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle
Check and if necessary correct the headlight adjustment (see Headlight Vertical
Adjustment).
Check that the free play has been eliminated and that the steering can be turned freely from
locktolock without any sign of tightness. Readjust if necessary
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Swinging Arm
731
Exploded View – Swinging Arm
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Rear Suspension Units
732
Exploded View – Rear Suspension Units
5/7/2017 Rear Suspension Units Removal
733
Rear Suspension Units Removal
WARNING
1. Raise and support the motorcycle so that the rear wheel is clear of the ground.
2. Remove the exhaust silencers (if a single seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Removal
with Single Seat or, if a twin seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Removal with Twin Seat).
Note
If both suspension units are to be removed, place a block beneath the rear wheel to
prevent it dropping when the second unit is removed.
3. Loosen and remove the upper and lower mounting bolts and washers then remove the
suspension unit from its mounting spigots. Discard the bolts.
cjrx
1. Rear suspension unit
2. Upper mounting bolt
3. Lower mounting bolt
4. Repeat step 3 for the other rear suspension unit (if required).
5/7/2017 Rear Suspension Unit Inspection
734
Rear Suspension Unit Inspection
1. Remove all traces of dirt and inspect for damage/wear to the mountings and springs.
2. Inspect the unit closely for fluid leaks from all parts of the unit and for cracks and damage to
the springs. If there is any damage, or any leaks are evident, both rear suspension units
must be renewed as a matched pair.
3. Check the mounting rubbers for cracks and signs of elongation. Replace as necessary.
WARNING
Always renew both rear suspension units as a pair, even if only one appears to be faulty. If
only one suspension unit is replaced, the handling of the motorcycle could be adversely
affected. This could result in an unsafe riding condition leading to a loss of motorcycle
5/7/2017 Rear Suspension Units Installation
735
Rear Suspension Units Installation
WARNING
1. Locate the suspension units to the mounting spigots, articulating the swinging arm until the
distance between the upper and lower spigots allows the units to fit.
2. Fit the washer and new mounting bolt to the upper mounting and tighten to 28 Nm.
3. Fit a new mounting bolt to the lower mounting and tighten to 48 Nm.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other rear suspension unit (if removed).
5. Refit the exhaust silencers (if a single seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Installation with
Single Seat or, if a twin seat is fitted, see Exhaust Silencer Installation with Twin Seat).
6. Remove the wheel support (if fitted), lower the motorcycle to the ground and park it on the
side stand.
5/7/2017 Swinging Arm Removal
736
Swinging Arm Removal
Support the motorcycle so that the rear wheel is clear of the ground, with no weight on the
swinging arm and suspension units.
Remove the rear suspension units (see Rear Suspension Units Removal).
If fitted, remove the evaporative canister (see Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Removal).
1. Remove and discard the two fixings and detach the hose guide from the left hand side of
the swinging arm.
2
cjrv
1. Fixings
2. Harness guide
2. Remove the two fixings and remove the left heel guard.
cjs b
737
1. Fixings
2. Heel guard
3. Remove the two fixings and detach the left hand control plate from the frame.
4. Carefully remove the swinging arm pivot cover on the left hand side of the frame.
2
3
cjs a
1. Fixings
2. Control plate
3. Cover
5. Remove the fixings securing the front sprocket cover to the crankcase and remove the
sprocket cover.
1. Front sprocket cover
738
2. Fixings
6. Carefully remove the swinging arm pivot cover on the right hand side of the frame.
7. Remove and discard the swinging arm pivot nut and collect the washer on the right hand
side of the frame.
2
1
cjrw
1. Nut
2. Washer
8. Support the swinging arm and remove the swinging arm spindle and washer from the left
hand side.
9. Partially fit the swinging arm spindle on the right hand side to support the swinging arm.
10. Engage T3880104 Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench in the slots of the frame adjuster sleeve
and rotate anticlockwise to loosen the sleeve fully.
cjbc
739
1. Frame adjuster
11. Support the swinging arm and withdraw the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side.
Note
When removing the swinging arm, ensure that the harness and hoses on the left
hand side of the frame do not get damaged.
12. Lower the left hand side and raise the right hand side of the swinging arm and carefully
manoeuvre the swinging arm rearwards and remove from the frame.
cjru
1. Swinging arm
5/7/2017 Swinging Arm Disassembly
740
Swinging Arm Disassembly
WARNING
Support the motorcycle so that the rear wheel is clear of the ground, with no weight on the
swinging arm and suspension units.
Remove the swinging arm (see Swinging Arm Removal).
1. Remove the left hand ball bearings by drifting through from the right.
2. Collect the spacer tube.
Note
The needle roller bearing in the right hand side of the arm cannot be removed
undamaged.
3. Remove the right hand needle roller bearing by drifting through from the left.
8
7
6
5
2
1 4
3
1. Sleeve
2. Seal
4. Spacer tube
5. Ball bearings
6. Circlip
7. Seal
8. Spacer
5/7/2017 Swinging Arm Inspection
741
Swinging Arm Inspection
1. Check all swinging arm bearings for damage, pitting, and cracks. Replace as necessary.
2. Check the swinging arm for damage. Replace as necessary.
3. Check the wheel bearings for damage, pitting, and cracks. Replace as necessary.
4. Check all bearing seals for damage, splits etc. Replace as necessary.
5. Check the drive chain for wear, damage etc. Replace as necessary.
6. Check both drive chain sprockets for wear, damage etc. Replace as necessary.
5/7/2017 Swinging Arm Assembly
742
Swinging Arm Assembly
WARNING
1. Install the bearings (marked faces outwards), sleeves and seals etc. into the swinging arm
in the order shown in the following illustration. Use new seals throughout.
8
7
6
5
2
1 4
3
1. Sleeve
2. Seal
4. Spacer tube
5. Ball bearings
6. Circlip
7. Seal
8. Spacer
Refit the swinging arm (see Swinging Arm Installation).
5/7/2017 Swinging Arm Installation
743
Swinging Arm Installation
WARNING
Note
When installing the swinging arm, ensure that the harness and hoses on the left hand
side of the frame do not get damaged.
1. Prior to installing the swinging arm, check that the harnesses and breather pipe are secure
as shown in the following illustration.
6
1
3 2
5
cjrt
1. Side stand harness
2. Coolant overflow pipe
3. Rear wheel ABS sensor harness
4. Quick shifter electrical connector
5. Harness guides
6. Main harness
2. With the swinging arm at the same angle for removal, position the swinging arm to the
frame.
744
cjru
1. Swinging arm
3. Refit the swinging arm spindle from the right hand side such that it will support the swinging
arm, but not pass all the way through the frame adjuster sleeve. This will allow T3880104
Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench to engage in the slot in the frame adjuster sleeve.
4. Using T3880104 Swinging Arm Adjuster Wrench, tighten the swinging arm pivot bolt
adjuster sleeve to 6 Nm.
cjbc
1. Frame adjuster
5. While supporting the swinging arm, remove the swinging arm spindle and fully insert it from
the left hand side.
6. Fit the washer and a new swinging arm spindle nut, tighten the nut to 110 Nm.
7. Refit the front sprocket cover and tighten to 9 Nm.
745
8. Refit the swinging arm pivot cover to the left hand side of the frame.
9. Refit the left hand control plate and tighten its fixings to 25 Nm.
2
3
cjs a
1. Fixings
2. Control plate
3. Cover
10. Refit the left and right hand heel guards and tighten their fixings to 7 Nm.
cjs b
1. Fixings
2. Heel guard (left hand side)
11. Refit the hose guide to the left hand side of the swinging arm and tighten the new fixings to
746
3 Nm.
2
cjrv
1. Fixings
2. Harness guide
If removed, refit the evaporative canister (see Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Installation).
Refit the rear suspension units (see Rear Suspension Units Installation).
Lower the motorcycle to the ground and park it on the side stand.
Pump the rear brake pedal to position the rear brake pads.
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Front Brake Master Cylinder, Caliper and Brake Disc
747
Exploded View – Front Brake Master Cylinder, Caliper and Brake
Disc
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Rear Brake Master Cylinder, Caliper and Brake Disc
748
Exploded View – Rear Brake Master Cylinder, Caliper and Brake
Disc
5/7/2017 Exploded View – ABS System
749
Exploded View – ABS System
5/7/2017 Braking System Maintenance Safety Precautions
750
Braking System Maintenance Safety Precautions
WARNING
Brake fluid is hygroscopic which means it will absorb moisture from the air. The absorbed
moisture will greatly reduce the boiling point of the brake fluid causing a reduction in braking
efficiency.
Replace brake fluid in line with the Scheduled Maintenance chart. A dangerous riding
condition could result if this important maintenance item is neglected.
Do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork as this will damage any painted or
plastic surface.
Always use new brake fluid from a sealed container and never use fluid from an unsealed
container or from one that has been previously opened.
Do not mix different brands of fluid. Check for fluid leakage around brake fittings, seals and
joints.
Check regularly for brake hose damage.
FAILURE TO OBSERVE ANY OF THE ABOVE WARNINGS MAY REDUCE BRAKING
EFFICIENCY LEADING TO LOSS OF MOTORCYCLE CONTROL AND AN ACCIDENT.
WARNING
If there has been an appreciable drop in the level of the fluid in either brake fluid reservoir,
consult your authorised Triumph dealer before riding.
If the brake lever or pedal feels soft when it is applied, or if the lever/pedal travel becomes
excessive, there may be air in the brake lines or the brake may be defective.
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle under such conditions and you must have your
authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the motorcycle
again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading to loss of
WARNING
Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the General Information section of this
manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General
Information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to loss of
Failure to change the brake fluid at the interval specified in the Scheduled Maintenance
chart may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
WARNING
5/7/2017 Braking System Maintenance Safety Precautions
751
Never use mineralbased grease in any part of the braking system or in any area where
contact with the braking system is possible. Mineralbased grease will damage the hydraulic
seals in the calipers and master cylinders. Damage caused by contact with mineralbased
grease may reduce braking efficiency resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
WARNING
Before installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated with
clean new DOT 4 brake fluid.
Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil or any other petroleum distillate on internal
brake components as this will cause deterioration of the hydraulic seals in the calipers and
master cylinders.
A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could
result if this warning is ignored.
WARNING
A magnetised brake disc and/or a magnetised ABS pulser ring may cause problems with the
ABS sensor which will illuminate the ABS warning light and disable the ABS.
To prevent these parts becoming magnetised, we strongly recommend that magnets, and
items that contain magnets, must not be stored near or placed on brake discs or ABS pulser
rings.
This includes parts fitted to motorcycles, parts removed during motorcycle service and new
parts in dealer stores.
Examples of items that may contain magnets, are listed below:
∙Alternator rotor
∙Magnetic fuel tank bags
∙Audio speakers
∙Magnetic dial test indicator stand
∙Magnetic parts tray.
If the ABS is not functioning, the brake system will continue to function as a nonABS
braking system. Do not continue to ride for longer than is necessary with the indicator light
illuminated. Ride with extreme caution when performing diagnostic troubleshooting on a
nonfunctioning ABS system. In this situation braking too hard will cause the wheels to lock
resulting in loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
5/7/2017 Brake Fluid Level Inspection
752
Brake Fluid Level Inspection
WARNING
In accordance with the Scheduled Maintenance chart, inspect the brake fluid level in the front
and rear master cylinder reservoirs.
Front Brake Fluid Reservoir
1. The brake fluid level must be kept between the upper and lower level lines with the
motorcycle on its side stand and the steering on full left lock.
1
3
jajc_2
1. Fixings
2. Reservoir cap
3. Upper level line
4. Lower level line
Front Brake Fluid Level Adjustment
1. Remove the two fixings.
2. Remove the reservoir cap and the diaphragm seal.
3. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line using new DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container.
4. Refit the reservoir cap and diaphragm seal ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly
positioned between the cap and the reservoir body.
5. Refit the two fixings and tighten to 1 Nm.
Rear Brake Fluid Reservoir
1. Remove the right hand side panel (see Side Panels).
2. The brake fluid level must be kept between the upper and lower level lines (reservoir held
753
horizontal).
citi_1
1. Upper level line
2. Lower level line
Rear Brake Fluid Level Adjustment
bracket.
citi_1
1. Fixing
2. Release the cap screws and remove the reservoir cover noting the position of the sealing
754
diaphragm.
3. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line using new DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container.
4. Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the
cap and the reservoir body. Tighten the cap retaining screws to 1 Nm.
citi_1
1. Fixing
6. Refit the right hand side panel (see Side Panels).
5/7/2017 Changing Brake Fluid
755
Changing Brake Fluid
Brake fluid must be changed every two calendar years, irrespective of the mileage the
motorcycle has covered in that time.
5/7/2017 Brake Pads Wear
756
Brake Pads Wear
Front and rear brake pad wear is automatically compensated for and has no effect on brake
lever or pedal action.
5/7/2017 Brake Wear Inspection
757
Brake Wear Inspection
In accordance with the Scheduled Maintenance chart, inspect the brake pads for wear. The
minimum thickness of lining material for any front or rear brake pad is 1.5 mm. If any pad has
worn to the bottom of the groove in the pad centre, replace all the brake pads on that wheel.
cbmz_1
1. Brake pads
2. Minimum thickness line
WARNING
Do not replace individual brake pads; replace both pads in the brake caliper. On the front
where two calipers are mounted on the same wheel, all the pads in both calipers must be
replaced simultaneously. Replacing individual pads will reduce braking efficiency and may
cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
5/7/2017 Breakingin New Brake Pads and Discs
758
Breakingin New Brake Pads and Discs
After replacement brake discs and/or pads have been fitted to the motorcycle, we recommend a
period of careful breakingin that will optimise the performance and longevity of the discs and
pads. The recommended distance for breaking in new pads and discs is 200 miles (300 km).
After fitting new brake discs and/or pads avoid extreme braking, ride with caution and allow for
greater braking distances during the breakingin period.
5/7/2017 Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid
759
Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid
WARNING
Note
The master cylinder should always be bled last. Bleed each caliper in turn before
bleeding the master cylinder.
1. Note the original setting of the brake lever adjuster in order that it can be returned to the
same position when the bleeding operation is complete. Turn the brake lever adjuster fully
in.
1
2
cggq_1
1. Brake lever
2. Adjusting screw
2. Remove the rubber cap from the bleed nipple on the right hand caliper.
3. Attach a transparent tube to the bleed nipple.
760
3
2
4
ceze_1
1. Bleed nipple
2. Spanner
3. Bleed tube
4. Container
4. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid.
5. Turn the handlebars to bring the fluid reservoir to a level position.
2
abdj_2
1. Front reservoir upper level
2. Front reservoir lower level
3. Screws
6. Remove the screws from the brake reservoir cover.
761
WARNING
Ensure absolute cleanliness when adding brake fluid to the brake fluid reservoir. Do not
allow moisture or debris to enter the cylinder as this will adversely affect the fluid properties.
Always use fluid from a sealed container and do not use fluid from a container which has
been opened for any period of time. Always check for fluid leakage around hydraulic fittings
and for damage to hoses.
A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
CAUTION
To prevent body damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork.
7. Carefully remove the reservoir cover taking care not to spill any fluid.
8. Check the condition of the sealing diaphragm for the reservoir. Replace if necessary.
9. Release the bleed nipple.
WARNING
Use only DOT 4 specification brake fluid as listed in the general information section of this
manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the general
information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to an accident.
Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier in this section of the manual.
Note
During bleeding, do not allow the fluid level to fall below the lower level mark in the
reservoir. If the level is allowed to fall below this mark, air may enter the system and
the sequence of bleeding must be repeated.
10. Slowly pull the brake lever to the handlebar and, holding the lever fully in, close the bleed
nipple.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until no more air appears in the bleed tube.
12. When all air has been expelled from the system, hold the lever in and close the bleed
nipple. Tighten the nipple to 8 Nm.
13. Fill the reservoir to the upper level with new DOT 4 fluid.
14. Remove the transparent bleed tube.
15. Repeat the bleeding procedure for the left hand caliper.
16. Repeat the bleed procedure for the bleed nipple on the master cylinder. Tighten the bleed
nipple to 5 Nm.
762
3 1
2
cexz_1
1. Bleed nipple
2. Spanner
3. Bleed tube
4. Container
17. When both calipers and the master cylinder have been bled, ensure the brake lever
operation has a firm resistive feel to it, does not feel spongy and that the lever cannot be
pulled directly back to the handlebar. Take remedial action as necessary.
19. Refit the reservoir diaphragm and cover. Secure the cap with its screws. Tighten the screws
to 1 Nm.
WARNING
Always return the lever adjuster to the original setting. Operating the motorcycle with lever
settings which are unfamiliar may lead to loss of control or an accident.
20. Reset the brake lever adjuster to the original setting.
21. Check that the brake operates correctly. Rectify as necessary.
WARNING
It is dangerous to operate the motorcycle with defective brakes; you must have your
authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you ride the motorcycle again. Failure
to take remedial action may result in reduced braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle
22. Connect the Triumph diagnostic tool (see Triumph Diagnostic Software ABS).
23. Follow the on screen menu to ABS Diagnostics. From the menu, select 'BLEED SYSTEM'
(see Triumph Diagnostic Software ABS).
763
CAUTION
On pressing the Start button, the diagnostic software will send a command to the ABS ECM
to open the 2nd circuit solenoid.
When the ABS modulator 2nd circuit is activated by the bleed command, the front brake
lever travel will increase as the ABS modulator solenoids are opened and will then decrease
as the solenoids are automatically closed.
Pressure must be applied to the front brake lever before operating the bleed sequence on
the diagnostic tool. An assistant will be required to open the bleed nipple while pressure is
applied to the brake lever.
24. Apply pressure to the front brake lever, press the Start button to activate the bleed
sequence on the diagnostic tool, and with assistance, release one of the bleed nipples.
25. Get an assistant to slowly pull the brake lever to the handlebar.
26. With the lever held fully against the handlebar, close the bleed nipple. Once the bleed nipple
is closed, release the brake lever.
27. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until no more air appears in the bleed tube, maintaining the brake
fluid level between the upper and lower reservoir levels whilst bleeding is being carried out.
28. The bleed sequence will run for a maximum of 90 seconds. Press the Stop button to end
the bleed sequence at any time. Once the bleed sequence has completed the diagnostic
tool will display a message ABS system bleed complete.
29. Repeat the above procedure as necessary until all air is expelled from the system.
30. When all air has been expelled from the system, apply pressure to the brake lever and
close the bleed nipple. Tighten the nipple to 8 Nm.
31. Repeat the brake bleed procedure as detailed in steps 1 to 21.
CAUTION
The ABS modulator must be allowed to cool between bleeding operations. Always allow the
ABS modulator to cool for 5 minutes before starting the bleed procedure again. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the ABS modulator.
5/7/2017 Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid
764
Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Remove the cap from the rear bleed nipple.
2. Attach a transparent tube to the bleed nipple.
3. Place the other end of the tube in a suitable receptacle containing new brake fluid.
cjff_1
1. Bleed nipple
2. Bleed tube
WARNING
Ensure absolute cleanliness when adding brake fluid to the brake fluid reservoir. Do not
allow moisture or debris to enter the cylinder, as this will adversely affect the fluid properties.
Always use fluid from a sealed container and do not use fluid from a container that has been
opened for any period of time. Always check for fluid leakage around hydraulic fittings and
for damage to hoses. A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and
an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
765
CAUTION
4. Release the cap screws and remove the reservoir cover noting the position of the sealing
diaphragm.
5. Check the condition of the reservoir sealing diaphragm. Replace if necessary.
6. Release the bleed nipple.
CAUTION
During bleeding, do not allow the fluid level to fall below the lower level mark in the reservoir.
If the fluid level is allowed to fall below this mark, air may enter the system and the
sequence of bleeding must be repeated.
7. Get an assistant to slowly depress the brake pedal and, holding the pedal fully down, close
the bleed nipple.
9. When all air has been expelled from the system, hold the pedal fully down and close the
bleed nipple.
10. Connect the Triumph Diagnostic Interface (see System Diagnostics).
11. Follow the on screen menu to ABS Diagnostics. From the menu, select BLEED SYSTEM
(see System Diagnostics).
CAUTION
On pressing the Start button, the diagnostic software will send a command to the ABS ECM
to open the 2nd circuit solenoid.
When the ABS modulator 2nd circuit is activated by the bleed command, the rear brake
pedal travel will increase as the ABS modulator solenoids are opened and will then
decrease as the solenoids are automatically closed.
Pressure must be applied to the rear brake pedal before operating the bleed sequence on
the diagnostic tool. An assistant will be required to open the bleed nipple while pressure is
applied to the rear brake pedal.
12. Apply pressure to the rear brake pedal, press the Start button to activate the bleed
sequence on the diagnostic tool and release the bleed nipple.
13. Slowly depress the brake pedal and, holding the pedal fully down, close the bleed nipple.
Repeat until no more air appears in the bleed tube, maintaining the brake fluid level
between the upper and lower reservoir levels whilst bleeding is being carried out.
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 until no more air appears in the bleed tube, maintaining the brake
fluid level between the upper and lower reservoir levels whilst bleeding is being carried out.
15. The bleed sequence will run for a maximum of 20 seconds. Press the Stop button to end
the bleed sequence at any time. Once the bleed sequence has completed, the diagnostic
tool will display the message ABS system bleed complete.
766
CAUTION
The ABS module must be allowed to cool between bleeding operations. Always allow the
ABS modulator to cool for 5 minutes before starting the bleed procedure again. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the ABS modulator.
16. Repeat the above procedure a minimum of twice or as necessary until all air is expelled
from the system.
17. When all air has been expelled from the system, apply pressure to the brake lever and
close the bleed nipple.
18. Disconnect the Triumph diagnostic Interface.
20. When all air has been expelled from the system, apply pressure to the brake pedal and
close the bleed nipple and tighten it to 8 Nm.
21. Remove the bleed tube.
22. Replace the bleed nipple cap.
WARNING
CAUTION
24. When the caliper has been bled, ensure the brake pedal operation has a firm resistive feel
to it, does not feel spongy and that the brake pedal does not have excessive movement.
Take remedial action as necessary.
25. Refit the reservoir cap ensuring that the diaphragm seal is correctly positioned between the
cap and the reservoir body. Tighten the cap retaining screws to 1 Nm.
26. Check the operation of the rear brake. Rectify as necessary.
WARNING
767
5/7/2017 Air Gap Measurement
768
Air Gap Measurement
1. Using feeler gauges, measure the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser
ring.
1. ABS sensor (front sensor shown)
2. Shim
3. Pulser ring
4. Fixing
2. Rotate the wheel and repeat the measurement in several places to ensure the pulser ring is
not distorted or bent. Renew a damaged pulser ring.
3. Adjust the air gap using the correct shim to achieve an air gap between 0.40 mm and 1.20
mm.
4. Shims are available in the following sizes:
shims 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm.
5. If necessary, remove the wheel speed sensor, fit the correct thickness shim and refit the
wheel speed sensor and tighten the fixing to 9 Nm.
6. Repeat the air gap measurement. Readjust as necessary.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Calipers Alignment
769
Front Brake Calipers Alignment
The front brake calipers are aligned to the brake discs to maintain a minimum amount of
clearance when the front wheel is mounted during manufacture. Therefore if the wheel or brake
components are removed and refitted for any reason the following clearance check and
alignment procedure must be followed.
Clearance Check
CAUTION
Never lever directly against the disc, caliper or the pad lining material as this will damage
these components. Always use a levering tool made from a soft material which will not
cause damage to the load bearing surfaces.
Brake fluid will be displaced as the caliper pistons are compressed. To prevent body
damage, ensure that the displaced fluid does not come into contact with any part of the
bodywork.
1. Push the pistons fully back into the caliper body. Observe the fluid level in the reservoir
whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
2. Thoroughly clean the threaded fixing holes for the front fork brake caliper fixings.
3. Thoroughly clean the threaded part of the fixing and smear the first four threads with a
proprietary copper based grease.
4. Position the caliper over the brake disc.
Note
DO NOT operate the front brake.
Operating the front brake will allow the brake pads to come into contact with the
discs.
Allowing the brake pads to come into contact with the discs will affect the front wheel
and forks positioning.
5. Secure the brake caliper with the fixings, until the mating face of the caliper touches its
mounting point but is able to slide from side to side, do not fully tighten at this stage.
770
chbg
1. Fixings
2. Caliper
6. Loosen the front fork lower pinch bolts on the right hand fork to allow the right hand front
fork lower to move freely on the spindle. Do not fully remove the bolts.
7. Without operating the front brake, position the front wheel against a fixed surface (i.e
against a wall) and bounce the motorcycle on it’s front forks twice allowing the forks to move
through their travel and then rest in their natural position.
Note
Do not lean on the motorcycle or operate the front brakes prior to tightening the fork
pinch bolts.
8. Tighten the fork lower pinch bolts to 22 Nm.
9. Push both front brake calipers as far as possible inwards towards the wheel.
10. Using feeler gauges, measure the clearance between the front brake calipers and the brake
discs at A and B, as shown in the following flow chart.
Note
Care must be taken to not allow the brake disc to move on its mountings during
measurement.
771
11. If clearances A and B are greater than 0.3 mm no further adjustment is required, hold the
caliper in position against its mounting. Initially tighten the fixings to 10 Nm and then fully
tighten to 55 Nm.
Note
Only continue with the clearance adjustment if instructed to do so in the flow chart.
Clearance Adjustment
CAUTION
During manufacture the front wheel is installed with either a matching pair of 24.6 mm
(grooved) or 25.0 mm (non grooved) spacers.
Grooved and non grooved wheel spacers must not be fitted on the same axle.
Failure to fit the wheel spacers in pairs may cause cosmetic damage to the brake disc(s)
and or brake caliper(s).
The front brake caliper to brake disc clearance can be adjusted by using a pair of 24.6 mm
grooved wheel spacers. When fitting a pair of grooved spacers the groove must always be
positioned away from the wheel bearing and closer to the front fork.
Carry out a visual check to identify which wheel spacers are fitted to the motorcycle.
772
1 2
1. Spacer 25.0 mm (no groove)
2. Spacer 24.6 mm (grooved)
Note
If a pair of 24.6 mm grooved wheel spacers are already fitted and clearances A and B
suggest the spacers require changing, contact Triumph Service for further
instructions.
If a pair of 25.0 mm wheel spacers (without a groove) are fitted, follow the
instructions below.
1. Remove the front wheel (see Front Wheel Removal).
2. Remove the 25.0 mm wheel spacers from the wheel hub.
CAUTION
Grooved spacers (24.6 mm) must always be fitted as pairs with the groove positioned away
from the grease seal.
Fitting the spacers with the groove closer to the grease seal will damage the seals.
Damage to the grease seals will allow dirt ingress into the wheel bearings causing
premature wear and possible failure.
3. Using a pair of grooved spacers (24.6 mm), refer to EPC for part number, refit the wheel
(see Front Wheel Installation), making sure the grooves on the wheel spacers are
positioned away from the wheel bearing and closer to the front fork as shown below.
773
1 2
1. Grooved spacer (24.6 mm) right hand spacer
2. Grooved spacer (24.6 mm) left hand spacer
4. Using feeler gauges, check and, if necessary adjust the air gap between the wheel speed
sensor and the pulser ring (see Air Gap Measurement).
5. Carry out a final clearance check, as described in the clearance check section.
Note
If the clearances A and B are still less than 0.3 mm contact Triumph service for
further instruction.
6. If clearances A and B are greater than 0.3 mm, hold the caliper in position against its
mounting. Initially tighten the fixings to 10 Nm and then fully tighten to 55 Nm.
WARNING
information section may reduce the efficiency of the braking system leading to loss of
7. Check the front brake fluid level and top up as required with new DOT 4 fluid.
8. Remove the motorcycle from the paddock stand and place it on the side stand.
9. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
WARNING
774
5/7/2017 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
775
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
System Description
Ths model is fitted with an electronic antilock brake system which is designed to prevent the
wheels from locking or skidding by reducing braking effort to the front or rear brake caliper as
required.
The system consists of a hydraulic modulator and ECM assembly mounted to a bracket
beneath the swinging arm, a front wheel speed sensor mounted to the front fork, and a rear
wheel speed sensor mounted to the rear brake caliper carrier.
Both front and rear wheels have a pulser ring mounted on to the wheel hub.
The front and rear master cylinders are connected via lines to the modulator and from the
modulator the lines connect to the brake calipers.
The front and rear brake circuits operate as separate systems. The front and rear brakes are
not connected in any way inside the modulator.
The modulator ECM continuously calculates the front and rear wheel speeds, and from these
inputs the ECM calculates the estimated motorcycle speed, wheel deceleration/acceleration,
the wheel speed difference and the wheel slip (skid) rate. This is calculated by comparing the
calculated wheel speeds with the calculated vehicle speed, so that if one wheel speed deviates
significantly from the other two readings, this wheel is calculated to be slipping (skidding).
Under braking, if the modulator detects that either wheel is slipping, due to the brake force
exceeding the available traction between the tyre and road surface (the wheel will begin to slip
or 'skid'), the ECM very rapidly releases and reapplies the brake pressure to prevent the wheel
from slipping.
This is felt through the brake pedal or lever as a rapid 'pulsing'.
If the rider reduces braking effort, or traction increases (so that traction exceeds braking force,
the wheel will rotate once more) the wheel will no longer lock up. The ABS system will detect
this and stop controlling brake pressure, and return to its monitoring state.
The system has a self diagnostic function builtin which monitors the fail safe relay, solenoid
valves, motor relay, wheel speed sensors, power supply and ground, as well as internal ECM
functions. In the event of a malfunction being detected, the ECM will illuminate the ABS warning
light, and store a diagnostic trouble code in the system memory. This stored data can then be
recovered using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool which is mandatory for all Triumph dealers. In this
way, precise diagnosis of a fault can be made and the fault quickly rectified.
Component Locations
5/7/2017 Antilock Brake System (ABS)
776
5/7/2017 ABS System Circuit Tables
777
ABS System Circuit Tables
Key To Wiring Circuit Diagram
1 ABS Modulator
2 Fuse Box
3 Front Brake Switch
4 Rear Brake Switch
5 Engine Electronic Control Module Connector A
6 Rear Light Subharness Connector
7 Front Wheel Speed Sensor
8 Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
9 Instruments Connector
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
778
Code Wiring Colour
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
ABS ECM Connector Pin Numbering
9 8 2 1
18 17 11 10
chzl
The above illustration shows the pin numbering system used in the ABS circuit diagram.
As viewed on the mating face with the ABS ECM (as per the illustration), pins are numbered
from right to left with number one in the top right hand corner.
5/7/2017 ABS System Circuit Diagram
779
ABS System Circuit Diagram
2
7 5
1
10A 25A
R 18
G 4
3 1 GP GP 7
4 1 GP
5 A07 BY
6 3 GP
1 UW 17
7 2 BG 8
1 UR 15
8 2 BG 6
9 21 BU 3
1 OG 13
7 BG 5
10
6 R 2
14 U 11
B 10
780
System Diagnostics
The ABS system has an onboard diagnostics feature which allows service technicians to
retrieve stored data from the ECM using Triumph diagnostic software. Full details of the
Triumph diagnostic software operation and how to interpret the results are given in the Triumph
Diagnostic Tool User Guide.
The software is connected, via an interface cable, to the motorcycle using a dedicated
diagnostic plug situated beneath the seat. By using a dedicated plug, no electrical connectors
associated with the system are disturbed, reducing potential connector damage.
The software allows the user to retrieve data associated with the system sensors and actuators,
test various component functions, read build data and make minor adjustments to the setup of
the system. The data and tests available are described on the following pages.
Diagnostic Tool Connection
1. To connect the Triumph diagnostic interface to the motorcycle, remove the seat (see Seat
Removal) and release the diagnostic connector from its locating tang.
cja j_1
2. Plug the diagnostic interface directly into the diagnostic connector.
781
1. When the diagnostic session is completed, disconnect the Triumph diagnostic interface.
2. Refit the diagnostic connector to its locating tang and refit the seat (see Seat Installation).
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are logged in the ABS ECM memory when there is a
confirmed fault in the system.
The codes are reported to the Triumph Diagnostic Tool as a four digit code.
5/7/2017 Triumph Diagnostic Software ABS
782
Triumph Diagnostic Software ABS
Described on the following pages is the range of information which can be retrieved from the
ECM’s memory and the adjustments which can be performed using the Triumph diagnostic
software.
The tables indicate which tests are performed by the onboard system and what information can
be retrieved by the Triumph diagnostic software.
Note
Full details of how to operate the software can be found in the Triumph Diagnostic
Tool User Guide.
Build Data
The Build Data screen will display the following information:
Function Examined
ECM type
ECM ID number
Software version number
Current Data
The Current Data screen will display the following information:
Front wheel speed km/h
Rear wheel speed km/h
Brake switch status On/Off
ABS warning light status On/Off
Bleed System
Using the Triumph diagnostic tool, it is possible to bleed the ABS modulator of trapped air. This
is necessary when the hydraulic brake system has been dismantled, or the ABS modulator
renewed.
Full details of this procedure are provided on page Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake
Fluid for front brakes or page Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid for rear brakes.
5/7/2017 Diagnostic Trouble Codes
783
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are logged in the ABS ECM memory when there is a
confirmed fault in the system.
The codes are reported to the Triumph diagnostic tool as a four digit code.
DTCs can be removed at any time using the Triumph diagnostic tool.
The system will log the diagnostic trouble codes listed below:
Diagnostic Fault Description Pinpoint Test
Trouble Page Number
Code
(DTC)
C1611 Front wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit Front Wheel

Sensor Open
Circuit/Short
Circuit
C1612 Front wheel sensor incorrect or missing signal Front Wheel

Sensor
Abnormal
Input/Losing
Contact
C1613 Rear wheel sensor short circuit to ground or open circuit Rear Wheel

Sensor Open
Circuit/Short
Circuit
C1614 Rear wheel sensor incorrect or missing signal Rear Wheel

Sensor
Abnormal
Input/Losing
Contact
C1621 Front wheel pulser ring missing teeth Front Wheel

Pulser Ring
Missing Teeth
C1623 Rear wheel pulser ring missing teeth Rear Wheel

Pulser Ring
Missing Teeth
C1631 Front wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open Front or Rear

circuit Input/Output
solenoid
Open/Short
Circuit
784
Trouble Page Number
Code
(DTC)
C1632 Front wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open Front or Rear

solenoid
Open/Short
Circuit
C1633 Rear wheel input solenoid short circuit to ground or open Front or Rear

solenoid
Open/Short
Circuit
C1634 Rear wheel output solenoid short circuit to ground or open Front or Rear

solenoid
Open/Short
Circuit
C1635 Low pressure feed valve short circuit to ground or open Front or Rear

solenoid
Open/Short
Circuit
C1636 Low pressure feed valve short circuit to ground or open Front or Rear

solenoid
Open/Short
Circuit
C1641 Front Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock Front or Rear

Wheel Actuator
(Hydraulic
Control) Wheel
Lock
C1643 Rear Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock Front or Rear

Wheel Actuator
(Hydraulic
Control) Wheel
Lock
785
Trouble Page Number
Code
(DTC)
C1651 Motor Circuit fault Motor – Lock;

Motor Stuck
OFF; Motor
stuck ON
C1652 Motor Does not run Motor – Lock;

Motor Stuck
OFF; Motor
stuck ON
C1653 Motor Runs continually Motor – Lock;

Motor Stuck
OFF; Motor
stuck ON
C1654 Solenoid relay does not operate or operates continually Front or Rear

Input/Output
solenoid
Open/Short
Circuit
C1661 Power source voltage too low Power Source

Voltage
Drop/Voltage
Rise
C1662 Power source voltage too high Power Source

Voltage
Drop/Voltage
Rise
C1671 Incorrect tyre size detected Incorrect Tyre

Size Detected
C1681 ABS ECM internal error ABS Modulator

Internal Error
C1682 CAN fault lost communication with engine ECM CAN Fault
C1683 CAN fault lost communication with instrument panel CAN Fault
C1684 CAN fault all communication lost CAN Fault
786
Dependant on the DTC stored, the ABS ECM will act in one of two ways:
1. Inhibit ABS operation immediately, irrespective of the ABS operating mode;or
2. Allow the ABS operation to complete before inhibiting the ABS.
Once the ABS ECM has inhibited ABS function, the ECM will act in one of three ways:
1. Allow the ABS to resume operation if the fault clears;or
2. Allow ABS operation after an ignition cycle if the fault clears;or
3. Inhibit the ABS function until the fault is rectified and the DTC erased.
The ABS system will act on the DTC stored according to the table:
Note
ABS is Active means that the ABS system is completing an ABS manoeuvre.
Fault Description ABS ABS ABS ABS will resume

warning operation continues to operation if fault
light is inhibited operate clears (DTC still
illuminated when fault when fault is stored for 40 cycles)
when fault is logged logged
is logged (Only when
ABS is
Active. When
ABS is no
longer
active,
operation is
inhibited)
Front Wheel Sensor Yes Yes No

Open Circuit/Short DTC stored for 40
Circuit cycles
Front Wheel Sensor Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition

Abnormal Input/Losing cycle, no fault is
Contact detected. DTC
remains stored for 40
cycles
Rear Wheel Sensor Yes Yes No

Open Circuit/Short
Circuit
Rear Wheel Sensor Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition

Abnormal Input/Losing cycle, no fault is
Contact detected. DTC
remains stored for 40
cycles
787
ABS is
Active. When
ABS is no
longer
active,
operation is
inhibited)
Front Wheel Pulser Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition

Gear Missing Teeth cycle, no fault is
detected for 1 second
and speed exceeds 30
km/h. DTC remains
stored for 40 cycles
Rear Wheel Pulser Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition

Gear Missing Teeth cycle, no fault is
detected for 1 second
and speed exceeds 30
km/h. DTC remains
stored for 40 cycles
Front Wheel Input Yes Yes No

Solenoid Open/Short
Circuit
Front Wheel Output Yes Yes No

Solenoid Open/Short
Circuit
Rear Wheel Input Yes Yes No

Solenoid Open/Short
Circuit
Rear Wheel Output Yes Yes No

Solenoid Open/Short
Circuit
Front Wheel Actuator Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition

(Hydraulic Control) cycle, no fault is
Wheel Lock detected. DTC
remains stored
788
ABS is
Active. When
ABS is no
longer
active,
operation is
inhibited)
Rear Wheel Actuator Yes Yes Yes Yes, if after ignition

(Hydraulic Control) cycle, no fault is
Wheel Lock detected. DTC
remains stored
Motor Lock Yes Yes No
Motor Stuck OFF Yes Yes No
Motor Stuck ON Yes Yes No
Solenoid Relay Stuck Yes Yes No

OFF/ON
Power Source Voltage Yes, Light Yes Yes, if voltage rises

Drop will above a preset
extinguish threshold for more
if fault than 10 seconds
clears
Power Source Voltage Yes, Light Yes Yes, if voltage drops

Rise will below a preset
extinguish threshold for more
if fault than 10 seconds
clears
Different Tyre Yes Yes No

Diameter
Abnormal ECU Yes Yes No
5/7/2017 ABS Electrical Connectors
789
ABS Electrical Connectors
Before beginning any diagnosis, the following connector related information should be noted:
Note
A major cause of hidden electrical faults can be traced to faulty electrical connectors.
For example:
Dirty/corroded terminals
Damp terminals
Broken or bent cable pins within multiplugs.
For example, the ABS electronic control module (ABS ECM) relies on the supply of accurate
information to enable it to monitor and control the brake system. One dirty terminal will cause an
excessive voltage drop resulting in an incorrect signal to the ECM.
If, when carrying out fault diagnosis, a fault appears to clear by simply disconnecting and
reconnecting an electrical plug, examine each disconnected plug for the following.
Before Disconnection:
If testing with a voltmeter, the voltage across a connector battery supply and ground pins
should be virtually battery volts with a small deviation allowable for usual voltage drop within
wiring circuits. If there is a noticeable change, suspect faulty/dirty connections. Refer to the
ABS circuit diagram within this Service Manual for pin numbers.
When Disconnecting a Connector:
Check for a security device that must be released before the connector can be separated
e.g. barb, hook and eye etc.
When Inspecting a Connector:
Check that the individual pins have not been bent.
Check for dampness/dirt/corrosion.
Check cables for security.
Check cable pin joints for damage.
When Connecting a Connector:
Ensure there is no dirt around the connector/seal.
Push together squarely to ensure terminals are not bent or incorrectly located.
Push the two halves together positively.
Disconnection of ABS ECM Connector
CAUTION
When disconnecting a connector, never pull directly on the wires as this may result in cable
and connector damage.
CAUTION
790
Never disconnect the ABS ECM when the ignition switch is in the ON position as this may
cause multiple fault codes to be logged in the ECM memory.
Always disconnect an ECM after disconnecting the battery negative (black) lead first.
1. Press the locking device and move the lever to the rear of the connector while
disconnecting it from the ABS ECM.
2. When disconnected, ensure the lever is fully to the rear of the connector. An audible click
can be heard when it is locked in position.
1
2
cjec
3
1. ABS modulator (shown removed for clarity)
2. Connector
3. Locking device
4. Lever
CAUTION
The ABS ECM is an integral part of the ABS modulator. Under no circumstances should the
ECM be removed from the ABS modulator. If a new ECM is required, repair is by
replacement of the ABS modulator and ECM as an assembly only.
Reconnection of the ABS ECM Connector
CAUTION
Damage to the connector pins may result if an attempt to fit the connectors incorrectly is
made.
791
CAUTION
If the lever is not fully over to the rear position, it is possible that the connector may not fully
engage into its socket.
1. Ensure the lever on the connector is fully over to the unlocked position, as shown below:
ciar
1. Lever
2. Connector
2. Align the connector to its socket on the ABS modulator such that the end of the lever aligns
with the lug on the socket.
cjfb
792
1. Lever end
2. Lug
3. Release the lever by pushing it towards the front of the connector. At the same time, push
the connector into its socket until the lever is fully forward and locked in position. An audible
click can be heard when locked.
1
2
cjec
3
1. ABS modulator (shown removed for clarity)
2. Connector
3. Locking device
4. Lever
5/7/2017 Further Diagnosis
793
Further Diagnosis
The tables that follow will, if used correctly, help to pinpoint a fault in the system once a
diagnostic trouble code has been stored.
Pinpoint Tests
Before Starting Pinpoint Tests:
1. Delete the stored DTCs.
2. Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
WARNING
If the ABS is not functioning, the brake system will continue to function as a nonABS
braking system. Do not continue to ride for longer than is necessary with the indicator light
illuminated. Ride with extreme caution when performing diagnostic troubleshooting on a
nonfunctioning ABS system. In this situation braking too hard will cause the wheels to lock
3. Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30 km/h. If the DTC is repeated, proceed
to the relevant pinpoint test.
4. If the DTC is not repeated, this indicates the DTC may have been stored due to external
influences such as bad road surfaces or electrical interference.
After Completion of Pinpoint Tests:
1. Delete the stored DTCs.
2. Switch the ignition OFF and ON.
3. Ride the motorcycle at a road speed in excess of 30 km/h. If the DTC is repeated, proceed
to the relevant pinpoint test.
4. If a DTC is stored, there is a further fault. Read the stored DTC and refer to the relevant
pinpoint test.
5/7/2017 ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored)
794
ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored)
ABS Warning Light ON (No ABS Ignition supply Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

DTCs Stored) fuse/circuit fault connector is secure.
ABS Warning light circuit Disconnect ABS ECM
fault connector and proceed to
pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal OK Proceed to test 2
integrity:
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 4 and ground pin Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
10
2 Check cable continuity of the Voltage greater Proceed to test 3

ABS ignition supply circuit: With than 10 V
the ignition 'ON', check voltage
between:
ABS modulator/ECM Voltage less Locate and rectify wiring fault,
connector pin 4 and ground pin than 10 V proceed to test 5
10
3 Check cable continuity of the Voltage greater Proceed to test 4

ABS warning light circuit: than 1.5 V
Check voltage between:
ABS modulator/ECM
Voltage less Locate and rectify fault, proceed
connector pin 3 and ground pin
than 1.5 V to test 5
10
4 Check cable continuity of the ABS warning Proceed to test 5

ABS warning light circuit: Short light 'OFF'
ABS modulator/ECM connector
pin 3 and ground pin 10
together: ABS warning Locate and rectify fault, proceed
Turn ignition 'ON' light 'ON' to test 5
5 Reconnect ABS modulator/ECM OK Action complete quit test
harness, clear fault code and
test ABS to verify fault cleared.
present
5/7/2017 ABS Warning Light ON (No DTCs Stored)
795
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 ABS Warning Light Does not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored)
796
ABS Warning Light Does not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored)
ABS Warning Light OFF (No Warning light circuit fault Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

DTCs Stored) ABS modulator/ECM ground connector is secure.
circuit fault Ensure ABS modulator/ECM
ground connection is secure.
Disconnect ABS ECM
connector and proceed to
pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check the ABS warning light OK Proceed to test 2
circuit and ignition fuses in the
fuse box (fuse 7 and 5)
integrity:
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 4 and ground pin Faulty Replace fuse, proceed to test 6
10
3 Check cable for short to voltage: 0 V Proceed to test 4

With ignition 'OFF', check
voltage between:
ABS modulator/ECM Above 3 V Locate and rectify wiring fault,
connector pin 4 and ground proceed to test 6
4 Check cable for short to ground: Voltage greater Proceed to test 5

With ignition 'ON', check the than 1.5 V
ABS warning light circuit voltage
between:
ABS modulator/ECM Voltage less Locate and rectify fault, proceed
connector pin 3 and ground than 1.5 V to test 6
5 Check cable for continuity: ABS OK Proceed to test 6
ECM connector pin 10 and
ground:
Faulty Locate and rectify fault, proceed
to test 6
5/7/2017 ABS Warning Light Does not Illuminate (No DTCs Stored)
797
Test Result Action
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Front Wheel Sensor Open Circuit/Short Circuit
798
Front Wheel Sensor Open Circuit/Short Circuit
Front wheel sensor short Front wheel sensor short Ensure ABS ECM connector

circuit to ground or open circuit to ground or open is secure.
circuit circuit Ensure wheel speed sensor
Disconnect ABS ECM
connector and proceed to
pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
integrity:
ABS ECM connector pin 17
and ABS ECM connector pin 8 Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 9
ABS ECM connector pin 8 and
ground Short circuit Proceed to test 3
3 Disconnect the front wheel OK Replace the wheel speed sensor,
speed sensor connector. Check proceed to test 9
cable for short circuit:
Wheel speed sensor
connector pin 2 (motorcycle Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
harness side) and ground fault, proceed to test 9
and ground Short circuit Proceed to test 5
5 Check cable for short circuit: OK Replace the wheel speed sensor,
Wheel speed sensor proceed to test 9
connector pin 1 (motorcycle
harness side) and ground Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
fault, proceed to test 9
ABS ECM connector pin 8 and
wheel speed sensor connector
pin 2 (motorcycle harness side)
799
Test Result Action
Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
and wheel speed sensor
connector pin 1 (motorcycle Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
harness side) fault, proceed to test 9
8 Reconnect the front wheel 1.8 mA to 16.8 Proceed to test 9

speed sensor connector. Check mA
the wheel speed sensor
operation:
Connect a suitable voltage
supply between 10 V and 16 V
between ABS ECM connector Faulty Replace the wheel speed sensor,
pin 8 (positive) and pin 17 proceed to test 9
(negative), and measure the
current consumption of the
wheel speed sensor
9 Reconnect ABS ECM harness, OK Action complete quit test
clear fault code and test ABS to
verify fault cleared.
present
Circuit Diagram
Wheel speed sensor current consumption data under typical conditions:
Supply Voltage Min Typical Max
10 16 V 1.8 mA 7.5 mA 16.8 mA
800
5/7/2017 Rear Wheel Sensor Open Circuit/Short Circuit
801
Rear Wheel Sensor Open Circuit/Short Circuit
Rear wheel sensor short Rear wheel sensor short Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

circuit to ground or open circuit to ground or open connector is secure.
circuit circuit Ensure wheel speed sensor
Disconnect ABS
modulator/ECM connector
and proceed to pinpoint test
1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
integrity:
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 6 and ABS ECM Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 9
connector pin 15
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 6 and ground Short circuit Proceed to test 3
3 Disconnect the rear wheel OK Replace the wheel speed sensor,
speed sensor connector. Check proceed to test 9
cable for short circuit:
Wheel speed sensor
connector pin 6 (motorcycle Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
harness side) and ground fault, proceed to test 9
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 15 and ground Short circuit Proceed to test 5
5 Check cable for short circuit: OK Replace the wheel speed sensor,
Wheel speed sensor proceed to test 9
connector pin 1 (motorcycle
harness side) and ground Short circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
802
Test ABS modulator/ECM Result Action
connector pin 6 and wheel
speed sensor connector pin 2 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
(motorcycle harness side) fault, proceed to test 9
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 15 and wheel
speed sensor connector pin 1 Open circuit Locate and rectify wiring harness
(motorcycle harness side) fault, proceed to test 9
8 Reconnect the rear wheel 1.8 mA to 16.8 Proceed to test 9

speed sensor connector. Check mA
the wheel speed sensor
operation:
Connect a suitable voltage
supply between 10 V and 16 V
between ABS ECM connector Faulty Replace the wheel speed sensor,
pin 6 (positive) and pin 15 proceed to test 9
(negative), and measure the
current consumption of the
wheel speed sensor
present
Circuit Diagram
Wheel speed sensor current consumption data under typical conditions:
Supply Voltage Min Typical Max
10 16 V 1.8 mA 7.5 mA 16.8 mA
803
5/7/2017 Front Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input/Losing Contact
804
Front Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input/Losing Contact
Front wheel sensor incorrect Front wheel sensor incorrect Ensure ABS ECM connector

or missing signal or missing signal is secure.
Incorrect wheel speed Ensure wheel speed sensor
sensor air gap connector is secure.
Damaged or dirty pulser ring Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Loose or incorrectly installed
wheel speed sensor
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Measure the air gap of the front OK Proceed to test 2
wheel speed sensor between
the sensor and the pulser ring:
Air gap between 0.40 mm and Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to
1.20 mm test 5
2 Check the pulser ring for OK Proceed to test 3
damage or contamination by
road grime or ferrous metal
filings Faulty Clean or replace the ABS pulser
ring, proceed to test 5
3 Check the wheel speed sensors OK Proceed to test 4
for correct installation, and the
fixings for correct torque
Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to
test 5
4 Check the wheel speed sensor OK Proceed to test 5
circuit (see Front Wheel Sensor
Open Circuit/Short Circuit)
test 5
5 Clear fault code and test ABS to OK Action complete quit test
present
5/7/2017 Rear Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input/Losing Contact
805
Rear Wheel Sensor Abnormal Input/Losing Contact
C1614 Rear wheel sensor incorrect Ensure ABS ECM connector

or missing signal is secure.
Incorrect wheel speed Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
sensor air gap
Damaged or dirty pulser ring
wheel speed sensor
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Measure the air gap of the rear OK Proceed to test 2
1.20 mm test 5
filings Faulty Clean or replace the ABS pulser
fixings for correct torque
test 5
4 Check the wheel speed sensor OK Proceed to test 5
circuit (see Rear Wheel Sensor
Open Circuit/Short Circuit)
test 5
present
5/7/2017 Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth
806
Front Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth
Front wheel pulser ring Front wheel pulser ring Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

missing teeth missing teeth connector is secure.
wheel speed sensor
Damaged/incorrect wheels
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Measure the air gap of the front OK Proceed to test 2
1.20 mm test 5
filings. Faulty Clean or replace the ABS pulser
fixings for correct torque.
test 5
4 Check the motorcycle wheel for OK Proceed to test 5
damage/incorrect size.
test 5
present
5/7/2017 Rear Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth
807
Rear Wheel Pulser Ring Missing Teeth
Rear wheel pulser ring Rear wheel pulser ring Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

missing teeth missing teeth connector is secure.
wheel speed sensor
Damaged/incorrect wheels
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Measure the air gap of the rear OK Proceed to test 2
1.20 mm test 5
test 5
4 Check the motorcycle wheel for OK Proceed to test 5
damage/incorrect size.
test 5
present
5/7/2017 Front or Rear Input/Output solenoid Open/Short Circuit
808
Front or Rear Input/Output solenoid Open/Short Circuit
Front wheel input solenoid Front wheel input solenoid Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

short circuit to ground or short circuit to ground or connector is secure.
open circuit open circuit Disconnect ABS
modulator/ECM connector
Front wheel output solenoid Front wheel output solenoid and proceed to pinpoint test
short circuit to ground or short circuit to ground or 1:
open circuit open circuit
Rear wheel input solenoid Rear wheel input solenoid
short circuit to ground or short circuit to ground or
Rear wheel output solenoid Rear wheel output solenoid
Master cylinder isolation Master cylinder isolation
valve short circuit to ground valve short circuit to ground
or open circuit or open circuit
Low pressure feed valve Low pressure feed valve
Solenoid relay does not Solenoid relay does not
operate or operates operate or operates
continually continually
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check the ABS main fuse in the OK Proceed to test 3
fuse box (fuse 5):
2 Check cable and terminal OK Replace fuse, proceed to test 5
integrity:
ABS modulator/ECM Faulty Rectify fault, replace fuse,
connector pin 18 and ground pin proceed to test 5
10
809
Test Result Action
3 Check cable continuity: With Voltage greater Proceed to test 4
ignition 'ON', check voltage than 11 V
between:
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 18 and ground pin Voltage less Locate and rectify fault, proceed
10 than 11 V to test 5
4 Check cable for continuity: OK Proceed to test 5
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 10 and ground Faulty Locate and rectify fault, proceed
to test 5
present
Circuit Diagram

810
5/7/2017 Incorrect Tyre Size Detected
811
Incorrect Tyre Size Detected
Incorrect tyre size detected Incorrect tyre size detected Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

Incorrect tyre pressures connector is secure.
Incorrect wheel speed Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
sensor air gap
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check for installation of wheels OK Proceed to test 2
and tyres of the correct size.
2 Check the tyre pressures. OK Proceed to test 3
3 Check the pulser rings for OK Proceed to test 4
4 Measure the air gap of the OK Proceed to test 5
wheel speed sensors between
Air gap between 0.40 mm to Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to
1.20 mm test 5
present
5/7/2017 Front or Rear Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock
812
Front or Rear Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock
Front wheel Actuator Front wheel Actuator Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

(Hydraulic control) wheel (Hydraulic control) wheel connector is secure.
lock lock Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Binding brake
Incorrect Wheel speed
sensor air gap
wheel speed sensor
Rear wheel Actuator Rear wheel Actuator
(Hydraulic control) wheel (Hydraulic control) wheel
lock lock
Binding brake
Incorrect Wheel speed
sensor air gap
wheel speed sensor
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check the relevant wheel for OK Proceed to test 2
brake bind caused by caliper or
master cylinder faults, or other
mechanical causes. Faulty Rectify the fault and proceed to
test 4
1.20 mm test 4
test 4
5/7/2017 Front or Rear Wheel Actuator (Hydraulic Control) Wheel Lock
813
Test Result Action
present
5/7/2017 Motor – Lock; Motor Stuck OFF; Motor stuck ON
814
Motor – Lock; Motor Stuck OFF; Motor stuck ON
Motor circuit fault Motor circuit fault Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

Motor does not run Motor does not run Turn the ignition 'ON'.
Motor runs continually Motor runs continually
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check the ABS main fuse in the OK Proceed to test 2
fuse box (fuse 5)
Faulty Replace fuse and proceed to test
5
2 Check the motor function: OK Proceed to test 3
Check that with the motorcycle
stationary and the ABS
modulator/ECM modulator Motor runs Contact Triumph service
connected, the motor does not continually
operate
3 Check cable continuity: With Voltage greater Proceed to test 4

ignition 'ON', check voltage than 11 V
between:
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 18 and ground pin Voltage less Locate and rectify wiring fault,
10 than 11 V proceed to test 5
4 Check cable for continuity: OK Proceed to test 5
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 10 and ground Faulty Locate and rectify fault, proceed
to test 5
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Motor – Lock; Motor Stuck OFF; Motor stuck ON
815
5/7/2017 Power Source Voltage Drop/Voltage Rise
816
Power Source Voltage Drop/Voltage Rise
Power source voltage too Power source voltage too Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

low low connector is secure.
Disconnect ABS ECM
Power source voltage too Power source voltage too connector and proceed to
high high pinpoint test 1:
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
integrity:
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 4 and ground pin Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
10
2 Check the cable for continuity: OK Proceed to test 3
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 10 and ground Faulty Rectify wiring harness fault,
proceed to test 5
3 Check battery voltage: With Voltage greater Proceed to test 4

ignition 'ON', check the voltage than 11 V
between:
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 4 and ground pin Voltage less Locate and rectify fault, proceed
10 than 11 V to test 5
4 Check battery voltage: Voltage Proceed to test 5

Reconnect ABS between 11 V
modulator/ECMconnector and and 16 V
start the engine, check the
voltage between:
Voltage greater Check the battery charging
Battery positive (red) terminal than 16 V circuit. Locate and rectify fault,
and negative (black) terminal proceed to test 5
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 Power Source Voltage Drop/Voltage Rise
817
5/7/2017 CAN Fault
818
CAN Fault
CAN fault lost CAN fault lost Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

communication with engine communication with engine connector is secure.
ECM ECM Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
CAN fault lost CAN fault lost
communication with communication with
instrument panel instrument panel
CAN fault all CAN fault all
communication lost communication lost
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal OK Disconnect instruments and
integrity: proceed to test 2
ABS modulator/ECM
connector pin 2
ABS modulator/ECM Faulty Rectify fault, proceed to test 5
connector pin 11
2 Check the cable for continuity: OK Proceed to test 3
ABS modulator/ECM pin 2 to
ground
Short circuit Rectify wiring harness fault,
ABS modulator/ECM pin 11 to proceed to test 5
ground
ECM pin A33
ECM pin A34
Instruments pin 9
Instruments pin 10
Diagnostic connector pin 6
Diagnostic connector pin 14
5/7/2017 CAN Fault
819
Test ABS modulator/ECM pin 11 to Result Action
Open circuit Rectify wiring harness fault,
proceed to test 5
ABS modulator/ECM pin 11 Short circuit Rectify wiring harness fault,
proceed to test 5
present
Circuit Diagram
5/7/2017 ABS Modulator Internal Error
820
ABS Modulator Internal Error
ABS ECM internal error ABS ECM internal error Ensure ABS modulator/ECM

Incorrect wheel speed connector is secure.
sensor air gap Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
wheel speed sensor
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
wheel speed sensors between
1.20 mm test 4
2 Check the pulser rings for OK Proceed to test 2
test 4
present
5/7/2017 Front Brake Pads Removal
821
Front Brake Pads Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Do not allow a brake component to hang unsupported on the brake hose or line.
Brake hoses or lines that are not supported may become damaged or bent.
Bent or damaged brake hoses or lines lead to reduced braking efficiency causing loss of
1. Remove the caliper mounting bolts and slide the caliper off the disc.
chbg
1. Caliper mounting bolts
2. Caliper
2. Release the brake pad retaining lug from its mounting in the caliper and remove the brake
pad.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Pads Removal
822
chay
1. Brake pad retaining lug
3. Repeat for the other brake pad.
Note
Note the position and orientation of the antirattle spring for installation.
Note that the arrow on the antirattle spring is pointing in the same direction as the
arrow on the caliper.
1 2
chba
1. Arrow, antirattle spring
2. Arrow, front caliper
5/7/2017 Front Brake Pads Inspection
823
Front Brake Pads Inspection
1. Check the brake pad retainer, antirattle spring and retaining pin. Renew any component
which shows signs of damage or corrosion.
2. Check the brake caliper body slides easily on the mounting bracket pins and check there is
no sign of leakage from the piston seals. Rectify any problems before installing the brake
pads.
3. Inspect the brake pads for wear (see Brake Wear Inspection).
5/7/2017 Front Brake Pads Installation
824
Front Brake Pads Installation
WARNING
Never use mineralbased grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area
where contact with the braking system hydraulic seals and dust seals is possible. Mineral
based grease will damage the hydraulic seals and dust seals in the calipers and master
cylinders.
Damage caused by contact with mineralbased grease may reduce braking efficiency
WARNING
If fitting new proprietary brakes pads, check that the carrier plate of the brake pad is at least
4.5 mm thick.
Fitting brake pads with the carrier plate less than 4.5 mm thick may result in brake failure
due to the possible loss of the brake pad as it wears.
Brake pads for this model supplied by Triumph will have the carrier plate at least 4.5 mm thick.
Always have replacement brake pads supplied and fitted by your Triumph dealer.
1. Carrier plate
2. Brake pad
CAUTION
825
Never lever directly against the disc, caliper or the pad lining material as this will damage
these components. Always use a levering tool made from a soft material which will not
cause damage to the load bearing surfaces.
bodywork.
1. If new pads are being installed, push the pistons fully back into the caliper body. Keep an
eye on the fluid level in the reservoir whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
2. Ensure that the antirattle plate position and orientation is as noted for removal.
3. Fit one of the brake pad's retaining lugs into its mounting in the caliper with its friction
material surfaces facing the other side of the caliper.
chaz
1. Antirattle spring
2. Retaining lug
3. Retaining lug mounting
4. Using finger pressure only, fit the pad's other retaining lug into its mounting of the caliper.
Ensure that both retaining lugs are fully fitted into their mountings.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the other brake pad.
6. Fit the front brake caliper (see Front Brake Caliper Installation).
WARNING
7. Check the front brake fluid level and top up as required with new DOT 4 fluid.
826
8. Check for correct brake operation. Rectify as necessary.
WARNING
5/7/2017 Front Brake Caliper Removal
827
Front Brake Caliper Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Remove the front brake pads (see Front Brake Pads Removal).
Note
Note the orientation of the brake hose on the caliper for installation.
2. Disconnect the brake hose at the caliper and place the free end of the hose in a suitable
container to collect the brake fluid.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Caliper Disassembly
828
Front Brake Caliper Disassembly
WARNING
To prevent injury, never place fingers or hands inside the caliper opening when removing the
pistons. Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using compressed air. Eye, face
and skin damage will result from direct contact with compressed air.
WARNING
Ensure the seal grooves in the caliper bores are not damaged during the removal of the
seals. Damage to the seal grooves may allow brake fluid to leak past the seals resulting in a
dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
1. Cover the caliper opening with a clean heavy cloth and using either compressed air or by
reconnecting the master cylinder and pumping the brake lever, remove the pistons one at a
time.
4
1 2 3
3 2
1
3
chbd
1. Dust seal
2. Piston seal
3. Pistons
4. Caliper
2. Extract the dust seals and piston seals, taking care not to damage the caliper bores.
Discard the old seals, these must not be reused.
Note
The piston seals are slightly thicker than the dust seals.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Caliper Disassembly
829
chbc
2
1. Piston seals
2. Dust seals
3. Check the pistons, caliper and mounting bracket for signs of damage, paying particular
attention to the caliper bores and pistons. If damage is present, renew the worn component
or the complete caliper assembly.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Caliper Inspection
830
Front Brake Caliper Inspection
WARNING
Always renew caliper seals and pistons after removal from the caliper. An effective hydraulic
seal can only be made if new components are used.
A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of control of the motorcycle or an accident could
1. Check the pistons and caliper bores for corrosion, scoring and damage. Renew as
necessary.
2. Inspect the brake pads for damage and wear beyond the service limit. Renew as necessary.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Caliper Assembly
831
Front Brake Caliper Assembly
WARNING
cylinders.
WARNING
Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil, or any other petroleum distillate on internal
master cylinders.
If all components are serviceable, obtain a piston seal kit and reassemble the caliper as follows:
1. Ensure all components are clean, then fit the new seals to their grooves in the caliper bores.
2. Lubricate the fluid seals, caliper bore and the outside of the pistons with clean DOT 4 brake
fluid.
3. Ease the pistons squarely back into the bores, taking care not to displace the seals.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Caliper Installation
832
Front Brake Caliper Installation
WARNING
Do not allow the calipers to hang on the brake hoses as this may damage the hoses and
could lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
1. Connect the brake hoses to the calipers incorporating new sealing washers on each side of
the hose connections.
2. Ensure the orientation of the brake hose is as noted for removal and tighten the union bolt
to 25 Nm.
3. If removed, fit the front brake pads (see Front Brake Pads Installation).
4. Push the pistons fully back into the caliper body. Observe the fluid level in the reservoir
whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
5. Thoroughly clean the threaded fixing holes for the front fork brake caliper fixings.
6. Thoroughly clean the threaded part of the fixing and smear the first four threads with a
proprietary copper based grease.
7. Position the caliper over the disc.
Note
DO NOT operate the front brake.
Operating the front brake will allow the front brake pads to come into contact with the
brake disc.
8. Secure the brake caliper with the fixings, until the mating face of the caliper touches its
mounting point but is able to slide from side to side, do not fully tighten at this stage.
chbg
1. Caliper mounting fixings
2. Caliper
9. Position both front brake calipers to give maximum clearance between both sides of the
833
brake disc and the brake caliper.
Note
When the brake caliper is fitted, there must be a minimum gap of 0.3 mm between the
caliper and brake disc.
10. Using feeler gauges, measure the gap between the front brake caliper and the brake disc,
as shown in the following illustration. Minimum gap to be 0.3 mm.
1. Front brake caliper
2. Front brake disc
11. If the clearances are greater than 0.3 mm, hold the caliper in position and initially tighten the
fixings to 10 Nm and then fully tighten to 55 Nm.
12. Repeat the installation process for the other caliper.
13. If one or more of the clearances is less than 0.3 mm, adjust the brake calipers alignment
(see Front Brake Calipers Alignment
WARNING
14. Fill the master cylinder with new, DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container.
15. Bleed the front brake line (see Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid).
16. Check for correct brake operation.
834
WARNING
5/7/2017 Front Brake Disc Wear
835
Front Brake Disc Wear
WARNING
Front Brake Disc Wear
Front Brake Disc Thickness
Standard 4.5 mm
Service limit 4.0 mm
Brake Disc Runout
1. Measure disc run out using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.
1. Disc
2. Dial gauge
2. Replace any brake disc worn beyond the service limit or exceeding the disc runout limit.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Disc Removal
836
Front Brake Disc Removal
WARNING
WARNING
To avoid wheel damage, always support the wheel as instructed below. A dangerous riding
condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
The fixings securing the left hand brake disc to the wheel also secures the ABS pulser ring.
Note the orientation of the brake discs and the ABS pulser ring fitted for installation.
1. Support the wheel on blocks to avoid damage to the wheel centre and brake disc.
2. Remove and discard the brake disc fixings and remove the brake disc and the ABS pulser
ring, if fitted.
cjmn_1
1. Fixings
2. Brake disc (right hand side shown)
3. Repeat the steps for the other side.
5/7/2017 Front Brake Disc Installation
837
Front Brake Disc Installation
WARNING
1. Check the front brake damper for deterioration and cracks, replace if necessary.
Note
The ABS pulser ring is to be fitted to the left hand brake disc.
2. Locate the brake discs and ABS pulser ring (left hand side) to the wheel as noted during
removal.
3. Fit new disc fixings and tighten to 22 Nm.
4. Refit the wheel (see Front Wheel Installation).
5. Check and, if necessary, adjust the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the ABS
pulser ring (see Air Gap Measurement).
6. Check the operation of the front brake. Rectify as necessary.
WARNING
5/7/2017 Front Brake Master Cylinder Removal
838
Front Brake Master Cylinder Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
Remove the headlight from the headlight bowl (see Headlight and Daytime Running Light
Bulb Replacement).
3 1
cjdt
1. Fixings
2. Harness bracket
3. Headlight bowl
Note
Note the routing of the front brake switch harness for installation.
2. On the back of the harness bracket, locate and disconnect the front brake switch electrical
connector from the main harness.
839
2
1
cjcz_4
1. Front brake switch electrical connector
2. Harness bracket
3. Route the front brake switch harness out of the headlight bowl to the front brake master
cylinder.
4. To drain the fluid from the master cylinder, attach a tube to the front brake caliper bleed
nipple, loosen the nipple and operate the brake lever until all fluid has been expelled into a
suitable container.
5. Release the fixing and detach brake fluid reservoir bracket from the master cylinder.
6. Disconnect the brake fluid reservoir hose from the master cylinder and remove the brake
fluid reservoir.
4
1
2
cjrz
1. Fixing
2. Bracket
3. Brake fluid reservoir hose
840
7. Disconnect the brake hose from the master cylinder and discard the two sealing washers.
8. Remove the pivot bolt and lock nut securing the brake lever to the master cylinder. Remove
the brake lever.
4
3
cjry
1
1. Brake hose union
2. Pivot bolt
3. Lock nut
4. Brake lever
9. Release the fixings, remove the clamp and the master cylinder.
2
cjrc_1
1. Fixings
841
2. Clamp
5/7/2017 Brembo Front Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly
842
Brembo Front Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly
The following items can be replaced on the front brake master cylinder:
Brake lever;
Bleed screw;
Brake light switch.
Brake Lever
1. Note the setting of the brake lever adjuster(s) to ensure they are returned to the same
position when the overhaul operation is complete.
2. Remove the lock nut from the brake lever pivot bolt.
3. Remove the brake lever pivot bolt.
4. Release the brake lever from the master cylinder assembly.
Note
The T3880636 Kit, Brake Lever Pivot Sleeve is required to remove the front brake
lever pivot sleeve.
3 4
cjug
T3880636 Kit, Brake Lever Pivot Sleeve
1. Mandrel
2. Extractor
3. Installer piece
4. Support piece
WARNING
When removing the brake lever pivot sleeve, always wear overalls, eye, face and hand
protection. The brake lever sleeve is hardened and liable to splinter if broken. Debris from
broken components could cause injury to eyes, face and any unprotected parts of the body.
5. Fit the extractor to the mandrel as shown.
843
cjug
1. Mandrel
2. Extractor
6. Position the brake lever assembly with the pivot facing towards the support piece as shown.
2
1
3
cjuf
1. Brake lever
2. Pivot
3. Support piece
7. Position the mandrel and extractor to the brake lever and press out the pivot sleeve from
the brake lever assembly.
844
1
6
3
5
4
2
cjuf
1. Mandrel
2. Support piece
3. Extractor
4. Front brake lever
5. Pivot
6. Return spring
8. Retain the brake lever pivot sleeve for reuse during assembly.
WARNING
Always wear eye, hand and face protection when separating brake lever components.
Uncontrolled release of the brake lever components may cause the spring to become
detached during dismantling. Flying springs may cause injury to eyes, face and any
unprotected parts of the body.
Note
Note the orientation of the return spring, push rod and brake lever pivot for
installation.
9. Carefully remove the extractor from the brake lever assembly.
10. Collect the brake lever pivot sleeve from the support piece.
11. Carefully detach the lever from the pivot assembly.
Bleed Screw
1. Remove the cover from the bleed screw. Release the bleed screw and remove from the
master cylinder assembly.
845
1
1. Bleed screw
2. Front brake master cylinder
Brake Switch
1. Pulling carefully on the brake switch housing, remove the brake switch from the master
cylinder assembly.
1. Brake switch
2. Location holes
5/7/2017 Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
846
Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
Brake Lever
1. Locate the pin of the brake lever assembly into the hole in the master cylinder dust seal,
ensuring the rubber seal correctly locates into position.
2
3
4
2. Dust seal
3. Brake lever pin
4. Brake lever
2. Line up the holes of the brake lever and master cylinder, and insert the pivot bolt. Tighten
the pivot bolt to 1 Nm.
3. Fit the pivot bolt lock nut and tighten to 6 Nm.
4. Check lever operation and ensure the rubber seal is still correctly seated.
Bleed Screw
1. Fit the bleed screw to the master cylinder and tighten to 5 Nm
5/7/2017 Front Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
847
1
1. Bleed screw
2. Fit the rubber cover to the bleed screw.
Brake Switch
1. Position the brake switch to the master cylinder. Locate the brake switch in the location
holes and push firmly home.
1. Brake switch
2. Location holes
5/7/2017 Front Brake Master Cylinder Installation
848
Front Brake Master Cylinder Installation
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Locate the master cylinder to the handlebars and position the clamp with the UP arrow
pointing upwards. Do not tighten the clamp fixings at this stage.
2. Align the split line of the master cylinder clamp to the alignment mark on the upper surface
of the handlebar. Tighten the clamp fixings, upper one first, to 8.5 Nm.
1 3
2
cjrc
1. Alignment mark
2. UP arrow
3. Fixings
3. Position the brake lever ensuring that the pivot boss is correctly aligned to the master
cylinder push rod.
4. Fit and tighten the pivot bolt to 1 Nm, and the lock nut to 6 Nm.
5. Connect the brake hose to the master cylinder incorporating new sealing washers to each
side of the union. Tighten the union bolt to 25 Nm.
849
4
3
cjry
1
1. Brake hose union bolt
2. Pivot bolt
3. Lock nut
4. Brake lever
6. Connect the brake fluid reservoir hose to the master cylinder.
7. Fit the brake fluid reservoir bracket to the master cylinder and tighten its fixing to 6 Nm.
4
1
2
cjrz
1. Fixing
2. Bracket
3. Brake fluid reservoir hose
8. Route the front brake switch harness to the headlight bowl as noted for removal.
850
9. On the back of the harness bracket, locate and connect the front brake switch electrical
connector to the main harness as noted for removal.
2
1
cjcz_4
1. Front brake switch electrical connector
2. Harness bracket
3 1
cjdt
1. Fixings
2. Harness bracket
3. Headlight bowl
851
WARNING
CAUTION
To prevent body damage, do not spill brake fluid onto any area of the bodywork. Spilled
11. Fill and bleed the front brakes (see Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid).
12. Examine the system for correct operation and fluid leaks. Rectify as necessary.
WARNING
Fit the headlight to the headlight bowl (see Headlight and Daytime Running Light Bulb
Replacement).
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Pads Removal
852
Rear Brake Pads Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the right hand side panel to gain access to the rear brake fluid reservoir (see Side
Panels).
2. Loosen the brake pad retaining pins.
3. Remove the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Removal).
4. Detach the brake caliper and anchor plate assembly from the swinging arm.
5. Remove the brake pad retaining pins.
cjs c 1
1. Brake pad retaining pins
6. Remove the brake pads and the antirattle spring.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Pads Removal
853
1
cjs d
1. Brake pads
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Pads Inspection
854
Rear Brake Pads Inspection
1. Check the friction material of each brake pad for signs of contamination and measure its
thickness. If the friction material of either pad is contaminated or has worn beyond the
service limit, renew both pads as a set.
jafz_1
1. Friction material thickness (service limit 1.5 mm)
2. Brake pads
2. Check the antirattle spring and retaining pins. Renew any component which shows signs of
damage or corrosion.
3. Check the caliper body slides easily on the mounting bracket pins and check there is no
sign of leakage from the piston seals. Rectify any problems before installing the brake pads.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Pads Installation
855
Rear Brake Pads Installation
WARNING
WARNING
cylinders.
CAUTION
bodywork or the rear wheel.
1. If new brake pads are being installed, push the pistons fully back into the caliper body. Keep
an eye on the fluid level in the reservoir whilst retracting the pistons to prevent fluid spillage.
2. Install the antirattle spring into the caliper.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Pads Installation
856
WARNING
Do not apply more than a minimum coating of grease to the brake pad retaining pins.
Excess grease may contaminate the brake pads, hydraulic seals and discs causing reduced
braking efficiency and an accident.
3. Lubricate the brake pad retaining pins with a thin smear of proprietary high temperature
copper based grease.
4. Fit the brake pads into the caliper with their friction material facing each other. Ensure both
pads are correctly located then align them with the caliper body and fit the retaining pins.
5. Fit the brake caliper and anchor assembly to the swinging arm.
6. Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Installation).
7. Pump the brake pedal to correctly position the caliper pistons.
8. Check the brake fluid level and top up as required with new DOT 4 fluid.
WARNING
WARNING
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Caliper Removal
857
Rear Brake Caliper Removal
WARNING
1. Release the fixing and detach the rear wheel ABS sensor from the rear brake anchor plate.
Collect the shim.
2. Disconnect the rear brake hose at the caliper and place the free end of the hose into a
suitable container to collect the brake fluid. Discard the two sealing washers.
3. If the brake caliper is to be disassembled, loosen the two brake pad retaining pins.
cjs c_1
3
1. ABS sensor
2. Fixing
3. Brake hose union
5. If the brake caliper is to be disassembled, remove the brake pads and the antirattle spring.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly
858
Rear Brake Caliper Disassembly
WARNING
To prevent injury, never place fingers or hands inside the caliper opening when removing the
pistons. Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using compressed air. Eye, face
and skin damage will result from direct contact with compressed air.
1. Separate the brake caliper and the mounting bracket.
cjs y
1. Mounting bracket
2. Cover the caliper opening with a clean, heavy cloth and, using either compressed air or by
reconnecting the master cylinder and pumping the rear brake pedal, eject both pistons from
the caliper at the same time.
WARNING
Ensure the seal grooves in the caliper bores are not damaged during the removal of the
seals. Damage to the seal grooves may allow brake fluid to leak past the seals resulting in a
dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
3. Extract the dust seals and piston seals, taking care not to damage the caliper bores.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Caliper Inspection
859
Rear Brake Caliper Inspection
WARNING
Always renew caliper seals and pistons after removal from the caliper. An effective hydraulic
seal can only be made if new components are used.
A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of control of the motorcycle or an accident could
1. Check the pistons, caliper, mounting bracket and mounting bracket sliding pin gaiters for
signs of damage, paying particular attention to the caliper bores and pistons. If damage is
present, renew the worn component or the complete caliper assembly.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Caliper Assembly
860
Rear Brake Caliper Assembly
1. If all components are serviceable, obtain a piston seal kit and reassemble the caliper as
follows:
WARNING
Always renew caliper seals after removal of the pistons. An effective hydraulic seal can only
be made if new seals are fitted.
A dangerous riding condition leading to an accident could result if this warning is ignored.
WARNING
Never use solvents, petrol (gasoline), engine oil, or any other petroleum distillate on internal
master cylinders.
result if this warning is ignored
2. Ensure all components are clean, then fit the new seals to their grooves in the caliper bores.
3. Lubricate the fluid seals, caliper bore and the outside of the pistons with clean DOT 4 brake
fluid.
4. Ease the pistons squarely back into the bores, taking care not to displace the seals.
WARNING
Never use mineral based grease (such as lithium or copper based grease) in any area
cylinders. Damage caused by contact with mineral based grease may reduce braking
efficiency resulting in an accident.
5. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with silicone based grease (such as T2022021 supplied
by Triumph) then reassemble the bracket and caliper. Ensure the pin gaiters are correctly
located on both the bracket and caliper.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Caliper Assembly
861
1
2
cjs y_1
1. Sliding pins
2. Sliding pin gaiters
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Caliper Installation
862
Rear Brake Caliper Installation
WARNING
1. If the caliper has been overhauled, install the brake pads.
2. Position the rear brake anchor plate onto the swinging arm.
3. Fit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Installation).
4. If loosened or removed, tighten the brake pad retaining pins to 18 Nm.
5. Refit the rear wheel ABS sensor and its spacer to the rear brake anchor plate. Check and, if
necessary, adjust the ABS sensor to pulser ring air gap (see Air Gap Measurement). Then
tighten the new fixing to 9 Nm.
6. Connect the brake hose to the caliper incorporating new sealing washers on each side of
the brake hose union.
7. Tighten the brake hose union to 25 Nm.
cjs c_1
3
1. ABS sensor
2. Fixing
3. Brake hose union
8. Bleed the rear brake (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid).
9. Check the operation of the brake and carry out a thorough leak check before riding the
motorcycle.
WARNING
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Caliper Installation
863
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Disc Wear
864
Rear Brake Disc Wear
Wear
WARNING
1. Replace any brake disc worn beyond the service limit or exceeding the disc runout limit.
Rear Disc Thickness
Standard 5.0 mm (standard)
Service limit 4.5 mm (service limit)
Disc Runout
Measure disc runout using an accurate dial gauge mounted on a surface plate.
cjfe_5
1. Brake disc
2. Dial gauge
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Disc Removal
865
Rear Brake Disc Removal
WARNING
1. Support the wheel on blocks to avoid damage to the wheel centre.
2. Remove and discard the fixings and remove the ABS pulser ring.
3. Remove and discard the fixings and remove the brake disc.
4 1
cjfe_2
1. Fixings (ABS pulser ring)
2. ABS pulser ring
3. Fixing (rear brake disc)
4. Rear brake disc
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Disc Installation
866
Rear Brake Disc Installation
1. Locate the brake disc to the wheel.
2. Fit new fixings and tighten to 22 Nm.
3. Locate the ABS pulser ring to the rear brake disc.
4. Fit new fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the ABS
Check the operation of the rear brake. Rectify as necessary.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Master Cylinder Removal
867
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Drain the fluid from the master cylinder by bleeding the system at the rear brake caliper until
all fluid has been expelled.
bracket.
citi_1
1. Fixing
3. Disconnect the brake line from the rear master cylinder. Discard the sealing washers.
CAUTION
868
4. Remove the fixing and detach the brake line Pclip from the right hand control plate.
5. Remove the fixings and detach the right hand control plate from the frame.
4 2
3
cjs k
1. Brake line union
2. Fixing (Pclip)
3. Fixings (right hand control plate)
4. Brake line
6. Disconnect the rear brake switch from the main harness and remove the brake master
cylinder and control plate assembly.
cjs f
869
7. Remove the fixing securing the brake light switch and bracket assembly to the right hand
control plate.
8. Slide the brake light switch forwards and detach it from its locating pin on the right hand
control plate.
3
1
cjs h_1
1. Fixing
2. Locating pin
3. Brake light switch and bracket assembly
9. Release the clip, and noting its orientation, remove the brake fluid reservoir and hose from
the master cylinder.
10. Remove the clip and clevis pin at the lower end of the brake pushrod.
Note
Note that the front fixing for the rear brake master cylinder has a lock nut.
11. Remove the two fixings and detach the rear brake master cylinder from the right hand
control plate. Discard the lock nut.
870
1 5
3
2
cjs i
1. Hose clip
2. Clevis pin
3. Brake push rod
4. Fixings
5. Control plate
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly
871
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Disassembly
1. Remove the rubber boot from the cylinder and pushrod.
2. Remove the circlip retaining the pushrod to the cylinder.
ccan_1
1. Rubber boot
2. Circlip
3. Remove the pushrod and piston set from the master cylinder bore noting the relative
position of the seals and piston components.
2 1 2
ccao
1. Piston
2. Seals
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Master Cylinder Inspection
872
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Inspection
1. Check the following for wear, damage, cracks or deterioration:
1 3
4
2
ccad
1. Cylinder bore
2. Dust cover
3. Spring
4. Piston
2. Examine the pushrod for distortion and other damage. Replace as necessary.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
873
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
WARNING
Never use mineralbased grease in any part of the braking system or in any area where
contact with the braking system is possible. Mineralbased grease will damage the hydraulic
seals in the calipers and master cylinders. A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of
motorcycle control and an accident could result from use of mineral grease.
1. Lubricate the piston and cylinder with new, clean brake fluid.
WARNING
Ensure that the piston and piston seal are fitted facing the same way as noted during
removal. A dangerous riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident
could result from incorrect assembly of the master cylinder.
2. Fit the new piston and seal set into the master cylinder.
2 1 2
ccao
1. Piston
2. Seals (in correct orientation)
3. Apply a small amount of brake grease to the pushrod.
4. Install the pushrod in the master cylinder, compress the spring and retain the assembly with
a new circlip.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
874
ccan
1. Pushrod
2. Circlip
5. Refit the master cylinder boot.
5/7/2017 Rear Brake Master Cylinder Installation
875
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Installation
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Fit the rear brake master cylinder to the right hand control plate. Fit a new lock nut to the
front fixing and tighten the fixings to 18 Nm.
2. Position the brake pedal to the pushrod, engage the clevis and retain it with the clip. Ensure
the clip is fitted as shown below:
3. Refit the brake fluid reservoir and its hose to the master cylinder as noted on for removal.
Secure with the clip.
2 4
1
3
cjs h
1. Brake switch bracket
2. Lock nut
3. Clip
4. Clip
4. Position the brake light switch and bracket assembly to its locating pin on the right hand
control plate.
5. Fit a new fixing but do not fully tighten at this stage.
6. Slide the brake switch assembly rearward until it stops against the switch actuation plate.
Tighten the fixing to 5 Nm.
876
2
cjs h_2
1. Switch actuation plate
2. Brake light switch (control plate removed for
clarity)
7. Connect the rear brake switch to the main harness.
cjs f
8. Attach the right hand control plate to the frame and tighten the fixings to 25 Nm.
9. With the brake switch harness routed as noted for removal, attach the brake line Pclip to
the right hand control plate and tighten the fixing to 5 Nm.
10. Incorporating new washers to either side of the union, fit the brake line. Tighten the union
bolt to 25 Nm.
877
4 2
3
cjs k
1. Brake line union
2. Fixing (Pclip)
3. Fixings (right hand control plate)
4. Brake line
11. Refit the front sprocket cover (see Front Sprocket Cover Installation).
12. Refit the rear brake fluid reservoir to the relay bracket and tighten the new fixing to 3 Nm.
WARNING
service manual. The use of brake fluids other than those DOT 4 fluids listed in the General
motorcycle control and an accident. Observe the brake fluid handling warnings given earlier
in this section of the manual.
Fill and bleed the rear brake system (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake
Fluid).
WARNING
authorised Triumph dealer take remedial action before you attempt to ride the
motorcycle again. Failure to take remedial action may reduce braking efficiency leading
to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
Check the operation of the rear brake and brake light. Rectify as necessary.
5/7/2017 Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal
878
Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal
WARNING
Remove the headlight from the headlight bowl (see Headlight Removal).
1. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector from the main harness, located
inside the headlight.
CAUTION
Note the routing of the wheel speed sensor harness and it clips for installation.
2. Detach the front ABS wheel speed sensor harness from the clips on the front brake line.
3. Route the front ABS wheel speed sensor harness down to the front brake caliper.
Note
There is a shim between the wheel speed sensor and the front fork leg.
4. Release the fixing securing the wheel speed sensor to the fork leg.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor and collect the shim.
3
cjs l
1. Fixing
2. Clip (to brake line, one shown)
3. Front ABS wheel speed sensor
5/7/2017 Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal
879
5/7/2017 Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Installation
880
Front ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Installation
WARNING
1. Position the wheel speed sensor and shim to the fork leg, as noted for removal. Fit the fixing
and tighten to 9 Nm.
2. Secure the wheel speed sensor harness to the brake hose clips.
3. Route the harness as noted for removal and connect the wheel speed sensor electrical
connector to the main harness.
4. Refit the headlight to the headlight bowl (see Headlight Installation).
5. The air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the pulser ring must be between 0.4 mm
and 1.2 mm. Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap (see Air Gap Measurement).
5/7/2017 Front ABS Pulser Ring Removal
881
Front ABS Pulser Ring Removal
Note
The front ABS pulser ring is mounted on the left hand brake disc.
1. Remove front brake disc and pulser ring (see Front Brake Disc Removal).
5/7/2017 Front ABS Pulser Ring Installation
882
Front ABS Pulser Ring Installation
Note
The front ABS pulser ring is mounted on the left hand brake disc.
1. Fit the front brake disc and ABS pulser ring (see Front Brake Disc Installation).
5/7/2017 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal
883
Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Removal
WARNING
Remove the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
Note
Note the location of the shim for the ABS wheel speed sensor for installation.
1. Release the fixing and detach the wheel speed sensor from the rear brake caliper carrier.
Collect the shim.
cjs c_2
1. Fixing
2. Rear ABS wheel speed sensor
3. If fitted, remove the evaporative canister (see Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Removal).
4. Detach the ABS sensor cable and brake hose from their cable guide on the left hand side of
the swinging arm.
884
1
cjrv_1
1. Brake hose
2. Harness guide
CAUTION
Note the routing of the wheel speed sensor harness and it clips for installation.
5. Disconnect the rear wheel ABS sensor from the main harness and detach from the airbox.
cjqd
6. Route the sensor harness to the rear caliper and remove rear ABS wheel speed sensor.
885
5/7/2017 Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Installation
886
Rear ABS Wheel Speed Sensor Installation
1. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector to the main harness.
2. Route and secure the ABS wheel speed sensor harness to its retaining clips as noted for
removal.
3. Refit the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
4. Attach the ABS sensor cable and brake hose to their cable guide on the left hand side of the
swinging arm.
1
cjrv_1
1. Brake hose
2. Harness guide
5. If removed, refit the evaporative canister (see Evaporative Canister (if fitted) Installation).
6. Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Installation
7. Position the wheel speed sensor and shim to the brake caliper carrier, as noted for removal.
Fit the fixing and tighten to 9 Nm.
8. The air gap between the wheel speed sensor ring and the sensor must be between 0.40
mm and 1.20 mm. Check, and if necessary, adjust the air gap (see Air Gap Measurement).
5/7/2017 Rear ABS Pulser Ring Removal
887
Rear ABS Pulser Ring Removal
1. Remove and discard the four fixings and remove the pulser ring.
cjfe_3
1. Fixings (ABS pulser ring)
2. ABS pulser ring
5/7/2017 Rear ABS Pulser Ring Inspection
888
Rear ABS Pulser Ring Inspection
1. Check the pulser ring for damaged, missing or cracked teeth or distortion. Renew the pulser
ring as necessary.
5/7/2017 Rear ABS Pulser Ring Installation
889
Rear ABS Pulser Ring Installation
1. Locate the pulser ring on the brake disc, fit new fixings and tighten to 5 Nm.
2. Refit the rear wheel (see Rear Wheel Installation).
3. Check and, if necessary, adjust the air gap between the wheel speed sensor and the ABS
5/7/2017 ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM Removal
890
ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
Drain the brake fluid from the front master cylinder by bleeding the system at the front
caliper until all fluid has been expelled (see Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake
Fluid).
Drain the fluid from the rear master cylinder by bleeding the system at the rear caliper until
all fluid has been expelled (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid).
1. Remove the swinging arm (see Swinging Arm Removal).
2. Remove the alternator regulator/rectifier (see Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Removal).
CAUTION
When loosening the ABS modulator brake line unions, hold the ABS modulator.
Note the position of the four brake lines on the ABS modulator for installation.
3. Disconnect the ABS modulator multiplug (see ABS Electrical Connectors).
4. Remove the four brake line unions and discard the sealing washers.
5. Remove the two fixings shown in the following illustration and remove the ABS modulator.
Discard the fixings.
5/7/2017 ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM Removal
891
2
1 3
cjs g
4
1. ABS modulator harness
2. Brake line unions
3. Fixing (ABS modulator to bracket)
4. Fixing (ABS modulator bracket to frame)
6. If necessary, release the fixing and remove the antirotation moulding from the ABS
modulator. Discard the fixing.
cje h
1. Fixing
2. Antirotation moulding
5/7/2017 ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM Installation
892
ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM Installation
WARNING
CAUTION
1. If removed, fit the antirotation moulding and tighten the new fixing to 5 Nm.
cje h
1. Fixing
2. Antirotation moulding
2. Position the ABS modulator onto its bracket. Fit new fixings and tighten to 9 Nm.
3. Connect the ABS modulator multiplug (see ABS Electrical Connectors).
4. Incorporating new washers to either side of the unions, fit the brake lines to the ABS
modulator as noted for removal. Tighten the brake line unions to 25 Nm.
5/7/2017 ABS Hydraulic Modulator/ECM Installation
893
2
1 3
cjs g
4
1. ABS modulator harness
2. Brake line unions
3. Fixing (ABS modulator to bracket)
4. Fixing (ABS modulator bracket to frame)
5. Refit the alternator regulator/rectifier (see Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Installation).
6. Fit the swinging arm (see Swinging Arm Installation).
WARNING
authorised Triumph Dealer take remedial action. Failure to take remedial action may reduce
braking efficiency leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
Bleed the front brakes (see Bleeding the Front Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid).
Bleed the rear brakes (see Bleeding the Rear Brakes, Renewing Brake Fluid).
Check the operation of the front and rear brakes. Rectify as necessary.
5/7/2017 ABS Hydraulic Circuit Layout
894
ABS Hydraulic Circuit Layout
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Front Wheel
895
Exploded View – Front Wheel
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Rear Wheel and Cush Drive
896
Exploded View – Rear Wheel and Cush Drive
5/7/2017 Tyres
897
Tyres
This model is equipped with spoked wheels which require a tyre suitable for use with an inner
tube.
A protection band is also fitted between the wheel rim and the inner tube.
WARNING
Failure to use an inner tube in a spoked wheel will cause deflation of the tyre resulting in
loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
WARNING
Inner tubes must only be used on motorcycles fitted with spoked wheels.
Some brands of approved tyres marked 'TUBELESS' may be suitable for use with an inner
tube. Where this is the case, the tyre wall may be marked with text permitting the fitment of
an inner tube (see illustration below).
All tyres approved for this model by Triumph are suitable for use with an inner tube.
For the correct inner tube and tyre, a list of approved tyres specific to this model is available
from your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk.
Use of a tyre not approved for use with an inner tube may result in loss of tyre pressure
leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
ON
TUB
FIT ETYP
AT
UB E RIM
E
Typical Tyre Marking Tubeless Tyre Suitable For
Use With An Inner Tube
5/7/2017 Tyre Inflation Pressures
898
Tyre Inflation Pressures
WARNING
Incorrect tyre inflation will cause abnormal tread wear and instability problems that may lead
to loss of control and an accident.
Underinflation may result in the tyre slipping on, or coming off the rim. Overinflation will
cause instability and accelerated tread wear.
Both conditions are dangerous as they may cause loss of control leading to an accident.
Correct inflation pressure will provide maximum stability, rider comfort and tyre life. Always
check tyre pressures before riding when the tyres are cold. Check tyre pressures daily and
adjust if necessary. See the Specification section for details of the correct inflation pressures.
5/7/2017 Minimum Recommended Tread Depth
899
Minimum Recommended Tread Depth
In accordance with the periodic maintenance chart, measure the depth of the tread with a depth
gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread depth
specified in the table below:
Under 80 mph (130 km/h) 2 mm (0.08 in)
Over 80 mph (130 km/h) Front 2 mm (0.08 in)
Rear 3 mm (0.12 in)
WARNING
This Triumph motorcycle must not be operated above the legal road speed limit except in
authorised closed course conditions.
WARNING
Only operate this Triumph motorcycle at high speed in closed course, onroad competition or
on closed course racetracks. High speed operation should only then be attempted by riders
who have been instructed in the techniques necessary for high speed riding and are familiar
with the motorcycle’s characteristics in all conditions. High speed operation in any other
circumstances is dangerous and will lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
5/7/2017 Important Tyre Information
900
Important Tyre Information
All Triumph motorcycles are carefully and extensively tested in a range of riding conditions to
ensure that the most effective tyre combinations are approved for use on each model. It is
essential that approved tyre combinations are used when purchasing replacement tyres as the
use of nonapproved tyres or approved tyres in nonapproved combinations may lead to
motorcycle instability. A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your
authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk.
WARNING
The ABS computer operates by comparing the relative speed of the front and rear wheels.
Use of nonrecommended tyres can affect wheel speed and cause the ABS function not to
operate, potentially leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident in conditions where
the ABS would normally function.
WARNING
Always check tyre pressures before riding when the tyres are cold. Operation with
incorrectly inflated tyres may affect handling leading to loss of control and an accident.
WARNING
Operation with excessively worn or damaged tyres will adversely affect handling and control
leading to loss of control or an accident.
WARNING
Inner tubes must only be used on motorcycles fitted with spoked wheels.
All Triumph motorcycles are carefully and extensively tested in a range of riding conditions
to ensure that the most effective tyre combinations are approved for use on each model. It is
essential that approved tyre combinations are used when purchasing replacement tyres as
the use of nonapproved tyres or approved tyres in nonapproved combinations may lead to
motorcycle instability. A list of approved tyres specific to this model is available from your
authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk.
WARNING
901
If a tyre or inner tube sustains a puncture, the tyre and inner tube must be replaced together.
Failure to replace a punctured tyre and inner tube together, or operation with a repaired tyre
or inner tube can lead to instability, loss of motorcycle control or an accident.
If tyre or inner tube damage is suspected, such as after striking the kerb, ask your
authorised Triumph dealer to inspect the tyre both internally and externally and to also
inspect the inner tube. Remember, tyre damage may not always be visible from the outside.
Operation of the motorcycle with damaged tyres could lead to loss of motorcycle control and
an accident.
When replacing a 'TUBETYPE' tyre on a spoked wheel, always inspect the rim tape (rim
protection band) to ensure that it is correctly protecting the tube from the spoke threads. A
damaged rim tape may lead to rapid tyre deflation causing loss of control and an accident.
WARNING
Do not install tubetype tyres on tubeless rims. The bead will not seat and the tyres could
slip on the rims, causing tyre deflation that may result in a loss of motorcycle control and an
accident.
Do not install an inner tube inside a tubeless tyre. This may cause instability and excessive
heat buildup may cause the tube to burst resulting in rapid tyre deflation, loss of vehicle
WARNING
The use of tyres other than those listed at your authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet,
at www.triumph.co.uk, may adversely affect handling leading to loss of motorcycle control or
an accident. Use the recommended tyre options only in the combinations listed at your
authorised Triumph dealer, or on the internet at www.triumph.co.uk. Do not mix tyres from
different manufacturers or tyres from the same manufacturer but from another option.
WARNING
Accurate wheel balance is important for safe, stable handling of the motorcycle. Do not
remove or change any wheel balance weights. Incorrect wheel balance may cause instability
leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
When wheel balancing is required, such as after tyre replacement, see your authorised
Triumph dealer.
Only use selfadhesive weights. Clipon weights will damage the wheel and tyre potentially
resulting in tyre deflation, loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
WARNING
902
When replacement tyres are required, consult your authorised Triumph dealer who will
arrange for the tyres to be fitted according to the tyre manufacturer’s instructions.
When tyres are replaced, allow time for the tyre to seat itself to the rim (approximately 24
hours). During this seating period, ride cautiously as an incorrectly seated tyre could cause
loss of motorcycle control or an accident. Initially, the new tyre will not produce the same
handling characteristics as the worn tyre and the rider must allow adequate riding distance
(approximately 100 miles/160 km) to become accustomed to the new handling
characteristics.
After both 24 hours and 100 miles (160 km), the tyre pressures should be checked and
adjusted and the tyre examined for correct seating and rectified as necessary.
Use of a motorcycle when not accustomed to its handling characteristics, with incorrect tyre
pressures or an incorrectly seated tyre is dangerous and may lead to loss of motorcycle
5/7/2017 Tyre Wear/Wheel Inspection
903
Tyre Wear/Wheel Inspection
As the tyre tread wears down, the tyre becomes more susceptible to puncture and failure. It is
estimated that 90% of all tyre failures occur during the last 10% of tread life (90% worn). It is
false economy and unsafe to use tyres until they are worn to their minimum.
All tyres are fitted with tread wear indicators. When the tyre becomes worn down as far as the
top of a tread wear indicator, the tyre is worn beyond its service life and must be replaced.
1. Tread wear indicator
Attention must also be paid to the legal limits for tread wear, which differ from country to
country. Tyres that have worn to the legal limit in the country or region in which the motorcycle
is operated must be replaced, even if tread wear has not yet reached the level of the tread wear
indicators.
In accordance with the scheduled maintenance chart, measure the depth of the tread with a
depth gauge, and replace any tyre that has worn to, or beyond the minimum allowable tread
depth.
Inspect wheels for cracks, splits and kerb damage. Always replace wheels that are suspected of
having become damaged.
WARNING
5/7/2017 Tyre Wear/Wheel Inspection
904
Operation with excessively worn tyres is hazardous and will adversely affect traction,
stability and handling which may lead to loss of control and an accident.
When tubeless tyres, used without a tube, become punctured, leakage is often very slow.
Always inspect tyres very closely for punctures. Check the tyres for cuts, embedded nails or
other sharp objects. Operation with punctured or damaged tyres will adversely affect
motorcycle stability and handling which may lead to loss of control or an accident.
Check the rims for dents or deformation. Operation with damaged or defective wheels or
tyres is dangerous and loss of motorcycle control or an accident could result.
Always consult your authorised Triumph dealer for tyre replacement, or for a safety
inspection of the tyres.
5/7/2017 Front Wheel Removal
905
Front Wheel Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the brake hose as this may damage the hose.
Damaged hoses could cause brake failure leading to loss of motorcycle control and an
accident.
1. Raise and support the front of the motorcycle.
Note
It is not necessary to disconnect the brake hoses.
2. Detach and support the front brake calipers (see Front Brake Pads Removal).
3. Loosen the pinch bolt at the lower end of the right hand fork.
4. Working from the right hand side, release and remove the wheel spindle which is threaded
into the left hand fork.
1
cjs v
1. Pinch bolt
2. Wheel spindle
5. Remove the wheel, recovering the spacers from both sides.
5/7/2017 Front Wheel Removal
906
cje u_2
1. Spacer (right hand shown)
6. Place the wheel on wooden blocks to prevent damage to the brake discs.
WARNING
Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc as this may damage the disc leading to loss
CAUTION
To prevent wheel and wheel bearing damage, ensure dirt and debris are not allowed to enter
the wheel bearings.
7. Thoroughly clean all components and inspect for wear or damage.
5/7/2017 Front Wheel Inspection
907
Front Wheel Inspection
1. Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings
(see Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Removal).
5/7/2017 Front Wheel Installation
908
Front Wheel Installation
WARNING
1. Lightly smear the spacers with grease and locate into the left hand and right hand sides of
the hub.
cje u_2
1. Spacer (right hand shown)
2. Position the wheel between the forks.
3. Raise the wheel until it is in alignment with the spindle holes in both forks. Take care to not
dislodge the spacers.
4. Refit the wheel spindle from the right hand side and tighten to 65 Nm.
5. Thoroughly clean and degrease the brake discs.
6. Fit the front brake caliper and check/adjust its alignment (see Front Brake Calipers
Alignment).
WARNING
5/7/2017 Rear Wheel Removal
909
Rear Wheel Removal
WARNING
1. Support the motorcycle so the rear wheel is raised clear of the ground.
2. Release the fixings and remove the drive chain guard.
3. Loosen the wheel spindle nut.
4. Release the lock nuts on both the left hand and right hand chain adjuster bolts.
2
3
citw_5
1. Adjuster bolt
2. Adjuster bolt lock nut
3. Rear wheel spindle nut
5. Remove the spindle nut and washer then support the wheel and withdraw the spindle.
Discard the nut.
910
3 2
citw_3
2. Washer
3. Spindle
6. Lower the wheel to the ground, and noting its position, release the brake caliper and carrier
from the slot on the swinging arm.
WARNING
Do not allow the caliper to hang on the brake hose as this may damage the hose.
Damaged hoses could cause brake failure leading to loss of motorcycle control and an
accident.
7. Roll the wheel forward until the drive chain can be detached from the rear sprocket.
8. Manoeuvre the wheel out of position and recover the spacers from the hub and drive flange.
WARNING
Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc as this may damage the disc leading to loss
CAUTION
To prevent wheel and wheel bearing damage, ensure dirt and debris are not allowed to enter
the wheel bearings.
911
cjfe_1
1. Spacer (left hand shown)
5/7/2017 Rear Wheel Inspection
912
Rear Wheel Inspection
1. Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings
(see Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Removal).
5/7/2017 Rear Wheel Installation
913
Rear Wheel Installation
WARNING
1. Lubricate the lips of the wheel bearing seals with a smear of multipurpose grease.
2. Fit the spacer to the hub and drive flange.
cjfe_1
1. Spacer (left hand shown)
3. Position the wheel in between the swinging arm and engage the drive chain with the
sprocket.
4. Fit the brake caliper mounting plate, locating its slot on the swinging arm lug.
5. Lift the wheel into position, ensuring the spacers and caliper mounting plate remain
correctly positioned, and insert the spindle from the left hand side.
6. Fit the washer and a new nut to the spindle and hand tighten.
5/7/2017 Rear Wheel Installation
914
3 2
citw_3
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Spindle
7. Lower the motorcycle to the ground and adjust the drive chain free movement (see Final
Drive Chain Adjustment), then tighten the spindle nut to 110 Nm.
8. Operate the brake pedal a few times to ensure the brake pads are in firm contact with the
disc.
WARNING
5/7/2017 Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Removal
915
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Removal
WARNING
To avoid wheel damage, always support the wheel as instructed below. A dangerous riding
condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an accident could result if this warning is
ignored.
1. Support the wheel on blocks to prevent damage to the sprocket and wheel rim.
WARNING
Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using a drift as use of a hammer and drift
can cause bearings to fragment. Pieces of fragmented bearing could cause eye and hand
injuries if suitable protective apparel is not worn.
CAUTION
To prevent wheel damage and to aid bearing removal, always apply force evenly on both
sides of the bearing to prevent it from 'tipping' and becoming stuck. Application of uneven
force will lead to difficulty in removing the bearing and to a damaged wheel.
2. Remove and discard the seal (two on the front wheel, one on the rear) and the bearing
circlip.
3. Using a suitable pin punch through the centre of the wheel, drift out the wheel bearings.
Collect the centre sleeve.
cdio
5/7/2017 Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Removal
Wheel Bearing Removal
916
5/7/2017 Inspection Bearings
917
Inspection Bearings
1. Check the wheel bearings spin smoothly with no signs of play. If not, renew the bearings.
5/7/2017 Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Installation
918
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Installation
Note
Refer to the chart below for the correct tool and tool face when inserting bearings.
Bearings are inserted by means of a draw bolt acting on the insertion tool. A support
tool is located on the opposite side of the wheel to the insertion tool and as the bolt
is tightened, the bearing is drawn into the wheel.
Insert bearings with the marked or shielded side facing outwards and always fit a
new bearing circlip and seals.
Front Wheel Bearing Tool Selection Chart
Bearing insertion tool Support tool
Left bearing T3880053 Wheel Bearing T3880075 Bearing Installer

Extraction Kit Large face to wheel
Small face to bearing
Right bearing T3880053 Wheel Bearing T3880075 Bearing Installer

Small face to bearing
Rear Wheel Bearing Tool Selection Chart
Bearing insertion tool Support tool
Left bearing T3880053 Wheel Bearing T3880075 Bearing Installer

Large face to bearing
Right bearing T3880053 Wheel Bearing T3880075 Bearing Installer

Large face to bearing
1. Fit the wheel bearings and centre sleeve using the method described above.
5/7/2017 Front and Rear Wheel Bearings Installation
919
cjfe_1
1. T3880075 Bearing Installer in position on rear
wheel
2. Fit a new circlip.
3. Lubricate and fit new seal(s) to the wheel. Lubricate the seal’s knifeedge with grease to
NLGI 2 specification.
Fit the front wheel (see Front Wheel Installation).
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Final Drive
920
Exploded View – Final Drive
5/7/2017 Final Drive Chain
921
Final Drive Chain
For safety and to prevent excessive wear, the drive chain must be checked, adjusted and
lubricated in accordance with scheduled maintenance requirements. Checking, adjustment and
lubrication must be carried out more frequently for extreme conditions such as salty or heavily
gritted roads.
If the drive chain is badly worn or incorrectly adjusted (either too loose or too tight) the drive
chain could jump off the sprockets or break.
WARNING
A drive chain that breaks or jumps off the sprockets could snag on the engine sprocket or
lock the rear wheel, severely damaging the motorcycle and causing an accident. Never
neglect chain maintenance.
Note
Lubrication of the drive chain should ideally be carried out with the motorcycle set
up so that the rear wheel is free to rotate.
The drive chain must be adjusted with the motorcycle in an upright position, resting
on its wheels, and with no additional weight on it.
5/7/2017 Final Drive Chain Lubrication
922
Final Drive Chain Lubrication
Lubrication is necessary every 200 miles (300 km) and also after riding in wet weather, on wet
roads, or any time that the chain appears dry.
Use the special drive chain lubricant as recommended in the specification section.
Correct application is critical for drive chain lubrication. Apply the lubricant for one full drive
chain revolution only, then leave for eight hours before riding. This allows the lubricant’s solvent
(used to thin the oil) to evaporate and the oil to 'soak' into all parts of the drive chain. If the
lubricant is applied and the motorcycle is ridden shortly afterwards, the lubricant is unlikely to
reach all parts and the majority will be flung off and wasted. Applying excessive amounts is not
helpful under any circumstances.
It should be noted that the lubricant is applied to the drive chain to lubricate its action across the
sprockets. In an Oring chain, external lubrication does not penetrate to the bushes and rollers
as the Oring seals prevents this from happening.
CAUTION
Do not use a power jet washer to clean the chain as this may cause damage to the chain
components.
5/7/2017 Final Drive Chain Adjustment
923
Final Drive Chain Adjustment
WARNING
Drive Chain Free movement Inspection
1. Maximum movement position
1. Place the motorcycle on a level surface and hold it in an upright position with no weight on
it.
2. Rotate the rear wheel by pushing the motorcycle to find the position where the drive chain
has least slack. Measure the drive chain’s vertical movement, midway between sprockets.
3. If correct, the vertical movement of the drive chain midway between the sprockets should
be 20 30 mm.
Drive Chain Free Movement Adjustment
1. Loosen the wheel spindle nut.
2. Release the lock nuts on both the left hand and right hand chain adjuster bolts.
5/7/2017 Final Drive Chain Adjustment
924
2
3
citw_5
1. Adjuster bolt
2. Adjuster bolt lock nut
3. Moving both adjusters by an equal amount, turn the adjuster bolts clockwise to increase
chain freemovement and anticlockwise to reduce chain freemovement.
4. When the correct amount of chain freemovement has been set, push the wheel into firm
contact with the adjusters.
CAUTION
Check for equal adjustment on both sides using the graduation marks on the swinging arm.
5. Tighten both adjuster lock nuts to 20 Nm and the rear wheel spindle nut to 110 Nm.
6. Repeat the chain adjustment check. Readjust if necessary.
WARNING
Operation of the motorcycle with insecure adjuster lock nuts or a loose wheel spindle may
result in impaired stability and handling of the motorcycle. This impaired stability and
handling may lead to loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
5/7/2017 Drive Chain and Sprocket Wear Inspection
925
Drive Chain and Sprocket Wear Inspection
WARNING
1020
KG
1. Measurement across 20 links
2. 10 20 kg Weight
1. Stretch the chain taut by hanging a 10 20 kg (20 40 lb) weight on the drive chain.
2. Measure a length of 20 links on the straight part of the drive chain from pin centre of the 1st
pin to pin centre of the 21st pin. Repeat the test at various sections of the drive chain to
establish an average reading. This is because the drive chain may wear unevenly.
3. If the length exceeds the service limit of 319 mm (12.56 in), the chain must be replaced.
WARNING
A drive chain that breaks or jumps off the sprockets could snag on the engine sprocket or
lock the rear wheel, severely damaging the motorcycle and causing loss of motorcycle
4. Examine the whole length of the drive chain. If there are any excessively tight or loose
sections, loose pins or damaged rollers, the drive chain should be replaced.
5. Inspect sprockets for unevenly or excessively worn teeth. Also examine the sprockets for
damaged teeth.
5/7/2017 Drive Chain and Sprocket Wear Inspection
926
WORN TOOTH WORN TOOTH
(ENGINE SPROCKET) (REAR SPROCKET)
ccol
5/7/2017 Drive Chain Replacement
927
Drive Chain Replacement
WARNING
Rivet Link Type
The following instructions for the replacement of rivet link type drive chains requires the use of
T3880635 Final Drive Chain Cut and Rivet.
1
3
2
4
T3880635 Final Drive Chain Cut and Rivet
1. Service tool body
2. Pin holder
3. Cut/rivet pin
4. Plate holder A
5. Plate holder B
6. Gauge
1. Support the motorcycle on a stand so the rear wheel is clear of the ground.
2. Insert the cut/rivet pin into the pin holder so its smaller diameter end (cutting point) is facing
away from the holder as shown.
928
1. Pin holder
2. Cut/rivet pin
3. If required, file the domed heads of the chain link pins flat.
4. Position T3880635 Final Drive Chain Cut and Rivet so that the drive chain is between the
cut/rivet pin and the service tool body, with the pin that is to be removed aligned with the
hole in the service tool body.
5. Turn the pin holder clockwise until its pin contacts the link pin. Ensure that the pin is
centralised on the link pin to be removed.
2
1
1. Guide plate holder
3. Drive chain
6. Retain the tool body and rotate the pin holder clockwise until the link pin is pressed out from
929
the chain.
7. Remove the tool and separate the two ends of the chain.
Note
The replacement chain is supplied in a split condition, complete with a link kit to join
the two ends.
CAUTION
The component parts of the new link kit are coated with a special grease which must not be
removed. Removal of this special grease will severely reduce the service life of the chain.
8. Use the old drive chain to pull the new chain into position as follows: Temporarily attach the
end of the new chain to a free end of the old chain using the old connector link. Carefully
pull the other end of the old chain to pull the new chain around the sprockets.
Note
Do not use the new connector link as the special grease on it may be removed.
9. Using the new link supplied with the chain kit, join the two ends of the chain. Ensure that the
Orings are positioned as shown below and the link plate is fitted with its markings facing
outwards.
1 2
1 3
camw
1. Orings
2. Link
3. Link plate
10. Insert the cut/rivet pin into the pin holder so its larger diameter end (riveting point) is facing
away from holder as shown.
11. Fit the guide plate A to the service tool as shown below.
930
4
3
2
1. Cut/rivet pin
2. Guide plate B
3. Guide plate A
12. Fit the new connecting link plate to the new link by hand or with a suitable pair of pliers.
13. Position T3880635 Final Drive Chain Cut and Rivet so that the new connecting link plate
of the drive chain is in contact with guide plate A.
14. Rotate the pin holder clockwise until the drive chain link makes contact with guide plate B.
15. Ensure the connecting link is correctly positioned and then continue to rotate the pin holder
to press the connecting link fully on.
2
1
1. Guide plate A
2. Guide plate B
3. Drive chain
931
16. Rotate the pin holder anticlockwise and remove the Guide plate A and insert the cut/rivet
pin into the pin holder so its larger diameter end (riveting point) is facing away from the
holder.
17. Align one of the split link pins to the cut/rivet pin then turn the pin holder clockwise until the
pin contacts the split link pin. Ensure the split link pin is centrally located on the cut/rivet pin.
Note
The riveting end of the cut/rivet pin is shaped to prevent over tightening. Over
tightening may cause damage to the connecting link pin and the cut/rivet pin.
18. Retain the tool body then tighten the pin holder until the split link end is rivetedover.
2
1
1. Cut rivet pin
2. Guide plate B
3. Drive chain
19. Back off the pin holder and rivet the remaining split link pin as described above.
20. Remove the tool from the chain and using the gauge from T3880635 Final Drive Chain Cut
and Rivet check that both the split link pins are correctly riveted. The rivet should not pass
through the slot on the gauge.
932
1. Gauge
2. Slot
3. Rivet
21. Also check that both the split link pins are correctly riveted as shown below.
1 2 3 4
cana
1. Correct riveting
2. Insufficient riveting
3. Excessive riveting
4. Riveting offcentre
WARNING
933
If either split link pin is not correctly riveted, the split link must be removed and replaced with
a new link. Never operate the motorcycle with an incorrectly riveted split link as the link
could fail resulting in an unsafe riding condition leading to loss of motorcycle control and an
accident.
Endless Type
WARNING
Remove the swinging arm (see Swinging Arm Removal
1. Free the chain from the front sprocket and remove it from the motorcycle.
2. Locate the new chain on the front sprocket.
Refit the swinging arm (see Swinging Arm Installation).
5/7/2017 Front Sprocket Removal
934
Front Sprocket Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
Position the motorcycle on the side stand.
lock nuts.
1
2
cjpt
1. Fixings
mounting.
935
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
CAUTION
bracket.
936
1. Fixing
Note
4. Bend back the front sprocket lock washer.
5. Have an assistant sit on the motorcycle, select sixth gear and apply the front brake hard.
6. Loosen the front sprocket nut.
937
1. Nut
2. Lock washer
3. Front sprocket
7. Remove the front sprocket nut and discard the lock washer.
8. Set the drive chain adjustment to allow maximum free play in the drive chain.
Note
Note the orientation of the front sprocket for installation.
9. Disengage the front sprocket from the drive chain and slide it off the output shaft.
5/7/2017 Front Sprocket Installation
938
Front Sprocket Installation
WARNING
1. Fit the front sprocket, as noted for removal, and engage it with the drive chain.
2. Fit a new lock washer engaging it with the output shaft splines, and fit the sprocket nut hand
tight.
1. Nut
2. Lock washer
3. Front sprocket
3. Have an assistant sit on the motorcycle, select sixth gear and apply the front brake hard.
4. Tighten the front sprocket nut to 180 Nm.
5. Secure the front sprocket nut in position by bending the lock washer down to contact one of
the nut flats.
6. Adjust the final drive chain free movement (see Final Drive Chain Adjustment).
5/7/2017 Front Sprocket Installation
939
3
1
cjqg
1. Fixings
2. Harness clip
1
2
cjpt
1. Lock nuts
9. Attach the rear brake fluid reservoir to the relay bracket and tighten the new fixing to 3 Nm.
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Removal
940
Rear Sprocket Removal
CAUTION
Do not allow the wheel to rest on the brake disc, as this may damage the disc. Support the
wheel on wooden blocks, equally spaced around the rim, such that the brake disc is raised
above the ground.
1. Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive chain sprocket uppermost.
Note
If the studs for the rear sprocket become loose or removed, they must be replaced.
2. Evenly and progressively, remove and discard the rear sprocket lock nuts.
Note
Note the orientation of the rear sprocket for installation.
3. Remove the rear sprocket.
cjej_1
1. Lock nut
2. Sprocket
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Installation
941
Rear Sprocket Installation
CAUTION
above the ground.
1. If necessary, replace any rear sprocket studs that have been loosened or removed as
follows:
Remove and discard any of the studs that have become loose.
Fit new studs and tighten to 30 Nm.
Check the height of the studs when fitted to the sprocket carrier. The top of the stud must be
between 16.5 to 18.5 mm above the sprocket carrier face.
16.5 to 18.5 mm
1. Height of stud (16.5 to 18.5 mm)
2. Fit the rear sprocket to the sprocket carrier as noted during removal.
3. Fit new lock nuts, evenly and progressively tighten to 55 Nm.
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive Removal
942
Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
above the ground.
1. Place the wheel on wooden blocks with the drive chain sprocket uppermost.
Note
Note the position and orientation of the spacer for installation.
2. Gently lever the drive chain sprocket and flange from the wheel hub. Collect the spacer.
cje o
1. Rear sprocket carrier
2. Spacer
3. Cush drive rubber
3. Remove the cush drive rubber.
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive Removal
943
1. Cush drive rubber
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive Inspection
944
Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive Inspection
1. Check the cush drive rubbers for deterioration and cracks.
2. Inspect the sprocket teeth for wear, damage and chips.
3. Check the wheel and drive flange for wear, cracks and damage.
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive Installation
945
Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush Drive Installation
WARNING
CAUTION
above the ground.
1. Install the cush drive rubbers to the wheel hub.
2. Fit the spacer to the wheel hub as noted for removal.
3. Refit the sprocket carrier to the wheel.
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings Disassembly
946
Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings Disassembly
1. Remove the rear sprocket carrier and cush drive (see Rear Sprocket Carrier and Cush
Drive Removal).
2. Remove and discard the seal.
cjej_1
1. Sprocket carrier
2. Seal
3. Remove and discard the bearing circlip.
cje j
1. Sprocket carrier
2. Circlip
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings Disassembly
947
WARNING
Always wear eye, hand and face protection when using a hammer and drift. Use of a
hammer and drift can cause bearings to fragment. Pieces of fragmented bearing could
cause eye and soft tissue injuries if suitable protective apparel is not worn.
CAUTION
To prevent sprocket carrier damage and to aid bearing removal, always apply force evenly
on both sides of the bearing to prevent it from 'tipping' and becoming stuck. Application of
uneven force will lead to difficulty in removing the bearing and to a damaged drive flange.
4. Turn the sprocket carrier over, and use a pin punch to drift out the ball bearing.
cje k
1. Sprocket carrier
2. Ball bearing
5/7/2017 Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings Assembly
948
Rear Sprocket Carrier Bearings Assembly
WARNING
1. Position the bearing, marked side facing outwards, to the drive flange.
2. Using a suitable press, fully insert the bearing into the sprocket carrier, ensuring both the
inner and outer races are pressed.
3. Fit a new circlip.
4. Install a new seal, marked side facing outwards, to the sprocket carrier.
5. Lubricate the seal’s knifeedge with grease to NLGI 2 specification.
6. Install the cush drive rubbers to the wheel hub.
7. Fit the spacer to the wheel hub as noted for removal.
8. Refit the sprocket carrier to the wheel.
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Frame and Fixings
949
Exploded View – Frame and Fixings
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Front and Rear Mudguards
950
Exploded View – Front and Rear Mudguards
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Front Footrests with Single Seat
951
Exploded View – Front Footrests with Single Seat
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Single Seat
952
Exploded View – Single Seat
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Single Seat
953
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Twin Seat
954
Exploded View – Twin Seat
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Twin Seat
955
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Side Panels
956
Exploded View – Side Panels
5/7/2017 Exploded View – Side Stand
957
Exploded View – Side Stand
5/7/2017 General Frame Inspection
958
General Frame Inspection
1. Inspect the frame, bodywork and footrests for accident and other damage, cracks, splits and
general dilapidation. Check all fixings for security. If any faults are found, rectify as
necessary. If any faults with the frame are found, the frame must be replaced; repairs to the
frame are not permitted.
WARNING
If the motorcycle is involved in an accident or collision it must be taken to an authorised
Triumph dealer for inspection and repair before it is ridden again.
WARNING
The frame must not be modified in any way. Any modification to the frame, such as welding
or drilling, may weaken the structure causing an unsafe riding condition leading to loss of
2. Check the operation of the side stand to make sure it is securely held in the retracted
position by the spring. Rectify any faults.
WARNING
If the return spring is faulty, the side stand could extend whilst the motorcycle is being
ridden. This will cause an unsafe riding condition, which could lead to loss of motorcycle
5/7/2017 Bank Angle Indicators
959
Bank Angle Indicators
Bank Angle Indicators
1. Inspect the bank angle indicators on the rider's footrests for wear. The bank angle indicators
are worn out when 5 mm of the bank angle peg remains.
citc_1
1. Bank Angle Indicators
WARNING
Use of a motorcycle with bank angle indicators worn beyond the maximum limit (when the
bank angle indicator is worn to a minimum 5 mm in length) will allow the motorcycle to be
banked to an unsafe angle. Therefore, always replace the bank angle indicator pegs when
they are worn to 5 mm in length.
Banking to an unsafe angle may cause instability, loss of motorcycle control and an
accident.
WARNING
The bank angle pegs must not be used as a guide to how far the motorcycle may be safely
banked. This depends on many various conditions including, but not limited to, road surface,
tyre condition and weather. Banking to an unsafe angle will lead to loss of motorcycle control
and an accident.
5/7/2017 Seat Removal
960
Seat Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the seats or seat covers, care must be taken not to drop the seats. Do
not lean the seats against the motorcycle or any surface which may damage the seats or
seat covers. Instead, place the seats, with the seat cover facing upwards, on a clean, flat
surface which is covered with a soft cloth.
Do not place any item on the seats which may cause damage or staining to the seat covers.
1. Insert the ignition key into the seat lock and turn it anticlockwise while pressing down on the
rear of the seat.
2. Lift the seat up from the back and slide rearwards for complete removal from the
motorcycle.
cith_1
1. Seat lock
5/7/2017 Seat Installation
961
Seat Installation
1. Engage the seat’s tongue under the fuel tank.
Note
An audible click can be heard when the seat is correctly engaged in the lock.
2. Press firmly down in the centre of the seat to engage the seat lock.
WARNING
To prevent detachment of the seat during riding, after fitting always grasp the seat and pull
firmly upwards. If the seat is not correctly secured it will detach from the lock. A loose or
detached seat could cause loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
3. Grasp the seat and ensure that it is securely retained.
5/8/2017 Seat Cowl Removal
962
Seat Cowl Removal
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Remove the fixings.
ckcd
1. Fixings
2. Seat base
3. Seat cowl
2. Carefully slide the seat cowl away from the seat base.
5/8/2017 Seat Cowl Removal
963
2
1. Seat base
2. Seat cowl
5/8/2017 Seat Cowl Installation
964
Seat Cowl Installation
WARNING
CAUTION
1. Carefully slide the seat cowl on to the rear of the seat, aligning the fixing tabs of the seat
cowl with the fixing holes in the seat base.
2 3
2
ckcd
1
1. Fixing holes
2. Fixing tabs
3. Seat base
2. Ensure the lip of the seat cowl is located correctly over the base of the rear seat.
3. Position the fixings and tighten to 1.5 Nm
5/8/2017 Seat Cowl Installation
965
3
ckcd
1. Fixings
2. Seat base
3. Seat cowl (lip)
4. Grasp the seat cowl and ensure that it is securely retained.
5/8/2017 Side Panels
966
Side Panels
1
2
2
citf
1. Side panel (right hand shown)
2. Grommets
To remove either side panel, grasp the panel firmly in both hands and pull the panel away from
the motorcycle until it clears the three retaining grommets (leaving the grommets in place).
To refit, position the three locating dowels to the grommets, then press firmly to secure the
panel.
Finally, grasp the panel and make sure that it is fully retained.
5/8/2017 Front Mudguard Removal
967
Front Mudguard Removal
WARNING
1. Remove and discard the four fixings securing the front mudguard to the front forks and
carefully remove the mudguard.
cjs l
1. Fixings
2. Front mudguard
5/8/2017 Front Mudguard Installation
968
Front Mudguard Installation
WARNING
1. Carefully manoeuvre the mudguard into position between the front forks.
2. Fit four new fixings and tighten to 6 Nm.
cjs l
1. Fixings
2. Front mudguard
5/8/2017 Rear Mudguard Removal
969
Rear Mudguard Removal
WARNING
1. Disconnect the rear light harness from the main harness.
2. Remove the engine ECU (see Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Removal).
3. Remove the two front fixings and flanged sleeves from the underside of the rear mudguard.
cjqw
1. Fixings
2. Flanged sleeves
Note
Note the routing of the harnesses for installation.
4. Remove the four rear fixings and flanged sleeves from the rear mudguard and carefully
remove the mudguard.
5/8/2017 Rear Mudguard Removal
970
1
1
cjqx
1. Fixings
2. Flanged sleeves
5/8/2017 Rear Mudguard Installation
971
Rear Mudguard Installation
WARNING
1. Carefully locate the mudguard to the frame, positioning the locating holes to the holes in the
frame.
2. Fit the four flanged sleeves and the new fixings. Tighten the fixings to 6 Nm.
1
cjqx
1. Fixings
2. Flanged sleeves
3. Fit the two flanged sleeves and the new fixings. Tighten the fixings to 6 Nm.
5/8/2017 Rear Mudguard Installation
972
cjqw
1. Fixings
2. Flanged sleeves
4. Refit the engine ECU (see Engine Electronic Control Module (ECM) Installation).
5. Connect the rear light harness to the main harness.
5/8/2017 Cradle Assemblies Removal
973
Cradle Assemblies Removal
WARNING
Left Hand Cradle Assembly
1. Remove the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
CAUTION
Note the routing and the retaining clips of the side stand switch harness for installation.
2. Disconnect the side stand switch electrical connector from the main harness and feed it
down to the side stand switch.
cjs s
1. Side stand switch electrical connector
3. Detach the two clutch cable clips from the cradle assembly.
4. Detach the two harness clips from the cradle assembly.
5. Disconnect the two wires, release the fixing and remove the horn.
974
2
cje n
1. Clips (clutch cable)
2. Clips (harness, exhaust header removed for
clarity)
3. Horn connectors
6. Remove the cradle assembly two rear mounting bolts and collect the nuts.
1
cjep
1. Mounting bolts
Right Hand Cradle Assembly
1. Remove the fixing and detach the electrical connector bracket from the frame. Discard the
fixing.
975
cjqj
1. Fixing
2. Electrical connector bracket
2. Remove the cradle’s rear mounting bolt and nut.
3. Remove the nut and bolt securing the exhaust intermediate pipe to the cradle assembly.
3 1
4
cjeg
1. Bolt
3. Bolt
4. Cradle assembly
Both Cradle Assemblies
1. Remove the crankcase front mounting nut and bolt.
2. Remove the nut and bolt securing the cradle assemblies to the headstock.
976
cjem
1. Bolt (to crankcase front mounting)
2. Bolt (to headstock)
3. Detach the cradle assembly from the lower mounting of the radiator and remove the cradle
assembly.
2
cje q
2. Cradle assembly (left hand side shown)
5/8/2017 Cradle Assemblies Installation
977
Cradle Assemblies Installation
WARNING
1. Position the cradle assembly to the frame, ensure the lower mounting of the radiator is
attached to the cradle assembly.
2. Fit the crankcase front mounting nut and bolt, do not fully tighten at this stage.
3. Fit the nut and bolt securing the cradle assembly to the headstock, do not fully tighten at
this stage.
cjem
1. Bolt (to crankcase front mounting)
2. Bolt (to headstock)
Right Hand Cradle Assembly
1. Fit the cradle assembly rear mounting bolt and nut, do not fully tighten at this stage.
2. Fit the nut and bolt to secure the exhaust intermediate pipe to the cradle assembly. Do not
fully tighten at this stage.
978
3 1
4
cjeg
1. Bolt
3. Bolt
4. Cradle assembly
Note
When tightening the cradle assembly mounting bolts and nuts, hold the nut and
torque the bolt.
3. Tighten the cradle assembly to headstock bolt to 40 Nm.
4. Tighten the cradle assembly rear mounting bolt to 40 Nm.
5. Tighten cradle assembly to crankcase bolt to 105 Nm.
6. Tighten the exhaust intermediate pipe to cradle assembly to 19 Nm.
7. Attach the electrical connector bracket to the frame and tighten its new fixing to 3 Nm.
cjqj
979
1. Fixing
2. Electrical connector bracket
Left Hand Cradle Assembly
1. Fit the cradle assembly two rear mounting bolts and captivated nuts, do not fully tighten at
this stage.
1
cjep
1. Mounting bolts
Note
When tightening the cradle assembly mounting bolts and nuts, hold the nut and
torque the bolt.
2. Tighten the cradle assembly to headstock bolt to 40 Nm.
3. Tighten the cradle assembly rear mounting bolts to 40 Nm.
4. Tighten cradle assembly to crankcase bolt to 105 Nm.
5. Fit the horn to the cradle arm and tighten its fixing to 24 Nm. Connect the two wires to the
horn.
6. Refit the clips for the clutch cable and horn harness to the cradle assembly.
980
2
cje n
1. Clips (clutch cable)
2. Clips (harness, exhaust header removed for
clarity)
3. Horn connectors
7. Route the side stand switch harness to the left hand side of the airbox as noted for removal.
Connect the electrical connector to the main harness.
cjs s
8. Fit the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
Both Cradle Assemblies
981
5/8/2017 Mirrors Removal
982
Mirrors Removal
1. Remove the handlebar end weight. Discard the fixing.
Note
Note the orientation of the mirror for installation.
2. Loosen the mirror pinch bolt and remove the mirror.
3
1
cjqs
1. Fixing (bar end weight)
2. Bar end weight
3. Pinch bolt
5/8/2017 Mirrors Installation
983
Mirrors Installation
WARNING
If the mirror fixing is too loose, the mirror may blow back at speed. This will result in a loss of
vision to the rear of the motorcycle. It is dangerous to ride a motorcycle without sufficient
rearward vision.
1. Refit the mirror as noted for removal and tighten the pinch bolt to 3 Nm.
2. Refit the right hand handlebar end weight. Do not fully tighten the fixing at this stage..
3
1
cjqs
2. Bar end weight
3. Pinch bolt
3. Position the mirrors to give rear visibility in the riding position. Do not rotate the mirror
beyond 75°, measured from the vertical section of the mirror arm.
5/8/2017 Mirrors Installation
984
75°
4. Tighten the mirror fixing to 5 Nm.
5/8/2017 Side Stand Removal
985
Side Stand Removal
WARNING
1. Raise and support the motorcycle.
WARNING
Wear hand, eye and face protection when unhooking the stand spring. Take great care to
minimise the risk of personal injury and loss of components.
2. Remove the left hand exhaust intermediate pipe (see Exhaust Intermediate and Header
Pipes Removal).
3. With the side stand in the up position, unhook the spring from the side stand and remove it
from the motorcycle.
4. Remove and discard the Eclip securing the pivot pin.
5. Remove the pivot pin and remove the side stand.
2 1
cjfq
1. Spring
2. Eclip
3. Pivot pin
5/8/2017 Side Stand Installation
986
Side Stand Installation
WARNING
1. Lubricate the pivot pin shoulder and side stand pivot with multipurpose grease.
2. Fit the side stand to the motorcycle and insert the pivot pin.
3. Fit a new Eclip to secure the pivot pin.
WARNING
Wear hand, eye and face protection when fitting the stand spring. Take great care to
minimise the risk of personal injury and loss of components.
4. Hook the spring onto its frame lug then carefully hook it onto the side stand lug.
5. Refit the left hand exhaust intermediate pipe (see Exhaust Intermediate and Header Pipes
Installation).
6. Check the operation of the side stand before riding the motorcycle. Ensure the spring holds
the stand securely in the retracted position.
5/8/2017 Exploded View – Instruments
987
Exploded View – Instruments
5/8/2017 Exploded View – Alternator and Starter Motor
988
Exploded View – Alternator and Starter Motor
5/8/2017 Exploded View – Headlight
989
Exploded View – Headlight
All Markets Except India and Indonesia
India and Indonesia Markets Only
5/8/2017 Exploded View – Headlight
990
5/8/2017 Exploded View – Rear Lights
991
Exploded View – Rear Lights
5/8/2017 Exploded View – Indicators
992
Exploded View – Indicators
5/8/2017 Exploded View – Battery, Horn and Wiring
993
Exploded View – Battery, Horn and Wiring
5/8/2017 Battery
994
Battery
WARNING
Under some circumstances, the battery can give off explosive gases; keep sparks, flames
and cigarettes away. Provide adequate ventilation when charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space.
The battery contains sulphuric acid (electrolyte). Contact with skin or eyes may cause
severe burns. Wear protective clothing and a face shield.
If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with water immediately.
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.
If electrolyte is swallowed, drink large quantities of water and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION
IMMEDIATELY.
KEEP ELECTROLYTE OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
WARNING
The battery contains harmful materials. Always keep children away from the battery whether
or not it is fitted in the motorcycle.
Do not attach jump leads to the battery, touch the battery cables together or reverse the
polarity of the cables as any of these actions may cause a spark which would ignite battery
gases causing a risk of personal injury.
5/8/2017 Battery Disposal
995
Battery Disposal
Should the battery ever require replacement, the original battery must be handed to a recycling
agent who will ensure that the dangerous substances from which the battery is manufactured
do not pollute the environment.
5/8/2017 Battery Removal
996
Battery Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the seat (see Seat Removal).
2. Disconnect the battery leads, negative (black) lead first.
1 2
4
3
cja j
1. Battery
2. Positive (+) terminal
3. Negative () terminal
4. Battery strap
WARNING
Ensure that the battery terminals do not touch the motorcycle frame as this may cause a
short circuit or spark, which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of personal injury.
3. Remove the battery strap and the USB port socket.
4. Take the battery out of the case.
5/8/2017 Battery Installation
997
Battery Installation
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that the battery terminals do not touch the motorcycle frame as this may cause a
short circuit or spark, which would ignite battery gases causing a risk of personal injury.
1. Place the battery in the battery case and secure with the battery strap.
2. Secure with the battery strap and make sure the USB port socket is refitted.
4. Apply a light coat of grease to the terminals to prevent corrosion.
5. Cover the positive terminal with the protective cap.
5/8/2017 Battery Commissioning and Charging
998
Battery Commissioning and Charging
New Battery
In order to correctly and safely commission a new battery, the battery commissioning procedure
listed below must be carefully followed. This is the only battery commissioning procedure that
Triumph recommends. The procedure is designed to ensure that the battery is at its best when
fitted to the motorcycle, and will provide the best possible performance and reliability.
Failure to comply with this procedure may lead to reduced battery performance and/or shorten
the life of the battery.
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive gases; keep sparks, flames and cigarettes away. Provide
adequate ventilation when charging or using the battery in an enclosed space.
The battery contains sulphuric acid (electrolyte). Contact with skin or eyes may cause
severe burns. Wear protective clothing and a face shield.
If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with water immediately.
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and SEEK MEDICAL
ATTENTION IMMEDIATELY.
If electrolyte is swallowed, drink large quantities of water and SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION
IMMEDIATELY.
KEEP ELECTROLYTE OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
1. Ensure the VIN number printed on the antitamper label attached to the battery matches the
motorcycle VIN.
2. Check the battery carefully for damage.
CAUTION
Ensure the electrolyte container part number matches the battery part number to be filled.
Battery life will be greatly reduced if the incorrect volume (either too little or too much) of
acid is added to the battery.
3. Read the instructions and warnings delivered with the battery.
4. Place the battery on a flat level surface and remove the sealing foil.
5. Remove the battery sealing strip from the electrolyte container and save for later in this
procedure. Place the sealing strip on a clean surface, with the upper side facing downwards
to avoid contamination of the sealing strip. Do not break the seal on the electrolyte
container.
6. Place the electrolyte container on the battery and fill the battery according to the
manufacturers instructions.
7. After starting to fill the battery with electrolyte, allow the battery to stand for 30 minutes with
the filling container in place.
8. Check that all of the electrolyte has drained from the container. Do not remove the container
at this point. If the container has not completely drained, tap the sides of the container to
start the electrolyte flowing again.
5/8/2017 Battery Commissioning and Charging
9. After the electrolyte has drained into the battery, allow the battery to stand with the
999
electrolyte container in place for a further 2 hours.
10. Remove the electrolyte container carefully, and dispose of immediately.
11. Place the sealing cap strip LOOSELY over the filling holes of the battery.
12. Charge the battery using the BatteryMate Battery Charger See Latest Parts Catalogue for
Part Number Information. Refer to the instructions supplied with the BatteryMate Battery
Charger See Latest Parts Catalogue for Part Number Information.
CAUTION
The caps must be fitted (after charging) within two hours of filling the battery with acid.
Leaving the battery open to the atmosphere for longer than is necessary will start to reverse
the chemical reaction which takes place within the battery, greatly reducing the battery’s
service life.
13. After charging is complete, press down firmly with both hands to seat the caps (do not use
tools or force the caps into position).
14. Disconnect the charger and allow the battery to stand for 1 hour before fitting to the
motorcycle.
15. Fit the battery to the motorcycle, positive (red) lead first.
5/8/2017 Battery Maintenance
1000
Battery Maintenance
The battery is a sealed type and does not require any maintenance other than checking the
voltage and routine recharging such as during storage.
It is not possible to adjust the electrolyte level in the battery.
Note
The charge level in the battery must be maintained to maximise the battery life.
With normal use of the motorcycle, the charging system will keep the battery charged. If the
motorcycle is unused, the battery will gradually discharge due to battery self discharge and the
continuous current drain for the clock and the engine control module memory.
The rate of battery discharge can be greatly increased by the addition of electrical security
systems or other accessories.
Allowing a battery to discharge, or leaving it discharged over a period of time, causes sulphation
of the lead plates within the battery.
Sulphation is a normal chemical reaction inside the battery and over a period of time sulphate
will crystallise on to the lead plates making charging difficult or impossible. The result is a
permanently damaged battery, which would not be covered by the motorcycle warranty.
Keeping a battery at full charge reduces the chance of it freezing in cold conditions. Allowing a
battery to freeze can cause serious internal damage to the battery.
When leaving the motorcycle standing for more than a few days, regularly check the battery
voltage using a digital multimeter. Should the battery voltage fall below 12.8 V, charge the
battery using the BatteryMate Battery Charger see latest Parts Catalogue for part number
information. Refer to the instructions supplied with the BatteryMate Battery charger.
For extended periods of storage (beyond two weeks) the battery should be removed and the
battery voltage checked regularly and charged when below 12.8 V.
5/8/2017 Battery Already in Service
1001
Battery Already in Service
Note
Before carrying out the following procedure the battery must be disconnected and
removed from the motorcycle.
Use the guidelines in the table below for charging. Always verify the battery condition before
charging, and 30 minutes after charging.
Note
A fully charged battery should read 12.8 volts or higher after the battery has been off
the charger for 30 minutes or more.
Table of Battery Charging Times
State of charge Voltage Action Charge time (using
BatteryMate 1509)
100% 12.8 V 13.0 V None. Check at 6 None required

months from date of
manufacture
75% 100% 12.5 V 12.8 V May need slight charge. 3 6 hours

If no charge given, check
in 3 4 months
50% 75% 12.0 V 12.5 V Needs charge 5 11 hours
25% 50% 11.5 V 12.0 V Needs charge At least 13 hours
0% 25% 11.5 V or less Needs recovery using 20 hours

BatteryMate 1509.
Retest after recovery
5/8/2017 Fuse Box
1002
Fuse Box
WARNING
Always replace blown fuses with new ones of the correct rating (as specified on the fuse box
cover) and never use a fuse of higher rating.
Use of an incorrect fuse could lead to an electrical problem, resulting in motorcycle damage,
loss of motorcycle control and an accident.
A blown fuse is indicated when all of the systems protected by that fuse become inoperative.
When checking for a blown fuse, refer to the fuse identification table to establish which fuse has
blown.
The fuse box is located underneath the seat.
To allow access to the fuse box, the seat must be removed (see Seat Removal).
Note
Numbers shown in the following illustration correspond to the position numbers in
the fuse identification table.
8 7
9
USB
1
6
5
4 3 2
citn_3
Fuse Identification Table
Position Circuit Protected Rating (Amps)
1 Auxiliary lights 10
2 Engine management system 15
3 Accessory socket 5
5/8/2017 Fuse Box
1003
Position Circuit Protected Rating (Amps)
4 Cooling fan 15
5 ABS 25
6 Instruments and alarm 15
7 Ignition switch, starter circuit 10
8 Dip and high headlight beams 15
9 USB port socket 5
5/8/2017 Relays
1004
Relays
Identification and Location
The relays are located behind the right hand side panel. To gain access to the relays, remove
the right hand side panel (see Side Panels).
3 2
cjun
1
1. Starter relay
2. Main DIP/DRL
3. Engine management relay (EMS)
4. Fuel pump
5. Headlamp
6. Cooling fan
5/8/2017 Starting Circuit
1005
Starting Circuit
All Triumph models are equipped with an electric start system. This system consists of a starter
relay, starter motor, starter switch, side stand switch, engine stop switch, clutch switch and the
sprag clutch. The starter motor is connected to the starter relay and the battery by heavy duty
cables in order to supply the large currents required by the motor to start the engine. When the
starter button is pressed, the relay is energised, which then allows current to the starter motor.
The starter motor will not operate unless the clutch lever is pulled in. Also, the starter will not
operate if the side stand is down, unless the transmission is in neutral. If the starter motor does
not operate, the following basic checks must be carried out before further diagnosis is
performed:
Check the engine stop switch is in the 'RUN' position.
Check the battery terminals are clean and tight.
Check the frame and engine earth connections are clean, tight and free from corrosion.
Ensure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown and is of the correct rating.
Using the Triumph Diagnostic Tool, check the operation of the neutral switch or gear
position sensor (if fitted), side stand and clutch switches.
Note
The engine will not crank if the instruments, ABS ECM, or immobiliser/chassis ECM
(if fitted) are disconnected.
Rectify any defects as necessary.
General Fault Finding – Starter Motor and Relay
Starter relay does not click, starter motor Battery discharged or defective
does not turn
Blown main or starter relay fuse
Defective starter relay wiring or starter
switch
Check that the side stand, transmission and
clutch lever are positioned for engine
starting i.e. transmission in neutral, clutch
lever pulled in and the side stand down
Defective alarm system ensure any alarm
fitted is working correctly
Starter motor turns slowly Battery discharged or defective
Loose, corroded or dirty battery connections
5/8/2017 Starting Circuit
1006
Loose, corroded or dirty starter motor or
starter relay connections
Defective starter motor
Loose, corroded or dirty battery ground
connections
Starter relay clicks but engine does not turn Battery discharged or defective
over
Crankshaft does not turn due to engine
defect
Defective starter motor
Starter cable open circuit
Defective starter relay
Starter motor turns but engine does not turn Starter motor or starter ring gear
over
5/8/2017 Diagnosis – Starter Circuit
1007
Diagnosis – Starter Circuit
Note
Prior to carrying out the diagnosis, ensure the battery voltage is 12 13.5 V, the
immobiliser system (if fitted) is functioning correctly, the transmission is in neutral
and the clutch lever is pulled fully to the handlebar.
WITH THE IGNITION SWITCH ON AND USING A SUITABLE HEAVY DUTY
THE ENGINE STOP SWITCH AT ‘RUN’, JUMPER CABLE, CONNECT THE
CLICKS
CHECK FOR A CLICK AT THE STARTER STARTER POSITIVE TERMINAL TO
RELAY WHEN THE STARTER SWITCH THE BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL
IS PRESSED
STARTER STARTER
MOTOR MOTOR
TURNS DOES NOT
TURN
LOOSE OR FAULTY STARTER
NO DISCONNECTED WIRE MOTOR
CLICK OR CABLE. FAULTY
STARTER RELAY/
SOLENOID
FAULTY NEUTRAL SWITCH
NO CONTINUITY FAULTY CLUTCH SWITCH
DISCONNECT THE STARTER RELAY
FAULTY SIDESTAND SWITCH
SWITCH CONNECTOR. CHECK THE
BAD CONTACT AT CONNECTOR
RELAY COIL EARTH (GROUND) WIRE
OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING LOOM
FAULTY ALARM OR ENGINE ECM (IF FITTED)
CONTINUITY
FAULTY IGNITION SWITCH/ ENGINE
CONNECT THE STARTER RELAY
STOP SWITCH
SWITCH CONNECTOR. MEASURE NO VOLTAGE BROKEN STARTER SWITCH CABLE
THE STARTER RELAY VOLTAGE
BAD CONTACT AT CONNECTOR
AT THE STARTER RELAY
OPEN CIRCUIT IN WIRING LOOM
SWITCH CONNECTOR
FAULTY ALARM
VOLTAGE
MEASURED
CHECK THE STARTER NORMAL
LOOSE OR POOR CONTACT
RELAY OPERATION AT STARTER RELAY
ABNORMAL FAULTY STARTER RELAY
5/8/2017 Alternator/Charging System
1008
Alternator/Charging System
The charging system consists of an alternator, a rectifier/regulator assembly and the battery.
The alternator is made up of two parts, the stator, which is mounted to the crankcase or the
engine cover, and the rotor, mounted to the end of the crankshaft. The stator is an assembly of
18 coils, arranged into 3 phases. The rotor is a series of magnets mounted in the engine
flywheel, which are arranged so as to be positioned around the outside of the stator coils. As
the engine rotates the alternator produces an AC (alternating current) voltage in each of the
three phases of the alternator, typically of around 35 to 40 volts AC at 4,000 5,000 rpm,
although this figure varies between models. As the battery requires DC (direct current) voltage
for correct charging, this AC voltage must be first rectified to DC current, and then regulated to
the correct voltage for the battery of 14.5 +/ 0.5 volts. This is done by the rectifier/regulator,
which uses diodes to convert the alternator output to DC Volts and limits the resulting output to
the correct figure required for optimal battery charging.
If the charging circuit does not operate correctly, the following basic checks must be carried out
before further diagnosis is performed:
Check the battery terminals are clean and tight.
Check the frame and engine earth connections are clean, tight and free from corrosion.
Ensure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
Check that any fuse in the circuit is not blown and is of the correct rating.
Rectify any defects as necessary.
Diagnosis – Charging Circuit
5/8/2017 Alternator Stator
1009
Alternator Stator
The alternator stator is an assembly of 18 coils, arranged into three phases. It is possible to
check for continuity and short circuits through the coils and to ground.
Note
Only repair the stator harness between the alternator regulator/rectifier and where
the harness goes into the crankcase.
Do not attempt to repair the alternator stator coils.
If the battery is not fully charged, the charging voltage may be lower than specified
when checking at 2,000 rpm.
Ensure all additional accessories (auxiliary lights, heated grips etc.) are switched off.
Fault Possible cause Action
Battery not charging Main fuse Check the condition of the

main 30A fuse:
Battery Check the condition of the
battery. Test the battery
using the BatteryMate 150
9. Refer to the instructions
supplied with the
BatteryMate 1509.
Ensure the battery is
serviceable:
Alternator Proceed to pinpoint test 1:
Regulator/Rectifier Test the regulator/rectifier
(see Regulator/Rectifier)
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check cable and terminal OK Disconnect the battery leads,
integrity: negative (black) lead first.
Battery positive (+) Disconnect regulator/rectifier black
connector and proceed to test 2
Battery negative ()
Regulator/rectifier black
connector pin 1
Regulator/rectifier black
connector pin 3
Regulator/rectifier grey
connector pin 1
Regulator/rectifier grey
connector pin 2
1010
Test Regulator/rectifier grey Result Action
connector pin 3
2 Check cable continuity: OK Reconnect the battery leads,
Regulator/rectifier black positive (red) lead first. Reconnect
connector pin 1 to battery lead the regulator/rectifier black
negative connector connector. Disconnect the
rectifier/regulator grey connector
Regulator/rectifier black and proceed to test 3
connector pin 3 to battery lead
positive connector
3 Check resistance through the 0.14 to 0.18 Proceed to test 4

coils: Ohms
Alternator pin 1 to pin 2
Alternator pin 2 to pin 3 Open If the fault is between the rectifier
Alternator pin 3 to pin 1 circuit or and the crankcase, repair the
short circuit harness. Proceed to test 4
If the fault is after the crankcase,
replace the unit. Proceed to test 5
4 Reconnect the harness and run 13.5 V 15 Action complete quit test

the engine. Check the charging V
voltage at 2,000 rpm:
Fault still Disconnect the regulator/rectifier
present grey connector and proceed to test
5
5 Check the alternator AC output 15 V AC to Test regulator/rectifier (see

voltage at 850 rpm by probing the 25 V AC Regulator/Rectifier)
3pin stator connector as follows:
Positive (+) probe to pin 1
negative () probe to pin 2
Positive (+) probe to pin 2 Less than Replace unit. Proceed to pinpoint
negative () probe to pin 3 15 V AC test 6
Positive (+) probe to pin 3
negative () probe to pin 1
6 Reconnect the harness and run 13.5 V 15 Action complete quit test

the engine. Check the charging V
voltage at 2,000 rpm:
present
1011
Circuit Diagram
B
+
3 1
N
2
N
1 2 3
B
B
B
BR
B
B
B
B
1 2 3 3 1 4
1. Battery
2. Starter solenoid main fuse
3. Alternator
4. Regulator/Rectifier
5/8/2017 Regulator/Rectifier
1012
Regulator/Rectifier
Internally the regulator/rectifier consists of three diodes, one between each input and the
positive terminal, and three Field Effect Transistors (FETs), one between each input and the
ground terminal.
As the voltage of the AC signal from the alternator rises, the voltage controller switches the
FETs to avoid over voltage on the output.
The diodes and FETs can be checked using a multimeter on DIODE setting. Disconnect the two
electrical connectors from the regulator/rectifier and check the readings as indicated below.
Note
This test does not check for voltage regulation.
Fault Possible cause Action
Battery not charging Main Fuse Check the condition of the

main 30A fuse:
Battery Check the condition of the
battery. Test the battery
using the BatteryMate 150
9. Refer to the instructions
supplied with the
BatteryMate 1509.
Ensure the battery is
serviceable.
Regulator/Rectifier Disconnect the black and
the grey connectors from the
regulator/rectifier and
Alternator Test the alternator stator
(see Alternator Stator).
Pinpoint Tests
Test Result Action
1 Check FET forward bias: 0.4 V to 0.7 Proceed to test 2

Positive (+) probe to rectifier black V
socket pin 1 to:
Negative () probe to rectifier grey
socket pin 1 Open circuit Replace the unit. Proceed to
or short test 4
Negative () probe to rectifier grey circuit
socket pin 2
socket pin 3
1013
Test
2 Check diodes function forward bias: Result
0.1 V to 0.3 Action
Proceed to test 3
Negative () probe to rectifier black V
socket pin 3 to:
Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey Open circuit Replace the unit. Proceed to
socket pin 1 or short test 4
Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey circuit
socket pin 2
Positive (+) probe to rectifier grey
socket pin 3
3 Check diodes reverse bias: More than Proceed to test 4

Negative () probe to rectifier black 1.4 V or
socket pin 1 to: open circuit
socket pin 1
socket pin 2
socket pin 3
Positive (+) probe to rectifier black Less than Replace the unit. Proceed to
socket pin 3 to: 1.4 V or test 4
Negative () probe to rectifier grey short circuit
socket pin 1
socket pin 2
socket pin 3
4 Reconnect the harness and run the 13 V 15 V Action complete quit test

engine. Check the charging voltage at
2,000 rpm:
Fault still Test alternator stator (see
present Alternator Stator)
If alternator stator is
serviceable, contact Triumph
service
Circuit Diagram
1014
5/8/2017 Headlight
1015
Headlight
WARNING
Adjust road speed to suit the visibility and weather conditions in which the motorcycle is
being operated.
Make sure that the head light beam is adjusted to illuminate the road surface sufficiently far
ahead without dazzling oncoming traffic. An incorrectly adjusted headlight may impair
visibility causing an accident.
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust a headlight beam when the motorcycle is in motion.
Any attempt to adjust a headlight beam when the motorcycle is in motion may result in loss
of control and an accident.
CAUTION
Do not cover the headlight or lens with any item likely to obstruct air flow to, or prevent heat
escaping from, the headlight lens.
Covering the headlight lens during operation with items of clothing, luggage, adhesive tape,
devices intended to alter or adjust the headlight beam or non genuine headlight lens covers
will cause the headlight lens to overheat and distort, causing irreparable damage to the
headlight assembly.
Damage caused by overheating is not considered a manufacturing defect and will not be
covered under warranty.
If the headlight must be covered during use such as taping of the headlight lens required
during closed‑course conditions the headlight must be disconnected.
5/8/2017 Headlight Vertical Adjustment
1016
Headlight Vertical Adjustment
1. Switch the headlight dipped beam on.
2. Loosen the headlight assembly mounting fixings sufficiently to allow restricted movement of
the headlight.
3. Adjust the position of the headlight to give the required beam setting.
4. Tighten the mounting fixings to 10 Nm.
5. Recheck the headlight beam setting.
6. Switch the headlight off when the beam setting is satisfactorily set.
1. Headlight mounting fixings
5/8/2017 Headlight and Daytime Running Light Bulb Replacement
1017
Headlight and Daytime Running Light Bulb Replacement
WARNING
The bulbs become hot during use. Always allow sufficient time for the bulbs to cool before
handling. Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb. If the glass is touched or gets dirty, clean
with alcohol before reuse.
CAUTION
The use of nonapproved headlight bulbs may result in damage to the headlight lens.
Use a genuine Triumph supplied headlight bulb as specified in the Triumph Parts Catalogue.
Always have replacement headlight bulbs installed by an authorised Triumph dealer.
Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights (DRL) are situated within the headlight assembly and are sealed,
maintenance free LED units.
Headlight Bulb
1. Release the two fixings and detach the headlight from the headlight bowl.
1. Headlight fixing (one of two)
2. While supporting the light unit, disconnect the multipin electrical connector from the
headlight bulb and the electrical connector for the daytime running light from the main
harness.
5/8/2017 Headlight and Daytime Running Light Bulb Replacement
3. Remove the rubber dust cover.
1018
4. Unhook the headlight bulb's wire retainer.
5. The headlight bulb can now be removed.
1 2
cizx_2
1. Wire retainer
2. Headlight bulb
3. DRL harness
6. Installation is the reversal of removal.
5/8/2017 Headlight and Position Light Bulb Replacement
1019
Headlight and Position Light Bulb Replacement
WARNING
The bulbs become hot during use. Always allow sufficient time for the bulbs to cool before
handling. Avoid touching the glass part of the bulb. If the glass is touched or gets dirty, clean
with alcohol before reuse.
CAUTION
The use of nonapproved headlight bulbs may result in damage to the headlight lens.
Use a genuine Triumph supplied headlight bulb as specified in the Triumph Parts Catalogue.
Always have replacement headlight bulbs installed by an authorised Triumph dealer.
Position Lights
The position lights are situated within the headlight assembly and are sealed, maintenance free
LED units.
Headlight Bulb
2. While supporting the light unit, disconnect the multipin electrical connector from the
headlight bulb and the electrical connector for the daytime running light from the main
harness.
5/8/2017 Headlight and Position Light Bulb Replacement
3. Remove the rubber dust cover.
1020
4. Unhook the headlight bulb's wire retainer.
5. The headlight bulb can now be removed.
1 2
cizx_2
1. Wire retainer
2. Headlight bulb
3. DRL harness
6. Installation is the reversal of removal.
5/8/2017 Rear Light Bulb Replacement LED
1021
Rear Light Bulb Replacement LED
The rear light unit is a sealed, maintenance free LED unit.
5/8/2017 Direction Indicator Lights Bulb Replacement
1022
Direction Indicator Lights Bulb Replacement
3
1
1. Lens
2. Locating tangs
3. Bulb
Carefully twist the lens clockwise and remove from the indicator to gain access to the bulb for
replacement.
To remove the bulb, gently press inwards and twist anticlockwise. Replace the bulb.
Installation for the bulb is the reverse of the removal procedure.
CAUTION
When installing the lens, make sure that the locating tangs are correctly aligned to the
indicator body.
5/8/2017 Headlight Removal
1023
Headlight Removal
WARNING
2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the headlight bulb, detach the position light and
remove the headlight.
1024
3 1
cjdt
1. Fixings
2. Harness bracket
3. Headlight bowl
Note
Note the position of the electrical connectors on the back of the harness bracket for
installation.
4. On the back of the harness bracket, detach all the electrical connectors and remove the
harness bracket.
cjcz
1. Electrical connectors
2. Harness bracket
5. Remove the headlight mounting fixings and remove the headlight bowl while feeding the
1025
harnesses out of the headlight bowl.
5/8/2017 Headlight Installation
1026
Headlight Installation
WARNING
1. Refit the headlight bowl while feeding the harnesses into the headlight bowl. Do not fully
tighten the fixings at this stage.
2. Fit the wiring harness electrical connectors to the back of the harness bracket as noted
during removal.
cjcz
1027
2. Harness bracket
3 1
cjdt
1. Fixings
2. Harness bracket
3. Headlight bowl
4. Reconnect the headlight electrical connector and refit the position light.
5. Refit the headlight, tightening the fixings to 4 Nm.
1028
Check the headlight operation and the beam setting, rectify as necessary.
5/8/2017 Headlight Bracket Removal
1029
Headlight Bracket Removal
WARNING
Remove the headlight (see Headlight Removal).
Note
The upper fixing for the headlight bracket has a domed nut.
The lower fixing has a captivated nut.
1. Release the fixings and remove the headlight bracket from the headlight subframe.
1
3
cjs w
1. Fixings
2. Domed nut
3. Headlight bracket
Headlight Subframe
If the subframe is to be removed, carry out the following steps
1. Remove the front direction indicators (see Front Direction Indicators Removal).
2. Remove the fixings securing the headlight subframe to the lower yoke. Collect the washer
and discard the lock nut.
3. Move the lower end of the subframe forward, detach it from the upper yoke and remove.
5/8/2017 Headlight Bracket Removal
1030
2
cjs w
1. Fixings
2. Headlight subframe
3. Lower yoke
5/8/2017 Headlight Bracket Installation
1031
Headlight Bracket Installation
WARNING
1. If removed, check the rubber grommets for the headlight subframes for cracks and wear,
replace if necessary.
2. Position the headlight subframes to the upper yoke.
3. Align the headlight subframes to the lower yoke, fit the washers, a new lock nut and tighten
to 3 Nm.
cjs w
1. Fixings
3. Lower yoke
4. Refit the front direction indicators (see Front Directional Indicators Installation).
Note
The upper fixing for the headlight bracket has a domed nut.
The lower fixing has a captivated nut.
5. Refit the headlight brackets to the headlight subframes. Tighten the fixings to 24 Nm.
Refit the headlight (see Headlight Installation).
5/8/2017 Rear Light Removal
1032
Rear Light Removal
WARNING
Remove the rear mudguard (see Rear Mudguard Removal).
1. Remove the license plate from the rear light bracket.
2. Release the fixings and remove the rear light assembly from the rear mudguard.
cjs z
1. Fixings
2. Rear light assembly
3. Release the fixing and remove the harness cover.
1033
cjpb
1. Fixings
2. Harness cover
Note
Note the routing of the direction indicator harnesses for installation.
The right hand direction indicator harness can be identified by the red tape on it.
4. Disconnect the direction indicators from the rear light harness.
5. Release the two fixings and remove the rear light cover.
3 2
cjpa
1. Fixings
2. Rear light cover
3. Direction indicator harnesses
6. Detach the rear light harness from the rear light bracket.
1034
Note
Note the routing of the rear light harness for installation.
7. Release the three fixings and remove the rear light.
1
cjpc
1. Harness clip
2. Fixings
5/8/2017 Rear Light Installation
1035
Rear Light Installation
WARNING
1. Fit the rear light to the rear light bracket and tighten the three fixings to 2 Nm.
2. Route the harness as noted for removal and attach the rear light harness to its clip on the
rear light bracket.
1
cjpc
1. Harness clip
2. Fixings
3. Refit the rear light cover and tighten its two fixings to 2 Nm.
Note
The harness for the right hand direction indicator can be identified by the red tape on
it.
4. Route the direction indicator harness as noted for removal and connect the electrical
connectors to the rear light harness.
1036
1
3 2
cjpa
1. Fixings
2. Rear light cover
3. Direction indicator harnesses
5. Fit the harness cover and tighten its fixings to 4 Nm.
cjpb
1. Fixings
2. Harness cover
6. Refit the rear light to the rear mudguard and tighten the new fixings to 5 Nm.
1037
cjs z
1. Fixings
2. Rear light assembly
7. Refit the rear mudguard (see Rear Mudguard Installation).
Check the rear light operation, rectify as necessary.
5/8/2017 Front Direction Indicators Removal
1038
Front Direction Indicators Removal
WARNING
Note
Note the routing of the front direction indicator harness for installation.
1. Disconnect the direction indicator electrical connectors from the main harness on the back
of the harness bracket.
2
cjcz_1
1. Left hand direction indicator connectors
2. Right hand direction indicator connectors
2. Remove the fixings and detach the headlight bowl from the headlight subframe.
3. Remove the fixing and remove the front direction indicator. Discard the fixing.
5/8/2017 Front Direction Indicators Removal
1039
2 3
1
cjs u
1. Fixing
2. Right hand direction indicator
5/8/2017 Front Directional Indicators Installation
1040
Front Directional Indicators Installation
1. Fit the direction indicator to the headlight subframe and tighten the new fixing to 5 Nm.
2. Route the direction indicator harness as noted for removal and connect it to the main
harness on the back of the harness bracket. The main harness for the right hand direction
indicator is marked with red tape to aid correct connection.
3. Fit the headlight bowl to the headlight brackets. Do not fully tighten the fixings at this stage.
Fit the headlight (see Headlight Installation).
Check the headlight alignment and adjust if necessary (see Headlight Vertical Adjustment).
Check the operation of the direction indicators, rectify as necessary.
5/8/2017 Rear Direction Indicators Removal
1041
Rear Direction Indicators Removal
Remove the rear light (see Rear Light Removal).
1. Release the fixing and remove the harness cover.
cjpb
1. Fixings
2. Harness cover
Note
Note the routing of the direction indicator harnesses for installation.
it.
2. Disconnect the direction indicator electrical connectors from the rear light harness.
3. Release the fixing and remove the direction indicator. Discard the fixing.
5/8/2017 Rear Direction Indicators Removal
1042
2
cjpc_1
1. Direction indicator connectors
2. Fixings
5/8/2017 Rear Direction Indicators Installation
1043
Rear Direction Indicators Installation
1. Fit the direction indicator to the rear light assembly and tighten the new fixing to 5 Nm.
Note
it.
2. Route the direction indicator harness as noted for removal and connect the electrical
connectors to the rear light harness.
2
cjpc_1
1. Direction indicator connectors
2. Fixings
3. Fit the harness cover and tighten its fixing to 4 Nm.
cjpb
5/8/2017 Rear Direction Indicators Installation
1044
1. Fixing
2. Harness cover
Refit the rear light to the rear mudguard (see Rear Light Installation).
Check the direction indicators operation, rectify as necessary.
5/8/2017 Instruments Removal
1045
Instruments Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the four fixings and remove the instrument cover.
2
1 1
cjog
1. Fixings
2. Instruments cover
2. Remove the three fixings and detach the instruments from its bracket.
5/8/2017 Instruments Removal
1046
1 2 1
cjof
1. Fixings
2. Instruments bracket
3. Slide the cover off the electrical connector, disconnect the electrical connector and remove
the instruments.
cjoh
1. Cover
5/8/2017 Instruments Installation
1047
Instruments Installation
WARNING
1. Connect the electrical connector to the instruments, slide the cover over the electrical
connector.
cjoh
1. Cover
2. Position the instruments to the headlight bracket, secure with the three fixings and tighten to
3 Nm.
1048
1 2 1
cjof
1. Fixings
2. Headlight bracket
3. Refit the instrument cover and tighten the fixings to 3 Nm.
2
1 1
cjog
1. Fixings
2. Instruments cover
Refit the headlight (see Headlight Installation).
Note
1049
If fitting a new instrument assembly the current mileage can be set using the Set
function in the chassis diagnostic menu of the Triumph Diagnostic tool.
CAUTION
The Set/Reset operation can only be performed once and cannot be undone.
Check the new value is correct before proceeding.
5/8/2017 Ignition Switch Removal
1050
Ignition Switch Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the sheared bolts then remove the ignition switch.
1
1
cjtb_1
1. Sheared bolts
2. Ignition switch
5/8/2017 Ignition Switch Installation
1051
Ignition Switch Installation
WARNING
1. Fit the ignition switch to the upper yoke.
Note
The torx head section on top of the bolt snaps off when fully tightened, leaving a
tamperproof dome.
2. Fit new shear bolts and tighten to 12 Nm.
1
1
cjtb
1. Shear bolts
2. Ignition switch
5/8/2017 Side Stand Switch Removal
1052
Side Stand Switch Removal
WARNING
1. Remove the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
CAUTION
Note the routing and the retaining clips of the side stand switch harness for installation.
2. Disconnect the side stand switch electrical connector from the main harness and feed it
down to the side stand switch.
cjs s
3. Remove and discard the fir tree clip from the frame cradle and retain the P clip.
5/8/2017 Side Stand Switch Removal
1053
1. Fir tree clip
2. P clip
4. Remove the side stand switch and discard the fixings.
1. Side stand switch
2. Fixings
5/8/2017 Side Stand Switch Installation
1054
Side Stand Switch Installation
WARNING
1. Refit the side stand switch, tighten the new fixings to 3 Nm.
1. Side stand switch
2. Fixings
2. Secure the harness using a new fir tree clip and the original P clip.
5/8/2017 Side Stand Switch Installation
1055
1. Fir tree clip
2. P clip
3. Route the side stand switch harness to the left hand side of the airbox as noted for removal.
Connect the electrical connector to the main harness.
cjs s
4. Fit the left hand side panel (see Side Panels).
5/8/2017 Ignition Coils Removal
1056
Ignition Coils Removal
WARNING
1. Disconnect the high tension cables from the spark plugs.
Note
The ignition coil wires identified with the red tape are fitted to the right hand side of
the ignition coils.
Note the position of the four wires connected to the ignition coils for installation.
2. Disconnect the four wires from the ignition coils (two either side of the ignition coils).
ciwj
1. Ignition coil connections (right hand side shown)
2. Ignition coils
3. Detach the coolant temperature connector from the ignition coils bracket.
1057
1
ciwk
1. Coolant temperature sensor connector
4. Remove the three fixings and detach the ignition coil bracket from the motorcycle frame.
2
ciwm
2. Ignition coil bracket
Note
Note the routing of the fuel pump harness on the ignition coil bracket for installation.
5. Detach the fuel pump harness from the ignition coils bracket.
6. Disconnect the MAP sensor hose and the electrical connector from the MAP sensor.
1058
1
2 3
ciya
1. Fuel pump harness
2. MAP sensor electrical connector
3. MAP sensor hose
Note
The front ignition coil has the longer HT lead.
7. Remove and discard the four fixings and remove the ignition coils from their bracket.
1 2
2 1
ciwl
1. Fixings
2. Ignition coils
5/8/2017 Ignition Coils Installation
1059
Ignition Coils Installation
WARNING
1. Position the ignition coils onto their bracket, secure with new fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
2. Connect the MAP sensor hose and the electrical connector to the MAP sensor.
3. Attach the fuel pump harness to the ignition coil bracket, as noted for removal.
2 3
ciya
1. Fuel pump harness
2. MAP sensor electrical connector
3. MAP sensor hose
4. Position the ignition coils and bracket assembly to the motorcycle frame, secure with the
fixings and tighten to 3 Nm.
5. Attach the coolant temperature sensor connector onto the ignition coil bracket.
Note
The wires for the right hand side of the ignition coils are identified with the red tape.
6. Connect the four wires from the ignition coils as noted for removal (two either side of the
ignition coils).
5/8/2017 Ignition Coils Installation
1060
2
ciwj
1. Ignition coil connections (right hand side shown)
2. Ignition coils
7. Connect the high tension cables to the spark plugs.
5/8/2017 Alternator Stator Removal
1061
Alternator Stator Removal
WARNING
Note
If the alternator stator needs to be replaced, the crankshaft position sensor will also
be replaced as they are one assembly.
Note
Note the routing of the stator harness for installation.
1. Remove and discard the fixings securing the crankshaft position sensor to the alternator
cover.
1. Fixings
2. Remove and discard the fixing securing the cable bracket to the alternator cover.
3. Remove and discard the fixings securing the stator to the alternator cover and remove the
stator.
5/8/2017 Alternator Stator Removal
1062
3
cjcs
2
1. Cable bracket fixing
2. Cable bracket
3. Stator fixing
4. Stator
5/8/2017 Alternator Stator Installation
1063
Alternator Stator Installation
WARNING
1. Fit the stator to the alternator cover and tighten its new fixings to 12 Nm.
2. Route the harness as noted for removal, fit the harness retainer and tighten its new fixing to
9 Nm.
cjcs
2
1. Cable bracket fixing
2. Cable bracket
3. Stator fixing
4. Stator
3. Fit the crankshaft position sensor to the alternator cover and tighten its new fixings to 6 Nm.
5/8/2017 Alternator Stator Installation
1064
1. Fixings
5/8/2017 Alternator Rotor Removal
1065
Alternator Rotor Removal
1. Assemble the T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set to the T3880606 Flywheel Restraint
Handle, ensuring the shorter pin is fitted to the short arm of T3880606 Flywheel Restraint
Handle. Fit the nuts and tighten to 10 Nm.
1. T3880606 Flywheel Restraint Handle
2. Pins (T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set)
3. Nuts (T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set)
WARNING
The rotor magnets are very strong. When fitting the service tools to the rotor the magnets
may 'grab' the service tool, causing injury to the hands or fingers. When installing the service
tools, wear suitable gloves to protect hands and fingers.
2. Using the T3880606 Flywheel Restraint Handle and T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set,
prevent the rotor from turning and remove the rotor fixing and washer from the end of the
crankshaft.
1066
3
2
1
civd
2. T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set
3. Rotor fixing
3. Locate the spigot from the larger of the two thrust pads supplied with T3880365 Alternator
Housing Puller to the crankshaft.
civc
1. Thrust pad
4. Assemble T3880365 Alternator Housing Puller to the threaded centre section of the rotor.
Note
Ensure that the thrust pad does not fall out during assembly of the tool.
5. Hold the outer of the tool to prevent rotation then tighten the drawbolt in the centre of the
1067
tool to release the taper seating of the rotor from the crankshaft.
civb
1. Rotor
2. T3880365 Alternator Housing Puller
6. Withdraw the rotor and tool as an assembly and then separate the tool from the rotor.
Collect the Woodruff Key and the tool thrust pad from the crankshaft.
5/8/2017 Alternator Rotor Installation
1068
Alternator Rotor Installation
1. Refit the Woodruff key to the crankshaft.
2. Assemble the rotor to the key way on the crankshaft, ensuring the Woodruff key remains in
position.
WARNING
The rotor magnets are very strong. When fitting the service tools to the rotor the magnets
may 'grab' the service tool, causing injury to the hands or fingers. When installing the service
tools, wear suitable gloves to protect hands and fingers.
3. Refit the T3880606 Flywheel Restraint Handle and T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set to
prevent the crankshaft from rotating.
4. Tighten the rotor retaining fixing in the following stages:
Stage 1. Tighten the rotor retaining fixing to 85 Nm.
Stage 2. Tighten the rotor retaining fixing to 120 Nm.
3
2
1
civd
2. T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set
3. Rotor fixing
5. Remove the T3880606 Flywheel Restraint Handle and T3880656 Pulley Wrench Pin Set
from the rotor.
5/8/2017 Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Removal
1069
Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Removal
Note
The alternator regulator/rectifier is located near the swinging arm below the ABS
modulator. The alternator regulator/rectifier does not contain any serviceable parts
and must be replaced if faulty.
1. Remove the fixings and shouldered washers then remove the ABS modulator cover.
cjs p
1. Fixings
2. ABS modulator cover
2. Release the two fixings securing the alternator regulator/rectifier to the frame and remove
the alternator regulator/rectifier.
Note
Note the position of the electrical connectors for installation.
3. Disconnect both electrical connectors from the alternator regulator/rectifier.
5/8/2017 Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Removal
1070
2 3
1
cjs q
1. Fixings
3. Alternator regulator/rectifier.
5/8/2017 Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Installation
1071
Alternator Regulator/Rectifier Installation
1. Reconnect the two electrical connectors to the alternator regulator/rectifier as noted for
removal.
2. Position the alternator regulator/rectifier to its mounting bracket below the ABS modulator,
secure with the two fixings and tighten to 4 Nm.
3. Refit the ABS modulator cover fit the shouldered washers and tighten its fixings to 4 Nm.
5/8/2017 Starter Motor Removal
1072
Starter Motor Removal
WARNING
1. Ease the rubber boot from the starter cable, release the nut and disconnect the cable.
2. Protect the crankcase painted surfaces from damage, using a suitable selfadhesive tape
such as masking tape.
3. Release the two bolts securing the starter motor to the crankcase.
3
cjfr
1. Rubber boot
2. Nut
3. Bolts
CAUTION
Damage to painted surfaces could result from inadequate care during removal or installation
of the starter motor. Always protect the crankcase from damage during removal or
installation.
4. Carefully manoeuvre the starter motor out to the right hand side of the motorcycle.
5/8/2017 Starter Motor Installation
1073
Starter Motor Installation
WARNING
1. Fit a new Oring to the starter motor.
cjfs
1. Oring
CAUTION
Damage to painted surfaces could result from inadequate care during removal or installation
of the starter motor. Always protect the crankcase from damage during removal or
installation.
2. Carefully position the starter to the crankcase and retain with the two bolts and tighten to 7
Nm.
3. Remove any selfadhesive tape used to protect the crankcase.
4. Locate the starter cable to its connection pole. Fit the nut and tighten it to 5 Nm.
5. Refit the rubber boot.
5/8/2017 Lighting Circuit tables
1074
Lighting Circuit tables
1 Fuse Box (Fuses 1, 7 and 8)
3 Rear Brake Switch
4 Bluetooth Module Connector
5 Engine Control Module Connector A
6 ABS Modulator/ECM
7 Rear Light SubHarness Connector
9 Oil Pressure Instruments Light
10 High Beam Warning Light
11 Engine Oil Pressure Switch
12 Daytime Running Light (DRL) Unit
13 Headlamp Bulb
15 Left Hand Switch Housing DIP/DRL Switch
16 Main/DIP Beam Relay
17 Ignition Switch Connector
18 Starter Motor Solenoid Relay
5/8/2017 Lighting Circuit tables
1075
19 Headlamp Relay
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
5/8/2017 Lighting Circuit Diagram
1076
Lighting Circuit Diagram
1 2 3
8 7 1
3 2 1 3 2 1
Y GU GP GU B GP
U G Y Y
4
1
4A
U 3A 4A U
5A UG 3A
5A
G 1A 2A
1A 2A
19 B
18 B A06
BN A18
5
UY A30
BY A07
Y OG
17
6 8 GP 7
6
GP 3
Y 5
7
Y 2
B 4
B UY Y
16
1 2 3
4 U
U 3
5 UW
BN 1 2 G
12 8
14 11 9
1 BU 12
1 U
3 UR
2 UY UW 20
15 10
UW UW B UR
1 3 2
13
5/8/2017 Starting and Charging Circuit Tables
1077
Starting and Charging Circuit Tables
1 Battery
2 Starter Solenoid
3 Starter Motor
4 Starter Solenoid Relay
5 Engine Electronic Control Module Connector B
6 Engine Electric Control Module Connector A
7 EMS Relay
8 Alarm Connector
9 Right Hand Switch Housing 8 Way Connector
11 Immobiliser
12 Bluetooth® Module Connector
13 Ignition Switch
14 Regulator Rectifier DC Connector
15 Fuse Box
16 Headlamp Relay
17 USB Socket
5/8/2017 Starting and Charging Circuit Tables
1078
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
5/8/2017 Starting and Charging Circuit Diagram
1079
Starting and Charging Circuit Diagram
1 2 3
M
1 2 3 4
N N WR B
4
UG 3
16 5 WR
14 3
1
BR
B
1 2 YN
U 3
5
B WR
G 1 2
A19
6
5
B
GR B01
YS B31
Y G N YN B25
N
15 9 7 8 2
Y G U NK
7
17 1
U
NK 3
YS 1 2
N Y G
9
1 4 5
3 B
G 1 2 GN
13 G 4
10 BBB B B
4 2 5 3 1
G
11
8
G 2
μP
8
G 6
12
5/8/2017 Auxiliary and Accessory Circuit Tables
1080
Auxiliary and Accessory Circuit Tables
1 Fuse Box
2 Accessory Socket Rider
3 Ignition Switch
4 Right Hand Switch Housing 8 Way Connector
5 Hazard Light Switch
6 Right Hand Heated Grip (Internal connector)
8 Rear Light SubHarness Connector
9 Alarm
10 Left Hand Front Direction Indicator
11 Right Hand Front Direction Indicator
14 Horn Switch
15 Left Hand Heated Grip (Internal connector)
16 Direction Indicator Switch
18 Heated Grips Switch
5/8/2017 Auxiliary and Accessory Circuit Tables
1081
19 Scroll Switch
20 Mode Switch
21 Blanked Electrical Connector
22 Horn
23 Heated Grip Connector
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
5/8/2017 Auxiliary and Accessory Circuit Diagram
1082
Auxiliary and Accessory Circuit Diagram
5/8/2017 Auxiliary and Accessory Circuit Diagram
1083
1
6 3
21
1 BR P P
2 B
20
2 BR
18
6 BG
17 1 BO
2
P 2
4 B
19 B 1
14 22
4 PB PB 1 1 OG
5 B
15 BG 1
B
6 GU GU 2 23
3
13
B OG
16 4
8
1 GR
3
5
GW
2 LGN LGN 7
3
GW 8
GR 6
6
GU 4
B 5
1 LGN
13 GU
22 BG
14 GU
19
23
BR
BO 7
15 P P 16
2 P
5 P
12
6 GR GR 6
8 GW GW 1
8
24 B
B 4
11 B
1 1 GW
11 B B B B B
B 10 11 6 8 7
1 1
W
1 1 GR
9
10 B
1 1
1084
Engine Management Circuit Tables
4 ABS Module Connector
5 Bluetooth® Module
6 Immobiliser
7 Ignition Switch
9 Fall Detection Switch
11 MAP Sensor
15 Coolant Temperature Sensor
17 Clutch Switch
18 Main Beam Switch
1085
19 Cruise Control Switch (if fitted)
20 Alarm Connector
21 Quickshifter
23 Throttle Position sensor
24 Throttle Drive Motor
25 Fuel Pump Relay
26 Fuel Pump
27 Cooling Fan
28 Cooling Fan Relay
33 Purge Valve
36 Crankshaft Position Sensor
37 EMS Relay
38 Fuse Box
1086
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
5/8/2017 Engine Management Circuit Diagram
1087
Engine Management Circuit Diagram
1
38 37
7 4 2
36
1 UB UB A35
2
2 UP
UP UP A36
7B 8B 2B 3 1 2 5
G NK NK NK NK R 9
U 10
NK NK A01
NK NK A13 3
35 A33
A34
R
U
R
U
6
14
NK 1 1 GK GK B15
B 4
34 5 4
NK 1 1 GP GP B14 4 U 11
33 3 R 2
NK 2 1 B B B06 6
32
U 1
NK 2 1 YP YP A11
7 R 6
2 BG 5
31 7 B 10
8
NK 2 1 YK YK A10
30 B44 BW BW 1
NK 3 4 W W B03 B23 BK BK 2
1 2 BU A22 B34 K K 4
BU
B18 KB KB 3
B
29 9
NK 3 4 W W B02
KB 6
1 2 BY BY A21
K 4
B38 KU KU 5
28 10
27 KB
K
1
M B41 KP KP 2
3 1 2 5
11
B
P NK BY NK
KB 1
BY A27 K 3
B36 KS KS 2
26 12
25
M KB 1
3 1 2 5
B K 2
G GR BP PW B27 BY BY 4
24
BP A26 13
GR B01 K 1
1 UO UO A02 3
B43 BR BR
2 UG UG A03
B 2
14
1 UY UY B20 KO KO 1
B42
4 UG UG B26
23
B 2
B
15
2 B B19
3 R R B33
B40 KG KG 1
B 2
7 R
5 B 16
6 W B
22
W B28 4
2 W W B21 B45 BO BO 3
1
B
R
B
R
B35
B17
17
A04 WU WU 7
18
21
A29 WR WR 5
1 RB B22 GR 8
19
2 B
A20 B
B
A23 B
1
A25
B08
B
B
20
B13 B
B48 B
1088
ABS System Circuit Tables
Key To Wiring Circuit Diagram
1 ABS Modulator
2 Fuse Box
4 Rear Brake Switch
5 Engine Electronic Control Module Connector A
6 Rear Light Subharness Connector
9 Instruments Connector
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
1089
Code Wiring Colour
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
ABS ECM Connector Pin Numbering
9 8 2 1
18 17 11 10
chzl
The above illustration shows the pin numbering system used in the ABS circuit diagram.
As viewed on the mating face with the ABS ECM (as per the illustration), pins are numbered
from right to left with number one in the top right hand corner.
5/8/2017 ABS System Circuit Diagram
1090
ABS System Circuit Diagram
2
7 5
1
10A 25A
R 18
G 4
3 1 GP GP 7
4 1 GP
5 A07 BY
6 3 GP
1 UW 17
7 2 BG 8
1 UR 15
8 2 BG 6
9 21 BU 3
1 OG 13
7 BG 5
10
6 R 2
14 U 11
B 10
5/8/2017 Complete Main Harness Table
1091
Complete Main Harness Table
3 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
4 Cooling Fan
5 Cooling Fan Relay
6 Engine ECM Main Relay
7 Fuel Pump
8 Fuel Pump Relay
9 Rear Brake Switch
10 Brake Light
11 Rear Light
12 Licence Plate Light
13 Left Hand Rear Direction Indicator
14 Right Hand Rear Direction Indicator
15 Rear Light SubHarness Electrical Connector
16 Dip/Main Headlamp Relay
17 Alarm Connector
18 Engine Alternator Connector
1092
19 Starter Motor Solenoid Relay
20 Starter Motor Solenoid
21 Harness Battery Negative Connection
22 Battery
23 Starter Motor
24 Fuse Box
25 Headlamp Main Relay
26 Ignition Switch Connector
27 Immobiliser Antenna
28 Rider Accessory Socket
29 Immobiliser
31 Engine OFF Switch
32 Engine Start Switch
33 Hazard Light Switch
34 Direction Indicator Switch
35 Horn Switch
36 Dip/Main Switch
37 Clutch Switch
38 Instrument Scroll Switch
1093
39 Mode Switch
40 Heated Grips Switch (if fitted)
41 Cruise Control
42 Bluetooth® Module Connector
43 USB Charging Point Connector
46 ABS Modulator
48 Headlamp Bulb
49 Front Position Light/Daytime running Lights (DRL)
50 Right Hand Front Direction Indicator
51 Left Hand Front Direction Indicator
52 Horn
53 Dip/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Switch
54 Instruments
55 Oil Pressure Switch
56 Heated Grip Switch
57 MAP Sensor
1094
59 Roll Over Switch
63 Ignition Coil 2
64 Ignition Coil 1
65 Oxygen Sensor 2
66 Oxygen Sensor 1
67 Injector 2
68 Injector 1
69 Purge Valve
70 Drive By Wire Throttle Motor
71 Throttle Position Sensor
73 Crankshaft Position sensor
74 Quick shifter
Code Wiring Colour
B Black
U Blue
1095
Code Wiring Colour
N Brown
G Green
S Slate/Grey
O Orange
K Pink
R Red
P Purple
W White
Y Yellow
LG Light Green
LU Light Blue
5/8/2017
48
50
51
49
44
45
52
53
43
46
47
56
54
55
57
58
1
2
8
6
7
2
6
4
2
2
1
2
1
4
6
5
2
1
8
7
9
1
17
15
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
21
19
20
15
22
23
13
14
24
11
10
12
P
P
P
16 P
3 B
1 B
B
B
B
18 R
R
R
3 K
R
Y
G
B
B
B
3 K
11 U
14 U
1 U
2 KS
2 KP
UW
10 B
1 KB
3 BG
R
UR
1 KB
4 G
BR
BG
7 BG
UY
PB
3 UR
BU
2 GU
GR
BU
BU
GR
BU
1 OG
GU
GU
1 UW
2 UY
GW
BW
UW
GW
LgN
3 BU
GP
5 BG
13 OG
BG K 4
UR KB 6
59
BG KU 5
Zoom In 
B
Y
BR 3
2 B B 2
60
3 R K 1
4 U
42
6 G
1 Y BY 4
K 2
61
KB 1
1 BR
2 B K 4
KB 3
62
BW 1
R 8 GR BK 2
B 5 WR
B 6
BG BG
2 BR GP
R
B
63
NK
R 1 WB
B B 4 B
GK
R 3 KB
64
B NK
R 7 WU
41 40 39 38 37 36
B B 1
BU 2
6
65
Zoom Out 
GU W 4
NK 3
B 5 B
P B 4 P B B 1
LgN 2 LgN BY 2
L
1
66
GR GR W 4
NK 3
35 34
GW 3 GW
R
NK 2
4 GU
67
YP 1
5 B
GW 8 GW NK 2
6
68
GR GR YK 1
LgN 7 LgN
WR 3 WR NK 2
69
B 1
https://www.tritun.net/tritun/content/document/view?id=2005&groupId=2
G 1 G
33 32 31
GN 2 GN UO 1
UG 2
70
Reset 
B 2 GB
U 3 U UG 4
30
R 1 GP UY 1
71
B 2
7 B R 3
6 R
1 U
8 G
Complete Main Harness Diagram
29
2 G B 5
10 B R 7
5 BG R 1
W 2
72
B 3
W 6
1 B
2
28
P
W B28
B B35
W B21
P
R B17
W 1 N R B33
B B19
UY B20
N 4 Y UG B26
UG A03
UO A02
Y 5 G B B06
YK A10
YP A11
26
WB 6 Y W B02
BY A21
W B03
WG 8 OG BU A22
Complete Main Harness Diagram
GK B15
2 BG
74
N
GP B14
27
2
1
W 7 B BK B23
B
RB
BW B44
RB B22
G
U
KB B18
1
3
K B34
Y BY B27
1
25
BR B43
NK N
2
2
5
4
KU B38
1
B
UG
P KP B41
3
KS B36
BO B45
NK UP A36
4
UB A35
WR A29
R N R A34
5
NK A33
UY A30
24
UW A04
6
B B08
2 UP B B48
1
73
G G UB B B13
7
B A20
B A25
U N B A23
8
YN B25
Y BN A18
9
WR A19
YS B31
NK A01
NK A13
P A27
GW
GR B01
BP A26
GY A07
U
G
B A06
2
UW 5
4
KG B40
M
23
KO B42
B
Y
Y
19
KO 1
GP
GR
GW
20
B
2
B 2
WR 1
UG 3
1
4
6
2
5
3
1
3
15
22
U
BN
16
KG 1
B
Y
GW
GP
GR
3
B 2
B
B
4
3
2
1
B B
4
1
N
N
B
WR
U
B
B
2 YN
5 WR
G
B
BP
GR
1
GW 1
1
GR 1
GP 1
GU 3
B 2
1
3
2
PW 5
PW 2
21
1/1
1096

2016 Triumph Thruxton R Service Manual - Rev 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Triumph Thruxton R Service Manual - Rev 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Triumph Thruxton R Service Manual - Rev 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2016 Triumph Thruxton R

 Service Tool and Garage Equipment

 Torque Wrench Settings

 Barrels and Pistons

 Crankshaft, Connecting Rods and Pistons

 Starter Drive and Sprag Clutch

 Engine Removal and Install

 Fuel System and Engine Management

 Wheels and Tyres

 Frame and Bodywork

Cylinder head Flatness 0.030 mm

Valve Head Diameter Inlet 35.60 mm

Valve Lift Inlet 10.3 mm

Valve Stem Diameter Inlet 4.975 ­ 4.990 mm (standard)

Valve Guide Bore Diameter Inlet 5.000 ­ 5.015 mm (standard)

Valve Stem to Guide Clearance Inlet 0.010 ­ 0.040 mm (standard)

Valve Seat Width (in head) Inlet 1.000 ­ 1.100 mm (standard)

Valve Clearance Inlet 0.05 ­ 0.13 mm

Camshaft Timing (at 1 mm lift) Inlet Open 5.0° ATDC

Piston Ring to Groove Top 0.02 ­ 0.07 mm (standard)

Piston Ring Groove Width Top 1.21 ­ 1.24 mm (standard)

Piston Ring End Gap Top 0.183 ­ 0.383 mm (standard)

Camshaft cover to cylinder head 14 Nm See Camshaft Cover ­

Camshaft drive chain tensioner blade to cylinder 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Camshaft frame to cylinder head 10 Nm See Camshaft ­

Camshaft sprocket to camshaft 22 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Camshaft idler shaft bolt 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Flanged plug to cylinder head 22 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Exhaust stud to cylinder head 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Clutch centre nut 98 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Dry seal plug 23 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Breather plate to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Crankcase breather pipes to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Sprag thrust washer fixings 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Sprag clutch housing fixings 16 Nm See Starter Drive/Sprag

Rear dead shaft retaining washer 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Dead shaft clamp retaining bolt 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Clutch cover to crankcase 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Clutch cover embelisher to clutch cover 4 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Sound suppression to clutch cover fixings (up to 6 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Cable cover to alternator cover 6 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Alternator cover embelisher to cover 4 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Sump baffle plate 6 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Sump plug 25 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)

Front sprocket to output shaft nut 180 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Input shaft bearing retainer 7 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Detent wheel to selector drum 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Detent arm fixing 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Selector drum bearing retaining screw 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Output selector shaft retainer 12 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Oil pressure switch 15 Nm Fit new sealing washer(s)

Oil filter 10 Nm Apply clean engine oil to

Oil pump to crankcase 10 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Oil cooling jet (pistons) 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Oil pump drive chain guide fixings 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Oil pump auxiliary chain guard 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Rear sprocket to cush drive 55 Nm See Rear Sprocket ­

Coolant temperature sensor 18 Nm Apply ThreeBond 1374 to

Coolant return elbow to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Coolant manifold to crankcase 9 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Valve Stem Diameter Inlet 4.975 4.990 mm (standard)

Valve Guide Bore Diameter Inlet 5.000 5.015 mm (standard)

Valve Stem to Guide Clearance Inlet 0.010 0.040 mm (standard)

Valve Seat Width (in head) Inlet 1.000 1.100 mm (standard)

Valve Clearance Inlet 0.05 0.13 mm

Piston Ring to Groove Top 0.02 0.07 mm (standard)

Piston Ring Groove Width Top 1.21 1.24 mm (standard)

Piston Ring End Gap Top 0.183 0.383 mm (standard)

Camshaft cover to cylinder head 14 Nm See Camshaft Cover

Camshaft frame to cylinder head 10 Nm See Camshaft

Rear sprocket to cush drive 55 Nm See Rear Sprocket

Oxygen sensor 25 Nm Apply antiseize

Swinging arm pivot bolt adjuster 6 Nm See Swinging Arm

Sprocket carrier stud 30 Nm See Rear Sprocket

Antirotation moulding to ABS modulator 5 Nm Fit new fixing(s) if

Front right hand cylinder head bolt to frame 24 Nm See Engine Installation

Front right hand cylinder head bolt to frame 105 Nm See Engine Installation

Frame adjuster 5 Nm See Engine Installation

Front left hand cylinder head bolt to frame 105 Nm See Engine Installation

Lower rear crankcase mounting 80 Nm See Engine Installation

Upper rear crankcase mounting 80 Nm See Engine Installation

Cradle to crankcase mounting bolts 105 Nm See Engine Installation